The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutCorson Hall Third Floor Lab and Office Indexed Drawings Addendum No. 1_4-13-2021.pdf CORNELL UNIVERSITY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR FACILITIES CONTRACTS LABORATORY & OFFICE 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING RENOVATION ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701 ADDENDUM NO. 1 April 13, 2021 This Addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply. Item 1. Drawing M-300, Detail 5, Detail Notes DELETE Note 3 in its entirety. REPLACE with: 3. FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT SHALL BE BLO-R-VAC, 12-IN ROUND NOMINAL DIMENSION, HOSE IS COMPRESSIBLE TO 60% OF ITS LENGTH, COLOR IS BLUE AND SUITABLE FOR CHEMICAL FUME EXTRACTION. Item 2. RFI Questions and Clarifications See attached RFI Log (Item 1) Attachments: RFI Log (Item 1) ****END OF ADDENDUM**** PROJECT: CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Date: 4/13/21 RFI Form RFI/ Page/ Response Dwg./Spec./Rep. Section/ Design Team Index Number Paragraph/Topic RFI Response 1 A-603 Section 11 53 13 Who is responsible for purchasing & installing the new fume hoods? Most items on this page are owner purchased and owner installed, so just want to verify. Fume hoods are part of the General Contractor's scope of work. Reference Sheet A-604, Section 11 53 13 "LABORATORY FUME HOODS" for requirements. Corson Hall Third Floor Lab and Office Indexed Drawings.pdf Drawing List General G-000 Cover Sheet G-001 Code Compliance Plan & Notes Architectural A-000 General Notes and Legends A-101 Partial Third Floor Plans -E303-E305 A-102 Partial Third Floor Plans -E318-E334 A-103 Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan - E318-E334 A-104 Partial Plans A-420 Interior Elevations -E303-E305 A-421 Interior Elevations -E318-E334 A-501 Interior Details, Lab Casework A-601 Interior Details & Door Schedule A-602 Finish Plans & Schedule A-603 Lab Equipment and Fume Hood Schedule A-604 Specifications Plumbing P-000 General Notes and Symbols List -Plumbing P-100 Partial Second Floor Plans - Plumbing P-101 Partial Third Floor Plans - Plumbing Demolition P-201 Partial Third Floor Plans - Plumbing Mechanical M-000 General Notes and Symbols List - HVAC M-100 Partial Third Floor Plans -HVAC M-101 Partial Fourth Floor and Roof Plans -HVAC M-200 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-201 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-202 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-203 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-204 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-205 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-300 Details -HVAC M-400 Schedules -HVAC Electrical E-000 Symbols List & General Notes - Electrical E-200 Partial Third Floor Plan -Power & Special Systems E-201 Partial Third Floor Plan -Lighting E-202 Partial Fourth Floor & Roof Plan - Electrical E-300 Electrical Details & Schedules Fire Protection FP-000 General Notes and Symbols List FP-100 Partial Third Floor Plans -Fire Protection Hazardous Materials AR-101 Asbestos Abatement Plan and Notes These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project # 3/12/2021 11:34:44 AM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Cover Sheet CWJ CRE G-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 March 5, 2021 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation 100% Construction Documents 20636.00 215 Tower Rd Ithaca, NY 14853 Architect & Structural Engineer: SWBR 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604 585 232 8300 rochester@swbr.com Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing & Fire Protection Engineer: M/E Engineering 300 Trolley Blvd Rochester, NY 14606 585 288 5590 Regional Map Location Map CorsonMudd Hall CorsonMudd Hall Primary Access Road Entrance Loading Dock TOWER ROAD GARDEN AVE CAMPUS ROAD TOWER ROAD GARDEN AVE CAMPUS ROAD Environmental Engineer: Delta Engineers, Architects & Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607 231 6600 E301 E303 E305 E309A E309B E309 E311 E304B E306 E304A E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E344C E321 E323 E325 E331 E331A E335 E339E341E343E345E347 E351 E300SB E300SA E320 E300C E300E E339A W335B W335C W335D W335 W339 W311 W309 W307 W305 W303 W301 W320A W320 W316 W320B W316A W316B W314 W314A W308 W308A W308C W308D W302 W302A W364W360W358W354 W354A W350A W350W342 W343 W345 W347 W347A W351 W355 W359 W361 W363 W363A W300S W300C W308B W344 W350B W313 W317 W319W319A W321 W321A W327A W327BW327 W331W331A W335A W357 W319B A300C A300UE A300UF A305 A306 A300TB A300UG A367 A300TA A300S A300J OPEN TO BELOW OPEN TO BELOW E301 E303 E305 E309A E309B E309 E311 E304B E306 E304A E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E344C E321 E323 E325 E331 E331A E335 E339E341E343E345E347 E351 E300SB E300SA E320 E300C E300E E339A DN UP DN UP DN UP DN DN DN UP DN UP FE XX PROJECT WORK AREA, SEE PLAN 2/G-001 FOR ROOM INFORMATION E EEATD = 126' - 2" E315 E317A E317 E317B E317C E2FB E2FBE2FB E2FB EXISTING EMERGENCY SHOWER E2SE E2SE E2SEE2SEE2SE E2SEE2SEE2SE E2SE E2SE EXISTING CONTROL AREA BOUNDARYCO NTROL AREA 1 CONTROL AREA 2 E2FB E2FB E2FB E2SEE2SEE2SE E2FB E2FBE2SE FE PROJECT WORK AREA, SEE PLAN 3/G-001 FOR ROOM INFORMATION EXISTING EMERGENCY SHOWER CPET = 45' -5" CPET = 32' -7" EXISTING CONTROL AREA BOUNDARY FE FE CPET = 25' -10" EATD = 84' -8" FE E318 E334 CODE COMPLIANCE NOTES: 1. COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS PROVIDED AT NEW DUCT PENETRATIONS THROUGH THE CORRIDOR WALL 2. WHERE NEW OPENINGS ARE PROVIDED, CORRIDOR WALLS ARE UPGRADED TO A 1HOUR FIRE PARTITION CONSTRUCTION FOR PERIMETER OF THE IMMEDIATE WORK AREA (UL U1419) 3. NEW EMERGENCY POWER LOADS DO NOT EXCEED EXISTING EM POWER LOADS. (NO INCREASE IN EM PANEL LOADS.) E1FB 193 SF FACULTY OFFICE E303 189 SF LAB E305 E309A E309 311 SF LAB E304 E304A E306 75 SF DARK ROOM E304B E2FB E1FB E1FB E2SE E2 SE E2SE E2 SE E2SE E2FB E1FB E1FB E301 A300TB A300C E1FBE1 FB E1FB E1FBE1 FBE1 FB CLASSIFICATIONS OF BUILDING, AS SPECIFIED IN THE 2020 EDITION OF THE BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE ARE AS FOLLOWS: BUILDING DATA AND CODE COMPLIANCE BUILDING DATA: CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION: BUILDING OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM: RENOVATION AREA: EXISTING FLOOR ASSEMBLY: 1A (PER RECORD DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY CORNELL) B -BUSINESS PARTIALLY SPRINKLERED 1,982 SF 2 HR FIRE-RATED E CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN LEGEND EXIT. MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION EXIT SIGN INDICATES FIRE-RESISTANT WALL CONSTRUCTION OF VARIOUS TYPES AND HOURLY RATINGS. SEE FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION LEGEND. SPECIFIC CODE INFORMATION NOTE POINT OF ORIGIN DECISION POINT CPET = X'-X" EATD = X'-X" COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL CPET = X'-X" EGRESS ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE EATD = X'-X" CODE COMPLIANCE GENERAL NOTES CODE COMPLIANCE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO ASSIST IN THE PERMIT PROCESS AND TO PROVIDE GENERAL INFORMATION TO THE CONTRACTORS WITH RESPECT TO LIFE-SAFETY PROVISIONS OF THE PROJECT. THESE DRAWINGS SHOULD NOT BE USED TO DETERMINE THE SCOPE OF OTHER WORK SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ELSEWHERE IN THE DOCUMENTS. THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR THE LOCATIONS OF FIRERESISTANT RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION. THE FOLLOWING BUILDING AND ACCESSIBILITY CODES AND STANDARDS ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT: A. 2020 BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE B. 2020 FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE C. 2020 PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE D. 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE E. 2020 FUEL GAS CODE OF NEW YORK STATE F. 2020 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE OF NEW YORK STATE G. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70, - 2017 EDITION AS REFERENCED BY THE NYS CODES ABOVE. H. ICC A117.1, ACCESSIBLE AND USABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES - 2009 EDITION AS REFERENCED BY THE NYS CODES ABOVE. I. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE, 2010 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN. REFERENCE FCNYS CHAPTER 33 FOR FIRE SAFETY PROVISIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION. X X X" OCCUPANT CAPACITY CLEAR WIDTH OCCUPANCY LOAD FIRE EXTINGUISHER ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCE CONTROL AREA BOUNDARY MAX = 74'-0" (TABLE BC 1006.21) MAX = 200'-0" (TABLE BC 1007.2) FE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING SCHEDULE FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION TYPE 1A. DESCRIPTION TEST REFERENCE COMMENTS FIRE RESISTANCE RATING STRUCTURAL FRAME INCLUDING COLUMNS, GIRDERS AND TRUSSES 3, EXISTING - EXISTING ASSEMBLY, CONCRETE ENCASED STRUCTURAL STEEL INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS 3, N/A - N/A FLOOR CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS 2, EXISTING - EXISTING ASSEMBLY, CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB ROOF CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS 1 1/2, EXISTING - EXISTING ASSEMBLY FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION LEGEND DESCRIPTION PLAN DESIGNATION FIRE WALL 2FW 3FW FIRE BARRIER (HORIZONTAL EXIT, INCIDENTAL USE/HAZARD, OCCUPANCY SEPARATION) 1FB 2FB SHAFT ENCLOSURE (FIRE BARRIER AT ELEVATOR, STAIR OR MECHANICAL SHAFT) 1SE 2SE FIRE PARTITION (ELEV LOBBY & CORRIDOR WALL) 1FP PRESUMED EXISTING FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES PREFIX E. SEE NOTE 1 WHEN THE PREFIX "E" IS INDICATED ON THE CODE COMPLIANCE FLOOR PLAN, IT DENOTES EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION WITH A PRESUMED FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF THE TYPE INDICATED AS INDICATED ON RECORD DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD HAVE NOT BEEN VERIFIED TO CONFIRM COMPLIANCE. NEW PENETRATIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL LISTED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP SYSTEMS FOR THE RATING INDICATED. NEW OPENINGS TO BE PROTECTED WITH OPENING PROTECTIVES FOR RATING INDICATED. 2FW 3FW 1FB 2FB 1SE 2SE 1FP NOTES: 1. E E 2. PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS. SEE CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN FOR FIRE-RATED PARTITIONS LOCATIONS. 1FP E325 186 SF COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 184 SF OFFICE E321 1FP1F P1F P 1FP 1F P 1FP1F P1F P E1FB E1 FB E1 FB E1 FB E1FB E1FB 1FP CORRIDOR E300C 491 SF OPEN LAB E334 68 SF ACID WASH E334A 164 SF SOIL ROOM E318 55 SF VEST E334B E1FB E1FB NEW DOOR - 20-MIN RATING REQUIRED PER TABLE BC716.1(2), 45-MIN PROVIDED. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/12/2021 11:34:47 AM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Code Compliance Plan & Notes CWJ CRE G-001 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/16" = 1'-0"1 Third Floor Code Compliance Plan - East Wing 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Third Floor Code Compliance Plan - E303-E305 N 1/8" = 1'-0"3 Third Floor Code Compliance Plan - E318-E334 GYPSUM BOARD / METAL STUD SERIES PARTITIONS 7/8" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD AT ROOM SIDE ONLY. LEGEND INDICATES PARTITION TYPE INDICATES PARTITION HEIGHT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR: "X" AFCPARTITION TO X" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING UFCPARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF FINISHED CEILING X'-X"WHERE HEIGHT IS NOTED, CONSTRUCT WALL TO THAT HEIGHT INCLUDING TOP OF WALL CAP 4 7/8"3 5/8" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8 " GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE. 1 HOUR FIRE RESISTANT RATED WHEN INDICATED (WITH OR WITHOUT INSULATION) PER UL U419 A3 UNBALANCED SERIES PARTITIONS 1 1/2" U3 XX * * A3 INDICATES PARTITION TYPE INDICATES ADDITIONAL SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS FOR ACOUSTICAL PURPOSES (REFER TO GENERAL PARTITION NOTES) A ALL STUD PARTITIONS NOT INDICATED WITH A PARTITION TYPE SHALL BE TYPE A3A. PARTITIONS WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS: GYPSUM BOARD TO BE "TYPE X" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL PARTITIONS ARE TO BE TO THE UNDERSIDE OF DECK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR EACH PARTITION DESCRIPTION INDICATE FACE-TO-FACE THICKNESS OF MATERIALS LISTED FOR THAT PARTITION PROVIDE LISTED U.L. FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT ASSEMBLIES @ TOP OF ALL WALLS INDICATED TO BE FIRE-RESISTANT RATED THE TOP OF ALL PARTITIONS FRAMED AGAINST THE UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURES SHALL HAVE PROVISIONS FOR DEFLECTION & RESTRAINT. SEE DETAIL 1/A-000. FOR STUD CONSTRUCTION NOT EXTENDING TO THE STRUCTURE, PROVIDE DIAGONAL BRACING FROM TOP OF WALL TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. INSTALL AT 12'-0" MAX SPACING AND @ EACH DOOR JAMB REFER TO CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS FOR PARTITION FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT IN CONCEALED SPACES SHALL BE FIRE TAPED. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN A SPECIFIC UL DESIGN, JOINTS SHALL BE FIRE TAPED, AND JOINTS AND FASTENER HEADS COVERED WITH (1) COAT OF JOINT COMPOUND. BASE LAYERS IN MULTI-LAYER SYSTEMS ARE NOT REQUIRED TO HAVE JOINTS OR FASTENER HEADS TAPED OR COVERED WITH JOINT COMPOUND. FOR PARTITIONS SCHEDULED WITH BOARD ON (1) SIDE ONLY, PROVIDE 20 GA. MINIMUM PRE-NOTCHED BRIDGING/SPACING BARS (SIMILAR TO SPAZZER 9200 BY CLARK DIETRICH) AT 4'-0" O.C. HORIZONTALLY. AT CONTRACTORS' OPTION, 1-1/2" x 12GA. C.R. CHANNEL BRIDGING WITH 16 GA. CLIP ATTACHMENT TO EACH STUD CAN BE UTILIZED. GENERAL PARTITION NOTES: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. GENERAL NOTES: ALL GENERAL NOTES PERTAIN TO ALL ARCHITECTURAL (A-SERIES) DRAWINGS IN THIS SET WHERE DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS MEET, AND A SPECIFIC TRANSITION DETAIL IS NOT INDICATED, PREPARE SUBSTRATE WITH A TRANSITION HEIGHT BUILD UP USING TROWELABLE LEVELING AND PATCHING COMPOUND TO PRODUCE A FLUSH SMOOTH CONDITION. TROWEL MATERIAL FOR A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 2 FEET FROM A FEATHER EDGE CONDITION UP TO A MAXIMUM SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION THICKNESS OF 1/2". FOR APPLICATIONS THICKER THAN 1/2", PLACE MATERIAL IN SUCCESSIVE LAYERS, SCORING PREVIOUS LAYER, UP TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 1". PROVIDE CONCEALED STEEL STUD BLOCKING, FRT WOOD BLOCKING OR 4" x 18 GA CONTINUOUS STEEL STRAPPING ATTACHED TO FACE OF STUDS BEHIND ALL WALL MOUNTED ITEMS SUCH AS: WALL CABINETS, SHELVING, COAT RODS, ETC. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & FURNITURE PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE. FLOOR FINISH TRANSITIONS/CHANGES SHALL OCCUR BELOW THE DOOR DIMENSIONS LOCATING INTERIOR PARTITIONS ARE TO THE FACE OF WALL (EXCLUDING FINISH MATERIALS SUCH AS -BUT NOT LIMITED TO: CERAMIC TILE, AND WOOD PANELING) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE FOR WALL THICKNESS ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE AND FOR CONTRACTORS VERIFICATIONS. IF DISCREPANCIES ARISE, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT (AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER) PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK THAT MAY BE EFFECTED BY THE DIMENSION CHANGE EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO INDICATE PERTINENT EXISTING UTILITIES AND CONDITIONS AS ACCURATELY AS POSSIBLE FROM EXISTING SURVEYS, DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA. PRIOR TO THE BID OPENING, CONTRACTORS SHALL WALK THE JOB SITE AND SATISFY THEMSELVES TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE CONSULTED WHEN ANY QUESTION ARISES RELATIVE TO MATERIALS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED ALL EXISTING WORK (CEILINGS, FLOORS, WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES, ETC.) DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL, SHALL BE PATCHED AND REPAIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AFTER INSTALLATION OF OTHER WORK PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS. SEE CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN FOR PARTITION LOCATIONS. PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON FIRE-RESISTANT RATED HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLIES, NOT PROTECTED BY A SHAFT ENCLOSURE, SHALL HAVE ITS ANNULAR SPACE FILLED WITH NON-COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL TO PREVENT THE PASSAGE OF FLAME, SMOKE FUMES, AND HOT GASES. NON-COMBUSTIBLE PENETRATING ITEMS SHALL NOT PENETRATE MORE THAN 3 FLOOR ASSEMBLIES. COMBUSTIBLE PENETRATING ITEMS SHALL NOT PENETRATE MORE THAN 1 FLOOR ASSEMBLY. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS IN ALL CAVITY SPACES IN WALL FULL HEIGHT THICKNESS OF BLANKETS IN STUD WALLS SHALL BE EQUAL TO THICKNESS OF CAVITY TO NEAREST 1/2", UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE PARTITIONS TO BE SEALED @ THE PERIMETER, BEHIND CONTROL JOINTS, AROUND OPENINGS AND AT ALL PENETRATIONS WITH EACH LAYER OF BOARD TO RECEIVE A BEAD OF NON-HARDENING SEALANT SEE WALL TYPE DESCRIPTIONS FOR CONDITIONS REQUIRING MINERAL FIBER SAFING INSULATION BATTS 1. 2. 3. 4. REFER TO CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN(S) FOR PARTITIONS REQUIRED TO BE FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED CONSTRUCTION. JOB SPECIFIC PARTITIONS J1 2 1/2" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE. 3 1/2" J23 5/8" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (2) LAYER 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE. (1) LAYER 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ROOM SIDE. 5 1/8" 2 1/2" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD AT ROOM SIDE ONLY. 3 3/8" U6 3 5/8" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD AT ROOM SIDE ONLY. 4 1/4" U8 1-HOUR RATED SHAFT WALL. 2 1/2" METAL C-H STUDS AT 24" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD AT ROOM SIDE ONLY. (1) LAYER 1" TYPE "X" GYPSUM LINER PANELS AT SHAFT SIDE. FULL HEIGHT PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. 1-HOUR RATED PER ASSEMBLY U.L. #U469 SHAFT WALL SERIES PARTITIONS 3 1/8" S1 7 1/4"6" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8 " GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE. 1 HOUR FIRE RESISTANT RATED WHEN INDICATED (WITH OR WITHOUT INSULATION) PER UL U419 A6 EXISTING CONCRETE DECK SCREW FASTENER TO STUDS ONLY 2" x 20 GA. MIN DEEP LEG DEFLECTION TRACK CONT. LATERAL BRACE WITHIN 12" OF TOP TRACK 1 1/2 C.R. CHANNEL W/ 16 GA. CLIP ANGLE OR CONT. STRAPPING ON EA. SIDE STEEL STUD CUT STUDS 1" SHORT OF DECK OR BEAM GYPSUM BOARD -EXTEND TO TOP OF STUD ELEVATION AT FIRE -RATED PARTITIONS: CONSTRUCT DETAIL IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS (HW-D). PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACK ASSEMBLIES, FORMING/ FILL MATERIALS AS REQUIRED BY APPROVED JOINT SYSTEM AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS & SMOKE PARTITIONS: FOR PARTITIONS CONTAINING SOUND BATT INSULATION PACKING MATERIAL FILL MATERIAL/SEALANT BOND BREAKER TAPE 3" 6" 3" T/O WALL CABINET B/O WALL CABINET T/O BASE CABINET FINISHED FLOOR SCHEDULED PARTITION 3" 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING T/O WALL CABINET B/O WALL CABINET T/O BASE CABINET FINISHED FLOOR SCHEDULED PARTITION 6"x16ga CONTINUOUS SHEET METAL: (2) SHEET METAL SCREWS PER STUD 3" 3" 3" 6" NOTE: REMOVE AND PATCH GYPSUM BOARD AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL BLOCKING INDICATED These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:23 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ General Notes and Legends CWJ CRE A-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 AB Anchor bolt A/C Air condition(ing) (ed) ACC Accessible ACCU Air cooled condensing unit ACI American Concrete Institute ACT Acoustical ceiling tile ACM Asbestos containing material ACOUS PNL Acoustical panel ACS PNL Access panel ADDL Additional ADJ Adjustable, adjacent ADH Adhesive AFF Above finished floor AGGR Aggregate AHU Air handling unit AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ALT Alternate ALUM Aluminum ANOD Anodized APPROX Approximate ARCH Architect(ural) ARD Auxillary roof drain ASD Allowable stress design ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWP Acoustical wall panel AWS American Welding Society BAT Batten B/B Back to back B BD Base board BCNYS Building Code of New York State BITUM Bituminous BD Board BLDG Building BLKG Blocking BM Beam, Benchmark BOT Bottom BR Bedroom BRG Bearing BRZ Bronze BSMT Basement BTWN Between BUR Built up roofing BW Both ways CCTV Closed circuit television CAB Cabinet CB Catch basin, Corner bead CH BD Chalkboard CEM Cement CF Contractor furnished CFMF Cold-formed metal framing CF/CI Contractor furnished/ Contractor installed CF/OI Contractor furnished/ Owner installed CG Corner guard CH Coat hook CI Cast iron CIP Cast in place, Cast iron pipe CJ Control joint CL Centerline CLG Ceiling CLO Closet CLR Clear, Color CMT Ceramic mosaic tile CMU Concrete masonry unit CNTR Counter CO Cleanout, Cased opening, Company COL Column CONC Concrete CONF Conference CONN Connect(ion) CONSTR Construction CONT Continue(ous) CONTR Contract(or) COORD Coordinate CPT Carpet CSJ Construction joint CSK Counter sunk CT Ceramic tile, Count, Current transformer CTR Center CW Cold water piping, Casement window CU Cubic CUH Cabinet unit heater CU YD Cubic yard D Deep, Depth D Penny (nail) db Bar diameter DBL Double DEFS Direct-applied exterior finish system DEG Degree DEMO Demolition DEPT Department DET Detail DF Drinking fountain DIA OR ø Diameter DIAG Diagonal, Diagram DIM Dimension DIFF Diffuser DIR Direction DISP Dispenser DIV Division DMPF Damp proofing DL Dead load DN Down DO Ditto DR Door, Drive DS Downspout DW Dishwasher DWVDrainage waste & vent DWGDrawing DWLDowel EEast EAEach EBCNYSExisting Building Code of New York State ECElectrical contractor EFEach face EIFSExterior insulation and finish system EJExpansion joint ELASElastomeric ELElevation ELECElectric(al) ELEVElevator EMEntry mat, Expanded metal EMEREmergency ENCLEnclosure ENGREngineer EOSEdge of slab EPElectric panel EQEqual EQUIPEquipment ESEmergency shower ETCEt cetera ETRExisting to remain EWEach way EWCElectric water cooler EXISTExisting EXCExcavation, Excavate EXPExpand, Expansion EXTExterior, External, Extinguisher F/FFace to face FAAPFire alarm annunciator panel FACPFire alarm control panel FDFloor drain FDTNFoundation FEFire extinguisher FECFire extinguisher cabinet FHCFire hose cabinet FINFinish(ed) FIXTFixture FLASHFlashing FLEXFlexible FLOURFluorescent FLGFlooring, flange FOFinished opening FPFire protection, Fireproof FRTWFire retardant treated wood FTFoot, Feet FTGFooting FTRFinned tube radiation FURNFurnace, Furniture, Furnish FUTFuture FWCFabric wall covering GAGage GALGallon GALVGalvanized GBGrab bar GCGeneral contract(or) GFRCGlass fiber reinforced concrete GFRGGlass fiber reinforced gypsum GLGlass, Ground level GL BLKGlass block GLU LAMGlued laminated beam GRGrade, Gross GWTGlazed wall tile GYPGypsum GYP BDGypsum board GYP PLASGypsum plaster HBHose bibb HCHollow core, Hose cabinet HCPHandicapped HDWHardware HDWDHardwood HMHollow metal HOHold open HORIZHorizontal HPHigh point, Horsepower HRHour HSSHollow structural section HTHeight HTGHeating HTRHeater HVACHeating, ventilating and air conditioning HWHot water HYDHydrant IDInside diameter INInches INCLIncluded INCANDIncandescent INFOInformation INSULInsulation INTERMIntermediate INTInterior JANJanitor JSTJoist JTJoint KIP1000 Pounds KITKitchen KOKnockout KPLKick plate LLiter, Angle LAMLaminate(d) LAULaundry LAVLavatory LBPound LBLLabel LDLoad LFLinear feet (foot) LHLeft hand, Latent heat LINLinear LKRLocker LLLive load LLHLong leg horizontal LLVLong leg vertical LOCLocation LRFDLoad & resistance factor design LTLight LTGLighting LWCLight-weight concrete MACHMachine MAINTMaintenance MASMasonry MATLMaterial MAXMaximum MCMechanical contractor MCBMetal corner bead MDOMedium density overlay MDFMedium density fiberboard MECHMechanical MEPMechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection MEZZMezzanine MFRManufacturer MHManhole MMMillimeter MIFRCMastic/intumescent fire-resistive coating MINMinimum MISCMiscellaneous MLWKMillwork MOMasonry opening MRK BDMarker board MTDMounted MTLMetal MULLMullion NNorth NATNatural NCOMBLNoncombustible NICNot in contract NO OR #Number NOMNominal NORMNormal NRCNoise reduction coefficient NTSNot to scale NWCNormal weight concrete O/OOut to out OAOverall, Outside air OCOn center ODOutside diameter OF/CIOwner furnished, Contactor installed OF/OIOwner furnished, Owner installed OFDOverflow drain OFFOffice OHOpposite hand OH DROverhead (coiling) door OPNGOpening OPPOpposite OPTOptional, Optimum OZOunce PAPublic address PBDParticleboard PCPlumbing contractor, Portland cement PCCPrecast concrete PCTPorcelain ceramic tile PEDPedestal PENDPendant PERPeriod PERFPerforated PGBDPeg board PLPlate, Property line PLFPonds per linear foot PLAMPlastic laminate PLASPlaster PLBPlumbing PLYWDPlywood PNLPanel POLPolished PORCPorcelain POSPositive, Position PPTPressure-preservative treated PRPair PREFABPrefabricate PREFINPrefinish PREPPreparation PROJProject PROJ SCRN Projection screen PSFPounds per square foot PSIPounds per square inch PTPaint, Post tension PTNPartition PVCPolyvinyl chloride (plastic) PVGPaving QTQuarry tile QTRQuarter QTYQuantity RRiser, Radius, Thermal resistance RBRubber base, Resilient base RCPReinforced concrete pipe, Reflected ceiling plan RDRoof drain, Road RECRecessed REFRefrigerator REFLReflect REGRegister, Regulation REINFReinforced REQDRequired RESILResilient REVRevision RFResilient flooring RFGRoofing RHRight hand, Roof hatch RMRoom RORough opening ROWRight of way RTURoof top unit RVRoof vent RWBRubber wall base SSouth SABSound attenuation batts SANSanitary SCSolid core, Shading coefficient SCHEDSchedule SEALSealer on floor (finish) SECTSection SFSquare foot, Safety factor SFRMSprayed fire-resistive Material SGTStructural glazed tile SHTSheet SHRShower SIMSimilar SOGSlab on grade SPStandpipe, Sump pit SPASpaces SPKRSpeaker SPECSpecification SQSquare SRDSecondary roof drain SSService sink SSMSolid surface material SSPStainless steel pipe SSTStainless steel STStain STAStation STCSound transmission class STDStandard STIFFStiffener STLSteel STORStorage STRStraight, Stringers STRUCTStructural SUSPSuspended SVSheet vinyl SYSquare yard TTread T/Top of T&BTop and bottom T&GTongue and groove TELTelephone THRESThreshold TEMPTemporary TERTerrazzo THKThick(ness) TK BDTack board TMPDTempered TOCTop of concrete TOMTop of masonry TOPOTopography, Topographic TOSTop of steel TOWTop of wall TPDToilet paper dispenser TSTATThermostat TVTelevision TYPTypical UHeat transfer coefficient UCUndercut UCLUnder cabinet lighting UGNDUnderground UHUnit heater ULUnderwriter's laboratories UNEXUnexcavated UNFINUnfinished UONUnless otherwise noted UTILUtility UVUnit ventilator VARNVarnish(ed) VBVinyl base VCTVinyl composition tile VENTVentilation VERTVertical VESTVestibule VIFVerify in field VINVinyl VOLVolume VRVapor retarder VTVinyl tile V SHTVinyl sheet VWCVinyl wall covering WWest W/With WCWater closet, Wall covering W/OWithout WDWood WDWWindow WFWide flange WD GDWood guard WHWater heater WIWrought iron WMWire mesh WPWaterproofing, Working point WRWater repellent, weather resistant W RECPTWaste receptacle WSCTWainscot WTWeight, Watertight, Water table WWFWelded wire fabric XBy YDYard C12 A C12 A-XXX 1 4 3 2 XSCALE: X"=1'-0" Title 1 1 2 B A 1 8'-0" AFF 1 Batt insulation Rigid insulation Wood blocking (intermittent) Stone Gravel or crushed stone Wood framing (continuous) Finish wood Steel -large scale Steel -small scale Plywood Concrete Concrete masonry unit Brick (Other metals as noted) View title Building / wall section cut Detail -blow up Exterior elevation Interior elevations 101 1 Partition type Room number Door numbers Window type Revision OR OR Undisturbed earth 001 100 A 001 Structural grid Viewing direction Detail no. Drawing no. Detail no. Drawing no. Drawing no. Elevation no. Plan key note Demolition key note Ceiling type and height Drawing symbols (Other metals as noted) A-XXX X A-XXX X Gypsum, sand, mortar A-XXX X Drawing no. Elevation no. Detail no. Detail section cut Detail no. DRAWING NO. A-XXX X Viewing direction Accessibility Accessible unit V/HAU Visual / hearing accommodation unit Material symbols Architectural / Structural abbreviations 3" = 1'-0" 1 TYP. DEFLECTION HEAD DETAIL 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 Blocking Location Detail 1019E_E404 A200J A C D F 1213 303305 304 304B 6 1 4 12 3 4 10 11 5 18 17 13 1415 2 19 +/- 16' - 0" 9 7 1 1 4 7 5 8 1 1 1 1 13 14 16 17 17 5 817 1 17 20 PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN TEMPORARY PROTECTION DURING DEMOLITION & CONSTRUCTION AT ALL FIN TUBE COVERS TO REMAIN 21 32 A C D F 1213 VIF 4' - 10" VIF 3' - 10" VIF 3' - 11" VIF 4' - 10" VIF 8' - 8" VIF 8' - 8" FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B A-420 11 A-420 1 A J1 2 13 A-420 8 7 J E304A 3 A-4206 4 5 10 U8 H G B A CDE F 5' - 0"+/- 4' - 6 1/4"2' - 6" 2' - 1" 1' - 7" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 2 A-601 1 2 2 2 4 3 2 20 11 20 4 22 2 2 22 5 21 20 2 6 320 23 23 23 2 1212 13 14 14 15 ( 9' - 11" ) ( 19' - 10" ) ( 9' - 9" ) ( 20' - 10" ) K L M E305 E303 14 A-501 H-1 E304 E304B 31 9 15 14 11' - 1" 2' - 1" 2' - 1" 2' - 1" 6' - 9" 16 2 33 20 A6 A6 6' - 9" N ELECTRICAL PANEL, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS U8 U8 ALIGN 1" 2' - 1" 1' - 11" ( 11' - 8 3/4" ) ( 19' - 1 1/4" ) ( 9' - 1 1/4" ) 4 A-101 FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B 1 8' -6" 1 8' -6" 1 8' -6" A J1 1 8' -6" 2 8' -4" 2 8' -4" 6 A-101 5 A-101 5 A-101 EQEQEQEQ TYP. @ CURTAINWALL MTL STUD & GYP BD INFILL @ TOP OF EXIST PARTITION S S S S 1' - 6" 2' - 0" EQEQ EXISTING CONT. WD BLOCKING, PT EXPOSED EDGES BLACK ANGLE MOLDING SCHEDULED CEILING, REFER TO RCP FOR HEIGHT +/- 2" VIF ROLLER WINDOW SHADE & FASCIA, VERIFY MOUNTING IN FIELD EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO DOCUMENT PERTINENT EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM EXISTING SURVEYS, DRAWINGS AND LIMITED FIELD INSPECTION. PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS, CONTRACTORS SHALL WALK THE SITE AND SATISFY THEMSELVES TO EXISTING VISUAL CONDITIONS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE CONSULTED WHEN ANY QUESTION ARISES RELATIVE TO MATERIALS AND CONDITIONS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED. ALL EXISTING WORK (CEILING, FLOORS, WALLS, FINISHES, ETC.) DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PATCHED AND REFINISHED. PATCHING AND FINISH WORK IS THE REPAIR WORK REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/ OR MATCHING THE ADJACENT SURFACES. MISCELLANEOUS FINISH REQUIREMENTS TO WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING IN AREAS AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION HAVE NOT BEEN TOTALLY INCORPORATED INTO THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. REFER TO THE DEMOLITION , FLOOR AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL CUTTING , PATCHING AND REFINISHING WORK SCOPE. CONTRACTOR(S) SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT WORK. SOME ITEMS ON DEMOLITION PLAN WILL REQUIRE REMOVAL PRIOR TO START OF ABATEMENT WORK. THE EXISTING FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION MUST BE MAINTAINED OR MADE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AS ESTABLISHED BY THIS CONTRACT. SEE THE CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS FOR THE FIRE RESISTANT RATINGS OF EXISTING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO LIMIT IMPACT OF CONSTRUCTION ON THE SURROUNDING OCCUPANTS AND OPERATIONS DURING THE PROJECT. SAFE LEGAL PASSAGES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL BUILDING OCCUPANTS DURING ALL THE PHASES OF THIS PROJECT. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH IS TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION AS A RESULT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL AND WITHOUT COMPENSATION. 'REMOVE' IS DEFINED AS DETACH FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE UNLESS INDICATED TO BE SALVAGED OR REINSTALLED 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: GENERAL NOTES: ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND OTHER SURFACES THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE TO BE PATCHED, REPAIRED, AND REFINISHED PRIOR TO FINISH INSTALLATION. ALL SURFACES ARE TO BE RESTORED TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/OR MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACES. FIRESTOP ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS (USED/UNUSED/ABANDONED) WITH 2 HR UL LISTED PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING. OF/CI: OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OF/OI: OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED DIMENSIONS WITHIN PARENTHESES, (X' -X"), HAVE BEEN PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY SEE A-603 FOR FUME HOOD (" ") AND OF/OI LAB EQUIPMENT (" ") 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.X X RCP LEGEND GYP BD CLG OR SOFFIT CEILING GRID EXIT LIGHT 2'X4' LED FIXTURE 2'X2' LED FIXTURE 1'X4' LED FIXTURE SPRINKLER HEAD SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS RETURN AIR GRILLE, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 12X2 ACT-1 CEILING TYPES GYP BD CLG OR SOFFIT, PT 2 EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN E 2" DEFLECTION HEAD BACKER ROD & SEALANT SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS EXISTING 2 1/2" MTL STUD PARTITION W/ 1/2" GYP BD EA. SIDE 1/2" GYP BD ON 2 1/2" MTL STUDS @ 16" OC ANGLE MOLDING LINE OF STRUCTURE 3 5/8" x 20GA MTL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING @ 4'-0" OC MAX LIGHT GAUGE CLIP ANGLE EXIST CEILING TILE SCHEDULED CEILING NOTE: EXTEND SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS AS FAR INTO EXISTING OFFICE 311 AS POSSIBLE FLAT STRAPPING @ 12" OC VERIFY THICKNESS IN FIELD DEFLECTION HEAD BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA SIDE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS 1/2" GYP BD ON 2 1/2" MTL STUDS @ 16" OC ANGLE MOLDING, EA SIDE LINE OF STRUCTURE 3 5/8" x 20GA MTL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING @ 4'-0" OC MAX LIGHT GAUGE CLIP ANGLE EXISTING 2 1/2" MTL STUD PARTITION W/ 1/2" GYP BD EA. SIDE ALIGN FACE OF GYP BD, EA SIDE. SHIM AS REQUIRED. MODIFIED EXIST CEILING TILE SCHEDULED CEILING These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:27 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Partial Third Floor Plans -E303-E305 CWJ CRE A-101 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Demolition Plan -E303-E305 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Third Floor Plan -E303-E305 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan -E303-E305 DEMOLITION KEY NOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1REMOVE SHELVING AND WALL STANDARDS IN THEIR ENTIRETY. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 2REMOVE WD DOOR, FRAME & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. PREPARE OPENING TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED DOOR. MARBLE THRESHOLD TO REMAIN. 3REMOVE DOOR, FRAME, & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS INCLUDING SHELVES INSTALLED ON DOOR PANEL. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. 4REMOVE WINDOW TREATMENTS & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH ANY REMAINING HOLES IN THE MTL FRAMING W/ COLOR MATCHED CAULK. 5REMOVE SHEET VINYL FLOOR FINISH & ASSOCIATED WALL BASE. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. PREP FLOOR TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 6REMOVE CPT FLOOR FINISH. SHEET VINYL FLOOR FINISH (BELOW CPT) & ASSOCIATED WALL BASE REMOVAL. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. PREP FLOOR FOR SCHEDULED FINISHES. 7REMOVE ACT CEILING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. EXISTING WOOD BLOCKING AT CEILING EDGES TO REMAIN. 8REMOVE ACT CEILING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. 9REMOVE MTL COAT RACK/SHELF. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 10REMOVE CHALKBOARD & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 11REMOVE TACKBOARD & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 12REMOVE WALL CABINET & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 13REMOVE MTL CHASE ENCLOSURE. 14REMOVE WD STUD AND PLYWOOD PARTITION IN ITS ENTIRETY. 15REMOVE PEGBOARD 16REMOVE WD DOOR & FRAME 17REMOVE ALL LAB CASEWORK IN ITS ENTIRETY. COORDINATE WITH ABATEMENT DRAWINGS 18REMOVE MTL STUD AND GYP BD PARTITION. PREP TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED WINDOW. 19REMOVE FUME HOOD. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. 20REMOVE COUNTERTOP. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. 21CAREFULLY REMOVE AND SALVAGE WOOD UPPER CABINETS FOR REINSTALLATION IN ACID WASH. 22REMOVE MTL STUD AND GYP BOARD PARTITION. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS AND FLOORS TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 23REMOVE DOOR, FRAME, AND RELATED HARDWARE. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. 24REMOVE PORTION OF MTL STUD AND GYP BOARD PARTITION FOR SCHEDULED DOOR. PATCH AND REPAIR PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 25REMOVE WALL MOUNTED PEGBOARD. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 26REMOVE WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. SALVAGE AND TURN OVER FIRE EXTINGUISHER TO OWNER. 27REMOVE WALL MOUNTED COAT RACK. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 28REMOVE WALL MOUNTED PENCIL SHARPENER AND WD BLOCKING. PATCH AND REPAIRGYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 29REMOVE WALL MOUNTED WD BLOCKING. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 30REMOVE WALL MOUNTED SHELVING UNIT (+/- 10'-0" LONG) AND ALL ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 31REMOVE METAL SCREW EYES. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 32SALVAGE HEAVY STONE BELOW COUNTERTOP AND RELOCATE TO E334. PLAN KEY NOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1GAS CYLINDER RACK - BOD: USA SAFETY BR2X2FS; FOR OWNER-PROVIDED (1) HE, (1) P5 AND (2) ULTRA-PURE AIR GAS BOTTLES. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND PIPING TO EQUIPMENT 2PAINTED STL BASE CABINETS, WALL CABINETS (WHERE SHOWN) & EPOXY COUNTERTOP. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 324"W X 30"H PEG BOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 4DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-A, 18" X 15" X 7.9" 5DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-B, 18" X 15" X 5" 6DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-C, 14" X 10" X 6.3" 7DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-D, 18" X 15" X 7.9" 8DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-E, 18" X 15" X 15.13" 9DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-F, 18" X 15" X 5" 10DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-G, 25" X 15" X 17.75" 114'-0" X 4'-0" TACKBOARD 12WINDOW TREATMENTS, WT-1. EXISTING WINDOWS ARE +/- 4'-9" HIGH, VIF. WIDTHS AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLANS. 13FROSTED VINYL FILM TO EXISTING DOOR SIDELITES. APPROX 24SF. 14COMPRESSED AIR CONNECTION, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS 15NATURAL GAS CONNECTION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS 162'-6" W X 4'-0"H MARKERBOARD 17(1) LAYER OF 1/2" GYP BD ON ROOM SIDE OF PARTITION. ON CORRIDOR SIDE OF PARTITION, INFILL REVEAL AT WALL BASE W/ (1) LAYER OF 1/2" GYP BD & PROVIDE 4" RESILIENT BASE. ALIGN FACE OF GYP BD W/ EXISTING GYP BD LAYER ABOVE. MATCH COLOR OF RESILIENT BASE TO EXISTING BASE IN CORRIDOR. CORRIDOR SIDE OF WALL TO RECEIVE PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING CORRIDOR PAINT. 18WD BASE CABINETS & EPOXY COUNTERTOP. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS 19(2) GAS CYLINDER WALL-MOUNTED SAFETY BRACKETS (BOD: USA SAFETY MODEL #GB300FS); FOR OWNER PROVIDED (1) P5 SIZE 200 AND (2) H2 SIZE 80 GAS BOTTLES. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF THE (2) SAFETY BRACKETS. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PIPING AND MANIFOLD. 20WALL MOUNTED ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVING. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 21ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVING MOUNTED TO PAINTED STEEL UPRIGHTS. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 2230"W X 30"H PEG BOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 23COMPUTER WORKSTATION (OF/OI) 2418"W X 30"H PEGBOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 25PAINT EXPOSED CONC COLUMN WITH EPOXY PAINT 2612"D X 4'-0"L METRO SHELVING (OF/OI) 274'-0"H X 8'-0"W SLATWALL AT 2'-8" AFF TO BOTTOM. 28GAS CYLINDER RACK - BOD: USA SAFETY BR2X2FS; FOR OWNER-PROVIDED (1) H2, (1) C2H2 AND (2) ULTRA-PURE AIR GAS BOTTLES. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND PIPING TO EQUIPMENT. 29INSTALL SALVAGED WD WALL CABNIETS FROM E304. 30CAPTURE HOOD, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 31SMOKE GASKETING AT EXISTING DOOR. 32PATCH HOLE IN CONCRETE SLAB AT PIPING REMOVAL. PREPARE TO RECEIVED SCHEDULED FINISH. 33GAS CYLINDER WALL-MOUNTED SAFETY BRACKET (BOD:USA SAFETY MODEL #GB200FS); FOR OWNER PROVIDED (1) H2 SIZE 200 GAS BOTTLE AND (1) FUTURE GAS BOTTLE. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATION FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PIPING. 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 Detail -Ceiling Edge @ Curtainwall, Typ. # SHOWN AS: # SHOWN AS: N 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 Detail -Top of Partition Infill -Lab 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 Detail -Top of Partition Infill -Office E303 FE D F 15161718 E323 E321 E334 E318 E318A 22 22 23 23 23 23 22 85 85 85 24 4 4 6 1129 1 27 28 30 13 1 17 17 17 31 31 25 19 9 17 17 26 17 13 17 11 6 TYP. D F 15161718 OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 (LAB CART, NIC) COAT RACK BALANCES ON MARBLE SLAB TABLE N2 ULTRA PURE AIR S IN K A C C E S S IB L E TALL STORAGE KNEE SPACE KNEE SPACE KNEE SPACE KNEE SPACE A J2 2 A' A' E' F' G' B'C' J' J' H' D' H-2 SOIL ROOM E318 VEST E334B ACID WASH E334A OPEN LAB E334 18 29 8 2 9 3 2 21 2 20 28 (LAB CART, NIC) 2 20 73 E318 E318A E334B E334A E334 12 12 E321 E323 2' - 0" V IF +/- 5' - 0 1/2" 5' - 0" A3 A3 A A3 A A3 A3 U3 U6 U8 10 7 KNEE SPACE A-421 A-421 A-421 3 A-421 5 7 A-4214 6 8 9 2 1 17 17 17 EXTENT OF INFILL AT WALL BASE, RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION AND PAINTING EXTENT OF INFILL AT WALL BASE RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION AND PAINTING 24 C LE A R 2' - 6 3/ 4" ELECTRICAL PANEL, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 5' - 0" ALIGN 25 19 3' - 1" 26 27 V IF +/- 5' - 0 1/2" 2' - 0" A-421 7 OPP COAT RACK 30 CA NG NG CA CANGCANG 31 ( 19' - 0 3/4" ) ( 9' - 3" ) ( 14' - 11" ) 11' - 0" ALIGN 2' - 6" ( 7' - 5" ) ( 19' - 7 3/4" ) ( 9' - 7 1/4" ) ( 9' - 7 1/4" ) ( 7' - 8 1/4" ) 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" ( 20' - 4" ) 2 A-601 1 A-601 V IF 3' - 10" V IF 4' - 10" V IF 3' - 10" V IF 4' - 10" V IF 8' - 8" V IF 8' - 8" 1415 1415 14 15 14 15 32 K' C2H2 2' - 1" 2' - 6" ALIGN HOLD "U3" AND "U6" TIGHT TO COLUMN PATCH WALL AT DRYING RACK REMOVAL, PREPARE FOR NEW FINISH GENERAL NOTES: ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND OTHER SURFACES THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE TO BE PATCHED, REPAIRED, AND REFINISHED PRIOR TO FINISH INSTALLATION. ALL SURFACES ARE TO BE RESTORED TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/OR MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACES. FIRESTOP ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS (USED/UNUSED/ABANDONED) WITH 2 HR UL LISTED PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING. OF/CI: OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OF/OI: OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED DIMENSIONS WITHIN PARENTHESES, (X' -X"), HAVE BEEN PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY SEE A-603 FOR FUME HOOD (" ") AND OF/OI LAB EQUIPMENT (" ") 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.X X EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO DOCUMENT PERTINENT EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM EXISTING SURVEYS, DRAWINGS AND LIMITED FIELD INSPECTION. PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS, CONTRACTORS SHALL WALK THE SITE AND SATISFY THEMSELVES TO EXISTING VISUAL CONDITIONS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE CONSULTED WHEN ANY QUESTION ARISES RELATIVE TO MATERIALS AND CONDITIONS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED. ALL EXISTING WORK (CEILING, FLOORS, WALLS, FINISHES, ETC.) DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PATCHED AND REFINISHED. PATCHING AND FINISH WORK IS THE REPAIR WORK REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/ OR MATCHING THE ADJACENT SURFACES. MISCELLANEOUS FINISH REQUIREMENTS TO WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING IN AREAS AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION HAVE NOT BEEN TOTALLY INCORPORATED INTO THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. REFER TO THE DEMOLITION , FLOOR AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL CUTTING , PATCHING AND REFINISHING WORK SCOPE. CONTRACTOR(S) SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT WORK. SOME ITEMS ON DEMOLITION PLAN WILL REQUIRE REMOVAL PRIOR TO START OF ABATEMENT WORK. THE EXISTING FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION MUST BE MAINTAINED OR MADE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AS ESTABLISHED BY THIS CONTRACT. SEE THE CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS FOR THE FIRE RESISTANT RATINGS OF EXISTING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO LIMIT IMPACT OF CONSTRUCTION ON THE SURROUNDING OCCUPANTS AND OPERATIONS DURING THE PROJECT. SAFE LEGAL PASSAGES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL BUILDING OCCUPANTS DURING ALL THE PHASES OF THIS PROJECT. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH IS TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION AS A RESULT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL AND WITHOUT COMPENSATION. 'REMOVE' IS DEFINED AS DETACH FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE UNLESS INDICATED TO BE SALVAGED OR REINSTALLED 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:29 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Partial Third Floor Plans -E318-E334 CWJ CRE A-102 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Demolition Plan -E318-E334 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Third Floor Plan -E318-E334 N # SHOWN AS:# SHOWN AS: PLAN KEY NOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1GAS CYLINDER RACK - BOD: USA SAFETY BR2X2FS; FOR OWNER-PROVIDED (1) HE, (1) P5 AND (2) ULTRA-PURE AIR GAS BOTTLES. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND PIPING TO EQUIPMENT 2PAINTED STL BASE CABINETS, WALL CABINETS (WHERE SHOWN) & EPOXY COUNTERTOP. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 324"W X 30"H PEG BOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 4DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-A, 18" X 15" X 7.9" 5DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-B, 18" X 15" X 5" 6DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-C, 14" X 10" X 6.3" 7DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-D, 18" X 15" X 7.9" 8DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-E, 18" X 15" X 15.13" 9DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-F, 18" X 15" X 5" 10DROP-IN EPOXY RESIN SINK, SK-G, 25" X 15" X 17.75" 114'-0" X 4'-0" TACKBOARD 12WINDOW TREATMENTS, WT-1. EXISTING WINDOWS ARE +/- 4'-9" HIGH, VIF. WIDTHS AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLANS. 13FROSTED VINYL FILM TO EXISTING DOOR SIDELITES. APPROX 24SF. 14COMPRESSED AIR CONNECTION, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS 15NATURAL GAS CONNECTION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS 162'-6" W X 4'-0"H MARKERBOARD 17(1) LAYER OF 1/2" GYP BD ON ROOM SIDE OF PARTITION. ON CORRIDOR SIDE OF PARTITION, INFILL REVEAL AT WALL BASE W/ (1) LAYER OF 1/2" GYP BD & PROVIDE 4" RESILIENT BASE. ALIGN FACE OF GYP BD W/ EXISTING GYP BD LAYER ABOVE. MATCH COLOR OF RESILIENT BASE TO EXISTING BASE IN CORRIDOR. CORRIDOR SIDE OF WALL TO RECEIVE PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING CORRIDOR PAINT. 18WD BASE CABINETS & EPOXY COUNTERTOP. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS 19(2) GAS CYLINDER WALL-MOUNTED SAFETY BRACKETS (BOD: USA SAFETY MODEL #GB300FS); FOR OWNER PROVIDED (1) P5 SIZE 200 AND (2) H2 SIZE 80 GAS BOTTLES. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF THE (2) SAFETY BRACKETS. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PIPING AND MANIFOLD. 20WALL MOUNTED ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVING. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 21ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVING MOUNTED TO PAINTED STEEL UPRIGHTS. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS. 2230"W X 30"H PEG BOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 23COMPUTER WORKSTATION (OF/OI) 2418"W X 30"H PEGBOARD WITH SST DRIP TRAY AT 42" AFF TO BOTTOM. 25PAINT EXPOSED CONC COLUMN WITH EPOXY PAINT 2612"D X 4'-0"L METRO SHELVING (OF/OI) 274'-0"H X 8'-0"W SLATWALL AT 2'-8" AFF TO BOTTOM. 28GAS CYLINDER RACK - BOD: USA SAFETY BR2X2FS; FOR OWNER-PROVIDED (1) H2, (1) C2H2 AND (2) ULTRA-PURE AIR GAS BOTTLES. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND PIPING TO EQUIPMENT. 29INSTALL SALVAGED WD WALL CABNIETS FROM E304. 30CAPTURE HOOD, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 31SMOKE GASKETING AT EXISTING DOOR. 32PATCH HOLE IN CONCRETE SLAB AT PIPING REMOVAL. PREPARE TO RECEIVED SCHEDULED FINISH. 33GAS CYLINDER WALL-MOUNTED SAFETY BRACKET (BOD:USA SAFETY MODEL #GB200FS); FOR OWNER PROVIDED (1) H2 SIZE 200 GAS BOTTLE AND (1) FUTURE GAS BOTTLE. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATION FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PIPING. DEMOLITION KEY NOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1REMOVE SHELVING AND WALL STANDARDS IN THEIR ENTIRETY. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 2REMOVE WD DOOR, FRAME & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. PREPARE OPENING TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED DOOR. MARBLE THRESHOLD TO REMAIN. 3REMOVE DOOR, FRAME, & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS INCLUDING SHELVES INSTALLED ON DOOR PANEL. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. 4REMOVE WINDOW TREATMENTS & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH ANY REMAINING HOLES IN THE MTL FRAMING W/ COLOR MATCHED CAULK. 5REMOVE SHEET VINYL FLOOR FINISH & ASSOCIATED WALL BASE. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. PREP FLOOR TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 6REMOVE CPT FLOOR FINISH. SHEET VINYL FLOOR FINISH (BELOW CPT) & ASSOCIATED WALL BASE REMOVAL. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. PREP FLOOR FOR SCHEDULED FINISHES. 7REMOVE ACT CEILING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. EXISTING WOOD BLOCKING AT CEILING EDGES TO REMAIN. 8REMOVE ACT CEILING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. 9REMOVE MTL COAT RACK/SHELF. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 10REMOVE CHALKBOARD & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 11REMOVE TACKBOARD & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 12REMOVE WALL CABINET & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 13REMOVE MTL CHASE ENCLOSURE. 14REMOVE WD STUD AND PLYWOOD PARTITION IN ITS ENTIRETY. 15REMOVE PEGBOARD 16REMOVE WD DOOR & FRAME 17REMOVE ALL LAB CASEWORK IN ITS ENTIRETY. COORDINATE WITH ABATEMENT DRAWINGS 18REMOVE MTL STUD AND GYP BD PARTITION. PREP TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED WINDOW. 19REMOVE FUME HOOD. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. 20REMOVE COUNTERTOP. REFER TO ABATEMENT DRAWINGS. 21CAREFULLY REMOVE AND SALVAGE WOOD UPPER CABINETS FOR REINSTALLATION IN ACID WASH. 22REMOVE MTL STUD AND GYP BOARD PARTITION. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS AND FLOORS TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 23REMOVE DOOR, FRAME, AND RELATED HARDWARE. TURN LOCK CYLINDERS OVER TO OWNER. 24REMOVE PORTION OF MTL STUD AND GYP BOARD PARTITION FOR SCHEDULED DOOR. PATCH AND REPAIR PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 25REMOVE WALL MOUNTED PEGBOARD. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 26REMOVE WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. SALVAGE AND TURN OVER FIRE EXTINGUISHER TO OWNER. 27REMOVE WALL MOUNTED COAT RACK. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 28REMOVE WALL MOUNTED PENCIL SHARPENER AND WD BLOCKING. PATCH AND REPAIRGYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 29REMOVE WALL MOUNTED WD BLOCKING. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 30REMOVE WALL MOUNTED SHELVING UNIT (+/- 10'-0" LONG) AND ALL ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 31REMOVE METAL SCREW EYES. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 32SALVAGE HEAVY STONE BELOW COUNTERTOP AND RELOCATE TO E334. 1019E_E412 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 OFFICE E321 1 8' -6" 2 8' -6" 1 8' -6" 1 8' -6" E 8' -6" E 8' -6" E 7' -11 1/2" A J1 2 A-103 OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A SOIL ROOM E318 VEST E334B OFFSET TOP OF PARTITION AROUND EXISTING DUCT ABOVE CEILING. 3 A-103 MODIFY EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING IN SHADED AREA TO ACCOMMODATE PARTITION INFILL. REWORK GRID AND TILES AND INSTALL NEW PERIMETER EDGE TRIM. METAL STUD & GYP BD INFILL AT TOP OF EXISTING PARTITION EQEQ E Q E Q E Q E Q EQEQ EQEQ RCP LEGEND GYP BD CLG OR SOFFIT CEILING GRID EXIT LIGHT 2'X4' LED FIXTURE 2'X2' LED FIXTURE 1'X4' LED FIXTURE SPRINKLER HEAD SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS RETURN AIR GRILLE, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 12X2 ACT-1 CEILING TYPES GYP BD CLG OR SOFFIT, PT 2 EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN E VERIFY THICKNESS IN FIELD V IF +/- 4' - 3" DEFLECTION HEAD BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA SIDE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS 1/2" GYP BD ON 2 1/2" MTL STUDS @ 16" OC ANGLE MOLDING, EA SIDE LINE OF STRUCTURE 3 5/8" x 20GA MTL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING @ 4'-0" OC MAX LIGHT GAUGE CLIP ANGLE EXISTING 2 1/2" MTL STUD PARTITION W/ 1/2" GYP BD EA. SIDE ALIGN FACE OF GYP BD, EA SIDE. SHIM AS REQUIRED. MODIFIED EXIST CEILING TILE MODIFIED EXISTING CEILING TILE EXISTING TO REMAIN DUCT, VERIFY LOCATION IN FIELD 4" 4" GYPSUM BD OFFSET TO OCCUR ABOVE ACT CEILING SCHEDULED PARTITION SCHEDULED CEILING V IF +/- 4' - 3" LINE OF STRUCTURE 3 5/8" x 20GA MTL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING @ 4'-0" OC MAX LIGHT GAUGE CLIP ANGLE SCHEDULED CEILING ANGLE MOLDING, EA SIDE These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:30 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan E318-E334 CWJ CRE A-103 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan -E318-E334 N 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 Detail -Top of Partition Infill -Office E321 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 Detail -Partition Offset at Existing Duct D F 15161718 REINSTALL (3) SALVAGED METAL WALL CABINETS S1 S1 MODIFY EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING TO ACCOMMODATE CHASE A-104 6 PROVIDE 4" RUBBER BASE MATCHED TO EXISTING WALL BASE E412 E421A E416 E416A E412B E412C E400C E440 D F 15161718 MODIFY EXISTING BALLASTED INVERTED EPDM ROOF TO ACCOMMODATE OPENING AND 12" H PREMANUFACTURED ROOF CURB FOR EXHAUST FAN. VERIFY OPENING SIZE WITH EXHAUST FAN MFR. REFER TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DRAWINGS FOR ACM REMOVALS. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXHAUST FAN DETAILS. EXISTING BALLASTED INVERTED EPDM ROOF +/- 1' - 4 1/4" +/- 1' - 4 1/4" 7 A-104 D F 15161718 CAREFULLY REMOVE AND SALVAGE (3) METAL WALL CABINETS FOR REINSTALLATION. PATCH AND REPAIR GYPSUM BOARD PARTITION. PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACE. REFER TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DRAWINGS FOR FLOORING AND MASTIC REMOVAL FOR NEW DUCT OPENING. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. E412 E421A E416 E416A E412B E412C E400C E440 D F 15161718 E240 E236A E236 E200C E223 E221 E216A E216 E212 SHADED AREAS INDICATE APPROXIMATE AREA OF EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. REMOVE AND REPLACE ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE NEW MATERIAL AS NECESSARY TO REPLACE DAMAGED COMPONENTS. +/- 6' - 6" +/- 3' - 0" +/- 3' - 0" +/- 3' - 0" +/- 9' - 0" +/- 14' - 2" +/- 4' - 0" +/- 10' 11" +/- 3' - 0" +/- 6' - 0" +/- 10' - 8" +/- 4' - 0" +/- 3' - 1" A C D F 1213 E202A E202B E202 E205 E203 SHADED AREAS INDICATE APPROXIMATE AREA OF EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. REMOVE AND REPLACE ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE NEW MATERIAL AS NECESSARY TO REPLACE DAMAGED COMPONENTS. +/- 9' - 6" +/- 3' - 0" 2-PLY SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE FLASHING UP SIDES AND OVER CURB EXISTING +/-12" THICK CONCRETE ROOF DECK INSULATED PREFABRICATED CURB M IN 1' - 0" REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING INVERTED ROOF MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY. REFER TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DRAWINGS FOR REMOVAL OF FELT SLIP AND 3-PLY MOPPINGS OF FELT AND ASPHALT. INVERTED ROOF MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS SHALL MATCH EXISTING AND METHOD OF APPLICATION ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT EXISTING INVERTED ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM A-104 7A EXISTING DRY APPLIED, LOOSE LAID FELT SLIP SHEET EXISTING 3-PLY MOPPINGS OF FELT AND ASPHALT EXISTING RIGID PROTECTION BOARD EXISTING 2.5" EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION EXISTING ROUNDED STONE BALLAST CANT 1' - 0" 2" AT FIRE -RATED PARTITIONS: CONSTRUCT DETAIL IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS (HW-D). PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACK ASSEMBLIES, FORMING/ FILL MATERIALS AS REQUIRED BY APPROVED JOINT SYSTEM PACKING MATERIAL FILL MATERIAL/SEALANT BOND BREAKER TAPE DEFLECTION TRACK 3"3" 6" WIDE LIQUID FLASHING STRIP (BOD: SOPREMA ALSAN FLASHING) GASKETED FASTENERS. .050" PREFIN ALUM COUNTERFLASHING ROOF MEMBRANE "S1" SHAFTWALL ASSEMBLY WITH UL-RATED HEAD OF WALL ASSEMBLY FROM FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. LINER PANEL FACING EXISTING PARTITIONS. TAPE AND FINISH INSIDE OF SHAFT. DUCT, SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS "S1" SHAFTWALL ASSEMBLY WITH UL-RATED HEAD OF WALL ASSEMBLY FROM FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. LINER PANEL FACING INSIDE OF SHAFT. TAPE AND FINISH ROOM SIDE. EXISTING PARTITION TO CEILING CLEAR 1' - 2" C LE A R 1' - 2" These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:32 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Partial Plans CWJ CRE A-104 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0" 4 Partial Fourth Floor Plan 1/8" = 1'-0" 5 Partial Roof Plan N 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 Partial Fourth Floor Demolition Plan 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Second Floor Plan -Rm 216-236 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Second Floor Plan -Rm 202-205 3" = 1'-0" 7 Prefabricated Curb Detail 6" = 1'-0" 7A Enlarged Detail of Top of Curb 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 Enlarged Floor Plan at Chase 3/4" 2' - 6"2' - 0"5' - 0"2' - 0" 1 5/8" 3' - 6"3' - 6" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS TACKBOARD (4'-0" X 4'-0") EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP 12"D OUTER LIP REAGENT SHELVING ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 4" 2' - 6" 7' - 0" 3' - 0" 7 A-501 8 A-501 SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 4' - 3" 2' - 10" 3/4" 5' - 6" STL CLOSURE PANEL @ KNEESPACE PAINTED STL APRON EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS 12"D OUTER LIP W/ 12"D INNER REAGENT SHELVING ON PAINTED STL UPRIGHTS 30"W X 30"H PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH 14 A-501 4" 3' - 0" 2' - 11 5/8"3' - 0"2' - 6"3' - 0" 7' - 1" 3' - 0"3' - 6"3' - 0"2' - 6" 13' - 0 5/8" EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS 12"D OUTER LIP W/ 12"D INNER REAGENT SHELVING ON PAINTED STL UPRIGHTS 30"W X 30"H PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH STL CLOSURE PANEL @ KNEESPACE PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 12"D OUTER LIP REAGENT SHELVING ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY 14 A-501 CA NG 8 A-501 7 A-501 16 A-501 SIM 4 7/8" 1' - 9" 3' - 0" 2' - 0" 1" 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 10" 2' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 18"D PAINTED STL CABINET W/ OPEN SHELVES BEYOND (FACING KNEE SPACE) TOP EDGE OF BACKSPLASH @ 3'-4" AFF ALIGN SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP 12"D OUTER LIP REAGENT SHELVING ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY 18"D PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 3' - 0" PAINTED STL CABINETS & CLOSURE PANEL UPRIGHTS, SHELVING & PEG BOARDS BEYOND 30"W X 48"H MARKER BOARD (L) NOTE: (L) DENOTES LOCKED DRAWER LOCATION FLAMMABLE STORAGE CANG 9' - 1 1/8" 9 A-501 7' - 1" E304A 2" 2' - 6"3' - 0"1' - 9"2' - 6"2' - 6" 4" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" CAPTURE HOOD, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS PAINTED STL CABINETS W/ SLIDING GLASS DOORS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS STL CLOSURE PANEL @ KNEESPACE 3' - 6" 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 1 A-501 2 A-501 12' - 6" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 24"W X 30"H PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH 1" 2' - 0"2' - 8 1/4" 4" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 6 A-501 SIM. 13 A-501 ACCESSIBLE MOTORIZED BASE STAND COMBINATION FUME HOOD PAINTED STEEL CABINETS W/ GLASS DOORS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACKSPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP 18"D PAINTED STL CABINET W/ OPEN SHELVES (FACING KNEE SPACE) 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 2' - 7" 2' - 11" 2' - 10" 1" 5' - 0" 1" 2' - 10" 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 2' - 11" 12 A-501 PAINTED STL CABINET W/ OPEN SHELVES (FACING KNEE SPACE) OPEN BEHIND CASEWORK & UNDER FIN TUBE 2' - 6" 4" MARBLE SLAB BALANCE TABLE 5' - 3" 3/4" 2' - 6"2' - 6" 2' - 11" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACKSPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS STEEL CLOSURE PANEL AT KNEESPACE CORNER POST 2' - 7" 3' - 3" GAS CYLINDER BRACKET. PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKING. COAT RACK FUTURE GAS CYLINDER, NIC 2 A-501 SIM 4 A-101 1' - 9" 1" 4" 3' - 0" 8' - 8 1/2" OPEN TO CMU WALL AND PARTITION BEYOND AT KNEE SPACE SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK & SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION & FIN TUBE COVER PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS (L) 3' - 10 1/2" 3' - 0" 2 A-501 1 A-501 SIM.SIM. 5' - 0"1' - 9"2' - 6"3' - 0"2" 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 3' - 0" 4" 4' - 0" OPEN BEHIND CASEWORK & UNDER FIN TUBE 12' - 7" PAINTED STL CABINETS W/ SLIDING GLASS DOORS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS STEEL CLOSURE PANEL AT KNEESPACE 24"W X 30"H PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH GAS CYLINDER RACK CORNER POST CA 1 A-501 2 A-501 SIM13 A-501 SIM PAINTED STL CABINETS W/ GLASS DOORS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACKSPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP 12"D OUTER LIP REAGENT SHELVING ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY 3' - 0" 2' - 8 1/4"2' - 0" 1" 3' - 6" 8 A-501 7 A-501 3' - 0" 4" 7' - 1" These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:37 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Interior Elevations E303-E305 CWJ CRE A-420 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Interior Elevation -E304 -West A 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Interior Elevation -E304 -North 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Interior Elevation -E304 -East A 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Interior Elevation -E304 -West B 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Interior Elevation -E304 -South 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 Interior Elevation -E304 -East B 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 Interior Elevation -E304B -East 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 Interior Elevation -E304B -South 1/4" = 1'-0" 10 Interior Elevation -E305 -West 1/4" = 1'-0" 11 Interior Elevation -E305 -North 1/4" = 1'-0" 13 Interior Elevation -E305 -East 1/4" = 1'-0" 9 Interior Elevation -E304B -West E318 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 3" 4" 4" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 24" X 30" PEGBOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS, TYP. EPOXY COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH, TYP PAINTED STEEL CABINETS & DRAWERS 12"D REAGENT SHELVING WITH SST RETAINER RODS ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY 10' - 1" (L) 3 A-501 SIM 3' - 0" 7' - 1" 9' - 0"EPOXY COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH, TYP 4" 3' - 0" 1" PAINTED STEEL CABINETS & DRAWERS SCHEDULE BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONT AND SIDE PANELS, TYP. 3' - 0"3' - 0"6" 1 A-501 SIM. CAPTURE HOOD, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 1' - 6" MIN. CLEAR 2' - 6" 3' - 6" 1' - 5" CLEAR ACCESSIBLE MOTORIZED BASE STAND COMBINATION FUME HOOD 4" 2' - 9" 2' - 7" 7' - 0" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH PAINTED STL CABINETS & DRAWERS 4' - 0" 3' - 6" 1" 1' - 3" PAINTED STEEL CABINETS W/ SLIDING GLASS DOORS EPOXY COUNTERTOP AND BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION 7' - 8" FIXED PANEL WITH RECEPTACLES AND DATA JACKS DECK-MOUNTED COMPRESSED AIR AND NATURAL GAS SERVICE FITTING (L) 5 A-501 SIM. 1' - 4" 5' - 0" NOTE: (L) DENOTES LOCKED DRAWER LOCATION 3' - 0" 4" MARBLE SLAB BALANCE TABLE 2" 3' - 0"3' - 0" 2" 4' - 0" 2' - 11" 2' - 7" 7' - 0 5/ 8" LOCKABLE STORAGE CABINETS W/ FRAMED SLIDING GLASS DOORS AND (5) SHELVES PAINTED STEEL CABINETS & DRAWERS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION 12"D REAGENT SHELVING ON WALL RAIL ASSEMBLY 6' - 4" GAS CYLINDER BRACKETS. PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKING. 1' - 3" 2' - 0" (L) 3 A-501 SIM 3' - 0"3' - 0" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS, TYP. PAINTED STEEL CABINETS W/ SLIDING GLASS DOORS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP PAINTED STEEL CABINETS & DRAWERS 3' - 0"2' - 6"2' - 0"2' - 6"2' - 0"2' - 6"3' - 0"1" 1" 17' - 8" 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 7" 7' - 0" NGCANGCA 5 A-501 SIM.6 A-501 SIM. 2' - 10" EPOXY COUNTERTOP, EPOXY TRANSITION TO STANDING HEIGHT COUNTERTOP 18" X 24" PEGBOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH 12"D OUTER LIP W/ 12"D INNER REAGENT SHELVING ON PAINTED STL UPRIGHTS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS 3' - 0" PAINTED STEEL APRON STEEL CLOSURE PANEL AT KNEE SPACE PAINTED STEEL END PANELS 3/4" 4' - 8 1/2" 3/4" 5' - 0" 17 A-501 14 A-501 SIM 3' - 0" 2' - 10" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 6" STEEL CLOSURE PANEL AT KNEESPACE 12"D OUTER LIP W/ 12"D INNER REAGENT SHELVING ON PAINTED STL UPRIGHTS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS PAINTED STEEL CABINETS & DRAWERS 2' - 1"10' - 9" 2' - 2"3' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 6"3' - 0"1" CANG PAINTED STEEL END PANEL EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION 15 A-501 16 A-501 7' - 5" E-PUREDI E-PURE CAPTURE HOOD, SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS WOOD SINK BASE CABINETS EPOXY COUNTERTOP BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP 4" 3' - 0" SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS 2' - 0" 2' - 6" 11 A-501 SIMRELOCATED FROM E304 EXIST WD CABINETS SCHEDULED BASE AT ALL EXPOSED FINISH WALLS AND EXPOSED CABINET BASE FRONTS AND SIDE PANELS EPOXY COUNTERTOP, BACK AND SIDE SPLASH AT PARTITION, TYP WOOD CABINETS & DRAWERS 4" 3' - 0" 1' - 0 3/8"2' - 6"3' - 0"3 3/4" 18" X 24" PEGBOARD W/ PLASTIC DRIP TROUGH 7' - 0" 9' - 3" 10 A-501 11 A-501 PAINTED STEEL FILLER PANEL These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:40 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Interior Elevations E318-E334 CWJ CRE A-421 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Interior Elevation -E318 -North 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Interior Elevation -E318 -West 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Interior Elevation -E334 -North A (Accessible Station) 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Interior Elevation -E334 -East 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Interior Elevation -E334 -South B 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 Interior Elevation -E334 -West 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 Interior Elevation -E334 -South A 1/4" = 1'-0" 9 Interior Elevation -E334A -North 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 Interior Elevation -E334A -West STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL OPEN UTILITY CHASE PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL STEEL WALL CABINET, REFER TO ELEVATIONS 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 6" R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3'-0" 3' - 6" 1' - 1" 1" TYP. 7 3/8" EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS OPEN UTILITY CHASE PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL STEEL WALL CABINET, REFER TO ELEVATIONS 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 6" WIRE PULL BASE CABINET BEYOND REMOVABLE METAL PANEL -TYPICAL AT KNEE SPACES METAL APRON W/ DRAWER R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 1' - 1" 7 3/8" STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL OPEN UTILITY CHASE R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 6" PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" 7 3/8" REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR INVERTED TOP SHELF LOCATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 6" PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" FINISHED FLOOR OPEN UTILITY CHASE WIRE PULL BASE CABINET BEYOND REMOVABLE METAL PANEL -TYPICAL AT KNEE SPACES METAL APRON W/ DRAWER 7 3/8" REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR INVERTED TOP SHELF LOCATIONS STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL STEEL WALL CABINET, REFER TO ELEVATIONS 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 1" R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3'-0" 3' - 6" 1' - 1" EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL STEEL WALL CABINET, REFER TO ELEVATIONS 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 1" WIRE PULL BASE CABINET BEYOND METAL APRON W/ DRAWER R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 1' - 1" STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 1" PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR INVERTED TOP SHELF LOCATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS R E F E R T O E LE V A T IO N S 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 4" 2' - 1" PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" FINISHED FLOOR WIRE PULL BASE CABINET BEYOND METAL APRON W/ DRAWER REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR INVERTED TOP SHELF LOCATIONS 2' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 0"1' - 0" 3' - 0" 4' - 1" 1' - 9 5/8"1' - 2 3/4" ISLAND UPRIGHT INVERTED REAGENT SHELF BEYOND INNER & OUTER REAGENT SHELF W/ LIP BEYOND EPOXY RESIN COUNTER WITH BACKSPLASH OPEN UTILITY CHASE FINISHED FLOOR 3' - 6" PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER FALSE FRONT 5' - 0" 7' - 1" REMOVABLE METAL PANEL -TYPICAL AT KNEE SPACES 1" A-501 17 STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL 3' - 0" 4" 1' - 7" PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" 1' - 6" WOOD BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WIRE PULL OPEN UTILITY CHASE EXIST WOOD WALL CABINETS RELOCATED FROM ROOM 304 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 6" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" V IF 2' - 7" VIF 1' - 1" 7 3/8" WOOD BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR WIRE PULL 4" 2' - 6" 3' - 0" FALSE FRONT EPOXY PAINTED STEEL FIXED SINK SUPPORT SHELF 5" PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH 3' - 6" STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR DUAL-CHANNEL WIREMOLD, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FALSE FRONT PROVIDE BLOCKING PER 2/A-000, TYPICAL STEEL WALL CABINET, REFER TO ELEVATIONS 2' - 7" 7' - 0" 4" 2' - 1" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 6"1' - 6" OPEN UTILITY CHASE 1' - 1" STEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR WIRE PULL ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS 7' - 1" 4' - 1" 3' - 0" 1' - 9 5/8"1' - 2 3/4" 1' - 0"1' - 0" ISLAND UPRIGHT INNER & OUTER REAGENT SHELF W/ LIP BEYOND 3' - 0" 5' - 0" 1" OPEN UTILITY CHASE EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR WIRE PULL BASE CABINET BEYOND METAL APRON W/ DRAWER 3' - 0" 1' - 0"1' - 0" 4' - 1" 3' - 0" 7' - 1" ADJUSTABLE REAGENT SHELVES W/ LIPS ISLAND UPRIGHT INNER & OUTER REAGENT SHELF W/ LIP BEYOND REMOVABLE METAL PANEL -TYPICAL AT KNEE SPACES 5' - 0" 1' - 9 5/8"1' - 2 3/4"1' - 9 5/8" 1"1" OPEN UTILITY CHASESTEEL BASE CABINET PER ELEVATIONS EPOXY RESIN COUNTER W/ BACKSPLASH FINISHED FLOOR WIRE PULL FALSE FRONT 2' - 1" 4" 2' - 6" T O 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 7 3/8" PEG BOARD W/ SST DRIP TROUGH STANDING OR ADA HEIGHT ADA HEIGHT OR SITTING HEIGHT ALIGN FRONT OF SIDESPLASH FLUSH WITH FRONT OF ADJACENT WORKSURFACES WHEN TRANSITIONING HEIGHTS These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:41 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Interior Details, Lab Casework CWJ CRE A-501 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 Section at Casework -A 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 Section at Casework -B 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 Section at Casework -C 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 Section at Casework -D 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 Section at Casework -E 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 Section at Casework -F 3/4" = 1'-0" 7 Section at Casework -G 3/4" = 1'-0" 8 Section at Casework -H 3/4" = 1'-0" 14 Section at Bench, Sinks 3/4" = 1'-0" 9 Section at Casework -I 3/4" = 1'-0" 10 Section at Casework -J 3/4" = 1'-0" 11 Section at Casework -K 3/4" = 1'-0" 12 Section at Casework -L 3/4" = 1'-0" 15 Section at Bench, Typ. 3/4" = 1'-0" 16 Section at Bench, Knee Spaces 3/4" = 1'-0" 13 Section at Casework -O 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 17 Worksurface Transition Detail DOOR ELEVATIONSFRAME ELEVATIONS GLAZING TYPES: S-11/4" SAFETY GLASS S-21/4" FIRE-RATED SAFETY GLASS D1F1 SCHED SEE DOOR S E E D O O R S C H E D U LE D2 SCHED SEE DOOR M A X 3' - 7" 8" 5"8" S E E D O O R S C H E D U LE SCHED SEE DOOR SEE DOOR SCHED FOR GLAZING TYPE, TYP. SEE DOOR SCHED FOR GLAZING TYPE, TYP. S E E D O O R S C H E D U LE DOUBLE MTL STUD AT JAMBS, TYPICAL DOOR HM WRAPPED FRAME W/ GYP BD RETURNS AND MTL STUD ANCHORS 2" P LA N S E E F LR PARTITION TYPE AS SCHED. J1 T Y P . 5/8" MIN. 1/2" 4" WALL WHERE APPLICABLE 5/8" TYP 3 5/8" METAL STUDS AT DOOR POCKET POCKET DOOR 3/4" WOOD TRIM J2 2" 2 5/8" 4"PARTITION TYPE AS SCHEDULED DOUBLE METAL STUD AT JAMBS, TYP WOOD BLKG. PRE-HUNG WOOD FRAME WD. JAMB & STOP DOOR 3/4" X 3" WOOD CASING J3 WALL WHERE APPLICABLE 4" 3/4" X 3" WOOD CASING P LA N S E E F LR WOOD BLOCKING POCKET DOOR 2" 2 5/8" HEAD DETAIL WOOD BLOCKING 2 X WOOD HEADER 3/4" WOOD TRIM ADJUSTABLE SLIDING DOOR TRACK ASSEMBLY CLEAR 36" MIN P LA N S E E F LO O R WOOD BLOCKING BUMPER INSTALLED AT 42" AFF T Y P . 60" T O T O P O F S IG N SINGLE DOOR 9" AT PULL SIDE 4" AT PUSH SIDE LOCATE ON LATCH SIDE OF DOOR 3 1/2" 3 1/2" E000 3/8" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4'' LETTERING (WHITE) CENTER ON SIGN BRAILLE COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MFR FULL LINE EQEQ E Q E Q 5' - 2" 5/4 X 6 HARDWOOD, FINISH AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT (2) STAINLESS STEEL BOBRICK B-6827 HOOKS SectionElevation 1' - 4" EQEQ E Q E Q WD BLOCKING BETWEEN STUDS 9" 5' - 2" 5/4 X 6 HARDWOOD, FINISH AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT (2) STAINLESS STEEL BOBRICK B-6827 HOOKS SectionElevation 2' - 2" EQEQ E Q E Q WD BLOCKING BETWEEN STUDS 9"9" REMARKS 1. 3/4" MAX. UNDERCUT 2. POCKET DOOR 1/8" ALUMINUM PLATE, BOD: PEMKO ALUMINUM PLATE 18/1 EXISTING RESILIENT SHEET 1/8" END OF ALUMINUM PLATE TO COVER EDGE OF RESILIENT SHEET SHEET VINYL TO TRANSITION BENEATH DOOR PANEL DOOR FRAME BEYOND DOOR PANEL 6 1/8" VIF MARBLE THRESHOLD RESINOUS FLOOR 1/4" SHEET VINYL DOOR FRAME BEYOND DOOR PANEL 1/8" WIDTH OF SCHEDULE FRAME DIVIDER STRIP DIVIDER STRIP 2" These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:42 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Interior Details & Door Schedule CWJ CRE A-601 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR # DOORFRAME HARDWARELABELTHRESHOLDREMARKSDOOR # LEAFS SIZE TYPEMATERIALFINISHGLASSELEVATIONJAMBMATERIALFINISH WIDTHHEIGHTTHICK LEVEL 3 E304A(1)3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"D1WDPT-2S-1F1J3WDPT-2REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE -EXIST MARBLEE304A E304B(1)3' - 4"7' - 0"1 3/4"D1WDPT-2-F1J2HMPT-2REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE --2E304B E318(1)3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"D2WDPT-2/PT-3S-2F1J1HMPT-2/PT-3REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE 45 MINY, 1/8" ALUMINUM PLATE, DETAIL 3/A-601 1E318 E318A(1)3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"D2WDPT-2S-1F1J1HMPT-2REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE --E318A E334A(1)3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"D2WDPT-2S-1F1J3WDPT-2REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE -Y, MARBLE, DETAIL 4/A-601 1E334A E334B(1)3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"D2WDPT-2S-1F1J1HMPT-2REFERENCE HARDWARE SCHEDULE --E334B JAMB DETAILS SIGNAGE MOUNTING TYPES TYPICAL ROOM SIGNAGE TYPE 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 Coat Rack Detail -Office NOTE: DOORS E303, E304, E305, E321, E323 AND E334 ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 Coat Rack Detail -Lab 6" = 1'-0" 3 Threshold -Burnished Aluminum 6" = 1'-0" 4 Threshold -Marble MISCELLANEOUS FINISH REQUIREMENTS TO WALLS, FLOORS & CEILINGS IN AREAS AFFECTED BY DEMO HAVE NOT BEEN TOTALLY INCORPORATED INTO THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. REFER TO DEMOLITION, FLOOR & REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR EXTENT OF "CUTTING & PATCHING". PATCHING SHALL BE THE REPAIR WORK REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/OR MATCHING THE ADJACENT SURFACES. FLOORING TO RUN BENEATH ANY OPEN SPACES IN ROOMS, INCLUDING ADA CABINETS & APPLIANCES IN THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE -IN ANY ROW OR COLUMN "-" or "ETR" INDICATES THERE ARE NO CHANGES OR NEW FINISHES, EXISTING TO REMAIN PAINT ALL EXPOSED HVAC, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH ADJACENT OR BACKGROUND SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO STEEL ACCESS DOORS & FRAME, STEEL GRILLES, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND LOUVERS. DO NOT PAINT OPERATIONAL COMPONENTS OF SYSTEMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPRINKLER HEADS, FIRE, SMOKE, OR HEAT DETECTORS. PROVIDE TRANSITION STRIPS BETWEEN DIFFERENT FLOOR MATERIALS AS INDICATED ON SCHEDULE. WHERE TRANSITIONS OCCUR AT DOORWAYS, CENTER TRANSITION BENEATH DOOR. PAINT DOOR FRAMES & DOORS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. FINISH FRAMES & DOORS THE SAME ON BOTH SIDES UNLESS INDICATED AS A SPLIT FINISH IN THE DOOR SCHEDULE. ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS TO BE FLAT FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL PAINTED VERTICAL SURFACES (WALLS, SOFFITS, COLUMNS, ETC ) TO BE AN EGGSHELL FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. GENERAL NOTES -FINISHES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. NOTE: PLANK SIZE NOT TO SCALE, FOR DIRECTION ONLY. FULL LVT TILE, EDGE TO BE CENTERED UNDER DOOR LVT-1 EXIST. RESILIENT SHEET TS-1 PLANK ORIENTATION FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B SV-1 EXIST. RESILIENT SHEET EXIST RESILIENT SHEET SV-1 EXIST MARBLE THRESHOLD TO REMAIN FINISH LEGEND SECTION 07 92 00 -JOINT SEALANT JOINT SEALANT AT COUNTERTOP TO WALL TRANSITIONS, MATCH JOINT SEALANT TO COUNTERTOP SECTION 09 51 13 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (ACT) ACT-1CERTAINTEED PERFORM TILE, SQUARE LAY IN MINERAL FIBER TILE, STYLE: FINE FISSURED, TYPE: HHF-197, SIZE: 24" X 24", COLOR: WHITE, INCLUDE COORDINATING 15/16" SUSPENSION GRID, COLOR: WHITE SECTION 09 65 00 -RESILIENT FLOORING LUXURY VINYL FLOORING (LVT) LVT-1MANNINGTON, LUXURY VINYL TILE WITH MICRO BEVEL EDGES, COLLECTION: SELECT PLANK, SIZE: 5" x 48", COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE, INSTALLATION: 1/3STAGGERED RUNNING BOND, DIRECTION AS INDICATED ON PLANS (OFFICE E303) LVT-2MANNINGTON, LUXURY VINYL TILE WITH MICRO BEVEL EDGES, COLLECTION: SELECT PLANK, SIZE: 5" x 48", COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE, INSTALLATION: 1/3STAGGERED RUNNING BOND, DIRECTION AS INDICATED ON PLANS (OFFICE E321) SHEET VINYL (SV) SV-1MANNINGTON, BIOSPEC MD, THICKNESS: .080", COLOR: OYSTER WHITE 15201 (LABS) TRANSITION STRIP (TS) TS-1TARKETT, WHEELED TRAFFIC TRANSITION, CTA-XX-JL, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE (LVT TO EXISTING RESILIENT SHEET) TS-2TARKETT, WHEELED TRAFFIC TRANSITION, CTA-XX-JL, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE (LVT TO EXISTING RESILIENT SHEET) SECTION 09 65 13 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES RUBBER BASE (RB) RB-1JOHNSONITE, RUBBER BASE, 4" H, COVE TOE BASE, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE RB-2JOHNSONITE, RUBBER BASE, 4" H, COVE TOE BASE, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE RB-3JOHNSONITE, RUBBER BASE, 4" H, COVE TOE BASE, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE SECTION 09 67 23 -RESINOUS FLOORING RES-1 EPOXY RESINOUS FLOORING SYSTEM: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, TRAFFICOTE 105 W/ GP3741 NOVOLAC EPOXY ACID RESISTANT TOP COAT, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE (ACID WASH E334A) SECTION 09 91 23 -INTERIOR PAINTING PAINT (PT) -ALL DOORS, FRAMES AND TRIM –SEMI-GLOSS -CEILINGS –FLAT -ALL PAINTED VERTICAL SURFACES (WALLS, SOFFITS, COLUMNS, ETC) TO BE AN EGGSHELL FINISH. -AT EXPOSED CEILING USE DRYFALL PAINT. PT-1BENJAMIN MOORE, COLOR: LINEN WHITE 912, FINISH: INTERIOR SATIN (GENERAL) PT-2BENJAMIN MOORE, COLOR: LINEN WHITE, FINISH: SEMI-GLOSS (DOOR & FRAMES, WHERE INDICATED TO BE SPLIT FINISH USE AT DOORS AND FRAME ROOM SIDE) PT-3BENJAMIN MOORE, COLOR: MATCH EXISTING, FINISH: SEMI-GLOSS (DOOR & FRAMES, CORRIDOR SIDE) SECTION 10 14 00 -SIGNS PANEL SIGNAGE INTEGRAL ACRYLIC SHEET COLOR:AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE RAISED TEXT AND TYPEFACE COLOR:AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE SECTION 12 24 13 –ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WINDOW TREATMENTS (WT) WT-1DRAPER INC. -STYLE: 3G MERMET COMPANY M-SCREEN #8503 -FLEX SHADE MESH SHADE WITH FASCIA, MANUALLY CLUTCH CONTROLLED, 3% OPENNESS, SHADE COLOR: 002020 WHITE/LINEN, HARDWARE COLOR: IVORY (EXTERIOR WINDOWS) SECTION 12 35 51 -LABORATORY CASEWORK METAL CASEWORK MOTT MANUFACTURING, SCIENCE LABORATORY FURNITURE, COLOR: WHITE. WOOD CASEWORK MOTT MANUFACTURING, SCIENCE LABORATORY FURNITURE, COLOR: AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL LINE. SECTION 12 36 53 -LABORATORY WORK SURFACES EPOXY COUNTERTOP (EC) EC-1 DURCON, EPOXY RESIN WORKS, COLOR: BLACK 1. WT-1 AT EXTERIOR WINDOWS 2.PAINT EXISTING CORRIDOR DOOR AND FRAME PT-2 AND PT-3 AS INDICATED ON THE FINISH LEGEND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE REMARKS FULL LVT TILE, EDGE TO BE CENTERED UNDER DOOR LVT-2 EXIST. RESILIENT SHEET TS-2 PLANK ORIENTATION OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 NOTE: PLANK SIZE NOT TO SCALE, FOR DIRECTION ONLY. SOIL ROOM E318 VEST E334B OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A EXIST RESILIENT SHEET SV-2 EXIST RESILIENT SHEET SV-2 THRESHOLD MARBLE THRESHOLD SV-2 RES -1 RES-1 TO CONTINUE UNDERNEATH CASEWORK LOCATIONS These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:44 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Finish Plans & Schedule CWJ CRE A-602 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBERROOM NAME FLOORBASEWALL CEILING FINISHREMARKS ROOM NUMBER MATERIAL/ FINISHMATERIAL/ FINISH NORTHSOUTHEASTWEST MATERIALFINISHMATERIALFINISHMAT ERIALFINISHMATERIALFINISH LEVEL 3 E303FACULTY OFFICELVT-1RB-1ETR-CMUPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ACT-11, 2E303 E304LABSV-1RB-2ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ACT-12E304 E304BDARK ROOMSV-1RB-2ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ACT-1E304B E305LABSV-1RB-2ETR-CMUPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ACT-11, 2E305 E318SOIL ROOMSV-1RB-2GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1ETR-GW BPT-1ACT-12E318 E321OFFICELVT-2RB-3ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-CMUPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-ACT1, 2E321 E323COMPUTATIONAL LABLVT-2RB-3ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-CMUPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1ETR-ACT1, 2E323 E334OPEN LABSV-1RB-2GWB/ETR-GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWB/ETR-GWBPT-1ACT-12E334 E334AACID WASHRES-1RES-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1ETR-GWBPT-1GWB, PT-1E334A E334BVESTSV-1RB-2GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1GWBPT-1ACT-1E3 34B 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Finish Plan -E303-E305 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Partial Third Floor Finish Plan -E318-E334 N WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE SEE ELEVATIONS REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL SECTION AIRFOIL 2' - 6" +/- OVERALL +/- 1' - 1 1/4" LIGHT ENCLOSURE FRONT ELEVATION RECEPTACLE COMBO SWITCH 5' - 0" WATER 3" x 6" CUPSINK SAFETY MONITOR/ ALARM 5' - 0" 2' - 6" 5/8" 5"5" 2 1/4" 3 3/4" 2 1/2" DIA HOLE, TYP 2 PLACES 1' - 4" 2 7/16" 1 1/2" DIA HOLE, TYP 2 PLACES R0.56 +/-0.12 AT TOP SURFACE, TYP 4 CORNERS CUP SINK, COORDINATE DIMENSION TO AVOID FRAME BELOW +/- 7" +/- 1' - 1 1/4" 3/8" TYP PLAN COMPRESSED AIR These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:44 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Lab Equipment and Fume Hood Schedule CWJ CRE A-603 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 LAB EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - E303-E305 LETTERQTYEQUIPMENT NAMEMANUFACTURERMODEL NO.LOCATION DIMENSIONSELECTRICALHOUSE LABORATORY PLUMBING SYSTEMS CYLINDER GASES OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HEAT GENERATION (BTUH) EXHAUST (CFM) OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDCOMMENTS HEIGHT (IN) WIDTH (IN) DEPTH (IN) WEIGHT (LBS) NORMAL VOLTAGE (VAC)PHASEHzAMPSHPkVAWATTSGROUND EMERGENCY POWER PLUG TYPEDCWDHWPCW LAB DRAIN LAB VENTRO/DI GAS PROPANEVAC CA 85 PSI CA LP TEMP (*F)HUMIDITY % VIBRATION SENSITIVE A1STEREOMICROSCOPELEICAS7EBENCH18 1/48 5/810 7/82512060-----------XX B1STEREOMICROSCOPELEICAM165 CBENCH21 1/213 3/817 1/412060-----------XX C1FREEZERFISHER SCIENTIFIC20LFEEVWAFLOOR73 1/83432 1/8200120605.3YNEMA 5-15P -----------YXX D1REFRIGERATORFISHER SCIENTIFIC20LREEVWAFLOOR73 1/83432 1/828312060YNEMA 5-15P -----------YXX E1MUFFLE FURNACETHERMO FISHERF6018BENCH2119 1/820 1/81342086011.22325-----------XXHEATS 100*C to 1200*C F1DRYING OVENTHERMO FISHER51028115BENCH28 1/420 7/822 1/41241206014.41730NEMA 6-20 -----------XX G1DOC-TN ANALYZERSHIMADZUTOC-LBENCH18 7/813 3/82677.212060. 0.6Y, < 100 OHMS AC100 -120V --------ULTRA-PURE AIR 50-95YXXDRAIN TANK LOCATED BELOW COUNTER H1GAS CHROMATOGRAPH SHIMADZUGC-2014BENCH27152411012060Y, < 100 OHMS 5-20R-------HE, P5, H2 & ZERO-GRADE AIR 64-8240-70Y4760XXOWN DEDICATED 20-AMP CIRCUIT, CHROMATOGRAPHIC GRADE SS TUBING FOR GAS LINES, "ZERO AIR" NOTED AS "ULTRA-PURE AIR" ON PLANS J1MARBLE SLAB BALANCE TABLE FLOOR313524725------------------------XX K1DOC-TN ANALYZERSHIMADZUASI-LBENCH1 9 5/814 5/821 1/430.9SEE "G"--XX L1DOC-TN ANALYZERSHIMADZUTNM-LON "G"5 7/8 7/8 13 3/82613.2SEE "G"-ULTRA-PURE AIR XX M1GAS CHROMATOGRAPH SHIMADZUAOC-6000ON "H"26602033120605-15R-XXCAN SHARE A 15-AMP CIRCUIT W/ COMPUTER N1GROWTH CHAMBERPERCIVALI-36VLFLOOR77.233.533.6120160121/4YYNEMA 5-15P ------------XX LABORATORY FUME HOOD SCHEDULE KEYNOTEPURPOSEMODELEXHAUST TYPEDEPTHWIDTHSASH CONFIGURATIONLINER MATERIALCUPSINKSERVICE 1SERVICE 2SERVICE 3FURRING PANELADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS H-1ADAMOTT 7341050VAV32.7"5'-0"COMBINATIONFRPYCWCADUPLEX RECEPTACLE (EACH SIDE)-VAC PROVIDED BY VAC PUMP H-2ADAMOTT 7341050VAV32.7"5'-0"COMBINATIONFRPYCWCADUPLEX RECEPTACLE (EACH SIDE)-VAC PROVIDED BY VAC PUMP 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 Accessible Fume Hood Details NOTE: SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR CONTROLS, INCLUDING AIRFLOW MONITOR AND SASH POSITION INDICATOR(S) SHOWN AS: SHOWN AS: LAB EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - E318-E334 LETTERQTYEQUIPMENT NAMEMANUFACTURERMODEL NO.LOCATION DIMENSIONSELECTRICALHOUSE LABORATORY PLUMBING SYSTEMS CYLINDER GASES OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HEAT GENERATION (BTUH) EXHAUST (CFM) OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDCOMMENTS HEIGHT (IN) WIDTH (IN) DEPTH (IN) WEIGHT (LBS) NORMAL VOLTAGE (VAC)PHASEHzAMPSHPkVAWATTSGROUND EMERGENCY POWERPLUG TYPEDCWDHWPCW LAB DRAIN LAB VENTRO/DI GAS PROPANEVAC CA 85 PSI CA LP TEMP (*F)HUMIDITY % VIBRATION SENSITIVE A'2BALANCEVWR10204-968BAL. TABLE OPEN LAB 148 1/51313120603-PRONG GROUNDED XX B'1-20 FREEZERGEFUF21DLRWWFLOOR76 1/232.8831 3/821512060Y3-PRONG GROUNDED XX C'1REFRIGERATORWHIRLPOOLWRR56X18FWFLOOR6730.2529 1/812060Y3-PRONG GROUNDED XX D'1GAS CHROMATOGRAPH SHIMADZUGC-2014BENCH27.21627106120603-PRONG GROUNDED N2, H2, P5, ZERO AIR XX"ZERO AIR" NOTED AS "ULTRA-PURE AIR" ON PLANS E'1CRDS GAS CONCENTRATION ANALYZER PICARROG2508BENCH71717.55012060<375 AT START UP 3-PRONG GROUNDED CH4, CO2, N2O, ULTRA-PURE AIR XX F'1CENTRIFUGEVWRBENCHTOP GENERALBENCH13.615.5520.5120603-PRONG GROUNDED XX G'1SHAKERVWR89032-108BENCH728.526.5200120603-PRONG GROUNDED XX H'1GRINDER/ PULVERIZER SPEX8530 SHATTERBOXFLOOR401919207120603-PRONG GROUNDED XXCAPTURE HOOD TBD J'2DRYING OVENTHERMO FISHER51028115BENCH28 1/420 7/822 1/41241206014.4-1730NEMA 6-20--------------XXCAPTURE HOOD TBD K'1GAS CHROMATOGRAPH AUTOSAMPLER SHIMADZUHS-20BENCH172221.573120603-PRONG GROUNDED N2XX SHOWN AS: SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1. PRODUCT: MILDEW RESISTANT SILICONE SEALANT A. MANUFACTURER: DOW CORNING B. PRODUCT: 786 MILDEW RESISTANT C. COLOR: TO BE SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE SPECIFICATIONS: SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1. GYPSUM BOARD, TYPE X: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. LONG EDGES:TAPERED. 2. SOUND-ATTENUATION BLANKETS: ASTM C665, TYPE I (BLANKETS WITHOUT MEMBRANE FACING) PRODUCED BY COMBINING THERMOSETTING RESINS WITH MINERAL FIBERS MANUFACTURED FROM GLASS, SLAG WOOL, OR ROCK WOOL. 1. FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED ASSEMBLIES: COMPLY WITH MINERAL-FIBER REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY. 3. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NONSAG, PAINTABLE, NONSTAINING LATEX SEALANT COMPLYING WITH ASTM C834. PRODUCT EFFECTIVELY REDUCES AIRBORNE SOUND TRANSMISSION THROUGH PERIMETER JOINTS AND OPENINGS IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AS DEMONSTRATED BY TESTING REPRESENTATIVE ASSEMBLIES ACCORDING TO ASTM E90. 4. GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVELS: FINISH PANELS TO LEVELS INDICATED BELOW AND ACCORDING TO ASTM C840: 1. LEVEL 1: CEILING PLENUM AREAS, CONCEALED AREAS, AND WHERE INDICATED. 2. LEVEL 4:AT PANEL SURFACES THAT WILL BE EXPOSED TO VIEW UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1.STUDS AND RUNNERS: ASTM C 645 A. MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: 0.027" 1. EQUIVALENT COATINGS AND METAL THICKNESS (DIMPLED STEEL) STUDS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. B. DEPTH: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS C. PROTECTIVE COATING: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, HOT-DIP GALVANIZED SECTION 02 70 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.SUMMARY A. DEMOLISH AND REMOVE SELECTED PORTIONS OF BUILDING. B. DISCONNECT AND CAP OR SEAL UTILITIES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. C. MAINTAIN AND PROTECT ALL EXISTING UTILITY SERVICES. 2. DEMOLITION A. INSTALL TEMPORARY DUSTPROOF PARTITIONS AND ENCLOSURES. B. PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED SURFACES CAUSED BY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. C. DEMOLISHED MATERIALS BECOME CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS: A. BURNING: NOT PERMITTED. B. DISPOSAL: OFF OWNER'S PROPERTY. 4. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR UTILITY SHUTDOWNS 5. OCCUPANCY A. AREAS ADJACENT TO THE AREAS OF DEMOLITION MAY BE OCCUPIED. WORK IS TO BE CONDUCTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MINIMIZE THE DISRUPTION OF NORMAL OPERATIONS. 6. CONDITIONS OF STRUCTURES A. THE OWNER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTUAL CONDITIONS OF ITEMS OR STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED. CONDITIONS EXISTING AT THE TIME OF COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT WILL BE MAINTAINED BY THE OWNER INSOFAR AS IS PRACTICAL. HOWEVER, VARIATIONS WITHIN THE STRUCTURE MAY OCCUR BY THE OWNER'S REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OPERATIONS PRIOR TO START OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK. 7. DAMAGES A. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO PROMPTLY REPAIR ALL DAMAGES CAUSED TO ADJACENT FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT BY DEMOLITION WORK AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. PRODUCT: WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING & BACKING PANELS A. LUMBER STANDARDS AND GRADE STAMPS: PS 20, AMERICAN SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARD AND INSPECTION AGENCY GRADE STAMPS. B. FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT: AWPA C20 FOR LUMBER AND AWPA C27 FOR PLYWOOD; NONCORROSIVE TYPE C. DIMENSION LUMBER: HEM-FIR, SELECT STRUCTURAL NO. 2 SECTION 08 12 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1. HEAVY DUTY INTERIOR FRAMES PER SDI 250.8 A. PHYSICAL PERFORMANCE: LEVEL B PER SDI A250.4 B. MATERIALS: UNCOATED STEEL SHEET, MINIMUM 0.053 INCH C. CONSTRUCTION: FULLY-WELDED D. EXPOSED FINISH: PRIME SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. CORE: a. NON-RATED: PARTICLEBOARD CORE b. FIRE-RATED: MINERAL CORE, POSITIVE PRESSURE A B. FACE: MDO, FACTORY PRIMED C. GRADE: WDMA EXTRA HEAVY DUTY SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1. GLASS PRODUCTS A. FULLY TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS: ASTM C 1048, KIND FT (FULLY TEMPERED), CONDITION A (UNCOATED) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, TYPE 1, CLASS 1 (CLEAR), QUALITY Q3. 2. GLASS SCHEDULE: A. MONOLITHIC-GLASS (TYPE S-1) a. CLEAR FULLY TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS b. THICKNESS: 6.0 MM (0.25 INCH) c. PROVIDE SAFETY LABELING, 16 CFR 1201, CATEGORY II SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 1. ACCESS DOORS FOR WALLS & CEILINGS A. FRAMES: 16 GA (.0598 INCH) SHEET STEEL WITH FLANGE SUITABLE FOR ADJACENT MATERIAL B. DOORS: 14 GA (.0625 INCH) SHEET STEEL C. DOOR TYPE: FLUSH PANEL D. FIRE RATING: NFPA 80 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1. SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT DATA SHEETS INCLUDING INSTALLATION DETAILS, MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONS, DIMENSIONS OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS AND PROFILES, OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS AND FINISHES. B. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE: PREPARED BY OR UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF SUPPLIER, DETAILING FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY OF DOOR HARDWARE, AS WELL AS PROCEDURES AND DIAGRAMS. COORDINATE THE FINAL DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE WITH DOORS, FRAMES, AND RELATED WORK TO ENSURE PROPER SIZE, THICKNESS, HAND, FUNCTION, AND FINISH OF DOOR HARDWARE. 2. WARRANTY: A. SPECIAL WARRANTY PERIODS:1.TEN YEARS FOR MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHES.2.FIVE YEARS FOR EXIT HARDWARE.3.TEN YEARS FOR MANUAL SURFACE DOOR CLOSERS.4.TWO YEARS FOR ELECTROMECHANICAL DOOR HARDWARE 3. MAINTENANCE SERVICE: A. CONTINUING SERVICE: BEGINNING AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, AND RUNNING CONCURRENT WITH THE SPECIFIED WARRANTY PERIOD, PROVIDE CONTINUOUS (6) MONTHS FULL MAINTENANCE INCLUDING REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF WORN OR DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS, LUBRICATION, CLEANING, AND ADJUSTING AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER DOOR OPENING OPERATION. PROVIDE PARTS AND SUPPLIES AS USED IN THE MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF ORIGINAL PRODUCTS. 4. PRODUCTS: PROVIDE PRODUCTS INDICATED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE. NO SUBSTITUTIONS PERMITTED. SECTION 08 88 13 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 1. GLASS PRODUCTS A. LAMINATED CERAMIC GLAZING: LAMINATED GLASS MADE FROM TWO PLIES OF CLEAR, CERAMIC GLASS 2. GLASS SCHEDULE: A. LAMINATED CERAMIC GLAZING (TYPE S-2) a. 45 MINUTE FIRE-PROTECTION RATED LAMINATED CERAMIC GLASS b. THICKNESS: 8.0 MM c. PROVIDE SAFETY LABELING, 16 CFR 1201, CATEGORY II d. PRODUCTS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS; • SAFTI FIRST RATED GLAZING SOLUTIONS; PRYAN PLATINUM L • TECHNICAL GLASS PRODUCTS; FIRELITE PLUS • VETROTECH SAINT-GOBAIN; SGG KERALITE FR-L SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNS 1. SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE OF PRODUCT. B. SHOP DRAWINGS: FOR PANEL SIGNS. C. SAMPLES FOR INITIAL SELECTION: FOR EACH TYPE OF SIGN ASSEMBLY, EXPOSED COMPONENT, AND EXPOSED FINISH. a. INCLUDE REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLES OF AVAILABLE TYPESTYLES AND GRAPHIC SYMBOLS. D. SAMPLES FOR VERIFICATION: FULL-SIZE SAMPLE SHOWING ALL COMPONENTS AND WITH THE REQUIRED FINISH(ES) 2. PANEL SIGNS A. PANEL SIGN: SIGN WITH SMOOTH, UNIFORM SURFACES; WITH MESSAGE AND CHARACTERS HAVING UNIFORM FACES, SHARP CORNERS, AND PRECISELY FORMED LINES AND PROFILES; AND AS FOLLOWS: B. SOLID-SHEET SIGN:ACRYLIC SHEET WITH FINISH SPECIFIED IN "SURFACE FINISH AND APPLIED GRAPHICS" SUBPARAGRAPH AND AS FOLLOWS: a. THICKNESS:MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD FOR SIZE OF SIGN. b. SURFACE-APPLIED, RAISED GRAPHICS: APPLIED POLYMER CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE. c. SIGN-PANEL PERIMETER: FINISH EDGES SMOOTH. d. CORNER CONDITION IN ELEVATION:SQUARE. e. MOUNTING:SURFACE MOUNTED TO WALL WITH ADHESIVE AND TWOFACE TAPE. f. SURFACE FINISH AND APPLIED GRAPHICS: • INTEGRAL ACRYLIC SHEET COLOR:AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF INDUSTRY COLORS. • TEXT AND TYPEFACE:ACCESSIBLE RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE AND VARIABLE CONTENT AS SCHEDULED.FINISH RAISED CHARACTERS TO CONTRAST WITH BACKGROUND COLOR, AND FINISH BRAILLE TO MATCH BACKGROUND COLOR. AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF INDUSTRY COLORS. C. MATERIALS a. ACRYLIC SHEET: ASTM D 4802, CATEGORY AS STANDARD WITH MANUFACTURER FOR EACH SIGN, TYPE UVF (UV FILTERING). b. TWO-FACE TAPE: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD HIGH-BOND, FOAM-CORE TAPE, 0.045 INCH THICK, WITH ADHESIVE ON BOTH SIDES. D. INSTALLATION a. INSTALL SIGNS LEVEL, PLUMB, TRUE TO LINE, AND AT LOCATIONS AND HEIGHTS INDICATED, WITH SIGN SURFACES FREE OF DISTORTION AND OTHER DEFECTS IN APPEARANCE. E. SCHEDULE a. PROVIDE (1) SIGN FOR EACH DOOR NUMBERINDICATED ON PLANS. SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 1. MANUAL, CHAIN-AND-CLUTCH OPERATING MECHANISM A. ROLLER MOUNTING CONFIGURATION: SINGLE ROLLER B. INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES: FRONT FASCIA 2. SHADEBAND MATERIALS: COMPLYING W/ NFPA 701 A. LIGHT-FILTERING FABRIC: WOVEN POLYESTER AND PVC-COATED POLYESTER 3. PRODUCT SAFETY STANDARD: WCMA A100.1 1. PRODUCTS:AS INDICATED IN FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. INSTALLATION:INSTALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ACCORDING TO ASTM C636/C636M AND MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 3. CLEANING: CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES OF ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, INCLUDING TRIM, EDGE MOLDINGS, AND SUSPENSION-SYSTEM MEMBERS. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND TOUCHUP OF MINOR FINISH DAMAGE.REMOVE AND REPLACE CEILING COMPONENTS THAT CANNOT BE SUCCESSFULLY CLEANED AND REPAIRED TO PERMANENTLY ELIMINATE EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE. 1. PRODUCTS:AS INDICATED IN FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ADHESIVES: WATER-RESISTANT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY RESILIENTPRODUCT MANUFACTURER FOR RESILIENT PRODUCTS AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS INDICATED. 3. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING RESILIENT BASE. B. APPLY RESILIENT BASE TO WALLS, COLUMNS, PILASTERS, CASEWORK AND CABINETS IN TOE SPACES, AND OTHER PERMANENT FIXTURES IN ROOMS AND AREAS WHERE BASE IS REQUIRED. C. INSTALL RESILIENT BASE IN LENGTHS AS LONG AS PRACTICAL WITHOUT GAPS AT SEAMS AND WITH TOPS OF ADJACENT PIECES ALIGNED. D. TIGHTLY ADHERE RESILIENT BASE TO SUBSTRATE THROUGHOUT LENGTH OF EACH PIECE, WITH BASE IN CONTINUOUS CONTACT WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SUBSTRATES. E. ON MASONRY SURFACES OR OTHER SIMILAR IRREGULAR SUBSTRATES, FILL VOIDS ALONG TOP EDGE OF RESILIENT BASE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED ADHESIVE FILLER MATERIAL. F. JOB-FORMED CORNERS:USE STRAIGHT PIECES OF MAXIMUM LENGTHS POSSIBLE AND FORM WITH RETURNS NOT LESS THAN 3 INCHES IN LENGTH.MITER OR COPE CORNERS TO MINIMIZE OPEN JOINTS. 4. RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING RESILIENT ACCESSORIES. B. RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES: BUTT TO ADJACENT MATERIALS AND TIGHTLY ADHERE TO SUBSTRATES THROUGHOUT LENGTH OF EACH PIECE. INSTALL REDUCER STRIPS AT EDGES OF FLOOR COVERING THAT WOULD OTHERWISE BE EXPOSED. 5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND PROTECTING RESILIENT PRODUCTS. B. REMOVE ADHESIVE AND OTHER BLEMISHES FROM SURFACES OPERATIONS IMMEDIATELY AFTER COMPLETING RESILIENT-PRODUCT INSTALLATION. C. PROTECT RESILIENT PRODUCTS FROM MARS, MARKS, INDENTATIONS, AND OTHER DAMAGE FROM CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AND PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES DURING REMAINDER OF CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. D. COVER RESILIENT PRODUCTS SUBJECT TO WEAR AND FOOT TRAFFIC UNTIL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 1. PRODUCTS:AS INDICATED IN FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. TROWELABLE LEVELING AND PATCHING COMPOUNDS: LATEX-MODIFIED, PORTLAND-CEMENT-BASED OR BLENDED HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED FORMULATION PROVIDED OR APPROVED BY FLOOR TILE MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATIONS INDICATED. B. ADHESIVES: WATER-RESISTANT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY FLOOR TILE AND ADHESIVE MANUFACTURERS TO SUIT FLOOR TILE AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS INDICATED. 3. INSTALLATION: A. PREPARE SUBSTRATES ACCORDING TO FLOOR TILE MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS TO ENSURE ADHESION OF RESILIENT PRODUCTS. B. CONCRETE SUBSTRATES: PREPARE ACCORDING TO ASTM F710. C. FILL CRACKS, HOLES, AND DEPRESSIONS IN SUBSTRATES WITH TROWELABLE LEVELING AND PATCHING COMPOUND; REMOVE BUMPS AND RIDGES TO PRODUCE A UNIFORM AND SMOOTH SUBSTRATE. D. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING FLOOR TILE. E. COVER FLOOR SUBJECT TO WEAR AND FOOT TRAFFIC TILE UNTIL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. FOR PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALLS: PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS WITH RATINGS DETERMINED PER ASTME814 OR UL1479, BASED ON TESTING AT A POSITIVE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL OF 0.01-INCH WG. 1. F-RATING: NOT LESS THAN THE FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF CONSTRUCTIONS PENETRATED. B. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE COMPONENTS FOR EACH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM THAT ARE NEEDED TO INSTALL FILL MATERIALS AND TO MAINTAIN RATINGS REQUIRED. USE ONLY THOSE COMPONENTS SPECIFIED BY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED BY QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY FOR CONDITIONS INDICATED. 1. PERMANENT FORMING/DAMMING/BACKING MATERIALS. 2. SUBSTRATE PRIMERS. 3. COLLARS. 4. STEEL SLEEVES. C. INSTALL PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND PUBLISHED DRAWINGS FOR PRODUCTS AND APPLICATIONS. D. INSTALL FILL MATERIALS BY PROVEN TECHNIQUES TO PRODUCE THE FOLLOWING RESULTS: 1. FILL VOIDS AND CAVITIES FORMED BY OPENINGS, FORMING MATERIALS, ACCESSORIES AND PENETRATING ITEMS TO ACHIEVE REQUIRED FIRERESISTANCE RATINGS. 2. APPLY MATERIALS SO THEY CONTACT AND ADHERE TO SUBSTRATES FORMED BY OPENINGS AND PENETRATING ITEMS. 3. FOR FILL MATERIALS THAT WILL REMAIN EXPOSED AFTER COMPLETING THE WORK, FINISH TO PRODUCE SMOOTH, UNIFORM SURFACES THAT ARE FLUSH WITH ADJOINING FINISHES. SECTION 12 36 53 LABORATORY WORK SURFACES 1. PRODUCT: EPOXY RESIN WORK SURFACE A. BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER: DURCON, INC 2. MATERIAL: SOLID EPOXY RESIN A. SHEETS CAST FROM MODIFIED EPOXY RESIN AND NON-ASBESTOS INERT FILLER B. SHEET MONOLITHIC THROUGHOUT WITHOUT SURFACE COATING APPLICATION 3. COLOR: BLACK ONYX 4. FABRICATION: EPOXY RESIN WORK SURFACE A. THICKNESS: 1" B. EDGE TREATMENT: 1/8" BEVEL W/ DRIP GROOVE C. CORNER TREATMENT: EXPOSED CORNERS SHALL BE EASED SLIGHTLY FOR SAFETY D. BACK AND END SPLASHES: 1. SUPPLIED LOOSE FOR FIELD INSTALLATION 2. SAME MATERIAL AND THICKNESS AS WORK SURFACE 3. 4" HIGH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 4. TOP-MOUNTED END SPLASH WHERE WORK SURFACES ABUT ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION AND AT LOCATIONS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS E. JOINTS: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, MAXIMUM 1/8" BONDED WITH EPOXY GROUT F. SINK CUTOUTS: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, ROUTED FOR DROP-IN SINK G. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: a. SQUARE: PLUS OR MINUS 1/64" FOR EACH 12" OF LENGTH b. LOCATION OF CUTOUTS AND DRILLED OPENINGS: PLUS OR MINUS 1/8" OF DESIGN DIMENSION c. SIZE OF CUTOUTS OR DRILLED OPENINGS: PLUS 1/8" OR MUNS 0" 5. FABRICATION: EPOXY RESIN SINK A. MOLD SINKS FROM THERMOSETTING EPOXY RESIN B. MOLD INTERIOR CORNERS TO RADIUS. SLOPE SINK BASE TO DRAIN OUTLET. C. PROVIDE 1-1/2" OUTLET WITH OPEN ENDED STANDPIPE; STANDPIPE OVERFLOW 2" SHORTER THAN DEPTH OF SINK D. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, FABRICATE SINKS OF DROP-IN SUPPORT BY UPPER FLANGE FROM WORK SURFACE. E. COLOR: TO MATCH ADJACENT WORK SURFACES. F. SINK TYPES: a. SK-A: D-25 (18" X 15" X 7.9") b. SK-B: A-25 (18" X 15" X 5") c. SK-C: D-05 (14" X 10" X 6.3") d. SK-D: D-25 (18" X 15" X 7.9") e. SK-E: D-32 (18" X 15" X 15.13") f. SK-F: A-25 (18" X 15" X 5") g. SK-G: D-58 (25" X 15" X 17.75") 6. FABRICATION: EPOXY RESIN CUPSINKS A. BASIS OF DESIGN: TS05 B. SHAPE: OVAL C. COLOR: BLACK SECTION 11 53 13 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 1. PRODUCT: FUME HOOD A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & PRODUCTS (PROVIDE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING, NO SUBSTITUTIONS): a. BOD: MOTT DEEP FULLY ACCESSIBLE -COMBINATION SASH, MOTT 5' SAFEGUARD BENCH LABORATORY HOOD, 32.7" EXTERIOR, MODEL # 7341050 b. LABCONCO PROTECTOR XL LABORATORY HOOD c. BEDCOLAB FULLY ACCESSIBLE FUME HOOD MODEL VBH B. TYPE: FULLY ACCESSIBLE RESTRICTED BY-PASS C. CONTAINMENT: AVERAGE FACE VELOCITY 100 FPM +/-10% WITH SASHES AT 18-ICHES OPEN WHEN TESTED ACCORDING TO ASHRAE 110 AT A RELEASE RATE OF 4.0 L/MIN D. MATERIALS: a. FRP SURROUND: ALL STEEL COMPONENTS TO BE POWDER COATED (GLACIER WHITE) b. WORKSURFACE: BLACK EPOXY #9521520 E. SASH: VERTICAL TRAVEL OR COMBINATION (MOTT ONLY); TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS; COUNTER WEIGHTED AND BALANCED; PULLEY SYSTEM; STAINLESS STEEL SASH STOPS; SASH ALARM BY BACS CONTRACTOR F. ELECTRICAL FIXTURES (PROVIDE ALL WIRING WITHIN HOOD) a. FLUORESCENT LIGHT AND TUBES WITH SWITCH b. DUPLEX, 115 VAC/60Hz/20A/GFCI G. SERVICE FIXTURES (ADA COMPLIANT LEVER HANDLE REMOTE CONTROL VALVES); PROVIDE ALL FIXTURES AND PIPING ON AND WITHIN HOOD: a. COLD WATER (LEFT SIDE; REFER TO FUME HOOD SCHEDULE) b. COMPRESSED AIR W/ 1/4" QUICK CONNECT (LEFT SIDE, REFER TO FUME HOOD SCHEDULE) H. SINK: CUP SINK, REFER TO SECTION 12 36 53 I. OTHER FEATURES: AERODYNAMIC AIRFOIL BYPASS WITH SPILL THROUGH J. BASE/STAND: 5 FT ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC LIFT BASE STAND; 115 VAC / 60 HZ a. BOD: LABCONCO #3780106 SECTION 12 35 51 LABORATORY CASEWORK 1. PRODUCT: CABINETS A. MANUFACTURER: MOTT MANUFACTURING B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: COMPLY WITH SEFA 8 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES C. PRODUCT: STEEL CABINETS a. CABINETS: • CABINET SIDES: 18 GA • TOP RAILS: 14 GA • DOOR FRONTS: 18GA • RUBBER BUMPERS/SILENCERS • ADJUSTABLE SHELVES: 20GA • PULLS: 4" STAINLESS STEEL WIRE PULL • HINGES: STAINLESS STEEL OVERLAY HINGES • STEEL FINISH: POWDER COATED b. BASE CABINET • REMOVABLE BACK: 20 GA • REAR RAIL: 16 GA • DRAWER RUNNER SUPPORT: 14 GA GALVANIZED • DRAWER LINER: 20 GA • ROLLER CATCHES • 3/8" THREADED LEVELER PLATE: 11 GA • DRAWER WITH INTEGRAL SIDES & BACK: 18 GA OR 20 GA • ENCLOSED TOE SPACE: 18 GA c. UPPER CABINET • GLAZED DOORS: HOLLOW-METAL STILES AND RAILS. GLASS HELD IN RESILIENT CHANNELS OR GASKET MATERIAL D. PRODUCT: WOOD CABINETS a. CABINETS: • DESIGN: REVEAL OVERLAY WITH SQUARE EDGES 1. PROVIDE 1/8-INCH REVEALS BETWEEN DOORS AND DRAWERS THAT ARE ADJACENT • WOOD SPECIES: AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT 1. WOOD STAIN COLORS AND FINISHES: AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE. • CUT: QUARTER SLICED/SAWN • VENEER MATCHING: PROVIDE VENEERS FOR EACH CABINET FROM A SINGLE FLITCH, SLIP AND RUNNING MATCHED. 1. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS MATCHING OF ADJACENT DRAWER FRONTS WITHIN EACH CABINET • GRAIN DIRECTION: 1. DOORS: VERTICAL WITH CONTINUOUS VERTICAL MATCHING 2. DRAWER FRONTS: VERTICAL WITH CONTINUOUS VERTICAL MATCHING 3. FACE FRAME MEMBERS: LENGTHWISE 4. END PANELS: VERTICAL 5. BOTTOMS AND TOPS OF UNITS: SIDE TO SIDE 6. APRONS: HORIZONTAL • MATERIALS: 1. EXPOSED: HARDWOOD PLYWOOD, VENEER CORE WITH FACE VENEER OF SPECIES INDICATED. GRADE A EXPOSED FACES, AT LEAST 1/50 IN THICK AND GRADE J CROSSBANDS. PROVIDE BACKS OF SAME SPECIES AS FACES. SOLID WOOD, CLEAR HARDWOOD LUMBER OF SPECIES INDICATED. 2. SEMIEXPOSED: GRADE B SEMIEXPOSED FACES AND GRADE J CROSSBANDS OF SAME SPECIES AS EXPOSED PLYWOOD. PROVIDE BACKS OF SAME SPECIES AS FACES. SOLID WOOD, SOUND HARDWOOD LUMBER, SELECTED TO ELIMINATE APPEARANCE OF DEFECT, OF SAME SPECIES AS EXPOSED SOLID WOOD. 3. CONCEALED: HARDWOOD PLYWOOD. PROVIDE BACKS OF SAME SPECIES AS FACES. SOLID WOOD, WITH NO DEFECTS AFFECTING STRENGTH OR UTILITY • ROLLER CATCHES • RUBBER BUMPERS/SILENCERS • PULLS: 4" STAINLESS STEEL WIRE PULL • BUTT HINGES: STAINLESS STEEL FIVE-KNUCKLE HINGES. PROVIDE 2 PER DOOR E. PRODUCT: REAGENT SHELVING SYSTEM a. FABRICATED FROM COLD-ROLLED, COMMERCIAL STEEL SHEET MATERIAL IN MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD METAL THICKNESS. PROVIDE UPRIGHTS WITH ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. F. PRODUCT: PEG BOARDS a. POLYPROPYLENE, EPOXY OR PHENOLIC-COMPOSITE PEGBOARDS WITH REMOVABLE POLYPROPYLENE PEGS AND STAINLESS-STEEL DRIP TROUGHS WITH DRAIN OUTLET. G. MARBLE SLAB TABLE a. CONSTRUCTED FROM 3" THICK SOLID MARBLE SLABS WITH EASED EDGES. SOLID TOP AND SUPPORTING PANELS WITH STEEL OR IRON CROSS BEAM COATED FOR CORROSION RESISTANCE. b. BASIS OF DESIGN: VWR 12568-004 SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. PRODUCTS: A. GENERAL: a. MATERIALS FOR USE WITHIN EACH PAINT SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH ONE ANOTHER AND SUBSTRATES INDICATED, UNDER CONDITIONS OF SERVICE AND APPLICATION AS DEMONSTRATED BY MANUFACTURER, BASED ON TESTING AND FIELD EXPERIENCE b. FOR EACH COAT IN A PAINT SYSTEM, PRODUCTS SHALL BE RECOMMENDED IN WRITING BY TOPCOAT MANUFACTURERS FOR USE IN PAINT SYSTEM AND ON SUBSTRATE INDICATED. B. INTERIOR PRIMERS: a. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD PRIMER: FACTORY-FORMULATED LATEX-BASED PRIMER FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION • BENJAMIN MOORE; MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX ENAMEL UNDERCOATER & PRIMER SEALER 253; APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. b. INTERIOR FERROUS-METAL PRIMER: FACTORY-FORMULATED QUICK-DRYING RUST-INHIBITIVE ALKYD-BASED METAL PRIMER • BENJAMIN MOORE; MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC ALKYD ENAMEL UNDERBODY AND PRIMER SEALER C245; APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.5 MILS. C. INTERIOR FINISH COATS: a. INTERIOR FLAT ACRYLIC PAINT: FACTORY-FORMULATED FLAT LATEX PAINT FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION • BENJAMIN MOORE: MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX FLAT 275: APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. b. INTERIOR SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL: FACTORY-FORMULATED SEMIGLOSS LATEX ENAMEL FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION: • BENJAMIN MOORE: MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX SEMI-GLOSS ENAMEL 276: APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. 2. SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE OF PRODUCT INCLUDE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS. 3. EXAMINATION: A. EXAMINE SUBSTRATES AND CONDITIONS, WITH APPLICATOR PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR MAXIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. B. GYPSUM BOARD SUBSTRATES: VERIFY THAT FINISHING COMPOUND IS SANDED SMOOTH C. VERIFY SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES, INCLUDING SURFACE CONDITIONS AND COMPATIBILITY, WITH EXISTING FINISHES AND PRIMERS. D. PROCEED WITH COATING APPLICATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED a. APPLICATION OF COATING INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS 4. PREPARATION: A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN "MPI ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING SPECIFICATION MANUAL" APPLICABLE TO SUBSTRATES AND PAINT SYSTEMS INDICATED. B. REMOVE HARDWARE, COVERS, PLATES, AND SIMILAR ITEMS ALREADY IN PLACE THAT ARE REMOVABLE AND RE NOT TO BE PAINTED. IF REMOVAL IS IMPRACTICAL OR IMPOSSIBLE BECAUSE OF SIZE OR WEIGHT OF ITEM, PROVIDE SURFACEAPPLIED PROTECTION BEFORE SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING. a. AFTER COMPLETING PAINTING OPERATIONS, USE WORKERS SKILLED IN THE TRADES INVOLVED TO REINSTALL ITEMS THAT WERE REMOVED. REMOVE SURFACE-APPLIED PROTECTION IF ANY. C. CLEAN SUBSTRATES OF SUBSTANCES THAT COULD IMPAIR BOND OF PAINTS, INCLUDING DUST, DIRT, OIL, GREASE AND INCOMPATIBLE PAINTS AND ENCAPSULANTS. a. REMOVE INCOMPATIBLE PRIMERS AND REPRIME SUBSTRATE WITH COMPATIBLE PRIMERS OR APPLY TIE COAT AS REQUIRED TO PRODUCE PAINT SYSTEMS INDICATED. D. CONCRETE SUBSTRATES: REMOVE RELEASE AGENTS, CURING COMPOUNDS, EFFLORESCENCE AND CHALK. DO NOT PAINT SURFACES IF MOISTURE CONTENT OR ALKALINITY OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXCEEDS THAT PERMITTED IN MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 5. APPLICATION: A. APPLY PAINTS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND TO RECOMMENDATIONS IN "MPI MANUAL" a. USE APPLICATORS AND TECHNIQUES SUITED FOR PAINT AND SUBSTRATE INDICATED. b. PAINT SURFACES BEHIND MOVABLE EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE SAME AS EXPOSED SURFACES c. PAINT FRONT AND BACKSIDES OF ACCESS PANELS, REMOVABLE OR HINGED COVERS, AND SIMILAR HINGED ITEMS TO MATCH EXPOSED SURFACES d. DO NOT PAINT OVER LABELS OF INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCIES OR EQUIPMENT NAME, IDENTIFICATION, PERFORMANCE RATING OR NOMENCLATURE PLATES. B. TINT EACH UNDERCOAT A LIGHTER SHADE TO FACILITATE IDENTIFICATION OF EACH COAT IF MULTIPLE COATS OF SAME MATERIAL ARE TO BE APPLIED. TINT UNDERCOATS TO MATCH COLOR OF TOPCOAT, BUT PROVIDE SUFFICIENT DIFFERENCE IN SHADE OF UNDERCOATS TO DISTINGUISH EACH SEPARATE COAT. C. IF UNDERCOATS OR OTHER CONDITIONS SHOW THROUGH TOPCOAT, APPLY ADDITIONAL COATS UNTIL CURED FILM HAS A UNIFORM PAINT FINISH, COLOR AND APPEARANCE. D. APPLY PAINTS TO PRODUCE SURFACE FILMS WITHOUT CLOUDINESS, SPOTTING, HOLIDAYS, LAPS, BRUSH MARKS, ROLLER TRACKING, RUNS, SAGS, ROPINESS OR OTHER SURFACE IMPERFECTIONS. CUT IN SHARP LINES AND COLOR BREAKS. E. PAINTING FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, HVAC, ELECTRICAL, COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY WORK: a. PAINT THE FOLLOWING WORK WHERE EXPOSED IN OCCUPIED SPACES: • EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING PANELBOARDS • UNINSULATED METAL PIPING • UNINSULATED PLASTIC PIPING • PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS • METAL CONDUIT • PLASTIC CONDUIT • DUCT, EQUIPMENT AND PIPE INSULATION HAVING COTTON OR CANVAS INSULATION COVERING OR OTHER PAINTABLE JACKET MATERIAL • OTHER ITEMS AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT b. PAINT PORTIONS OF INTERNAL SURFACES OF METAL DUCTS, WITHOUT LINER, BEHIND AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS THAT ARE VISIBLE FROM OCCUPIED SPACES. 6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. AT END OF EACH WORKDAY, REMOVE RUBBISH, EMPTY CANS, RAGS AND OTHER DISCARDED MATERIALS FROM PROJECT SITE. B. AFTER COMPLETING PAINTING APPLICATION, CLEAN SPATTERED SURFACES. REMOVE SPATTER PAINTS BY WASHING, SCRAPING OR OTHER METHODS. DO NOT SCRATCH OR DAMAGE ADJACENT FINISHED SURFACES. C. PROTECT WORK OF OTHER TRADES AGAINST DAMAGE FROM PAINT APPLICATION. CORRECT DAMAGE TO WORK OF OTHER TRADES BY CLEANING, REPAIRING, REPLACING AND REFINISHING, AS APPROVED BY ARCHITECT, AND LEAVE IN AN UNDAMAGED CONDITION. D. AT COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES OR OTHER TRADES, TOUCH UP AND RESTORE DAMAGED OR DEFACED PAINTED SURFACES. 7. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. GYPSUM BOARD: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING FINISH SYSTEMS OVER INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES: a. SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL FINISH: TWO FINISH COATS OVER A PRIMER • PRIMER: INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD PRIMER • FINISH COATS: WATERBORNE ACRYLIC EPOXY. B. FERROUS METAL: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING FINISH SYSTEMS OVER FERROUS METAL: a. SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC-ENAMEL FINISH: TWO FINISH COATS OVER A PRIMER • PRIMER: INTERIOR FERROUS-METAL PRIMER FINISH COATS: INTERIOR SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL SECTION 06 25 30 SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS 1. MATERIAL: ANCHOR CORE FIREWALL-FR AS MANUFACTURED BY BOISE CASCADE OR EQUIVALENT A. PANEL CONFIGURATION: ENGINEERED GROOVE MACHINED INTO WOOD 3/4INCH-THICK COMPOSITE SUBSTRATE B. GROOVE PATTERN: 6 INCHES ON CENTER, ORIENTED HORIZONTAL C. ALUMINUM INSERTS: .036-INCH MILL FINISHED ALUMINUM INSERTS D. ALUMINUM TRIM: 3/4-INCH MILL FINISH J TRIM AT TOP, BOTTOM AND SIDE EDGES E. PANEL FINISH: PAINTED These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 3:42:45 PM BIM 360://20636.00 Cornell Corson Hall E303-E347/Cornell Corson Hall E303 E304 E305 E347 Lab and Office Renovation.rvt 20636.00 CWJ Specifications CWJ CRE A-604 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 WALL HYDRANT (WH) / HOSE BIBB (HB) VENT PIPING PRESSURE GAUGE THERMOMETER SHOCK ABSORBER (SA) BACKFLOW PREVENTER (BFP) UNION RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE SOLENOID VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE SHUT OFF VALVE INDIRECT WASTE PIPING (IW)IW FLOOR DRAIN (FD) / FLOOR SINK (FS) CLEANOUT (CO) WALL PLATE CLEANOUT (WPCO) DECK PLATE CLEANOUT (DPCO) CAP OR PLUG PIPE CONTINUATION "P" TRAP TOP TEE CONNECTION BOTTOM/TEE CONNECTION ELBOW UP 45°OFFSET ELBOW DOWN DESCRIPTION PLUMBING SYMBOL LIST SYMBOL COMPRESSED AIR PIPING (CA)CA NATURAL GAS PIPING (G)G LAB VENT PIPING (LV)LV STRAINER LAB WASTE PIPING (LW)LW SANITARY SEWER PIPINGSAN DIR DEIONIZED WATER RETURN PIPING (DIR) DEIONIZED WATER PIPING (DI)DI TEMPERED HOT WATER RETURN PIPING (TWR)TWR TEMPERED HOT WATER PIPING (TW)TW HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PIPING (HWR) HOT WATER PIPING (HW) COLD WATER PIPING (CW) NEW PIPING LOCATED BELOW FLOOR/SLAB NEW PIPING LOCATED ABOVE FLOOR/SLAB (E) EXISTING PIPING EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR VTR VENT THRU ROOF BFF BELOW FINISHED FLOOR AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR (ETR) EXISTING TO REMAIN (E) EXISTING NTS NOT TO SCALE POINT OF DISCONNECTION POINT OF CONNECTION EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION/REMOVAL KEYNOTE X X DETAIL NOTES: DOMESTIC COLD WATER FLOW DIRECTION LABEL. PROVIDE 360 DEGREE WRAP OVERLAPPING BOTH ENDS OF THE PIPE FUNCTION LABEL AND MATCHING THE FLOW DIRECTION OF THE PIPE CONTENTS. PIPE FUNCTION LABEL A. B. C. D. E. F. PROVIDE A PIPE LABEL FOR EACH PIPE FUNCTION. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE LABEL ON EACH PIPE FOR EVERY ROOM THE PIPE PASSES THROUGH. PROVIDE LABELS IN LARGE SPACES ON MAXIMUM 20' CENTERS FOR EVERY PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. LABELS TO BE LOCATED IN AN EASILY VISIBLE LOCATION AS THEY WOULD NORMALLY BE SEEN. IE. ON THE BOTTOM HALF OF PIPES IN THE AIR AND ON THE TOP HALF OR SIDES OF PIPES MOUNTED LOW. LABELS SHALL BE, COLOR CODED, PRE-PRINTED, SELF ADHESIVE VINYL. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS AND LIST OF PIPE FUNCTIONS. PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE SET PER END USERS TO SYSTEM MANIFOLD DESIGN BASIS: HARRIS MANIFOLD MODEL #SG900 SS 2'-0" FLEXIBLE STAINLESS STEEL PIGTAIL (TYPICAL) WALL BRACKET CYLINDER RESTRAINTS CYLINDER BY OWNER FINISHED FLOOR 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL HEADER STAINLESS STEEL CHECK VALVE (TYPICAL) 5'-0" AFF DETAIL NOTES: A. REFER TO LAB PLANS FOR SPECIFIC GAS REQUIRED. DETAIL NOTES: FUME HOOD WORK SURFACE AT NON ADA HEIGHT, 36 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. FUME HOOD WORK SURFACE AT ADA HEIGHT, 30 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. PROVIDE 2" DRUM TRAP. PROVIDE SUFFICIENT PIPE ON INLET TO ALLOW 6" OF WORK SURFACE ADJUSTMENT. PROVIDE 1 1/2" DRAIN FROM CUP SINK. PROVIDE SUFFICIENT TAILPIECE ON OUTLET TO ALLOW FOR 6" OF WORK SURFACE ADJUSTMENT. DRAIN IS TO BE SLEEVED WITHIN THE 2" INLET PIPE PROVIDED ON THE DRUM TRAP. 2" DRAIN, ROUTE BEHIND UNIT IN CHASE SPACE AND CONNECT TO SINK DRAIN PROVIDE 1 1/2" ACID VENT SERVING CUP SINK DRAIN. CONNECT TO NEAREST VENT SERVICE AS INDICATED ON PLANS. COORDINATE WITH VENT FROM ADJACENT LABORATORY FIXTURES. DOMESTIC COLD WATER CONNECTION: PROVIDE BRASS/ STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE CONNECTION TO PRE-PIPED LABORATORY DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE AT FT FUME HOOD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAB EXHAUST DUCT (TYP.) DUCT COLLAR (TYP.) FUME HOOD FUME HOOD 1 7 2 7 4 3 5 6 4 3 5 6 EMERGANCY EYEWASH. REFER TO PLANS FOR LEFT OR RIGHT HAND MODEL. 2" LAB WASTE. PIPING IN WALL. SINK TMV. REFER TO ASSOCIATED EYEWASH SPECIFICATION FOR TYPE.1/2" COLD WATER SUPPLY 1/2" HOT WATER SUPPLY 1/2" RODI WATER SUPPLY LAB VENT. REFER TO PLANS TO SEE IF INDIVIDUAL VENT IS REQUIRED. DI FAUCET PIPING IN WALL (TYP) NOTE: IF IN ADA CABINET, ALL PIPING SHALL MEET ANSI & ADA REQUIREMENTS FINISHED FLOOR CASEWORK SIGNAGE "GAS SHUTOFF" FINISHED FLOOR 5'-6" REFER TO PLANS FOR LINE SIZE CEILING These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 3:38:21 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK General Notes And Symbols List GDD CMD P-000 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 NOT TO SCALE1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION LABEL DETAIL THESE NOTES ARE APPLICABLE TO THE FULL SET OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE. THE LOCATIONS SHOWN MUST BE CONSIDERED APPROXIMATE. OTHER SUCH WORK MAY EXIST, HOWEVER, LOCATION AND SIZE ARE NOT PRESENTLY KNOWN. IT IS STRONGLY ENCOURAGED TO VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BID TO REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AND CONFIRM SCOPE OF WORK. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS DAMAGED DURING WORK BY THIS CONTRACTOR, REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE WITH SIMILAR MATERIALS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECTS APPROVAL. DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACTOR. LEGALLY DISPOSE ALL MATERIALS TO A LOCATION OFF SITE. COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE WORK AND SHUTDOWNS WITH THE OWNER AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN SHALL BE RECONNECTED TO ACTIVE SERVICE PIPING. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED, SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO ACTIVE PIPING AND CAPPED. VALVE AND CAP ALL WATER PIPING. REMOVE ALL INACTIVE PIPING UNLESS NOTED. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED AND LOCATED WITHIN A WALL TO REMAIN MAY BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS NOTED. REMOVE PIPING BACK TO BEHIND THE FINISHED WALL SURFACE AND CAP. PATCH HOLES IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION LEFT BY THE REMOVAL OF PIPING OR EQUIPMENT WITH MATERIALS TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN FIRE/SMOKE RATING. DEMOLITION SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PIPING, VALVES, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND INSULATION EXCEPT ASBESTOS. REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS FROM DAMAGE. WHERE NEW WORK IS TO BE INSTALLED ABOVE AN EXISTING CEILING, PROVIDE FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE CEILING. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, REPAIR ALL DAMAGED CEILING SURFACES, REPLACE ALL DAMAGED TILES. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF THE REQUIRED SERVICE CLEARANCES. PROVIDE FOR THE DRAINING AND REFILLING OF PIPING SYSTEMS, INCLUDING AIR REMOVAL, RESETTING OF FLUSH VALVES, FLUSHING SYSTEMS OF DIRT AND SCALE CAUSED BY SHUTDOWNS AND STARTUPS. REFER TO EQUIPMENT/ FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR FINAL CONNECTION SIZES. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT THE BASE OF ALL STORM, SANITARY AND WASTE STACKS. PITCH 4" AND LARGER LAB WASTE PIPING AT 1/8" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FOR LAB WASTE PIPING 3" AND SMALLER PITCH AT 1/4" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. GENERAL NOTES: NOT TO SCALE2 LAB GAS MANIFOLD DETAIL NOT TO SCALE4 ADA FUME HOOD INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE3 SINK WITH EYEWASH DETAIL 2 ACID WASH SINK, FOR ACID TUB, NO FAUCET. 1 REFER TO DETAIL 3 ON P-000. REMARKS: EW-A EYE WASH 1/2" TEPID - - - 1 SK-G SINK - - (2) 1 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" SK-E SINK - - - 2" 1 1/2" 2 SK-D SINK 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" SK-B, SK-F SINK - ADA 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" SK-A, SK-C SINK 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION COLD WATER HOT WATER DI WATER WASTE OR SANITARY VENT REMARKS FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE NOT TO SCALE5 GAS SHUTOFF DN UP DN UP A C D F 12 13 14 15 16 17 E200C E221 E223 E225 E227 E236 E236A E216A E216 E220 E217 E212 E242A E240 E242 E215 E213E211E209 E205 E203 E206 E202B E202A E248A E244 E248B E248 E202 (E)4" (E)4" (E)4" (E)4" (E)LW (R)2" LW UP (R)2" LW UP (E)LW (E)4" LW (E)4" LV (E)5" ST (E)2" LW UP TO SINK (E)LW (E)2" LW UP (E)4" LW UP & DN (E)2" (E)4" (E)4" LV UP & DN (E)LV (E)2" A C D F H 12 13 14 15 16 17 E200C E221 E223 E225 E227 E236 E236A E216A E216 E220 E217 E212 E242A E240E242 E215 E213E211E209 E205 E203 E201 E206 E202B E202A E248A E244 E248B E248A200UG E202 2" (E)LW 2" 2" LW UP TO THIRD FLOOR SINK 2" LW UP TO THIRD FLOOR SINK 2" LW UP TO THIRD FLOOR SINK (E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)4" LW (E)5" ST 4" 4" (E)4" LW (E)4" LV (E)5" ST 2" LW UP TO THIRD FLOOR SINK 2" (E)LW (E)2" LW UP (E)2" (E)4" (E)2" LW UP TO SINK (E)4" LW UP & DN (E)LV (E)2" (E)4" LV UP & DN 2" LW UP TO THIRD FLOOR SINK These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 3:38:21 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK Partial Second Floor Plans - Plumbing GDD CMD P-100 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Partial Second Floor Plan - Plumbing Demolition 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Partial Second Floor Plan - Plumbing C D F 15 16 17 18 (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● ● ●● CA G DI ● ●● ●●● (E)CA (E)G (E)DI (E)DIR ● ●● (E)CA (E)G (E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)2" LW (E)4" (E)4" LW (E)5" ST (E)4" (E)2" (E)3" LW (E)EMER. SHOWER (R)LW DN (R)LW DN (E)1/2" (E)1/2" (E)3" LW 1 2 1 1 E300C E331 ● ●● (E)CA (E)DI ● ●● (E)CA (E)G ●● ● (E)LW(E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)G (E)CA (E)LW (E)LW (E)4" LW (E)4" LV (E)5" ST EXISTING TO REMAIN 3 2 A C D F 12 13 4 4 3 5 5 5 (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● (E)G (E)CA ●● ● (E)3/4" (E)1" (E)1 1/4" (E)2" 1 1 REMOVE CA AND HW PIPING. CAP AT POINT OF DISCONNECT. (E)2" (E)1 1/4" (E)3/4" (E)1" (E)3/4" (E)1 1/2" (E)1" (E)2" LW UP (E)2" LW UP (E)3" LW (E)2" LW DN (E)LW (E)4" (E)4" LW DN (E)2" (E)1" (E)3/4" ● ●● (E)CA (E)G (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● ● ●● (E)CA (E)G (E)2" (E)1 1/4" (E)1" (E)3/4" (E)2" LW DN 6 7 (E)4" LV UP & DN (E)2" LV 1 6 (E)LW (E)LV (E)2" These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 3:38:22 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\200278_Co rson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK Partial Third Floor Plans - Plumbing Demolition GDD CMD P-101 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Partial Third Floor Plan - Plumbing Demolition DEMOLITION NOTES: 1 DISCONNECT SINK AND REMOVE PIPING BACK TO MAIN AND CAP. 2 REMOVE PIPING DOWN AND ALL PIPING UNDER COUNTER. 3 DISCONNECT FUME HOOD AND REMOVE PIPING BACK TO MAIN AND CAP. 4 REMOVE TURRETS AND PIPING BACK TO MAIN AND CAP. 5 REMOVE CUP SINK AND RELATED PIPING BACK TO MAINS. IF PIPING GOES BELOW FLOOR CAP AS CLOSE TO THE FLOOR AS POSSIBLE BUT DO NOT CAP BELOW FLOOR. 6 REMOVE PIPING AND CAP AT POINT OF DISCONNECT. 7 REMOVE LAB WASTE BUT LEAVE SECTION GOING BELOW FLOOR AND PREP FOR RECONNECTION. 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Partial Third Floor Plan - Plumbing Demolition C D F H 15 16 17 18 OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 Room E325 OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A VEST E334B SOIL ROOM E318 (E)LW (E)LW (E)LW (E)2" LW (E)4" (E)4" LW (E)5" ST(E)3" LW (E)EMER. SHOWER (E)3" LW (x4) 1/2" CW, HW & DI DN. 3/4" G & CA DN. ROUTE UNDER LAB BENCH. CUT AND PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED. E300C E331 (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● ● ●● CA G DI ● ●● ●●● (E)CA (E)G (E)DI (E)DIR ● ●● (E)CA (E)G SK-G SK-D SK-F SK-D 2" LW DN TO SECOND FLOOR 1/2" CW & HW DN. 2" LW DN TO SECOND FLOOR. ROUTE UNDER LAB BENCH TO SINK. CUT AND PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE SEDIMENT TRAP ON DRAIN. G CA 1/2" 1/2" ● ●● 1/2"1/2" 1/2" DI ● (E)2" LW UP 4" (E)2" LW UP (E)4" LW (E)4" LV (E)5" ST 1/2"G & CA DN TO GO-A & CA-A IN COUNTER. SET LOCATIONS TO MEET ADA. 1/2" G & CA DN TO IN COUNTER. CUT AND PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED. 1/2" G & CA TO EACH TURRET. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. EW-A EW-A EW-A 2" LW DN. REFER TO DETAIL 4 ON P-000. 1/2" 1/2" CW & HW DN. 2" LW DN TO SECOND FLOOR. ROUTE UNDER LAB BENCH TO SINK. CUT AND PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE SEDIMENT TRAP ON DRAIN. E' PROVIDE ULTRA PURE AIR MANIFOLD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON P-000. ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT D' & E' AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. 1/2" RODI DN EXPOSED TO EPURE UNIT. EPURE UNIT TO BE FURNISHED BY CU & INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE PURE WATER FROM UNIT THEN RUN IN WALL TO BELOW SINK. CONNECT TO EPURE FAUCET. N2 TANK LOCATION. ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT K' AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. PROVIDE H2 MANIFOLD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON P-000. ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT D' AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. P5 TANK LOCATION ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT D' AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. 1/2" CW, HW & DI TO FAUCET. 1/2" G & CA TO EACH TURRET. REFER TO ARCH DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS. ROUTE UNDER BENCH. 2" LW DN TO SECOND FLOOR D' 1/2" CW & CA DN TO FUME HOOD 1/2" ACETYLENE TANK LOCATION. SK-E 1 1 1 (E)DI (E)CA ●● ● GO-A GO-A GO-B K' CA-B CA-A CA-A GO-A CA-A PROVIDE PIPING CONNECTION TO EXISTING PIPING. (TYP=4) PROVIDE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING FROM EQUIPMENT K' TO D'. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. 3/4" G DN EXPOSED TO BALL VALVE AT 5'-6" AFF WITH SIGNAGE "GAS SHUT OFF". REFER TO DETAIL 5 ON P-000. G 3/4" (E)G 3/4" A C D F 12 13 (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● (E)G (E)CA ●● ● (E)3/4" (E)1" (E)1 1/4" (E)2" (E)2" LW UP (E)2" LW UP (E)3" LW (E)LW (E)4" LW DN (E)2" (E)1" (E)3/4" ● ●● (E)CA (E)G (E)DIR (E)DI (E)G (E)CA ●●● ●● ● ● ●● (E)CA (E)G (E)2" (E)1 1/4" (E)1" (E)3/4" 3/4" CA DN TO CA-A 1/2"● ●● DI 2" 1 1/4" (E)4" (E)LW (E)4" DI DIR 1/2" 1/2" CW & HW DN TO SK-C 1/2" CA & 1/2" G DN TO GO-A & CA-A SK-A SK-B SK-C SK-A 2" LW 2" LW 2" LW DN G ● CA 2" LW, 1/2" CW, 1/2" G & 1/2" CA DN IN WALL. ROUTE IN CASEWORK CHASE TO FUME HOOD. LAB E304 Room E304A Room E306 DARK ROOM E304B FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 Room E309 Room E309A 1/2" DI DN TO SK-A, SK-B & SK-C CA G K G H EW-A G LW 1/2" CW, HW & RODI WATER IN CASEWORK PROVIDE H2 MANIFOLD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON P-000. ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT H AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. 1 PROVIDE ULTRA PURE AIR MANIFOLD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON P-000. ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT G, H & K. HE TANK LOCATION ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT H AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. P5 TANK LOCATION ROUTE 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL TUBING TO EQUIPMENT H AND PROVIDE AN EXTRA 2'-0" OF TUBING THEN CAP. FINAL CONNECTION BY CU. EW-A1 2" LW (E)2" LW DN 1 1/2" LV UP (E)4" LV UP 2" LV UP AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE IN CHASE. CUT AND PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED. CONNECT TO (E)4" LV CONNECT TO (E)2" LW 3/4" G DN EXPOSED TO BALL VALVE AT 5'-6" AFF WITH SIGNAGE "GAS SHUT OFF". REFER TO DETAIL 5 ON P-000. (E)LV 2" (E)4" LV UP & DN 1/2" CA & 1/2" G DN TO GO-A & CA-A FUTURE H2 TANK GENERAL NOTES: A. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF NATURAL GAS AND COMPRESSED AIR OUTLETS. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 1:31:46 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK Partial Third Floor Plans - Plumbing GDD CMD P-201 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Partial Third Floor Plan - Plumbing 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Partial Third Floor Plan - Plumbing DRAWING NOTES: 1 REFER TO DETAIL 3 ON P-000. UPRIGHT SPRINKLER DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOL LIST QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER POINT OF CONNECTION SIDEWALL SPRINKLER NTS NOT TO SCALE (ETR) EXISTING TO REMAIN GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FC FLUSHING CONNECTION NEW PIPING S SPRINKLER MAIN/BRANCH PIPING (S) ELBOW DOWN DRAIN VALVE ELBOW UP CHECK VALVE TOP TEE CONNECTION PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FLUSHING CONNECTION RELIEF VALVE DRY PENDENT SPRINKLER BACKFLOW PREVENTER (BFP) SHUT-OFF VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH (TS) EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (E) EXISTING PIPING FP FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE (FP) D SPRINKLER DRAIN PIPING (D) 45°OFFSET BOTTOM/TEE CONNECTION PIPE CONTINUATION PENDENT SPRINKLER QUICK RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER POINT OF DISCONNECTION FS FLOW SWITCH (FS) DRY PRE-ACTION ALARM VALVE ALARM CHECK VALVE WITH TRIM (ACV) FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE (FDV) INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION (ITC) (E) EXISTING OR DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION/REMOVAL KEYNOTE X X X X STANDPIPE CALLOUT SPRINKLER BRANCH LINE IF OFFSET LENGTH EXCEEDS 2', PROVIDE PIPE HANGER DROP NIPPLE CLOSE NIPPLE REDUCER SUSPENDED CEILING SPRINKLER PER SPEC (RECESSED PENDENT SPRINKLER SHOWN) (PENEDENT WITH GUARD) THREADED 90° ELBOW (TYPICAL) REDUCER SUSPENDED CEILING SPRINKLER PER SPECIFICATION (PENDENT SPRINKLER WITH GUARD SHOWN) DETAIL NOTES: DOMESTIC COLD WATER FLOW DIRECTION LABEL. PROVIDE 360 DEGREE WRAP OVERLAPPING BOTH ENDS OF THE PIPE FUNCTION LABEL AND MATCHING THE FLOW DIRECTION OF THE PIPE CONTENTS. PIPE FUNCTION LABEL A. B. C. D. E. F. PROVIDE A PIPE LABEL FOR EACH PIPE FUNCTION. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE LABEL ON EACH PIPE FOR EVERY ROOM THE PIPE PASSES THROUGH. PROVIDE LABELS IN LARGE SPACES ON MAXIMUM 20' CENTERS FOR EVERY PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. LABELS TO BE LOCATED IN AN EASILY VISIBLE LOCATION AS THEY WOULD NORMALLY BE SEEN. IE. ON THE BOTTOM HALF OF PIPES IN THE AIR AND ON THE TOP HALF OR SIDES OF PIPES MOUNTED LOW. LABELS SHALL BE, COLOR CODED, PRE-PRINTED, SELF ADHESIVE VINYL. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS AND LIST OF PIPE FUNCTIONS. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 3:38:19 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\2002 78_Corson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK General Notes And Symbols List GDD CMD FP-000 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE. THE LOCATIONS SHOWN MUST BE CONSIDERED APPROXIMATE. OTHER SUCH WORK MAY EXIST, HOWEVER, LOCATION AND SIZE ARE NOT PRESENTLY KNOWN. VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BID TO REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DETERMINE SCOPE OF WORK. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS DAMAGED DURING WORK BY THIS CONTRACTOR, REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECTS APPROVAL. DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACTOR. LEGALLY DISPOSE ALL MATERIALS TO A LOCATION OFF SITE. COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE WORK AND SHUTDOWNS WITH THE OWNER AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN SHALL BE RECONNECTED TO ACTIVE SERVICE PIPING. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED, SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO ACTIVE PIPING AND CAPPED. VALVE AND CAP ALL WATER PIPING. REMOVE ALL INACTIVE PIPING UNLESS NOTED. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED AND LOCATED WITHIN A WALL TO REMAIN MAY BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS NOTED. REMOVE PIPING BACK TO BEHIND THE FINISHED WALL SURFACE AND CAP. PLUG HOLES IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION LEFT BY THE REMOVAL OF PIPING OR EQUIPMENT. MAINTAIN FIRE/SMOKE RATING. DEMOLITION SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PIPING, VALVES, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND INSULATION EXCEPT ASBESTOS. All SECURING AND ATTACHMENT POINTS TO EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURE INCLUDING WALLS, CEILINGS, FLOORS, SLABS, DECKS, ETC. SHALL BE REVIEWED WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY AND THE PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT PRIOR TO SECURING AND ATTACHING DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT. SOME BUILDING ELEMENTS MAY CONTAIN ASBESTOS AND ABATEMENT MAY BE REQUIRED. ABATEMENT SHALL BE PERFORMED BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THIS CONTRACTOR FOR IDENTIFYING ATTACHMENT POINT LOCATIONS. MIXING OF DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS IN COMMON DUMPSTERS IS NOT ALLOWED. ALL DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS SHALL BE SEPARATED AND SORTED THEN PLACED IN THE DESIGNATED DUMPSTER FOR THAT SPECIFIC MATERIAL IN COMPLIANCE WITH PROJECT LEED CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS. ABANDONING EXISTING SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT AND APPURTENANCES IN PLACE IS NOT ALLOWED. ALL SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT AND APPURTENANCES DEEMED FOR REMOVAL SHALL BE REMOVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY CORNELL UNIVERSITY IF EXISTING SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT AND APPURTENANCES ARE FOUND THAT HAD NOT BEEN INDICATED ON THE PROJECT PLANS TO EITHER BE REMOVED OR TO REMAIN IN PLACE. PIPE ROUTING DOES NOT SHOW PIPE FITTINGS THAT WILL BE REQUIRED. MOST LOCATIONS WILL REQUIRE PIPING TO RISE INTO STRUCTURAL CAVITY AND THEN BACK DOWN. (TYPICAL ALL LOCATIONS). PROVIDE WIRE GAGES ON ALL SPRINKLERS IN ELECTRICAL AND TR ROOMS. NO WORK TO BE DONE ON FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNTIL HEAT DETECTORS ARE INSTALLED & OPERATIONAL. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. GENERAL NOTES: NOT TO SCALE 2 RETURN BEND DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION LABEL DETAIL FS E344C E300SB E300C A300UG E301 E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E320 E309B DN UP FS A C D F 12 13 14 15 16 17 (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)FP (E)FP (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)ACCESS PANEL (E)6" (E)3" (E)6" FP UP/DN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (E)SHUTOFF VALVE EXISTING TO REMAIN (TYP OF OFFICES & CORRIDOR) (E)3" (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)3" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1"(E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EXISTING TO REMAIN (TYP OF OFFICES & CORRIDOR) A C D F 12 13 14 15 16 17 FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B Room E304A Room E306 OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 Room E325 OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A VEST E334B SOIL ROOM E318 Room E309A Room E309 OFFICE 311 KITCHENETTE 317C CONFERENCE 317B OPEN OFFICE 317 FACULTY OFFICE 317A FACULTY OFFICE 315 (E)ACCESS PANEL (E)6" FP UP/DN (E)6" (E)3" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)FP (E)FP (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" 1" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (E)SPRINKLER HEAD TO REMAIN (TYP) PROVIDE CORROSION RESISTANT SPRINKLER HEAD (E)SHUTOFF VALVE (E)SPRINKLER HEAD TO REMAIN (TYP) 1 (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)FP (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)1 1/4" (E)3" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1"(E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" (E)1" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (E)SPRINKLER HEAD TO REMAIN (TYP) These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 3:38:21 PM C:\Users\cmdoktor\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_P_Central_R20_cmdoktor.rvt 20636.00 THK Partial Third Floor Plans- Fire Protection GDD CMD FP-100 100% Contsruction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Partial Third Floor Plan - Fire Protection Demolition DEMOLITION NOTES: 1 REMOVE HEAD AND MODIFY PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR UPDATED LAYOUT. 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Partial Third Floor Plan - Fire Protection DRAWING NOTES: 1 MODIFY PIPING AS REQUIRED AND CENTER HEADS IN TILES. GENERAL NOTES: A. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION DEBRIS AND MATERIALS OFF SITE IN A PROPER LEGAL MANNER. B. ALL NEW PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOFS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, ETC. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE/SMOKE STOPPED. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON RATED WALLS SHALL BE SEALED WITH A NON-HARDENING SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL PENETRATION TO REDUCE NOISE TRANSMISSION. C. THE DUCTWORK SIZES AND TYPES (ROUND, RECTANGULAR AND FLAT OVAL)WERE SELECTED FOR SPACE LIMITATION WITHIN THE RENOVATED AREA. IN ADDITION, THE DUCTWORK SIZES AND TYPES WERE CHOSEN TO ALLOW SPACE ABOVE THE CEILINGS FOR FUTURE DUCTWORK, PIPING AND/OR CONDUIT. IT IS NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO CHANGE THE SIZE OR TYPE OF DUCTWORK FOR BIDDING OR INSTALLATION UNLESS SPECIFICALLY APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. D. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS OF AIR HANDLING, CHILLED WATER, HOT WATER, STEAM, ETC. SYSTEMS WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITY PERSONNEL FOR TIE-IN CONNECTIONS. ALL SHUT DOWNS WILL OCCUR DURING NIGHTS OR WEEKENDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSIST THE UNIVERSITY PERSONNEL IN SHUTTING DOWN, DRAINING, VENTING, ETC. OF SYSTEM TO FACILITATE THE INTENDED WORK. E. A MINIMUM OF 1'-6" SHALL BE PROVIDED IN FRONT OF CONTROL ACCESS ENCLOSURES AT ALL TERMINAL UNITS. NO PIPING OR CONDUIT SHALL BE DIRECTLY INSTALLED BELOW AIR TERMINAL UNIT ACCESS ENCLOSURES THAT WILL PROHIBIT ACCESS UP TO THE CONTROL ENCLOSURE. COORDINATE THESE REQUIREMENTS WITH ALL OTHER TRADES ON THE PROJECT. IF PROPER SERVICE ACCESS IS NOT MAINTAINED BECAUSE OF POOR COORDINATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RELOCATE OBSTRUCTIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. F. PROVIDE A VOLUME DAMPER AT EACH DIFFUSER AND GRILLE FOR PROPER BALANCING REGARDLESS IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. ALL VOLUME DAMPERS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6'-0" FROM DIFFUSER OR GRILLE CONNECTION. IF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK IS UTILIZED FOR FINAL CONNECTION AT GRILLES, THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE GRILLE NECK. G. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THE LOCATIONS OF ALL ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A WALK THROUGH WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER TO LOCATE SENSOR LOCATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THE TEMPERATURE SENSORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ALIGNMENT WITH ELECTRICAL, FIRE, AND OTHER DEVICES WHEN LOCATED ON COMMON WALLS. H. DAMAGE TO EXISTING SYSTEMS (EQUIPMENT, PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES) SHOWN TO REMAIN AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTORS WORK IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. I. COORDINATE ALL SHUT DOWNS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. J. THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHOW IN GENERAL MAJOR EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK REMOVALS. THE INTENT IS NOT TO IDENTIFY ALL MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, PIPING ACCESSORIES, DUCTWORK, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, SUPPORTS, CONTROLS, CONTROL ACCESSORIES, CONTROL WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CONTROL PNEUMATIC TUBING AND ACCESSORIES TO BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED BUT IS THE REQUIREMENTS UNDER THIS CONTRACT. NO EQUIPMENT, PIPING OR DUCTWORK SHALL BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. K. THE MOUNTING HEIGHT FOR ALL ROOM THERMOSTATS OR SENSORS SHALL BE 48 IN. TO TOP OF THE COVER. L. UNLESS SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACT TO PATCH WITH LIKE MATERIAL AND FINISH ALL EXISTING DUCTWORK OR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS AFTER DEMOLITION. M. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND ARE NOT GUARANTEED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS DUE TO CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS. N. THE OWNER OCCUPIED AREAS INCLUDE SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT AND RESEARCH WHICH MUST NOT BE INTERRUPTED OR OTHERWISE DISTRUPTED WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE AND APPROPRIATE PLANNING. DSD MBH THOUSAND BTU/HOUR (E) EXISTING DOUBLE LINE RECTANGULAR DUCT CONTINUED FPM FEET PER MINUTE AIR FLOW AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PIPE ANCHOR G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PIPE GUIDE E.C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXPANSION COMPENSATOR WITH GUIDES N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED PRE-FAB EXPANSION LOOP TEMPERATURE SENSOR STRAINER PRESSURE GAUGE THERMOMETER UNION 24x12DN UP AIR VENTV 24x12 14x8 6" BOOT TAP TT THERMOSTATIC TRAP 14" 18" LATERAL FT FLOAT & THERMOSTATIC TRAP SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE TD THERMODYNAMIC TRAP FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BT BUCKET TRAP COMPRESSED AIRA DIRECTION OF FLOW BBD BOILER BLOW DOWN CONDENSER WATER SUPPLYCS CR CONDENSER WATER RETURN CWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CWR CHILLED WATER RETURN D DRAIN FUEL OIL FILLFOF FUEL OIL GAUGEFOG FOS FUEL OIL SUPPLY FOR FUEL OIL RETURN FOV FUEL OIL TANK VENT G GAS GLYCOL SUPPLYGS GLYCOL RETURNGR HPWS HEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY HPWR HEAT PUMP WATER RETURN HWS HOT WATER SUPPLY HWR HOT WATER RETURN HG HOT GAS LPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM LPC LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE MPS MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM MPC MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE HPS HIGH PRESSURE STEAM HPC HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE PC PUMPED CONDENSATE RD REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID RS REFRIGERANT SUCTION VAC VACUUM CW DOMESTIC COLD WATER EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED DOUBLE LINE PIPE OR ROUND DUCT CONTINUED E PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT NTS NOT TO SCALE (DBL) DOUBLE WALL LINED DUCT CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE AD ACCESS DOOR P.C. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR N.O. NORMALLY OPEN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HUMIDISTAT ROUND DUCT - IN INCHES12" 24x12DN UP 14" CONICAL TEE 18" VOLUME DAMPER CAP OR PLUG ELBOW DOWN ELBOW UP AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER FD FIRE DAMPER SD SMOKE DAMPER BDD BACK DRAFT DAMPER M MOTORIZED DAMPER BALL VALVE GATE VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVEPRV CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUG (L) (2L) ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 2" THICK M.C. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR W/W WALL TO WALL G THERMOSTAT/SENSOR WITH GUARD G DUCT SECTION - SUPPLY DUCT SECTION - RETURN WIDTH A x DEPTH B A B R D 24x12 14" 6" BOOT TAP BG BLAST GATE FIN TUBE RADIATION VALANCE A B C REGISTER, GRILLE OR DIFFUSER TAG A = TYPE B = NECK SIZE C = CFM B C D FIN TUBE RADIATION TAG FT-A = TYPE B = FIN TUBE LENGTH C = ENCLOSURE LENGTH D = GPM FT-A A B C D VALANCE TAG A = TYPE B = COIL SIZE C = COOLING GPM D = HEATING GPM POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION BOTTOM TAP TRIPLE DUTY VALVETD GLOBE VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE SUCTION DIFFUSERSD DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE CONNECTION, CAP AND CHAIN FC FLEX CONNECTOR - DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR - PIPING AIR TERMINAL UNIT AND TAG (OPTION 1) A B C AIR TERMINAL UNIT TAG (OPTION 2) A = UNIT NO. B = MAXIMUM CFM C = MINIMUM CFM AxB FO DUCT SECTION - FLAT OVAL (FO) V VENT REDUCER S H S ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 1-1/2" THICK EXHAUST GRILLE RETURN REGISTER SINGLE LINE PIPE CONTINUED TRANSITION SQUARE TO ROUND RISE IN DUCT - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW DROP IN DUCT - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW SUPPLY DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN RETURN DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN RECTANGULAR BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH MITERED ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL T RELIEF VALVE T HVAC SYMBOL LIST X X DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION KEYNOTE A B C RADIANT CEILING PANEL TAG A = TYPE B = LENGTH C = GPM CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR C CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORCO GAS SENSORG SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION AVERAGING SENSOR S S START/STOP O C OPEN/CLOSE E D ENABLE/DISABLE T TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DUCT OR PIPE MOUNTED) H HUMIDITY SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) I P ELECTRICAL INTERFACE AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER (PARALLEL BLADE) AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER (OPPOSED BLADE) E ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) E ES END SWITCH EA EXHAUST AIR MOISTURE SENSOR OCCUPANCY SENSOR FLOW METER SUPPLY FANSF BTU ENERGY METERBTU P DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE SWITCH ALARM STATUS PROBE SENSOR RELAY FREEZE-STATFZ E ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CURRENT TRANSDUCER FLOW SENSOR AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION HARD WIRE INTERFACE S SOLENOID VALVE S M MANUAL SWITCH THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO 2 BINARY POINT ANALOG POINT THERMOWELL P DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ASD ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE R134a REFRIGERANT R134a SENSOR (WALL MOUNTED) C C COOLING COIL BASE MOUNTED PUMP FILTER BANK RETURN AIR FANRF EF EXHAUST AIR FAN H C HEATING COIL SMOKE CONTROL FANSC HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION GRID E P ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC SWITCH OR RELAY P E PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC SWITCH OR RELAY F FLOW TRANSMITTER P PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER I E ELECTRONIC/ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR MAIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL AIR SOURCE A IN LINE PUMP HR C HEAT RECOVERY COIL AIR TERMINAL UNIT WITH FACTORY ATTENUATOR (OPTION 1) VAV-X-XX VAV-X-XX LAB AIR VALVE RADIANT CEILING PANEL FLOW SWITCH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE G B GAS BURNER P PRESSURE SWITCH HUMIDIFIERH A R S OS M FS F BUTTERFLY CONTROL DAMPER VFD OA OUTSIDE AIR RA RETURN AIR SA SUPPLY AIR CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO F.L. FAIL LAST DEWPOINT SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) DP C CONDENSATE SENSOR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) SP CT BI BINARY INPUT BO BINARY OUTPUT AI ANALOG INPUT AO ANALOG OUTPUT BV BINARY VALUE AV ANALOG VALUE HIGH LEVEL SWITCHHI LOW LOW LEVEL SWITCH VENTURI AIRFLOW CONTROL VALVE TRANSFORMER MOTOR STARTERMS ROTATION DETECTORRD SMOKE DETECTORSD MOD MODULATING ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER E P SPEED COMMANDSC AOM ADDRESSABLE OUTPUT MODULE (FIRE ALARM INTERFACE) COM NETWORK COMMUNICATION INTERFACE POINT SIGNAL OUT CURRENT SENSORCS SIGNAL OUT A SIGNAL IN AIR IN A SIGNAL IN ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT T NITROGEN DIOXIDE SENSORN MOTOR S SPACE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT SA S SPACE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE S SPACE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY S SPACE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT T T T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH BINARY INPUT (GENERAL) BI BO BINARY OUTPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG INPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG OUTPUT (GENERAL) AI AO LIQUID IMMERSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR T SINGLE POINT SENSOR M M OV D F SA OV D F F.O. FAIL OPEN RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR RH LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE SWITCH FZ CONTROLS SCHEMATIC SYMBOL LIST These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 4:10:03 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\D ocuments\200278_Corson3rdFloor_M_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20636.00 NMJ General Notes and Symbols List - HVAC GDD SJG M-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 DN DN UP DN DN UP A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 E304 E304B E305E303 E318A E318 (E)36x16(E)36x18 (E)26x16 (E)14x12 (E)20x16 (E)18x12 (E)14x12 (E)22x12(E)26x12(E)36x16 (E)18x10 (E)34x16(E)34x18 (E)20x12 (E)20x12 (E)16x10 (E)16x10 (E)7" (E)10x6 (E)8" (E)8" (E)10x6 (E)10" (E)12x12 (E)8" (E)10" (E)8" (E)4" (E)6" (E)18x10 (E)7"(E)18x10 (E)18x10 (E)10" (E)10" (E)18x10 (E)18x10 (E)12x12 (E)16x10 (E)3" (E)12x8 (E)3/4" (E)2" (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)RADIATION (E)VAV D R (E)2" (E)VAV (E)CWR (E)CWS T T TT (E)12" T (E)12x10 (E)VAV (E)18x10 D (E)2" (E)10" (E)2 1/2" (E)1 1/2" (E)LPS (E)LPC (E)RADIATION (E)FUME HOOD 1 3 2 3 1 4 8 8 8 8 8 2 1 5 (E)VAV 8 6 Room E331 E344A E344 E310 320 E300SB E300C Room E325 OFFICE 311 FACULTY OFFICE 315 FACULTY OFFICE 317A OPEN OFFICE 317 CONFERENCE 317B KITCHENETTE 317C OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 OPEN LAB E334 E340 (E)12x8 (E)7" (E)10" (E)7" (E)7" (E)18x10 (E)16x8 (E)16x8 (E)7" (E)FD (E)72x26 UP & DN (E)30x20 UP & DN (E)28x20 UP & DN (E)42x18 UP & DN (E)42x24 UP & DN (E)48x36 UP & DN (E)FD (E)7" (E)12x8 (E)16x10 (E)16x10 (E)18x10 (E)24x18 (E)7" (E)16x8 (E)12x8 (E)7"T (E)FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL UNIT (E)VAV 8 89 9 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 10 10 3 T 3 (E)CANOPY HOOD E306 E304A (E)CANOPY HOOD E344B E344C E309 E309A E309B E301 7 (E)VAV (E)10" (E)10" EA UP 2 9 9 19 1 1 19 9 (E)RADIATION (TYP) (E)FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL UNIT 9 3 A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B Room E304A Room E306 OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A VEST E334B SOIL ROOM E318 Room E309A Room E309 12x10 10" 10" 10" 8" 12x8 8" 8" 8" " 2 315 10 " 2 315 10 " 3 375 10 " 1 350 10 " 2 125 8 FD/SD 9" EA UP 8" SAV-5 SAV-6 FEV-3 FEV-2 SAV-3 SAV-4 GEV-3 10x8 (E)26x16 (E)14x12 (E)20x16 (E)18x12 (E)14x12 (E)22x12(E)26x12(E)36x16 (E)20x12 (E)7" (E)10x6 (E)10x6 (E)10" (E)12x12 (E)6" (E)18x10 (E)10" (E)10" (E)18x10 (E)12x12 (E)16x10 (E)12x8 (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)RADIATION (E)VAV D (E)CWR (E)CWS T T (E)12" R (E)20x12 S S S 1 1 1 1 1 9" 4 4EH-2 10" 2 ERHC-6 ERHC-5 12x10 10" 12x8 ERHC-3 ERHC-4 8" (E)RADIATION (E)2 1/2" (E)1 1/2" (E)LPS (E)LPC Room E331 E344A E310 320 E300SB E300C Room E325 OFFICE 311 FACULTY OFFICE 315 FACULTY OFFICE 317A OPEN OFFICE 317 CONFERENCE 317B KITCHENETTE 317C OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 E340 (E)36x16 (E)34x16 E344 E344B E344C E301 (E)36x18 (E)34x18 (E)12x8 (E)7" (E)10" (E)7" (E)7" (E)FD (E)72x26 UP & DN (E)30x20 UP & DN (E)28x20 UP & DN (E)42x18 UP & DN (E)42x24 UP & DN (E)48x36 UP & DN (E)FD (E)7" (E)12x8 (E)24x18 (E)7" (E)16x8 (E)VAV (E)CANOPY HOOD (E)CANOPY HOOD E309B E301 (E)10"x 22 22 A x 22 22 A 12x10 18x12 12x10 12" (E)VAV 8" 10" ERHC-1 SAV-1 10" FEV-1 8"5" SAV-2 ERHC-2 12x10 8" 10" GEV-2 10x6 12x10 x 22 22 A 415 " 1 500 10 x 10 22 (E) 150 " (E) 150 8 VAV-1 " 1 515 TYP=2 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 6 S SS (E)10" EA UP GEV-1 x 22 22 A 500 7 EH-1 3 (E)RADIATION (TYP) D R DSD DSD DSD DSD FD/SDFD/SD FD/SD S D 12" S 9 S 9 10 8x6 x 8 6 A 185 8 x 6 8 A 140 8" 8x6 GEV-4 8 8x6 DN TO GRILLE 8x6 DN TO GRILLE These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 1:26:06 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_M_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20636.00 NMJ Partial Third Floor Plans - HVAC GDD SJG M-100 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Partial Third Floor Plan - HVAC - Demolition 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Partial Third Floor Plan - HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES 1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES. 2 CAP AND SEAL DUCTWORK AIRTIGHT AT POINT OF DISCONNECT. 3 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING THERMOSTAT. REMOVE PNEUMATIC TUBING BACK TO THE SOURCE. 4 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE PIPING AND ACCESSORIES BACK TO THE MAIN. CAP AND SEAL WATER TIGHT. 5 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING EXHAUST DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES FROM EXISTING FUME HOOD. 6 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK FROM OVEN. 7 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE. 8 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING AIR TERMINAL AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS. 9 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DIFFUSER/GRILLE. 10 DISCONNECT AND REINSTALL EXISTING DIFFUSER/GRILLE AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CEILING. SEE NEW WORK PLANS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. DRAWING NOTES 1 TIE DUCTWORK INTO EXISTING. PROVIDE ALL DUCTWORK MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION. 2 TIE DUCTWORK INTO ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT FUME HOOD, REFER TO DETAILS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 3 CANOPY EXHAUST HOOD SHALL BE MOUNTED 42 INCHES ABOVE MILLWORK. 4 CORROSIVE EXHAUST DUCTWORK. DUCTWORK SHALL BE PVC CONSTRUCTION. DUCTWORK SHALL BE WRAPPED IN TWO LAYERS OF 1-1/2 INCH FIRE WRAP. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 5 NEW LOCATION FOR EXISTING DIFFUSER/GRILLE. 6 PROVIDE NEW CONTROLS AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES FOR THE EXISTING AIR TERMINAL UNIT. REBALANCE EXISTING AIR TERMINAL UNIT. REFER TO CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 7 PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ACTUATION, CONTROLS AND PIPING ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONNECTION. 8 LOCATE GRILLE 6" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 9 PROVIDE BREAK GLASS MANUAL SHUTOFF AT LOCATION SHOWN. SWITCH SHALL CONTROL/CLOSE THE AIR VALVES ASSOCIATED WITH THE SPACE. PROVIDE LABEL AT SWITCH WHICH READS "VENTILATION SYSTEM EMERGENCY SHUTOFF". 10 PROVIDE A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR AT LOCATION SHOWN TO CONTROL THE OPERATION OF LEF-1. UP DN LADDER UP DN UP A C D F H L 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EXHAUST FAN LEF-1 E4P0SB E4P0U A4P0S ROOF A C D F H 15 16 17 (E)34x16 (E)20x16 (E)16x10 (E)16x10 (E)12x10 (E)10x12 (E)12x10 (E)10x10 (E)VAV (E)EAV 9" EA UP & DN (E)20x12 21 E440 E400C E412 E412B E416 E419 E417E413 E419A E412C E416A These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 4:10:10 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_M_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20636.00 NMJ Partial Fourth Floor and Roof Plans HVAC GDD SJG M-101 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Partial Roof Plan - HVAC 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - HVAC DRAWING NOTES 1 CORROSIVE EXHAUST DUCTWORK. DUCTWORK SHALL BE PVC CONSTRUCTION. DUCTWORK SHALL BE WRAPPED IN TWO LAYERS OF 1-1/2 INCH FIRE WRAP. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 2 OFFSET NEW EXHAUST DUCT RISER AROUND EXISTING DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED. NMJ NMJ M-200 P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM SAV SA H C H C AIR SUPPLY BI OS sa d AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS AO AO MONITOR HOOD FUME - ALARM - SASH POSITION FEEDBACK - VALVE POSITION COMMAND INTERFACE CARD: EXHAUST VALVE HOOD FUME HOOD MONITOR TO ANALOG POINT FROM EXHAUST FUME HOOD INDICATOR SASH POSITION VERTICAL HOOD I NTERFACE CARD CONTROLLER WI TH ANALOG ELECTRI C AO AI AI FLOW ALARM R COMMAND VACANCY UNOCCUPIED OCCUPIED/ AI SASH P HOOD I NTERFACE CARD CONTROLLER WI TH ANALOG ELECTRI C AO AI AI FLOW ALARM R COMMAND VACANCY UNOCCUPIED OCCUPIED/ AI SASH FEV - ALARM - SASH POSITION FEEDBACK - VALVE POSITION COMMAND INTERFACE CARD: EXHAUST VALVE HOOD FUME HOOD MONITOR TO ANALOG POINT FROM EA CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT 1 FEV SAV FUME HOOD MOTORIZED IAO ZONE CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT GEV T AI F AI EXHAUST GENERAL LAB E334 WITH SUPPLY AIR VALVE, FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE & GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY NOT TO SCALE POINT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X CEILING HEIGHT (FT) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE STATUS X ` VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X TRI-STATE ALARM X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) FUME HOOD SASH POSITION X X X SASH OPEN (18') FOR 24 CONTINUOUS HOURS OR MORE X FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE OCC / UNOCC COMMAND X X TRI-STATE OUTPUT POINT GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X SUPPLY VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL COMMAND X X X X 0 - 10V SIGNAL ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X SINGLE POINT SENSOR AIRFLOW SENSOR X X X NO FLOW X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO PLANS System Summaries Control Schematics & LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE CANOPY OPEN OCCUPIED SASH OPEN & OCC UNOCC UNOCC UNOCC ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE SASH OPEN SASH CLOSED SASH FULL SASH OPEN SASH CLOSED POINT SIZE RANGE SASH SASH SASH SASH MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 5) (NOTE 6) (NOTE 7) (NOTE 8) CLOSED (NOTE 4) (NOTE 5) CLOSED FULL OPEN CLOSED (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN 100 FPM 80 FPM 100 FPM 65 FPM (NOTE 9) MAX MIN 100 FPM 80 FPM (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) E334 VAV LAB 491 8.5 198 2.9 491 7.1 FEV-3 10 1300 0 630 9.1 505 7.3 280 6.0 630 9.1 410 5.9 280 4.0 SAV-6 10 1300 0 630 505 420 630 410 280 0GEV-4 8 800 0 0 0 140 0 0 0 TOTAL 630 505 420 630 410 280 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FUME HOODS EXCEEDS THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY. 2. . 2 WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 FT 2 CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 CFM/FT 3. . 2 CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/FT 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. 5. OCCUPIED SASH OPEN MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR FLOW REPRESENTS A 80-100 FPM FACE VELOCITY AT 18-INCH SASH HEIGHT. FUME HOOD AIR VALVE BASIS OF DESIGN WILL BE 100 FPM @ 18-INCHES SASH HEIGHT. FINAL AIRFLOW SETPOINT ESTABLISHED DURING HOOD CERTIFICATION. 6. OCCUPIED SASH CLOSED MODE: CALCULATED BASED ON SPECIFIC HAZARD. 7. UNOCCUPIED SASH FULL MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIRFLOW REPRESENTS A 100 FPM FACE VELOCITY AT 18-INCH SASH HEIGHT, SASH IS ABOVE 18-INCHES. FUME HOOD EXHAUST SHALL NOT INDEX TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. 8. UNOCCUPIED SASH OPEN MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST REPRESENTS AT 65 FPM FACE VELOCITY, SASH IS AT OR BELOW 18-INCHES. FUME HOOD EXHAUST SHALL INDEX TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. 9. UNOCCUPIED SASH CLOSED MODE: CALCULATED BASED ON SPECIFIC HAZARD. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL SETPOINTS TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE: MONITOR TO MAINTAIN FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT. NOT CONTROLLED BY BACS. VALVE IS CONTROLLED BY FUME HOOD FUME HOOD FACE VELOCITY: FPM UNOCC PROGRAMMED INTO FUME HOOD MONITOR. TYPICALLY 80-100 FPM OCC / 65 NOT CONTROLLED BY BACS. FACE VELOCITY SETPOINTS ARE GENERAL EXHASUT AIRFLOW RATE: REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TOTAL EXHAUST CFM - FUME HOOD EXHAUST CFM SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE 30 MINUTESMINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: 6 AM TO 8 PM, MON-FRI FACE VELOCITY CONTROL POSITION INDICATOR. THE FUME HOOD SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A FUME HOOD MONITOR AND SASH THE FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT. THE MONITOR SHALL ADJUST THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE MONITOR SHALL, AS A MINIMUM, HAVE THE FOLLOWING CAPABILITIES: - SASH POSITION INPUT - STANDBY MODE INPUT TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENT OF FACE VELOCITY. LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR TERMINAL UNIT SHALL GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE THE OCCUPIED FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT BASED ON THE SASH POSITION. THE SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN COMMAND TO THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE BACS SHALL SEND AN OCCUPIED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR TERMINAL UNIT SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR VELOCITY SETPOINT BASED ON THE SASH POSITION. THE GENERAL EXHAUST EXHAUST AIR VALVE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED FACE EXHAUST AIR VALVE. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD THE BACS SHALL SEND AN UNOCCUPIED COMMAND TO THE FUME HOOD WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, AND THE SASH IS AT OR BELOW 18-INCHES, MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR TERMINAL UNIT SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE OCCUPIED SASH OPEN AIRFLOW SETPOINT. THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE HOOD MONITOR SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED COMMAND TO THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE. THE FUME 18-INCHES BASED ON SASH POSITION, THE BACS SHALL NOT SEND THE SPACE WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED AND THE FUME HOOD SASH IS ABOVE CONTROL SHALL TAKE PRIORITY OVER AIR CHANGE CONTROL. IF THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE SETPOINT, ZONE TEMPERATURE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALE (GEV) SUPPLY AIR VALVE (SAV) DUCT MOUNTED ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL (RHC) FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE (FEV) ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME FROM THE SPACE. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW HEIGHT). CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE, THE BACS SHALL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES THIS DETAIL SHALL REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE S SWITCH. REFER TO PLANS. VENTILATION SHUTDOWN MANUAL BREAK GLASS DOWN SWITCH. SHALL COMMAND CLOSED UPON ACTIVATION OF THE MANUAL VENTILATION SHUT REGARDLESS OF THE OCCUPANCY MODE, THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR VALVES GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 M-201 1 P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM SAV **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES THIS DETAIL SHALL REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** SA H C H C BI OS sa d AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM GEV AIR EXHAUST SAV IAO ZONE EXHAUST CANOPY HOOD CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AIAI FLOWALARM AV SETPOINT GEVAIR SUPPLY T AI F AI NOT TO SCALE NMJ NMJ 2 NOT TO SCALE STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX System Summaries Control Schematics & POINT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X CEILING HEIGHT (FT) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X X X X X X X X X X X HOOD EXHAUST VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X SUPPLY VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL COMMAND X X X X 0 - 10V SIGNAL ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X SINGLE POINT SENSOR AIRFLOW SENSOR X X X NO FLOW X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO PLANS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SUPPLY AIR VALVE (SAV) GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME FROM THE SPACE. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW HEIGHT). CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE, THE BACS SHALL SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F 0 75OCCUPIED: F 0 78UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F 0 81UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET GENERAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE 30 MINUTESMINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DUCT MOUNTED ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL (RHC) F0 70OCCUPIED: F0 67UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F0 64UNOCCUPIED: LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE MAX COOLING OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE MAX OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE POINT SIZE RANGE COOLING MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 4) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN MAX MIN (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) E305 COOLING LAB 190 8.5 144 5.4 190 7.1 GEV-3 8 800 0 600 22.3 190 7.1 100 3.7 SAV-2 8 800 80 500 90 0 -100 E318 COOLING LAB 164 8.5 140 6.0 164 7.1 GEV-3 8 800 0 500 21.5 230 9.9 150 6.5 SAV-3 8 800 80 350 80 0 -150 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS (COOLING) OF THE LAB OVERRIDE THE REQUIRED AIR CHANGES. 2. . 2 DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 FT WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY 2 CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 CFM/FT 3. . 2 CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/FT 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL POINT LOAD SHED-1 STEAM LOAD SHED-2 STEAM LOAD SHED-3 STEAM LOAD SHED-4 STEAM LOAD SHED-5 STEAM LOAD SHED-6 STEAM ZONE CONTROL RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, RESETTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE SPACE TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 60 DEG F INDEX SPACE AIR CHANGE RATE TO MIN UNPCCUPIED AC/PH AND CRITICAL SPACES (2) UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (2) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL" SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS, SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE (GEV) LAB E305/E318 WITH SUPPLY AIR VALVE & GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE POSITION COMMAND GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) S SWITCH. REFER TO PLANS. VENTILATION SHUTDOWN MANUAL BREAK GLASS DOWN SWITCH. SHALL COMMAND CLOSED UPON ACTIVATION OF THE MANUAL VENTILATION SHUT REGARDLESS OF THE OCCUPANCY MODE, THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR VALVES GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 M-202 1 P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM SAV **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES THIS DETAIL SHALL REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** SA H C H C BI OS sa d AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM GEV AIR EXHAUST SAV IAO ZONE EXHAUST CANOPY HOOD CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AIAI FLOWALARM AV SETPOINT FEVAIR SUPPLY T AI F AI SLOT HOOD POINT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X CEILING HEIGHT (FT) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X HOOD EXHAUST VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X HOOD EXHAUST VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X HOOD EXHAUST VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X HOOD EXHAUST VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X SUPPLY VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL COMMAND X X X X 0 - 10V SIGNAL ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X SINGLE POINT SENSOR AIRFLOW SENSOR X X X NO FLOW X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO PLANS LAB E334A WITH SUPPLY AIR VALVE & SLOT HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY NOT TO SCALE NMJ NMJ 1 NOT TO SCALE CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL POINT DAYTIME (DEFCON 3) LOAD SHED 1 - CHILLED WATER (DEFCON 2) LOAD SHED 2 - CHILLED WATER NIGHT EMERGENCY (DEFCON 1) LOAD SHED 3 - CHILLED WATER EMERGENCY (DEFCON) LOAD SHED 4 - CHILLED WATER LCS ZONE CONTROL RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, RESTTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE VALVE CLOSED INDEX CHILLED WATER CONTROL CRITICAL SPACES (2) UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (1) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL" SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS, SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS System Summaries Control Schematics & LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE (NOTE 5) POINT SIZE RANGE (NOTE 5) MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 4) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN MAX MIN (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) E334A ACHR LAB 68 8.5 22 2.3 68 7.1 FEV-2 8" 800 0 500 51.9 125 13.0 SAV-5 8" 800 0 375 0 -125 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY DRIVES THE EXHAUST RATE 2. CFM/SQFT WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 SQFT. CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 3. CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/SQFT. 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SUPPLY AIR VALVE (SAV) GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME FROM THE SPACE. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW HEIGHT). CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE, THE BACS SHALL SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F 0 75OCCUPIED: F 0 78UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F 0 81UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET GENERAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE 30 MINUTESMINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DUCT MOUNTED ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL (RHC) F0 70OCCUPIED: F0 67UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F0 64UNOCCUPIED: VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED SLOT HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE (FEV) GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 M-203 1 P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM SAV SA H C H C sa d AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT SAV IAO ZONE AIR SUPPLY T AI F AI LAB E334B WITH SUPPLY AIR VALVE CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY NOT TO SCALE REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES THIS DETAIL SHALL NMJ NMJ 2 NOT TO SCALE MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY POINT SCHEDULE MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION FREEZER STATUS X X HIGH TEMPERATURE X REFRIGERATOR STATUS X X HIGH TEMPERATURE X System Summaries Control Schematics & LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE (NOTE 5) POINT SIZE RANGE MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 4) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN MAX MIN (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) E334A ACHR LAB 55 8.5 20 2.6 55 7.1 - - - - - - - - SAV-4 8" 800 0 125 125 125 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY DRIVES THE EXHAUST RATE 2. CFM/SQFT WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 SQFT. CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 3. CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/SQFT. 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALE (GEV) GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F 0 75OCCUPIED: F 0 78UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F 0 81UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F0 70OCCUPIED: F0 67UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F0 64UNOCCUPIED: LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED MAINTAIN SCHEDULED AIRFLOW. DURING OCCUPIED AND UNOCCUPIED MODES, THE SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL POINT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X CEILING HEIGHT (FT) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X SUPPLY VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL COMMAND X X X X 0 - 10V SIGNAL ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X SINGLE POINT SENSOR AIRFLOW SENSOR X X X NO FLOW X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 CMD GDD M-204 P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM SAV **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES THIS DETAIL SHALL REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** SA H C H C AIR SUPPLY BI OS sa d AI T AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS AO AO MONITOR HOOD FUME - ALARM - SASH POSITION FEEDBACK - VALVE POSITION COMMAND INTERFACE CARD: EXHAUST VALVE HOOD FUME HOOD MONITOR TO ANALOG POINT FROM EXHAUST FUME HOOD INDICATOR SASH POSITION VERTICAL HOOD I NTERFACE CARD CONTROLLER WI TH ANALOG ELECTRI C AO AI AI FLOW ALARM R COMMAND VACANCY UNOCCUPIED OCCUPIED/ AI SASH P HOOD I NTERFACE CARD CONTROLLER WI TH ANALOG ELECTRI C AO AI AI FLOW ALARM R COMMAND VACANCY UNOCCUPIED OCCUPIED/ AI SASH FEV - ALARM - SASH POSITION FEEDBACK - VALVE POSITION COMMAND INTERFACE CARD: EXHAUST VALVE HOOD FUME HOOD MONITOR TO ANALOG POINT FROM EA CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT 1 N.T.S FEV SAV FACE VELOCITY CONTROL POSITION INDICATOR. THE FUME HOOD SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A FUME HOOD MONITOR AND SASH THE FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT. THE MONITOR SHALL ADJUST THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE MONITOR SHALL, AS A MINIMUM, HAVE THE FOLLOWING CAPABILITIES: - SASH POSITION INPUT - STANDBY MODE INPUT TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENT OF FACE VELOCITY. LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED THE OCCUPIED FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT BASED ON THE SASH POSITION. THE SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN COMMAND TO THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE BACS SHALL SEND AN OCCUPIED DIFFERENTIAL. SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW VELOCITY SETPOINT BASED ON THE SASH POSITION. THE SUPPLY AIR VALVE EXHAUST AIR VALVE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED FACE EXHAUST AIR VALVE. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD THE BACS SHALL SEND AN UNOCCUPIED COMMAND TO THE FUME HOOD WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, AND THE SASH IS AT OR BELOW 18-INCHES, (MINIMUM TWO PER LAB). ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE: MONITOR TO MAINTAIN FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT. NOT CONTROLLED BY BACS. VALVE IS CONTROLLED BY FUME HOOD FUME HOOD FACE VELOCITY: FPM UNOCC PROGRAMMED INTO FUME HOOD MONITOR. TYPICALLY 80-100 FPM OCC / 65 NOT CONTROLLED BY BACS. FACE VELOCITY SETPOINTS ARE SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES 30 MINUTESMINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: ï»¿7 ï»¿7OCCUPIED SETBACK: ï»¿8UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: ï»¿7 ï»¿6OCCUPIED SETBACK: ï»¿64UNOCCUPIED: MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. POSITION. THE SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED FACE VELOCITY SETPOINT BASED ON THE SASH EXHAUST AIR VALVES WHOSE SASHES ARE AT 18-INCHES AND BELOW TO BELOW 18-INCHES. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD UNOCCUPIED COMMAND TO THOSE FUME HOODS WHOSE SASHES ARE AT OR OCCUPIED SASH OPEN AIRFLOW SETPOINT. THE BACS WILL SEND THE AIR VALVES WHOSES SASHES ARE ABOVE THE 18-INCHES TO MAINTAIN THE AIR VALVES. THE FUME HOOD MONITOR SHALL INDEX THE FUME HOOD EXHAUST SPACE UNOCCUPIED COMMAND TO THOSE PARTICULAR FUME HOOD EXHAUST ABOVE 18-INCHES BASED ON SASH POSITION, THE BACS SHALL NOT SEND THE WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED AND ANY OF THE FUME HOOD SASHES ARE (BACS). BUILDING AUTOMATION ANDCONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOWFROM THE SPACE. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON CEILING HEIGHT).VOLUME (AREA x THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE ROOM GROSS CHANGE RATE. THE BACS SHALL CALCULATE THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE SUPPLY AIR VALVE GENERAL MODULATE AIRFLOW. CURRENTLY HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO SYSTEM IS CONSTANT VOLUME AND DOES NOT CANOPY HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE CANOPY HOOD FUME HOOD MOTORIZED IAO EXHAUST CANOPY HOOD DUCT MOUNTED ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL LAB E304 WITH SUPPLY AIR VALVE, FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE & CANOPY HOOD EXHAUST AIR VALVE CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY ZONE F AI CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT GEV AI T PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF AND REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE BASEBOARD RADIATION VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. BASEBOARD RADIATION CONTROL VALVE FULLY OPEN, THE REHEAT CONTROL SETPOINT. IF THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS NOT AT SETPOINT WITH THE CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE BASEBOARD RADIATION OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE Summaries System Control Schematics & LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE CANOPY OPEN OCCUPIED SASH OPEN & OCC UNOCC UNOCC UNOCC ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE SASH OPEN & CANOPY ON SASH CLOSED SASH FULL SASH OPEN SASH CLOSED POINT SIZE RANGE SASH SASH SASH SASH MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 5) CANOPY OFF (NOTE 7) (NOTE 8) CLOSED (NOTE 4) (NOTE 5) CLOSED FULL OPEN CLOSED (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN 100 FPM 80 FPM (NOTE 6) 100 FPM 65 FPM (NOTE 9) MAX MIN 100 FPM 80 FPM (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) 304/304B VAV LAB 385 8.5 179 3.3 385 7.1 FEV-1 10 1300 0 630 20.7 505 18.4 280 5.1 630 11.6 410 7.5 280 5.1 SAV-1 12 1790 0 1030 905 180 530 310 180 -100GEV-1 8 800 0 500 500 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 1130 1005 280 630 410 280 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FUME HOODS EXCEEDS THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY. 2. . 2 WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 FT 2 CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 CFM/FT 3. . 2 CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/FT 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. 5. OCCUPIED SASH OPEN MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIR FLOW REPRESENTS A 80-100 FPM FACE VELOCITY AT 18-INCH SASH HEIGHT. FUME HOOD AIR VALVE BASIS OF DESIGN WILL BE 100 FPM @ 18-INCHES SASH HEIGHT. FINAL AIRFLOW SETPOINT ESTABLISHED DURING HOOD CERTIFICATION. 6. OCCUPIED SASH CLOSED MODE: CALCULATED BASED ON SPECIFIC HAZARD. 7. UNOCCUPIED SASH FULL MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIRFLOW REPRESENTS A 100 FPM FACE VELOCITY AT 18-INCH SASH HEIGHT, SASH IS ABOVE 18-INCHES. FUME HOOD EXHAUST SHALL NOT INDEX TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. 8. UNOCCUPIED SASH OPEN MODE: FUME HOOD EXHAUST REPRESENTS AT 65 FPM FACE VELOCITY, SASH IS AT OR BELOW 18-INCHES. FUME HOOD EXHAUST SHALL INDEX TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. 9. UNOCCUPIED SASH CLOSED MODE: CALCULATED BASED ON SPECIFIC HAZARD. DROPS BELOW TEMPERATURE, THE EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL CLOSE. IS THE DUCT TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 90 DEG F. ONCE THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR SHALL COMMAND THE EXHAUST AIR VALVE TO MAXIMUM AIRFLOW FOR ALL OCCUPANCY MODES, THE CANOPY EXHAUST DUCT TEMPERATURE SCHEDULEPOINT EQUIPMENT POINTS HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE GRAPHIC ON SHOWN NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION (CFM) AIRFLOW EXHAUSTTOTAL X X X (CFM) SETPOINT EXHAUSTTOTAL X X X (ACPH) RATE CHANGE AIRLAB X X X FT) (SQ AREAROOM X X (FT) HEIGHTCEILING X X (CFM) SETPOINT OFFSETFLOW X X (CFM) ACTUAL OFFSETFLOW X X (CFM) FEEDBACK AIRFLOW VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODFUME X X X STATUS VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODFUME X X FEEDBACK TO EQUAL NOT COMMANDVALVE X ALARM TRI-STATE X SWITCH) (VIA PRESSURE DIFFERENTIALLOW POSITION SASH HOODFUME X X X MORE OR HOURS CONTINUOUS 24 FOR (18') OPENSASH X COMMAND UNOCC / OCC VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODFUME X X POINT OUTPUTTRI-STATE STATUS VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODCANOPY X X XX X COMMAND POSITION VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODCANOPY X X X (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW MIN VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODCANOPY X X (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW MAX VALVE AIR EXHAUST HOODCANOPY X X TEMPERATURE DUCTEXHAUST X X X SENSOR POINTSINGLE STATUS VALVESUPPLY X X SETPOINT FROM DEVIATION FLOW10% X ALARM TRI-STATEX FEEDBACK TO EQUAL NOT COMMANDVALVE X SWITCH) (VIA PRESSURE DIFFERENTIALLOW COMMAND POSITION VALVESUPPLY X X X (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW MIN VALVESUPPLY X X (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW MAX VALVESUPPLY X X COMMAND COIL REHEATELECTRIC X X X X SIGNAL 10V -0 TEMPERATURE AIR LEAVING COIL REHEATELECTRIC X X X SENSOR POINTSINGLE SENSORAIRFLOW X X X FLOW NO X HEATING SETPOINT, TEMPERATURESPACE X X X COOLING SETPOINT, TEMPERATURESPACE X X X TEMPERATURESPACE X X SETPOINT FROM F DEG 4 +/- TEMPERATURESPACE X PLANS TOREFER ADJUSTMENT SETPOINT TEMPERATURESPACE X X PLANS TOREFER OCCUPANCYSPACE X X X X PLANS TOREFER SETPOINT OCCUPANCY MINIMUM OCCUPANCY,SPACE X X X X PLANS TOREFER GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 CMD GDD M-205 1 N.T.S AIR SUPPLY MODCOM OR BACnet / MSTP: BACnet / ARCNET AI T AO- AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AO I H C SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SEVEN DIFFERENT DAILY SCHEDULES PER WEEK. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: ï»¿7 ï»¿8UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: ï»¿7 ï»¿64UNOCCUPIED: SPACE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE. ZONE OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A TIME OF DAY ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SCHEDULE. TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A PROGRAMMED ENABLED AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL VALVE SHALL BE SETPOINT (MINIMUM). IF THE ZONE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE HEATING HEATING: THE SUPPLY AIR VAV BOX SHALL INDEX TO THE HEATING AIRFLOW REHEAT COIL SHALL BE DISABLED. AIRFLOW SETPOINTS AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. THE ELECTRIC MODULATE BETWEEN THE COOLING MINIMUM AND COOLING MAXIMUM COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE SUPPLY AIR VAV BOX SHALL AIRFLOW SETPOINT. IF THE ZONE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING: THE SUPPLY AIR VAV BOX SHALL INDEX TO THE COOLING MINIMUM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SUPPLY BOX W/ ELECTRIC REHEAT MOD COM OR BACnet / MSTP: BACnet / ARCNET AO - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AIR EXHAUST HWSHWR F.L. N.O. AO WHERE SHOWN FIN TUBE RADIATION, ZONE INDICATES EXISTING BI OS sa d AI T SETPOINT AV REFER TO PLANS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME EXHAUST BOX PERIMETER FINTUBE RADIATION OFFICE E303 WITH AIR TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL AND PERIMETER FINTUBE RADIATION SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY F AI Summaries System Control Schematics & EF SP AI SETPOINT AV ES BO O C BI MVFD F AI BYPASS MOD AO P BI AIR EXHAUST ES BI CIRCUIT TO FAN REFER TO PLANS SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION BYPASS DAMPER GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SEVEN DIFFERENT DAILY SCHEDULES PER WEEK. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR AND SHALL REQUIRE MANUAL RESET. ALL SAFETIES SHALL BE HARD WIRED INTO THE FAN MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT, SETPOINTS EXHAUST FAN SUCTION LOW STATIC PRESSURE LIMIT: -6.0" W.C. OWNER) SYSTEM OCUPANCY SCHEDULE: 6 AM - 8 PM, MON-FRI (COORDINATE WITH START/STOP SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED AT ALL TIMES. SHUTOFF DAMPER CONTROL EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SYSTEM FANS ARE OFF, THE OUTSIDE AIR AND ASSOCIATED PRIOR TO STARTING THE SYSTEM FANS. ASSOCIATED EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL PROVE OPEN VIA END SWITCH WHEN THE SYSTEM FANS ARE INDEXED TO START, THE OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM CONTROL THE FAN SHALL MODULATE TO FULL OPERATING SPEED. DAMPER SHALL BE INDEXED TO OPEN. ONCE THE DAMPER IS PROVEN OPEN, MINIMUM START SPEED (20%), AT WHICH TIME THE ASSOCIATED FAN ISOLATION ON A CALL TO OPERATE, THE FAN SHALL BE INDEXED TO START AND RUN AT MODULATE CLOSED AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. RISES MORE POSITIVE THAN SETPOINT, THE BYPASS DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. IF THE EXHAUST DUCT STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT WITH THE FAN AT FULL SPEED, THE BYPASS DAMPER WILL OPEN AND IF THE EXHAUST DUCT STATIC PRESSURE FALLS MORE NEGATIVE THAN TO MAINTAIN THE CRITICAL ZONE DAMPER POSITION AT 95% OPEN. THE DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT SHALL BE RESET AS NEEDED CONTROL. THE FANS SHALL INDEX TO 40% OF FULL DESIGN FLOW. LABORATORY EXHAUST SYSTEM, THE SYSTEM SHALL INDEX AIRFLOW ON FAILURE OF THE MAKE-UP AIR HANDLING SYSTEM ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAFETIES OF THE LOW FAN SUCTION STATIC PRESSURE SWITCH. THE OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL CLOSE UPON ACTIVATION LOW FAN STATIC: THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL SHUT DOWN, LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN MINIMUM START SPEED: 20% OF MAX ASSOCIATED EXISTING AIR HANDLING UNIT. LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE INTERLOCKED WITH THE AIR HANDLING UNIT SYSTEM HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION EXHAUST FAN ISOLATION DAMPER OPEN/CLOSED X X EXHAUST FAN ISOLATION DAMPER STATUS X X X EXHAUST FAN START/STOP X X X X INTERLOCK WITH FA SYSTEM EXHAUST FAN SPEED COMMAND X X X EXHAUST FAN STATUS X X X FAILURE X VIA CONTACT ON DRIVE EXHAUST FAN POWER (KW) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT EXHAUST FAN SPEED (RPM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT EXHAUST FAN AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X MONITORING POINT ONLY EXHAUST FAN LOW SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT X X X LOW LIMIT X BYPASS AIR DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X BYPASS AIR DAMPER STATUS X X X EXHAUST FAN DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE X X X X 10% DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X EXHAUST FAN DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT X X X POINT SCHEDULE 2 N.T.S LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY SCHEDULEPOINT EQUIPMENT POINTS HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE GRAPHIC ONSHOW NOTES AV BV SCH TREND BI BO AI AO BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION SHED LOADSTEAM (6) X EMCS FROM INPUTS NETWRKBINARY SHED LOAD WATERCHILLED (4) X EMCS FROM INPUTS NETWRKBINARY COMMAND POSITION DAMPER BOX VAVSUPPLY X X X (CFM) FEEDBACK AIRFLOW BOX VAVSUPPLY X X X SETPOINT FROM DEVIATION FLOW10% X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW BOX VAVSUPPLY X X X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet (%) FEEDBACK POSITION BOX VAVSUPPLY X X X FEEDBACK TO EQUAL NOT COMMANDVALVE X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet COMMAND COIL REHEATELECTRIC X X X X SIGNAL 10V -0 TEMPERATURE AIR LEAVING COIL REHEATELECTRIC X X X SENSOR POINTSINGLE COMMAND POSITION VALVE RADIATION FINPERIMETER X X X LAST FAIL SENSORAIRFLOW X X FLOW NO X SETPOINT TEMPERATUREZONE X X X TEMPERATUREZONE X X X SETPOINT FROM F DEG 4 +/- TEMPERATURESPACE X PLANS TOREFER COMMAND POSITION DAMPER BOX VAVEXHAUST X X X (CFM) FEEDBACK AIRFLOW BOX VAVEXHAUST X X X X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet (CFM) SETPOINT AIRFLOW BOX VAVEXHAUST X X X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet (%) FEEDBACK POSITION BOX VAVEXHAUST X X X X POINT NETWORK MSTPBACnet OCCUPANCYSPACE X X X X PLANS TOREFER SETPOINT OCCUPANCY MINIMUM OCCUPANCY,SPACE X X X X PLANS TOREFER BO S S SCAO R BI TYPICAL VFD CONTROL/MONITORING POINTS VFD M R AOM SYSTEM FIRE ALARM WIRE TO COM BACnet / MSTP AV: SPEED (RPM) AV: POWER (KW) GDD 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. All rights reserved. © FI LE PATH: Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project Number 20636.00 NEER NGENG SyracuseRochester 585.288.5590 Buffalo www.meengineering.com Mechanical/Electrical Engineering Consultants 300 TROLLEY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14606 M/E Project #: 200278 Schenectady 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 Cornell University Ithaca, NY Laboratory & Office Renovation Corson Hall Third Floor Documents 100% Construction March 5, 2021 MINIMUM 6'-0" FROM GRILLE 2" WIDE DUCT COLLAR. SHEETMETAL PLENUM SAME SIZE AS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SIZE MINIMUM 6'-0" FROM GRILLE SHEETMETAL PLENUM SAME SIZE AS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SIZE 2" WIDE DUCT COLLAR. RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE FACE RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE FACE TRANSITION ANGLE OF 30 DEG MAXIMUM. TRANSITION ANGLE OF 30 DEG MAXIMUM. RETURN/EXHAUST DUCTWORK INCREASE WIDTH OF DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION OF FLEX CONNECTION TO DUCTWORK 1" THICK INTERNAL SOUND LINING RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SHEETMETAL PLENUM SAME SIZE AS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SIZE RETURN/EXHAUST DUCTWORK FLEX DUCT CONNECTION (SEE NOTE C) PLAN VIEW ELEVATION VIEW PLAN VIEW ELEVATION VIEW RETURN/EXHAUST DUCTWORK CEILING TYPE AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE FACE 12" MINIMUM DIMENSION FROM GRILLE FACE TO TOP OF PLENUM RETURN/EXHAUST DUCTWORK FLEX DUCT CONNECTION (SEE NOTE C) SHEETMETAL PLENUM SAME SIZE AS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SIZE 12" MINIMUM DIMENSION FROM GRILLE FACE TO TOP OF PLENUM CEILING TYPE AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE FACE RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK 1" THICK INTERNAL SOUND LINING PAINT INSIDE OF PLENUM BOX FLAT BLACK IF INTERNAL SOUND LINING IS NOT SPECIFIED. ALSO APPLICABLE TO REGISTERS. OMIT FLEX CONNECTION AND PROVIDE HARD CONNECTION TO GRILLES WHERE DUCTWORK IS EXPOSED OR WHERE DUCTWORK/GRILLE CONNECTION IS LOCATED ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DO NOT PROVIDE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DETAIL NOTES: A. B. C. FLOW RANGE (CFM) SIZE(IN.) 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 0-110 111-230 231-410 411-675 676-1000 1001-1400 1401-1950 1951-2500 MINIMUM FLEX DUCT DIAMETER MINIMUM 6'-0" FROM DIFFUSER SUPPLY AIR DUCT SUPPLY DIFFUSER MINIMUM 6'0" FROM DIFFUSER ALTERNATIVE #1 DECK, BEAM, OR JOIST NOTE: FLEX SHALL BE 4'-0" MAXIMUM WITH (1) 90 DEG BEND ELBOW SUPPORT FOR FLEX ALTERNATIVE #2 DUCT AND DIFFUSER SIZE AND TYPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. FLEX DUCT MAXIMUM LENGTH IS 24" WITH A 6" MAXIMUM OFFSET. OMIT FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION AND PROVIDE HARD CONNECTION TO DIFFUSERS WHERE DUCTWORK/DIFFUSER CONNECTION IS LOCATED ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DO NOT PROVIDE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DETAIL NOTES: A. B. C. DETAIL NOTES: A. PROVIDE WIND RESTRAINT PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 230550-WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS. ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX. LOCATE CONTROL RELAYS ADJACENT TO ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX. EXISTING ROOF DECK ROOF CURB CURB MOUNTING BRACKET BYPASS AIR PLENUM ISOLATION DAMPER EXHAUST FAN EXTENSION DRUM HIGH PLUME DISCHARGE NOZZLE 10'-0" MIN DETAIL NOTES: A. REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR LENGTH, WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF THE CANOPY HOOD. B. DUCT CONNECTION TO HOOD SHALL MATCH SIZE OF EXHAUST DUCTWORK. REFER TO PLANS FOR DUCTWORK SIZE. CANOPY HOOD AND EXPOSED DUCTWORK SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 304 STAINLESS STEEL, #3 POLISH FINISH, WELDED CONSTRUCTION DUCT CONNECTION SUPPORT CONNECTIONS (TYP.4) ROOF STRUCTURE LAY IN CEILING PROVIDE THREADED ROD FOR SUPPORT OF HOOD FROM ROOF STRUCTURE FUME HOOD FUME HOOD FUME HOOD WITH WORK SURFACE AT NON-ADA HEIGHT, 36" A.F.F. FUME HOOD WITH WORK SURFACE AT ADA HEIGHT, 30" A.F.F. DETAIL NOTES: 1 ROUND FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT CONNECTION, SHOWING FULLY COMPRESSED TO ACCOMMODATE 36" WORK SURFACE HEIGHT. 2 ROUND FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT CONNECTION, SHOWING FULLY EXTENDED TO ACCOMMODATE 30" WORK SURFACE HEIGHT. 3 FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT SHALL BE FLEXAUST FLEX-LOK TCF, 12" ROUND NOMINAL DIMENSION, 5:1 COMPRESSION RATIO, SUITABLE FOR CHEMICAL FUME EXTRACTION. DUCT COLLAR (TYP.) LAB EXHAUST DUCT (TYP.) 2 31 3 These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 4:10:11 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_M_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20636.00 NMJ Details - HVAC GDD SJG M-300 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021NOT TO SCALE 1 RETURN / EXHAUST GRILLE PLENUM DETAILNOT TO SCALE2 TYPICAL DIFFUSER INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE3 ROOF MOUNTED FAN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE4 CANOPY HOOD INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE5 ADA FUME HOOD INSTALLATION DETAIL These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 4:10:12 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_M_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20636.00 NMJ Schedules - HVAC GDD SJG M-400 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5, 2021 1 PROVIDE WITH HANGER BRACKETS REMARKS: EH-2 ACID WASH E334A 500 GREY PVC 9" 5 24 36 4 @ 3/8" A KEES SLOTTED BACK SHELF HOOD EH-1 E304 800 304 SS 10" 33 60 18 - T-3 KEES INDUSTRAIL OVERHEAD HOOD 1 (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) UNIT NO. LOCATION CFM MATERIAL CONNECTION WIDTH LENGTH HEIGHT SLOTS STYLE MANUFACTURER & MODEL No. REMARKS EXHAUST HOOD SCHEDULE 2. PANEL SIZE = 24 IN X 24 IN 1. PANEL SIZE = 24 IN X 48 IN REMARKS: A EXHAUST STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL 355-RL 3 SUPPLY 304 SS WHITE TITUS MODEL TRITEC 2 2 SUPPLY STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL TRITEC 2 1 SUPPLY STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL TRITEC 1 TYPE APPLICATION MATERIAL FINISH MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS REGISTER GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE 3. SCR CONTROLLER. 2. INTEGRAL SOUND ATTENUATOR. 1. LINERS: FIBER FREE LINER. REMARKS: VAV-1 E303 120 90 0.01 5 10 22 1.0 90 55 90 120 1 10.4 15 TITUS DESV 1,2,3 (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC) (CFM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) FLOW FLOW MAX CFM (In.) AIR FLOW TEMP. TEMP. AIR AIR PRESS AT SIZE AT 1" S.P. AT 1" S.P. (KW) HEATING ENT. AIR LVG. AIR VOLTS PHASE MCA MOP UNIT NO. SERVICE MAX MIN MIN INLET INLET RAD N.C. DISCH N.C. CAPACITY AIR SIDE ELEC. CHARACTERISTICS MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS VAV - SINGLE DUCT - AIR TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE - ELECTRIC REHEAT 8. MANUAL THERMAL CUTOUT 7. NEPTRONIC CONTROLLER 6. FULL BREAK CONTACTOR 5. DISCONNECT SWITCH 4. MAGNETIC CONTACTOR 3. AUTOMATIC THERMAL CUTOUT 2. ELECTRONIC AIRFLOW SENSOR 1. MODULATING SCR CONTROLLER REMARKS: ERHC-6 E334 OPEN LAB OPEN COIL FLANGED 7 - 630 55 90 12 12 208 3 19.4 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ERHC-5 E334A ACID WASH HOOD OPEN COIL FLANGED 4.2 - 375 55 90 12 12 208 3 11.7 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ERHC-4 E334B VESTIBULE OPEN COIL FLANGED 1.1 - 100 55 90 12 12 208 1 9.2 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ERHC-3 E318 SOIL ROOM OPEN COIL FLANGED 3.9 - 350 55 90 12 12 208 3 10.8 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ERHC-2 E305 OPEN COIL FLANGED 11.5 - 1030 55 90 .065 420 18 12 480 3 13.9 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ERHC-1 E304 OPEN COIL FLANGED 1 - 90 55 90 .010 120 12 10 120 1 8.3 INDEECO QUZ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 (CFM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (In. W.C.) (FPM) (In.) (In.) STEPS FLOW TEMP. TEMP. P.D. VELOCITY LENGTH WIDTH (KW) OF AIR ENT. AIR LVG. AIR AIR MIN. FACE VOLTS PHASE MCA UNIT NO. LOCATION TYPE MOUNTING CAPACITY NO. AIR SIDE COIL FACE... ELEC. CHARACTERISTCIS MANUFACTURER & MODEL No. REMARKS HEATING COIL SCHEDULE - ELECTRIC 8. SPECIAL COATING - HI-PRO-Z 7. SPARK RESISTANT 6. ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE 5. WEATHER COVER 4. ACCESS DOOR 3. DISCHARGE NOZZLE 2. ISOLATION DAMPER 1. BYPASS DAMPER REMARKS: LEF-1 ROOF E334A ACID WASH TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL BI 1.0 125 500 500 3,670 16.7 0.27 2487 79 DIRECT 3500 3/4 480 60 3 ASD GREENHECK VEKTOR-H-10 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 (CFM) (CFM) FLOW (CFM) (FPM) HEIGHT (Ft.-In.) SOUND (LWA) TYPE (In. WC) FLOW FLOW DISCHARGE VELOCITY EFFECTIVE BHP RPM DISCHARGE TYPE BLADE S.P. MIN INLET MAX INLET TOTAL NOZZLE DISCHARGE MAX. FAN MAX. DRIVE FEG RPM HP VOLTS HZ PHASE STARTER UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE FAN CHARACTERISTICS MIN. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS FAN SCHEDULE - LABORATORY EXHAUST 7. UNIT SHALL FAIL OPEN. 6. PROVIDE WITH TIGHT SHUT-OFF. 5 PROVIDE WITH FACTORY DRAW BAND CLAMPS IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 4. PROVIDE WITH FAN STATIC RESET IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 3. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY SOUND NEUTRALIZER IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 2. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL RANGE WITH ACTUAL SETPOINTS IN SOFTWARE 1. REFER TO THE LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. REMARKS: GEV-4 E334 E334 OPEN LAB 8 0 800 0 140 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 GEV-3 E334 E318 CANOPY HOOD 8 0 800 500 500 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 GEV-2 E305 E305 10 0 1300 190 600 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 GEV-1 E304 CANOPY HOOD 8 0 800 500 500 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 FEV-3 E334 E334 FUME HOOD 10 0 1300 280 630 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 FEV-2 E334 E334A ACID WASH HOOD 8 0 1300 125 500 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 FEV-1 E304 FUME HOOD 10 0 1300 280 630 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-6 E334 E334 OPEN LAB 10 0 1300 280 630 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-5 E334A E334A ACID WASH HOOD 8 0 800 0 375 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-4 E334B E334B VESTIBULE 8 0 800 100 100 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-3 E318 E318 SOIL ROOM 8 0 800 0 350 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-2 E305 E305 8 0 800 90 500 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 SAV-1 E304 E304 12 0 1790 180 1030 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC.) FLOW FLOW FLOW FLOW PRESSURE (In.) MIN AIR MAX AIR MIN AIR MAX AIR POSITION OPERATING UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE SIZE FACTORY RANGE OPERATIONAL RANGE MOUNTING MINIMUM MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS LAB AIR VALVE SCHEDULE BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 HEAVY SOLID IS NEW, EXISTING ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, SOLID LIGHT IS EXISTING TO REMAIN , EXISTING ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, DASED LIGHT IS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED , REFERENCE TO DRAWING NOTE OS J TOGGLE SWITCH, VOLTAGE AS INDICATED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE, SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: 2 - TWO POLE SWITCH 3 - THREE WAY SWITCH 4 - FOUR WAY SWITCH M - MONENTARY CONTACT K - KEY OPERATED a,b,c - SWITCHING DESIGNATIONS NUMBER OF LETTERS EQUALS NO. OF GANGED SWITCHES V - VACANCY SENSOR VD - VACANCY SENSOR, DIMMER SWITCH VDS - VACANCY SENSOR, DUAL SWITCHED WP - WEATHERPROOF QUAD RECEPTACLE 20 AMP, 125 VOLT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: G - GROUND FAULT INTERUPT OC - OVER COUNTER UC - UNDER THE COUNTER WP - WEATHER PROOF TP - TAMPER PROOF P - CEILING PROJECTOR, MOUNT IN PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATE USB - INTEGRAL USB CHARGER H - MOUNT IN HORIZONTAL DIRECTION SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE. PROVIDE PROPER VOLTAGE, CLASS, CURRENT RATING AND NEMA CONFIGURATION AS REQUIRED BY BRANCH CIRCUIT AND/OR MATCH CAP ON EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED BY OTHERS. PROVIDE CORD AND CAP. SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: J CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR JUNCTION BOX 3 a,b,c 3 REFERENCE TO DEMOLITION NOTE EXISTING TO REMAIN - INDICATES EXISTING ITEM SHALL REMAIN. MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (E) EXISTING TO BE RELOCATED - INDICATES EXISTING ITEM SHALL BE RELOCATED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE, REINSTALL AT NEW LOCATION AND RECONNECT ITEM AS REQUIRED. (ER) PUSH BUTTON COMMUNICATIONS EXISTING COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET TEL/DATA DROP: 4"x4"x2.50" BOX WITH A 1-GANG MUD RING & FACEPLATE WITH DUPLEX DESIGN. 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR ( UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. TERMINATE CONDUIT AT CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR WITH CONDUIT BUSHING. PULL (2) CAT 6 CABLE, TERMINATE AT PATCH PANEL IN BDF. W - SINGLE GANG BACK BOX WITH MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. WALL MOUNT AT 46"AFF. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. DDC - SINGLE GANG BOX WITH BLANK COVER PLATE. PROVIDE 3/4"C STUBBED TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. DDC ALARM WIRING BY DIV 23. C - CAMERA, COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. TV - COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. DSR DSS FSD FS TS FAAP FACP WAP H F F F SD S FIRE ALARM SMOKE DAMPER CONNECTION DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR, RETURN SIDE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR, SUPPLY SIDE FIRE ALARM SHUT DOWN RELAY FLOW SWITCH CONNECTION TAMPER SWITCH CONNECTION FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATION PANEL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL REMOTE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TEST INDICATOR RATE-OF-RISE HEAT DETECTOR ALARM SIGNAL, STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE ALARM SIGNAL, SPEAKER AND STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE MANUAL PULL STATION SMOKE DETECTOR M D CB T CONTACTOR ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER COMBINATION FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH AND MAGNETIC STARTER 208Y/120 VOLT PANELBOARD. TRANSFORMER COMPLETE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A d A d CEILING MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE STRIP LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE LIGHTING ZONE WALL MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE LIGHTING ZONE LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY POWER WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE WITH BATTERY PACK MOTOR CONNECTION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE FOR SIZE POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL 480Y/277 VOLT PANELBOARD. DISCONNECT SWITCH FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD. MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION LUMINAIRES TRACK LIGHTING DOUBLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE SINGLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE CEILING RECEPTACLE 4'-0" EXIT LIGHT SWITCH 2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO CENTER OF OUTLETS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IN MASONRY CONSTRUCTION THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE USED FOR REFERENCE TO NEAREST BLOCK OR BRICK COURSING. THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE ADHERED TO UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 1'-6" DIVIDED SURFACE RACEWA Y HORN/LIGHT LENS ON TOP FINISHED FLOOR PULLSTATION COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT. ENTIRE LENS SHALL BE MINIMUM 80" AFF AND NOT GREATER THAN 96" AFF. WHERE NOT PERMITTED BY CEILING HEIGHT DEVICE SHALL BE MOUNTED WITHIN 6" OF THE CEILING. 4'-0" EXIT SIGNS CENTERED ABOVE DOOR CR CARD READER, REFER TO DETAIL DC DOOR CONTACT COMBINATION POWER/COMMUNICATION SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED. WIREMOLD G4000. RACEWAY SHALL BE MOUNTED "OVER COUNTER" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. VS CEILING MOUNTED VACANCY SENSOR. WAP - WIRELESS ACCESS POINT WALL MOUNT AT 90"AFF 4"x4"x2.25" BOX WITH DOUBLE GANG PLASTER RING. 1" EMT CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). PROVIDE TWO (2) CAT 6A CABLES. TERMINATE IN BDF AND 6-8" PIGTAIL WITHOUT FACEPLATE. All WAP ARE WALL MOUNTED. REFER TO ARROWS ON DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION. EM TYPICAL EMERGENCY PHONE OUTLET LOCATION. PROVIDE 4"x4" BACKBOX WITH A SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND (1) 3/4" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. RTS ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY SIZE PER QUANTITY OF CABLES AND 50% FUTURE CAPACITY AT A MINIMUM. POWER AND DATA PULLBOX IN CEILING LP-10,# HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD. LETTERS/ NUMBERS INDICATE PANEL. NUMBERS INDICATE CIRCUITS. NUMBER OF ARROWS EQUALS NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. CIRCUIT SHALL BE 2-#12, 1#12EG FROM 20A-1P CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SIZE AND NUMBER TO MATCH HOMERUN. REFER TO SPEC'S FOR RACEWAY TYPE. SOLID HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 120 VOLT CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SOLID FULL ARROW(S) INDICATES 208 VOLT CIRCUIT TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT G. H. I. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, WHICH IS TO REMAIN, IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF DEMOLITION AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO THE OWNERS APPROVAL. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS FROM DAMAGE. COORDINATE PHASING OF WORK WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS WITH UNIVERSITY PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWNS SHALL BE SCHEDULED THROUGH CUSTOMER SERVICE WITH AT LEAST 24 HOURS NOTICE BEFORE WORK IS TO BE STARTED. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE AND ARE NOT GARAUNTEED. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, VISIT SITE AND IDENTIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIFFICULTIES THAT WILL AFFECT THE DEMOLITION WORK. NO COMPENSATION WILL BE GRANTED FOR ADDITIONAL WORK CAUSED BY UNFAMILIARITY WITH SITE CONDITIONS THAT ARE VISIBLE OR READILY CONSTRUED BY EXPERIENCED OBSERVERS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PARTICIPATE IN SURVEY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECT AND CAP ALL SERVICE LINES TO BE DISCONNECTED FOR THOSE SERVICES WHICH NORMALLY ARE INCLUDED IN HIS FIELD OF WORK. PARTICULAR CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO AVOID CREATING HAZARD OR CAUSING DISRUPTION IN ADJOINING AREAS. NOT ALL DEVICES TERMINATIONS, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIRING HAVE BEEN SHOWN. REFER TO PLUMBING CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE KEPT OPERATIONAL DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD THE BUILDING UNDER RENOVATION MAY BE DISCONNECTED FROM SERVICE DURING THE HOURS THE CONTRACTOR IS WORKING, AT THE DISCRETION OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, BUT MUST BE OKACED BACK ON LINE DURING OTHER PERIODS. APPROVAL TO BE IN WRITING. THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITHIN DEMOLITION AREA SHALL BE DEMOLISHED ALONG WITH ALL FEEDERS AND CONDUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL ITEMS SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALLBOXES, BACKBOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE REUSED AS DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR. ALL UNUSED CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED. DISCONNECT AND MAKE SAFE ANY EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. MAINTAIN AND RESTORE, IF INTERRUPTED BY REMOVALS OR IN PATH OF NEW CONSTRUCTION, ALL CIRCUITS, CONDUITS AND FEEDERS PASSING THROUGH AND SERVING UNDISTURBED AREAS (SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN). ALL EXISTING CONDUITS STUBBED THROUGH FLOOR SERVING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED AND NOT SHOWN OR REQUIRED TO BE REUSED, SHALL BE CUT OFF FLUSH WITH SLAB LEVEL WITH CONCRETE. IN ANY AREA REQUIRING THE PERFORMANCE OF ANY TRADE'S WORK WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REMOVE AND STORE ANY OR ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS IN PATH OF WORK, REINSTALLING AND RECONNECTING SAME AS REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS AND/OR AS DIRECTED AFTER COMPLETION OF OTHER TRADE'S WORK IN THAT AREA. DISCONNECT, MAKE SAFE AND REMOVE ALL TEMPORARY AND ABANDONED WIRE WITHIN THE SPACE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO DEVICES IN AREAS OF DEMOLITION SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, MADE SAFE AND REMOVED COMPLETELY BACK TO THE PANELBOARD. THE CONTRATOR SHALL NOT ABANDON BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO ANY AREAS WICH ARE TO REMAIN BUT ARE AFFECTED BY THE DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE PANEL, FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE PRIOR TO THE START OF DEMOLITION, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS AND MAINTAIN THOSE CIRCUITS THAT EXTEND OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK. AFTER RENOVATING EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THAT ALL REMAINING AND NEW EQUIPMENT WILL OPERATE PROPERLY. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT DETECTORS IN AREAS WHERE SPRINKLERS ARE REMOVED FROM SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR. REFER TO MACHANICAL CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES:(APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE-RATED PENETRATIONS. UTILIZE REMOVABLE FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL AT CABLE TRAY PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT FOR ALL NON RATED PENETRATIONS. ALL FIRE RATINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL CONDUIT ROUTES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4" FOR POWER CIRCUITS UOI. PROVIDE NYLON PULLSTRING IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS. FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THE ENTIRE LENS IS NOT LESS THAN 80 INCHES AND NOT GREATER THAN 96 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR. CIRCUITING TO DEVICES/EQUIPMENT SHALL BE 2-#12AWG & 1-#12EG (MULTIPLE HOME RUNS IN SAME CONDUIT MAY SHARE SAME EQUIPMENT GROUND) FOR EACH 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE SEPARATE NEUTRALS (CIRCUITS SHALL NOT SHARE NEUTRALS). PROVIDE CONDUIT/WIRING (CIRCUITING) AND REQUIRED EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES/EQUIPMENT. CONNECT TO CIRCUIT(S) AS INDICATED. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REFERENCE STANDARD EDITION OF NFPA CODES, AS CITED BY THE FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE, BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE AND CORNELL UNIVERSITY DESIGN STANDARDS. ALL CONDUITS AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE AS TIGHT TO DECK AS POSSIBLE. PROVIDE PULLBOX FOR EVERY 180 DEGREE OF BENDS FOR TEL/DATA AND 360 DEGREES OF BENDS FOR POWER CONDUITS. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES (RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM, ETC.) SHALL BE ALIGNED HORIZONTALLY AND VERTICALLY. CONTRACTOR TO SCHEDULE AND COORDINATE PROJJECT WALKTHROUGH WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY DEVICE ROUGH-IN FOR FINALIZATION OF ALIGNMENTS. REFER TO EAV SERIES DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL WORK. ALL EXISTING DEVICES CIRCUITED TO PANELS BEING RENAMED SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH UPDATED LABELS. PROVIDE ALL PATHWAYS AND BACK BOXES AS CALLED FOR ON AV DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY ANOTHER CONSULTANT. COORDINATE IT SERVICE CHANGES OR DISRUPTIONS IN SERVICE WITH CIT OPERATIONS AT 255-5500. ALL RECEPTACLES WITHIN 6' OF SINK EDGE SHALL BE GFCI TYPE. GENERAL NOTES: (APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. J. K. L. M. N. J. K. L. M. N. FCU FAN COIL UNIT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET CONT. CONTACTOR F.A.T.C. F.A.C.P. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER DISTRIBUTION PANEL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GENERAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING F.A. FIRE ALARM H.V.A.C. G.C. E.C. BSMT. BASEMENT CLG. EA. CONTR. GEN. CEILING EACH GENERATOR A. AMPERE DN. EXIST. AUTO. DOWN EXISTING AUTOMATIC DP EMERG. ELEC. G.F.C.I. ELECTRIC EMERGENCY HORSEPOWER GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL GND. GROUND GRS. ABBREV. ABBREVIATIONS C BKR. HP. CAMERA BREAKER DESCRIPTION FZ (3) FIRE ZONE (3) ABOVE FINISHED FLOORA.F.F. EM. EMERGENCY CONTRACTOR A.F.G. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE EWC MOUNTED UNDER COUNTER HEIGHT TV TELEVISION WEATHERPROOF REFRIGERATOR SPECIFICATION MOUNTED OVER COUNTER HEIGHT PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET T.B.B. MICRO T.T.C. MICROWAVE P.C. REFRIG. TYP. TYPICAL SPEC. P. SP. SPACE POLE NL NIGHT LIGHT V. VOLT SW. SWITCH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN LUG ONLY P = POLE A = AMPERE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY LTG. U.L. 4 W. KW. LIGHTING KILOWATT WIRE M.L.O. 3P.15A. PH. M.C.B. PHASE PNL. PANEL PV POWER VENTILATOR WP OC UC UV WG VP EF EHP CUH UNIT VENTILATOR WIRE GUARD FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER EXHAUST FAN CABINET UNIT HEATER VANDAL PROOF POLYCARBONATE GUARD ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV. DESCRIPTION WAP WIRELESS ACCESS POINT O. UH UNIT HEATER P. O. P. Q. AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER Q. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 12:06:44 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_E_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20636.00 MRG Symbols List & General Notes - Electrical GDD CRS E-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5,2021 E344C E331 E300SB E300C A300C A300UE A300UF A305 A306 A300TB A300UG A300S OPEN TO BELOW E301 E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E320 E309B DN DN DN UP S S F F F F WAP WAP S S S S S M M M M J J DSD RTS SD F WAP S F S J M F F S S M WAP WAP WAP DSD RTS SD DSD RTS SD DSD RTS SD J J E344C E331 E300SB E300C A306 A300TB A300UG E301 E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E320 E309B DN DN UP WAP WAP A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B Room E304A Room E306 OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 Room E325 OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A VEST E334B SOIL ROOM E318 Room E309A Room E309 OFFICE 311 KITCHENETTE 317C CONFERENCE 317B OPEN OFFICE 317 FACULTY OFFICE 317A FACULTY OFFICE 315 PLE3-9(E) GFI WP F' G' GFI (E) (E) (E)(E) GFI GFI EPLE3-2(E) EPLE3-3(E) 2 3 EXISTING TEL/DATA CLOSET ERHC-3 ERHC-4 ERHC-5 ERHC-6 LAB AIR VALVE LAB AIR VALVE (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) DPLE3-1(E) EPLE3-1(E) ELHE3-1(E) LHE3-1(E) DPHE3-1(E) PLE3-6(E) PLE3-10(E) DPLE3-3(E) PLE3-8(E) VAV-1 PLE3-1(E) PLE3-1(E), 10 ERHC-1 PLE3-1(E), 8 PLE3-6(E), 14,16 PLE3-8(E), 17 PLE3-8(E), 19 EPLE3-1(E), 17 EPLE3-1(E), 15 (E) ERHC-2 LHE3-1 10,12,14 EPLE3-3(E), 8 4 5 3 5 7 2 6 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15 1717 17 20 19 19 19 19 19 21 21 21 21 21 23 23 23 23 23 25 25 25 25 25 4 4 4 4 4 PLE3-5(E) PLE3-5(E), 6 PLE3-5(E), 8 PLE3-5(E), 9 PLE3-5(E), 6 PLE3-5(E), 8 DPLE3-2(E) 17 171717 12 12 12 10 10 10 3 3 1 1 6 8 6 6 6 PLE3-9(E), 18 H-2 PLE3-6(E), 9 10 18 9 1 17 EPLE3-3(E), 7 EPLE3-3(E), 10 DRAWING NOTES: 1. PROVIDE DUAL CHANNEL RACEWAY THAT SHALL BE INSTALLED OVER COUNTER WITH A RECEPTACLE EVERY 24" OC AND DATA CONNECTIONS EVERY 36" OC. ALL RECEPTACLES WITHIN 6' OF SINK SHALL BE GFI TYPE. 2. DATA DROP DDC - CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY PROVIDE PATHWAY TO ABOVE FINISHED CEILING FOR LOW VOLTAGE WIRING INTO BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT ON FINAL MOUNTING LOCATION OF QUAD RECEPTACLE AND ASSOCIATED DATA DROP WITH CASEWORK CONFIGURATION. 4. ALL 120V CIRCUITS TO THE LEFT OF NOTE 4 SHALL BE CRCUITED TO A 20A-1P DEDICATED CIRCUIT FROM EXISTING PANEL PLE3-6, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL 120V CIRCUITS TO THE RIGHT OF NOTE 5 SHALL BE CIRCUITED TO A 20A-1P DEDICATED CIRCUIT FROM EXISTING PANEL PLE3-9, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 E304 E304B E305E303 E318A E318 E334 E321 E323 EM UC (E) (E)(E) PLE3-9(E) (E) PLE3-8(E) EPLE3-3(E) DPLE3-3(E) DPLE3-1(E) EPLE3-1(E) ELHE3-1(E) LHE3-1(E) DPHE3-1(E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) GENERAL NOTES: A. DEMOLISH ALL CIRCUITING BACK TO SOURCE AND MAKE EXISTING BREAKER SPARE. B. TURN OVER REMOVED WAP IN CORRIDOR E300C TO CIT AS UNIVERSITY PROPERTY. C. DEMOLISH ALL TEL/DATA CABLING SHOWN ON PLANS BACK TO SOURCE. NO CABLES SHALL BE LEFT ABANDONED. GENERAL NOTES: A. ALL EM RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS SHALL COME FROM EXISTING PANEL EPLE3-2. B. ALL NEW NORMAL POWER CONNECTIONS SHALL COME FROM EXISTING PANEL PLE3-9. C. REFER TO ARCHITECT EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE FOR ALL POWER CONNECTIONS WITH ASSOCIATED X' ON PLANS. D. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES INTO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. E. SMOKE DAMPERS SHALL BE CIRCUITED TO EXISTING PANEL PLE3-8, CIRCUIT NUMBER 13. 120V 20A-1P BREAKER SHALL BE INSTALLED TO MATCH EXISTING PANEL SPECS AND KAIC RATINGS. F. ALL LAB AIR VALVES SHALL BE CIRCUITED TO EXISTING PANEL PLE3-8, CIRCUIT NUMBER 15. 120V 20A-1P BREAKER SHALL BE INSTALLED TO MATCH EXISTING PANEL SPECS AND KAIC RATINGS. G. ALL NEW FIRE ALARM SHALL BE CONNECTED INTO EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HARDWARE AND PROGRAMMING UPDATES. WIRING SHALL MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM. ALL FIRE ALARM SHALL BE IN RED CONDUIT. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/15/2021 4:09:03 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_E_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20636.00 MRG Partial Third Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems GDD CRS E-200 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5,2021 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Third Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems Demo E344C E331 E300SB E300C A306 A300TB A300UG E301 E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E320 E309B DN DN UP a,b OS OS OS OS OS OS OS OS 3 D 3 D a,b D OS VS D D OS E344C E331 E300SB E300C A306 A300TB A300UG E301 E310 E340 E344A E344 E344B E320 E309B DN DN UP 3 3 A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FACULTY OFFICE E303 LAB E305 LAB E304 DARK ROOM E304B Room E304A Room E306 OFFICE E321 COMPUTATIONAL LAB E323 Room E325OPEN LAB E334 ACID WASH E334A VEST E334B SOIL ROOM E318 Room E309A Room E309 OFFICE 311 KITCHENETTE 317C CONFERENCE 317B OPEN OFFICE 317 FACULTY OFFICE 317A FACULTY OFFICE 315 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) X1 X1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 1 1 1 1 1 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L3 L3 L4 L4 L5 X1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L6 L6 2 A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 E304 E304B E305E303 E318A E318 E334 E321 E323 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E)(E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 1 DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. SALVAGE EXISTING LIGHTING FEEDER FOR REUSE IN NEW WORK PHASE. DRAWING NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL UTILIZE SALVAGED LIGHTING FEEDERS AS APPLICABLE FOR NEW LIGHTING. EXTEND FEEDERS AS REQUIRED. 2. OCCUPANCY SENSOR SHALL BE UTILIZED FOR HVAC SYSTEM. SENSOR SHALL NOT TIE INTO LIGHT FIXTURE. GENERAL NOTES: A. CONTRACTOR SHALL TIE NEW EM LIGHTING INTO NEAREST AVAILABLE EM LIGHTING CIRCUIT. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL TIE NEW EXIT LIGHTING INTO NEAREST AVAILABLE EXIT LIGHTING CIRCUIT. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 12:06:47 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_E_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20636.00 MRG Partial Third Floor Plan - Lighting GDD CRS E-201 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5,2021 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Third Floor Plan - Lighting 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Plan - Lighting Demo 6234 39 28 505 A4POU A4P0S E4P0SB E4P0U ROOF E4P0U UP DN LADDER UP DN UP 1019A_A4P0U 1019A_A4P0S M ASD A C D F H 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 LEF-11 EXISTING MCC-3 PLE4-7 LEF-1 3 C D F 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 E412B E412C E412 E440 E416 E416A DPLE4-3(E) PLE4-7(E) DRAWING NOTES: 1. GFI WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED WITHIN 25' OF EQUIPMENT BY NEC. SHALL BE MOUNTED ON STAINLESS STEEL UNISTRUT. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL RELOCATE (2)1" CONDUITS FOR NEW DUCT CHASE. COORDINATE IN FIELD WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE (3)#4AWG & (1)#8EG IN REROUTED CONDUIT. PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX AT EACH CONNECTION POINT. COORDINATE ALL SHUT DOWNS WITH OWNER. 3. NEW BUCKET FOR LEF-1 SHALL UTILIZE SPARE BUCKET AND MATCH ALL MCC SPECS BY WESTINGHOUSE. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 12:06:47 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_E_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20636.00 MRG Partial Fourth Floor & Roof Plan - Electrical GDD CRS E-202 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5,2021 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Roof Plan - Electrical 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Electrical LINE NEUTRAL BLK LOAD WHITE / NEUTRAL RED (LINE) POWER/RELAY PACKWHT. BLK. OFF SWITCH RED (LOAD) BLU BLK RED CONTROL OUTPUTBLU COMMON +24VDCRED BLU CONTROL OUTPUT COMMONBLK +24VDC CEILING SENSOR CEILING SENSOR RED EQUIPMENT: "INSERT DESIGNATION" POWER SOURCE: "INSERT SOURCE" TYPE SUPPLY: INSERT-NORMAL, OR CRITICAL OPERATION POWER, OR OPTIONAL STANDBY, OR LEGALLY REQUIRED, OR LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY AS APPLICABLE" VOLTAGE: "INSERT APPLICABLE VOLTAGE-208/120V OR 480/277V, ETC." CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: PHASE A - "BLACK OR BROWN" PHASE B - "RED OR ORANGE" PHASE C - "BLUE OR YELLOW" NEUTRAL - "WHITE OR GRAY" GROUND - GREEN AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: "INSERT AMPS RMS" PROVIDE CUSTOM NAMEPLATE AS INDICATED FOR ALL PANELBOARDS, MCC'S, SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, TRANSFER SWITCHES, GENERATORS ETC. NAMEPLATE SHALL BE ENGRAVED (WHITE LETTERING, BLACK BACKGROUND) AND ATTACHED TO THE EQUIPMENT WITH SCREWS. LETTERING SHALL BE 1/4" HIGH WITH SPACE BETWEEN LINES 1/8" MINIMUM. MINIMUM SHALL BE 8"H x 8"W. PROVIDE SAMPLE NAMEPLATE FOR REVIEW. THE AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE PROVIDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. 2. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 3. 4. BRANCH BREAKER NUMBER TYPICAL BLNL5-17 GENERAL DETAIL NOTES: PANEL NAME HL-T106-17 HL-T106-17 RECEPTACLE (EMERGENCY CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE SHALL BE "RED") B. PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. CONNECT TO GROUND BUS IN PANEL. DO NOT INSTALL RECEPTACLES, COMPUTER OR TELEPHONE OUTLETS BACK TO BACK. INSTALL IN ADJACENT STUD CAVITIES, TO REDUCE SOUND TRANSMISSION. A. 1/2" CONDUIT TO ABOVE LAY-IN CEILING WITH BUSHED END GROUNDING PIN ON TOP OR TO LEFT OF OUTLET ON HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLES 1/2" CONDUIT TO ABOVE LAYIN CEILING WITH BUSHED END TAPE LABEL, VERIFY COLOR WITH OWNER, ADHERE TO COVERPLATE. (ACTUAL CIRCUIT INFORMATION SHALL BE AS INSTALLED AND NOT NECESSARILY THE SAME CIRCUIT NUMBER AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS.) 3/4" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT OR MC CABLE MAXIMUM 6' LENGTH 3/4" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT OR MC CABLE MAXIMUM 6' LENGTH TYPICAL 2'x4' LUMINAIRE 3/4" EMT 3/4" EMT REFERENCE NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL NEW BREAKERS AS REQUIRED TO FEED EQUIPMENT. NEW BREAKERS SHALL MATCH ALL EXISTING PANELBOARD SPECS AND KAIC RATINGS. LOAD CEILING SENSOR 120/277V LOW VOLTAGE MOMENTARY SWITCH ADDITIONAL SWITCHES AS INDICATED ON THE PLAN VIEWS DETAIL NOTES: 0-10VDC DIMMING SIGNAL PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SENSORS AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURERS. ADDITIONAL SWITCH PACKS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ACCOMMODATE THE SENSOR QUANTITIES, MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS, AND INDICATED SEQUENCE. 0-10VDC DIMMER SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE INDICATED LUMINAIRE TYPE POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS. CONTRO L OUTPUT COMMON +24 VDC SWITCH PACK NEUTRAL LINE D 2 1 2 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ROOM UNOCCUPIED: LIGHTING TO BE OFF AFTER TIME DELAY FROM LAST MOTION SENSING. ROOM OCCUPIED: UPON SENSING OF MOTION IN THE SPACE, THE SENSOR SHALL ENABLE THE SWITCH PACK BUT NOT ENERGIZE THE LIGHTING (LOAD) UNTIL MANUAL OPERATION OF THE MOMENTARY SWITCH(ES). LIGHTING SHALL REMAIN ENERGIZED UNTIL MOTION IS NOT SENSED (INITIATE TIME DELAY, SET FOR 30 MINUTES) OR ANOTHER OPERATION OF THE MANUAL MOMENTARY SWITCH AND THEN DE-ENERGIZE. DIMMER SHALL CONTROL OUTPUT WHENEVER ENERGIZED. 1. 2. 3. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 3/10/2021 12:06:48 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\200278_Corson3rdFloor_E_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20636.00 MRG Electrical Details & Schedules GDD CRS E-300 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Ithaca, NY March 5,2021NTS 3 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR (MULTIPLE SENSORS) NTS 1 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DETAIL 1/8" = 1'-0" 4 TYPICAL RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS NTS 2 TYPICAL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING FOR CEILING X1 LED EXIT SIGN EXITRONICS MODEL: VEX SERIES LED 120/277V N/A L6 1'x2' LED LAB SPACE RECESSED FIXTURE W/ UL94 METALUX: 12EN-LD2-43-UNV-L840-CD1 LED 120/277V 4000K L5 2'x4' RECESSED PRISMATIC TROFFER WITH BOTH WHITE AND 620 NM RED LEDS. BOTH WHITE AND RED LEDS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING INDEPENDENTLY POWERED AND DIMMED. KENALL: CSEDI-24-23R/67L-40K8-DCC-DV-2F-2H-SYM LED 120/277V 4000K L4 2'x4' RECESSED PRISMATIC TROFFER KENALL: CSEDI-24-23R/67L-40K8-DCC-DV-2F-2H-SYM LED 120/277V 4000K L3 2'x4' ARCHITECTURAL RECESSED TROFFER METALUX: 24EN-LD2-45-UNV-L835-CD1 LED 120/277V 3500K L2 1'x4' SURFACE MOUNTED VAPORTIGHT METALUX: 4VT2-LD4-4-DR100-W-UNV-L840-CD1-WL LED 120/277V 4000K L1 1'x4' LED LAB SPACE RECESSED FIXTURE W/ UL94 METALUX: 14EN-LD2-43-UNV-L840-CD1 LED 120/277V 4000K TYPE DESCRIPTION MFR. & CATALOG No. LAMP VOLTAGE/BALLAST COLOR REFERENCE NOTES LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE NTS 5 CEILING MOUNTED VACANCY SENSOR VAV-1 VAV 3RD FLOOR 1 120 10.4 DPLE3-3 20/1 2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 VAV-1 ERHC-6 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 7 3 208 19.4 DPLE3-2 30/3 3#10 1#10 3/4"C 3#10 1#10 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-6 ERHC-5 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 4.2 3 208 11.7 DPLE3-2 20/3 3#12 1#12 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-5 ERHC-4 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 1.1 1 120 9.2 DPLE3-3 20/1 2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-4 ERHC-3 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 3.9 3 208 10.8 DPLE3-3 20/3 3#12 1#12 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-3 ERHC-2 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 11.5 3 480 13.8 LHE3-1 20/3 3#12 1#12 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-2 ERHC-1 ELECTRIC REHEAT COIL 3RD FLOOR 1 1 120 8.3 DPLE3-3 20/1 2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU 1 ERHC-1 LEF-1 EXHAUST FAN ROOF 3/4 3 480 1.6 MCC-3 15/3 3#12 1#12 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF A4POU Y 1 LEF-1 PHASE GROUND CONDUIT PHASE GROUND CONDUIT SWITCH AMPS FUSE SIZE LOC. WEATHER PROOF REF. NOTES ITEM ID NAME ROOM LOCATION HP KW PHASE SYSTEM VOLTS MCA or SYSTEM AMPS PANEL or CONTROL CENTER CIRCUIT BREAKER or "FU" FOR FUSE POWER WIRING FROM PANEL TO CONTROL UNIT POWER WIRING FROM CONTROL UNIT TO EQUIPMENT NEMA SIZE STARTER NEMA TYPE MANUAL MOTOR STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER COMBINATION STARTER MP/FUSE (F) SIZE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH BYPASS ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH REDUNDANT ASD PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT FURNISHED BY OTHERS DUPLEX PUMP CONTROLLER BY OTHERS FIRE ALARM FAN SHUTDOWN REQUIRED SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION RETURN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION EXHAUST DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION THERMOSTAT CONNECTION AQUASTAT CONNECTION MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION START/STOP PUSHBUTTONS HAND/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL DEVICE LOCATION SAFETY SWITCH ITEM ID EQUIPMENT POWER SOURCE, PROTECTION & WIRING CONTROL DEVICES AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS BY ITEM DESIGNATION G. "IU" INDICATES INTEGRAL WITH UNIT. F. "NF" INDICATES NON-FUSED. E. "AU" INDICATES CONTROL DEVICES IS LOCATED AT THE UNIT. D. PROVIDE OVERLOADS, SIZE AS REQUIRED, BY THE DIVISION 22/23 CONTRACTOR. C. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B. ITEM NUMBER INDICATES EQUIPMENT NUMBER A. ALL DEVICES PROVIDED BY THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: Specifications.pdf CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Project Manual & Specifications March 05, 2021 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, DPC 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TABLE OF CONTENTS LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01 45 33 Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TABLE OF CONTENTS LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Page 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 05 23 VALVES 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 07 00 INSULATION 22 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 22 70 10 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 04 ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 30 ROOF CURBS 23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 05 50 WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 07 10 INSULATION 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 31 CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW 23 20 10 PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 10 WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 31 00 SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 23 33 13 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 23 34 00 FANS 23 36 00 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 23 82 16.10 DUCT COILS (ELECTRIC) DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 20 00 ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 21 00 LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 03 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TABLE OF CONTENTS LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Page 3 DRAWINGS GENERAL G-000 Cover Sheet G-001 Code Compliance Plan & Notes HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AR-101 Asbestos Abatement Plan and Notes ARCHITECTURAL A-000 General Notes and Legends A-101 Partial Third Floor Plans – E303-E305 A-102 Partial Third Floor Plans – E318-E334 A-103 Partial Third Floor Reflective Ceiling Plans – E318-E334 A-104 Partial Plans A-420 Interior Elevations – E303-E305 A-421 Interior Elevations – E318-E334 A-501 Interior Details, Lab Casework A-601 Interior Details & Door Schedule A-602 Finish Plans & Schedule A-603 Lab Equipment and Fume Hood Schedule A-604 Specifications PLUMBING P-000 General Notes and Symbols List - Plumbing P-100 Partial Second Floor Plans - Pluming P-101 Partial Third Floor Plans – Plumbing Demolition P-201 Partial Third Floor Plans - Plumbing FIRE PROTECTION FP-000 General Notes and Symbols List FP-100 Partial Third Floor Plans - Fire Protection MECHANICAL M-000 General Notes and Symbols List - HVAC M-100 Partial Third Floor Plans – HVAC M-101 Partial Fourth Floor and Roof Plans - HVAC M-200 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-201 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-202 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-203 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-204 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-205 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-300 Details - HVAC M-400 Schedules - HVAC ELECTRICAL E-000 General Notes & Symbols List - Electrical E-200 Partial Third Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems E-201 Partial Third Floor Plan - Lighting E-202 Partial Fourth Floor & Roof Plan - Electrical E-300 Electrical Details & Schedules END OF DOCUMENT Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, DPC 387 East Main Street Rochester New York, 14604 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. • Pre-Bid Conference video and other materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/fl7w8m70xhnx bhjwffqlrkx3m9kgobmf Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use. b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A PreBid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance. 3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 9:00AM, April 5, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/92498767106?pwd=eWs3Vm51S0I1M0dTeVJuN0oxVjNEUT 09&from=addon In person, on site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below. 6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. 9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 2:00PM, on April 21, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 14. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contract s/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 15. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 17. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 18. START OF WORK a. Upon discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work or the Project has been deemed essential, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder further agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration Schedule. 1. Work shall be completed within (140) calendar days from the commencement of construction activities on site. 2. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7 b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 19. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 20. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1 CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name: Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable Street Address, City, State, Zip Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated March, 05, 2021, prepared by SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, DPC, 387 East Main Street, Rochester, New York 14604, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows: • A goal of 3.2% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. • A goal of 3.6% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. 3. Milestone Dates a. Upon project being deemed essential or discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration. i. Work shall be completed within (140) calendar days from the commencement of construction activities on site. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2 b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established. c. Following are additional Milestone Dates: N/A d. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3 d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4 10. Acceptance a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. e. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (as applicable): f. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the sole discretion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the Work. g. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. h. Alternates: 1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. Addendum No. __ dated ____. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5 2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields Bid Proposal Certification Form (this Form) signed and executed Project Duration Schedule Bid Bond Proposed Project Team Resumes (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then __________________ _____________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated: Rev 12.2018 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 12.2018 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 12.2018 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 3 Rev 12.2018 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 5 Rev 12.2018 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof are the property of the Owner and are not to be used on other work Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 6 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 12.2018 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "asbuilt" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 9 Rev 12.2018 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 10 Rev 12.2018 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev 12.2018 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 14 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. 15 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. 16 Rev 12.2018 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form. 17 Rev 12.2018 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/res ourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19 Rev 12.2018 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 12.2018 D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 21 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 22 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 23 Rev 12.2018 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the EBuilder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 24 Rev 12.2018 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 25 Rev 12.2018 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. 26 Rev 12.2018 Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 27 Rev 12.2018 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and subsubcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 28 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. 29 Rev 12.2018 Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Kelli Hulslander) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. 30 Rev 12.2018 C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in the Bid Proposal Certification Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html. E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract. F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation. Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed. B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D". Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/projectcontractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report 31 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor. ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. 32 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. 33 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. EXHIBIT "A" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK: NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TOTAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address: Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date: % Goals MBE: 3.2% WBE: 3.6% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates (Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title: Signature: Date: MWBE Contract Percentages Summary % MBE Totals WBE Totals EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 2 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, SubSubcontractor, or Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: Base Hourly Rate: $ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) * Worker's Compensation * Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % = $ * Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices: $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience modifications have been applied against manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________ DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. $ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________ Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project Number___________________________ Evaluators; Project Team_____________________________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________ Substantial Completion________________ Contractor___________ ___________________________________ Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________ Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________ Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________ Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___ Subcontractor___ Construction Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and accuracy c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completeness b. Controlling of project schedule c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project schedule e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety a. Timely submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation of safety rules and regulations d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptly e. Timely submission of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questions Comments: Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:________________________________________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category % Scoring 1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00% 0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00% 0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00% 0 4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00% 0 5 Safety 0 10.00% 0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00% 0 7 Working Relationships 0 10.00% 0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00% 0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00% 0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectatio 5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS: (To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued. 1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses, entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of the foregoing elements. 2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site, project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing the Contracted Work. 2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary to engage in qualifying construction activities. 2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to: 2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site 2 2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State Executive Orders 2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with all applicable job site safety requirements 2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County, City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of the Work for the duration of the contract. 3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices are in place, not for substantive review or approval. 3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion. 4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf 4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home 4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html 3 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative. 6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any onsite construction activity. MARCH 05, 2021 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY AND OFFICE RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................... .............................................1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ...................................... ...................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................... ................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ............................................... ...............1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION .................................................... ......................2 1.5 PARKING ..........................................................................................................2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS............................................................... ....4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................... .............................7 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1 1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................... ..........................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ........................ ...........................................................................1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................... ..................2 1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ................................ ........................3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .................................................... .........................................6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ...................... ....................................8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ............................ .............................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................8 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................ ....................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ................................................................................... ......4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .............................. ...1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .................................................... ...................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................... .............................................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ................................................................ ......4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ................................................... ....................................4 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................................... ...............................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ................................................................... ........1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS ................................................................... ..............................3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ..................................... ..........................................................................3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................... ................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ................................................... ...............................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION ..................... ..........................................................................................1 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................1 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................................................... ...............................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3 1.5 SAMPLES....................................................................................... ...................4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................6 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................................7 1.9 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................9 1.10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................9 1.11 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ............................................................................... ....9 1.12 DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................10 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ....................................................... ................................10 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................................10 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1 1.3 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................2 1.4 LEAD ....................................................................... ..........................................3 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION ..............................................................................3 1.6 SITE VISITS .................................... ..................................................................3 1.7 CONFINED SPACE ..........................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .............................................................. .........................3 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................. ...................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ ..1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...................................................................... .........2 1.6 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .......................................... ...........2 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................3 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..................................................... .........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION ..................... ..................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ............................................... .1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ......................................... ....................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.3 COMPLIANCE............................... ...................................................................1 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................................... ................2 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................. ..................................................................................1 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................... ........2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS .............................................................. ................4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED .................................................................. ......................17 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................17 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL ........................... ............................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION........ ..........................................................................................1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4 TESTING ................................................................................................... ........3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .................................................................. .......................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ..........................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION......... .........................................................................................1 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY ........................................................1 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES .................................................................................2 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY ...............3 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................................. .......................................................1 1.1 REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS .............................................................................. ............2 1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.5 PAYMENT .......................................................... ..............................................2 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................................2 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................2 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY ...............................................................................3 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING ................................................................................3 3.0 DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................... .............3 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS .............................................................................3 3.2 COMMUNICATION ............................................................... ..........................4 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS .......................................................................5 3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS............................... ...............5 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1 1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................... ..........................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ................................................................................. .3 2.5 SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES .................................................... ....................4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................5 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................5 2.10 SECURITY .............................................................................................. ..........5 2.11 FIELD OFFICES ...............................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION ......................................................... ......................................................5 3.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5 3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................6 3.3 REMOVAL ............................................................................... .........................6 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................... ...............................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................... ........1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ..............................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ..................................................3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................4 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ................... ............................................................................................4 3.1 REMOVAL ............................................................................................. ...........4 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .............................................................................. ......................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE ....................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ................................................................................... ......4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ............................ .......1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION............................................. .....................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES .......................................................................................... .......4 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4 2.1 MATERIALS ................................................ .....................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................4 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................. ...............................5 3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5 3.4 CLEANING ......................................... ..............................................................7 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INSPECTIONS .................................................... ..............................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...........................................................................................3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................... .............................4 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................ ....................................................1 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................... ...............................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... .....1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ...................................................... ..........................1 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES ............................. ................3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................... .............................7 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ......................................................... ...........................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................. ......................1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS............................................. ........................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................... ..........................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION .......................................... .....................................................................4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................4 MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS................................................. ..................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.................................. ................................................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING ........................................... .........................................................1 1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................................... ................4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work to be Done 1. Renovation of approximately 1,471 GSF of existing wet-laboratory space and 754 GSF of office space on the third floor of Corson Hall that will be occupied by two new faculty members. Demolition includes removal of existing laboratory casework, flooring, most ceilings, lighting, and MEP systems; including removal of asbestoscontaining materials as hazardous materials. 2. Lab Suite 1 includes existing rooms E303, E304, E304B and E305. Existing wet-lab research space in E304 / E304B will be substantially gutted and reconstructed with new partitions, finishes, ceilings, MEPFP systems and laboratory casework. E305 will be converted from office use to wet-lab research. Existing partitions will remain, with upgrades to MEP systems, new finishes, ceiling, lighting, and window treatments. E303 will remain as an office, with new finishes, ceiling, lighting, and window treatments. 3. Lab Suite 2 includes existing rooms E318, E318A, E321, E323 and E334. Existing wet-lab research space in E318 / E318A / E334 will be substantially gutted and reconstructed with new partitions, finishes, ceilings, MEPFP systems and laboratory casework. E321 will remain as an office, with new finishes and window treatments. E323 will be converted for computational (non-wet lab) research, with new finishes, power / data and window treatments. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts. B. New York State Electric & Gas (NYSEG): 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the project management of NYSEG work including coordinating any scheduling associated with the Project. 2. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost associated with the work to be performed by NYSEG. No NYSEG costs shall be carried in the Contractor’s bid. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations. B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. Due to ongoing work at the Palm Road lot, parking may be limited. 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Kelli Hulslander) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contra cts/forms/contractors.cfm. D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. 4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: 1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. 2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect all adjacent work. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 D. Existing or Archived Drawings 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required. 1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): a. Commencement Weekend  Sunday, May 30, 2021 2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Sunday, May 30, 2021 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon 3. Student and Campus Life Residence Halls Open August 18, 2021  No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site.  All work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site. 4. Courses Study Time & Final Exams: *See below. While future dates are unknown at this point, the Contractor shall assume these general timeframes for the duration of the project. 1) May 15 – 18, 2021 – Study Period 2) May 19 – 25, 2021 – Finial Exams 3) December 8 – 10, 2021 – Study Period 4) December 11 – 18, 2021 – Finial Exams CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 * Contractor shall assume that the “Study Time and Final Exam” periods are accurate for the University, but that the Owner has specific exam times falling within these periods. Contractor should assume 80 hours wherein a no noise restriction applies to be used at the discretion of the Owner, but falling within the “Study Time and Final Exam” Periods noted above. Specifically, this means that absolutely no construction noise may be transmitted by virtue of this project to the lecture halls, tutorial rooms, classrooms, library, etc. during the to-be-determined 80 hour period. The Owner will provide information relative to the specific times and locations no less than two weeks in advance of scheduled exams at the Contractor’s request. The 80 hours are to be included with no right to claim for additional cost or time or delays to construction schedule. 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products. 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved. 3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage. 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-8 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 05, 2021 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project. B. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. B. Training 1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 05, 2021 2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly 4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and preconstruction surveys. 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends. F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited. G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 05, 2021 I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification Sections K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats. L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 05, 2021 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein. C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Structural framing b. Subcontractor work CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 c. Equipment installations d. Finishes e. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PHOTOGRAPHIC 01 32 33-1 LAB &OFFICE RENOVATION DOCUMENTATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Submittals 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. 2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs. 3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction. 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review. C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan. 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings 6. Certification of Asbestos free products 7. Owner audio/visual 8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any nonelectronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review) 2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required) 10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in section 01 32 16. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.9 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual. 1.10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.11 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. 6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.12 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH 01 35 29-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION & SAFETY MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-s afety 1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH 01 35 29-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION & SAFETY MARCH 05, 2021 C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply. 2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 ASBESTOS A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Removal and disposal of asbestos containing material shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with Division 2 specifications. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH 01 35 29-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION & SAFETY MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 LEAD A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team. 1.6 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. 1.7 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” January 25, 2013 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: DR Corson Hall, SG Mudd Hall and Biological Science Atrium - Suspect Material Overview Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Dale R. Corson Hall (Building 1019E), Seeley G. Mudd Hall (Building 1019W) and the Biological Science Atrium (Building 1019A. It should be noted that a comprehensive “Full Building” Asbestos Survey has not been performed at DR Corson Hall, SG Mudd Hall or the Biological Science Atrium and other suspect building materials not listed/included below are known to be present in the Buildings. As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA and NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the affected renovation areas and the associated suspect materials present in each. When these “other” undocumented suspect materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given project’s Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey. Based on previous Delta sampling efforts and bulk sample information from Cornell University’s 4D Database, the following is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing wherever present in the Complex. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given material was either sampled as a part of the facility-wide SG Mudd/Atrium/DR Corson Telecommunications Survey or included in the Cornell 4D Database, so the material classification is applicable for the given material wherever present in the Complex. 1) Asbestos Containing Materials: Gray Rolled Flooring and associated paper backing Tan Stone Pattern Rolled Flooring and associated paper backing Black Sink Top Caulk Black Sink Top Mastic Black Lap Top Mastic Black Lab Top Back-Splash Mastic Black Lab Top Seam Sealer Fume Hood Transite Panels and associated Bench-tops 2) Non-Asbestos Materials: - Hard-Packed Fitting Insulation from Chilled Water System Supply & Return Lines - Hard-Packed Fitting Insulation from Steam System Supply & Return Lines - Cloth Backing from Metal Ceiling System Insulation - Top Coat Wall/Ceiling Plaster DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 2 of 2 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” 2) Non-Asbestos Materials (continued): - Base Coat Wall/Ceiling Plaster - Skim-Coat Material on Concrete - Green-board Wall Board - Joint Compound from Green-board Wall Board - Fireproofing - “Newer” Drywall - Joint Compound from “Newer” Drywall - “Original” Gypsum Board/Sheetrock - Joint Compound from “Original” Gypsum Board/Sheetrock - Gray Cement Board Wall Panel - Ceramic Wall Tile Mastic on Green board - White Grout from Ceramic Wall Tile - Mortar Bed from Gray 4” Ceramic Wall Tile - White Grout from Gray 4” Ceramic Wall Tile - White Ceramic Wall Tile Mastic - White Ceramic Wall Tile Grout - 2’ x 4’ Pinhole-patterned Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 4’ Smooth-patterned Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 4’ Fissured-patterned Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 4’ Rigid Textured Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 4’ Heavy Textured Pinhole-patterned Ceiling Tile - 1’ x 1’ Fissured-patterned Splined Ceiling Tile - 1’ x 1’ Textured Splined Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 2’ Pinhole-patterned Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 2’ Textured Recessed Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 2’ Smooth-Finish Ceiling Tile Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey must be performed by a New York State Department of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos Inspector and would include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of bulk samples for those suspect materials encountered that have not been previously identified. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control B. Section 01 35 45 – Refrigerant Compliance 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 2. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 3. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site. B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust. B. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterial DisposalPlan.pdf C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. (2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REGULATORY 01 41 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca. D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REGULATORY 01 41 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h. International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National Electric Code 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 6. All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.” L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor. W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract. Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes. AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cf r/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required. iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track nonconforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION SERVICES MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited to the following: 1. New York State Building Code, Chapter 17, Special Inspections 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing ". C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York. D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. F. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION SERVICES MARCH 05, 2021 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards, ASTM, other recognized authorities, and as specified. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. The Architect shall determine whether remedial action is necessary. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents. F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which have not yet been repaired or resolved. G. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION SERVICES MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel. Provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified. C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's responsibility. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Special Inspections and Structural Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of New York State (BCNYS). B. Hold a Special Inspections preconstruction meeting at least seven (7) days prior to the initial planned date for start of construction. 1. Discussion shall include the following: a. Review of specifications and Schedule of Special Inspections for work requiring Special Inspections. b. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional. c. Notification and reporting procedures. 2. Attendees shall include the Contractor, Owner’s representative, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professionals for Structural Engineering and for Architecture. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Registered Design Professional: The licensed Professional Engineer or Registered Architect whose seal appears on the Construction Drawings. B. Code Enforcement Official: The Officer or other designated authority charged with administration and enforcement of the BCNYS. C. Testing/Inspecting Agency: An agent retained by the Special Inspector or by the Owner and coordinated by the Special Inspector, to perform some of the inspection services on behalf of the Special Inspector. (An example of an Inspecting Agent is a Geotechnical Engineer.) D. Statement of Special Inspections: A document prepared by the Registered Design Professional and filed with and approved by the Code Enforcement Official that includes the Schedule of Special Inspections listing the materials and work requiring Special Inspections. This document includes the inspections and verifications required for the project and the individuals, agencies, and/or firms who will be retained to perform these services. E. Continuous Special Inspection: The full-time observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency while the work is being performed. F. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency for work that has been or is being performed and at the completion of the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall be accepted by the Owner. B. Special Inspections shall be performed by agents who have relevant experience for each category of inspections indicated on the drawings. C. Minimum qualifications of inspection agents are indicated on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit to the Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official for review, a copy of their qualifications including the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.5 PAYMENT A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency. B. If any materials requiring Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant not located within 200 miles of the project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will provide the Special Inspector with a complete set of Contract Documents sealed by the Registered Design Professional and approved by the Code Enforcement Official. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and his agents so that Special Inspections and testing may be performed without hindrance. B. As indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections, the Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and/or Testing/Inspecting Agency at least 48 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 D. If Special Inspections or testing require the use of the Contractor’s scaffolding to access work areas, the Contractor shall provide a competent person to perform the daily evaluation of the scaffolding to verify that it is safe to use. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and Testing Agent of this review before each use. The Contractor is responsible for the safe assembly and stability of the scaffolding. E. The Contractor shall keep the latest set of Construction Drawings, field sketches, accepted shop drawings, and specifications at the project site for field use by the Inspectors and Testing Technicians. F. The Contractor shall perform remedial work (if required) and sign non-conformance reports stating that remedial work has been completed. The Contractor shall submit signed reports to the Special Inspector as work proceeds. G. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. H. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have control over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction. C. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have the authority to stop the work. 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall follow the Special Inspection requirements developed by the Architect/Engineer of Record. 3.0 DOCUMENTATION 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. Detailed reports shall be prepared of each test or inspection. The reports shall include the following general information: 1. Project name and number. 2. Date of test or inspection. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 3. Name of Testing Agency or Inspecting Agency. 4. Name of technician or inspector. 5. Weather conditions. 6. Locations and elevations of specific areas tested or inspected referenced to gridlines. 7. Description of test or inspection. 8. Reference to applicable ASTM standard. 9. Summary of observations, results, and recommendations. 10. Description of any areas or materials requiring retesting or re-inspection. B. Concrete compressive strength test reports shall contain the following information: 1. Name of Contractor and concrete supplier. 2. Name of concrete testing service. 3. Name of technician making and testing specimens. 4. Truck number and delivery ticket number. 5. Date and location within the structure of concrete placement. 6. Concrete type, class, mix proportions of materials, and design compressive strength at 28 days. 7. Slump, air content, unit weight, and concrete temperature. 8. Total time period between batching and completion of placement for each truck. 9. Compressive strength and type of break for all tests. C. Field reports for concrete inspection shall contain the general information noted above, plus ambient temperature and cylinder numbers. D. Test reports for masonry materials shall include proportions, composition, and compressive strength. 3.2 COMMUNICATION A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall immediately notify the Owner, Contractor, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional by telephone, fax, or email of any test results failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 B. The Special Inspector shall immediately notify the Contractor of any work found to be in nonconformance with the Contract Documents during inspections. If the nonconforming work is not corrected while the Special Inspector is on-site, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner and Registered Design Professional within 24 hours (one business day) and issue a nonconformance report. The Special Inspector may use the Special Inspection NonConformance Report form at the end of this section or other similar form. C. If the nonconforming work is not corrected at the time of substantial completion of the structure or other appropriate time, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner. 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit reports to the Owner, Special Inspector and the Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspection or test. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. B. The Special Inspector shall submit reports to the Owner and Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspections. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. C. If requested by the Code Enforcement Official, the Special Inspector shall submit interim reports which include all inspections and tests performed since the beginning of construction or since the previous interim report. Interim reports shall be addressed to the Code Enforcement Official with copies sent to the Registered Design Professionals (Structural Engineer and Architect) and Contractor. Interim reports shall be signed by the agent performing inspections. 3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. At the completion of work, each Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit an Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections to the Special Inspector stating that work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that appropriate inspections and tests were performed. The Testing/Inspecting Agency may use the Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form. B. At the completion of work, the Special Inspector shall compile all inspection and test reports generated by each Agent into a Final Report of Special Inspections. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall state that required inspections have been performed and shall itemize any nonconforming work not corrected or resolved. C. The Special Inspector may use the Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form based on CASE Form 102-2001. D. The Special Inspector shall submit The Final Report of Special Inspections to the Owner, Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official prior to issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 SPECIAL INSPECTION NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT NO. DATE: ____________________ _______ TO: CC: Contractor: FROM: ___________________________, Special Inspector PROJECT: PART I: REFERENCE SPECIAL INSPECTION REPORT NO. (Attach copy of report) DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE: RDP RESPONSE: (PROVIDE ATTACHMENTS IF NECESSARY) RDP SIGNATURE ____________________________________ DATE__________________ IS RE-INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTOR REQUIRED □ YES □ NO PART II: CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION (To be completed by either the [General Contractor or Construction Manager] or Subcontractor and returned to the Special Inspector and the RDP.) I verify that as of the date listed, the non-conforming item noted above has been corrected as required. Date Completed By (Contractor’s Site Representative) CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 AGENT’S FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Project Name: Special Inspector: Location: Agent: Special Inspector’s Project: Agent’s Project: To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this project and designated for this Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: [Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.] Respectfully submitted, Agent of the Special Inspector ______________________________________________ (Type or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ______________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________ City, State, Zip Design Professional Seal or Certification CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-8 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES MARCH 05, 2021 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS Project Name: Registered Design Professionals Location: Architecture: Name Address Owner: CORNELL UNIVERSITY Owner’s Address: Structural Engineering: Name Address Special Inspector: Name Address To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: [Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.] Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Agent’s Final Reports of Special Inspections are attached and are also a part of this Final Report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector ______________________________________________ (Type or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ***END OF SECTION 01 45 33*** Professional Seal CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fireprotection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees. 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor shall install Owner provided project identification signage. 2.10 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.11 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND CONTROLS MARCH 05, 2021 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative. c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use. d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project. e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use. f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. 1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each returnair grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site location shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited and not guaranteed to be provided. If staging space is needed a request should be submitted to the Project Manager. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents. G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container will need to meet the Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher. The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed. H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. 3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following: a. Foundation construction b. Bearing and retaining walls c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of inplace or existing materials. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION AND REPAIRING MARCH 05, 2021 F. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. Substantial Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced. - A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas: 1. Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 2. Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include: a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces. b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork. c. Marking of duct-mounted damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers. d. Cleaning of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same. f. Removal of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof. g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion. h. Removal and reinstallation of ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning. i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning. 3. Cleaning shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations involved. b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building. c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000 cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine. d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at the furthest point of the supply ductwork. 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR FIXED EQUIPMENT 01 78 22-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INVENTORY MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include: 1. Name of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR FIXED EQUIPMENT 01 78 22-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION INVENTORY MARCH 05, 2021 F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST • Building Equipment • AC Drive/VSD • Air Dryer • Backflow Preventor • Air Compressor • Building • Sprinkler • Control • Vacuum • Pump • Condensate • Glycol • CWC • HWC • Potable • Sanitary Sewer • Storm Sewer • Sump • Quality Water • Fuel • Fan • Exhaust • Supply • Return • Fume Hood • Furnace • Generator • Hot Water Heater • Heat Exchangers • Boiler • Tank • Unit Heater • Fan Coil • VAV Box • Transfer Switch • Motor • Pump • Fan • Lift/Levelers • Water Softener • Reverse Osmosis 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 22*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form. 1. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”. b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. c. Drawings in electronic format - Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format. d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide indexed PDF bookmarks. - Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: - Title of Project - Identity of separate structure as applicable. - Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Submittal Data: 1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 D. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. d. Certification as to asbestos free 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals. B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 05, 2021 D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours. 2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty. 3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility. 4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution. 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. e. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems f. Items that will require future maintenance g. Life safety critical items 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) a. Products where submittals are requested b. Final locations of all equipment. c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators. f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations. h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 LAB & OFFICE RENOVATION MARCH 05, 2021 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CORSON HALL THIRD FLOOR LABORATORY & OFFICE RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK SPECIFICATION SECTION 02 82 13 Asbestos Abatement at Cornell University’s Corson Hall for the Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Prepared for: Cornell University FCS Project Management Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Phone: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 Delta Project No. 2016.159.003 Stephen Prislupsky, Director of Environmental Services NYS DOL Certified Asbestos Project Designer Certificate No. 90-10891 Dated: March 5, 2021 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 2 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 SECTION 02 82 13 - ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The asbestos abatement work will consist of the removal and disposal of non-asbestos materials, asbestos containing materials and asbestos contaminated materials in the Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation Project 3rd Floor, 4th Floor and Roof renovation areas at Corson Hall, located at 215 Tower Road on the Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus. B. Reference Drawing AR-101 for asbestos abatement notes and abatement locations, quantities, and details. Reference the GR Section 01 35 29 – General Health and Safety for the Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report. C. Asbestos containing and asbestos contaminated materials to be removed include the following: 1. Asbestos Containing Sheet Vinyl Flooring and its associated Asbestos Containing Yellow Mastic: The Sheet Vinyl Flooring / associated Mastic to be removed are present in Rooms E303 (193 SF, under carpeting), E304 (320 SF), E304B (76 SF), E305 (192 SF), E318 (192 SF), E318A (126 SF), E321 (184 SF under carpeting), E323 (186 SF under carpeting), E334 (473 SF), and E416 (2 SF). Flooring / Mastic removal shall be down to the concrete substrate. Where flooring continues underneath walls to remain, it shall be cut-flush, and removed up to, the wall. All nonasbestos cove base / associated non-asbestos cove mastic shall also be removed as a part of flooring abatement operations in all 3rd floor locations. Flooring system removal in the 4th floor Room E416 shall include an approximately 1.5’ x 1.5’ area for the installation of a new duct penetration. Coordinate Room E416 specific removal location / limits with Mechanical Contractor. The total quantity of Asbestos Containing Sheet Vinyl Flooring and its associated Asbestos Containing Yellow Mastic in the 3rd floor renovation areas and 4th floor room E416 to be removed is approximately 1,944 square feet. The windows are inoperable at Corson Hall, as such, the contractor shall either be required to sub-contract the removal of windows as necessary for negative air exhaust or utilize the conditions of the Cornell University Campus Wide Variance 20-0068 for interior exhausting. If interior exhausting of the negative air is utilized, no chemicals shall be used for the ACM mastic removals. Localized negative air exhaust for the Room E416 Minor Tent work area shall be via HEPA vacuum. Both the sheet vinyl flooring and its associated mastic were identified as being Non-Friable Organically Bound (NOB) by the Laboratory during sample analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 3 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 2. Fume Hood with Asbestos Containing Transite Panels and associated non-asbestos Lab-top with Asbestos Containing Mastic : The interior of the Room 304 fume hood is lined with asbestos containing Transite Panels on the back wall, two side walls, and ceiling. The non-asbestos Lab-top (16.5 SF) the Fume Hood is located on has asbestos containing mastic on it underside. The total quantity of transite panels associated with the fume hood to be removed is approximately 35 square feet and the total quantity of lab-top mastic is approximately 2 square feet. Fume Hood / Lab-top removal shall be performed as per the provisions and conditions listed in the Cornell University Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance File No. 20-0068. This will require the Fume hood and Lab-top to be wrapped and removed with the associated transite panels remaining intact. All non-transite components (i.e. outer metal components, exhaust duct, etc.) can be removed prior to wrapping and disposal operations, as long as their removal does not impact the transite panels. Residual mastic present on the Lab-top metal base cabinets / support legs shall be removed from the items and the base cabinets / support legs can be disposed of as general C&D waste. 3. Transite Drying Rack: The wall-mounted drying rack located on the north wall of Room 318 is asbestos containing. Rack removal shall be performed as per the provisions and conditions listed in the Cornell University Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance File No. 20-0068. This will require the rack to be removed from the wall and wrapped intact. 4. Backsplash Mastic from Non-Asbestos Countertops: This asbestos containing mastic is associated with the non-asbestos countertop backsplash present in Rooms 318,318A and 334. The total quantity is approximately 6 square feet based on 71.5 linear feet @ a 1” bead. 5. Roofing System Materials: Asbestos Roofing removals shall be performed as necessary for the installation of the new exhaust duct. A total of approximately 2 square feet of roofing is to be removed. The asbestos materials present in the existing roofing system to be impacted include the black fabric present beneath the stone ballast and the hotmop vapor barrier applied to the roof deck. Coordinate specific roofing removal location / extent with Mechanical Contractor and Roofing Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the Work. E. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply. 1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor may submit for a Site Specific Variance to accomplish the Project. Variance petition shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for review and approval prior to submission to the New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL). B. Work shifts and working hours shall be as necessary to complete the project in the required time frame and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review/approval. The CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 4 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility, the Owner, and the Owner’s representative. C. Contractor to submit man power and work schedule with bid. D. Owner will provide a tie-in location for electric and water source. The contractor will be responsible for providing GFCI electrical panel(s) and connecting to the building system as necessary for project power. E. Any air sampling necessary to meet OSHA requirements will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Contractor. F. Waste Dumpster locations shall be approved by the Facility Representative. All dumpsters receiving RACM Waste shall be lined, enclosed and lockable (i.e. no open-to dumpsters). G. Locations of all Airlocks and/or Decontamination Enclosure Units shall be approved by the Facility Representative. 1.4 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the Work. B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code Rule 56 (herein referred to as Code Rule 56), 40 CFR 61, 29 CFR 1926, and as specified herein. Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent requirements. C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State Department of Labor and Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work related to this Project, including the removal, handling, transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the Contractor to engage in or supervise Work on any asbestos Project have a valid NYS asbestos handling certificate pursuant to Code Rule 56. E. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents shall constitute a breach of the Contract and the Owner shall have the right to and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance. F. The contractor shall be responsible for any waste water permits required to perform his work under this contract. Any cost associated with waste water permits shall be included in his Bid. G. The contractor shall be responsible for any Local City and/or State building permits required to perform his work. Any cost associated with building permits shall be included in his Bid. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 5 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Reference the Front–end and Division 01 documents for eBuilder submittal requirements/procedures. B. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall submit via eBuilder an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Progress Schedule: a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of Work for each floor. b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of Work including substantial completion dates for each Work Area and Floor. 3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory agencies together with proof of transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt). 4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies. 5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following: a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially. b. Proposed locations and types of all decontamination enclosures. c. Location of water and electrical connections to building services. d. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container. 6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency. 7. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. C. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.D for all submittals, documentation, and postings required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities. D. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 15 days of project completion, the Contractor shall submit an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final payment. 1. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the Work. 2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log. 3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name, NYS DOL certification number and type of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.). E. Fully executed/signed Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted as per applicable State and Federal Regulations and time frame requirements. F. The contractor shall also be responsible for completing and submitting the Owner’s “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form included in the front-end Bid Documents. This form shall be submitted and approved by the Cornell Project Manager prior to the Owner issuing any payment for the project. 1.6 PRE-BID MEETING A. Bidders shall attend a pre-bid meeting. Bidding Contractors will be notified in advance of the meeting. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 6 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents prior to attending the conference. 1.7 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: B. Federal Regulations: 1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA) 2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA) 3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA) 4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags" (OSHA) 5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA) 6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA) 7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA) 8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA) 9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA) 10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT) C. New York State Regulations: 1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL). 2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC) 3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH) D. Standards and Guidance Documents: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory Protection 2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems 3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book) 4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance 5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” 1.8 NOTICES A. The Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities as indicated below. 1. If applicable, at least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning abatement activities, send written notification to: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator 26 Federal Plaza New York, NY 10007. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 7 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 The Contractor is required to send notification via mail or package delivery service that will provide proof of delivery and receipt. 2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities, submit notification to: New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program. State Office Campus Building 12 - Room 454 Albany, NY 12240 Contractor shall print copy of electronic NYS DOL Notification Notice and post onsite. B. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior to beginning abatement activities as required by Code Rule 56. 1.9 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who shall provide Project Monitoring and Air Sampling for the project. B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall comply with all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the Project. C. The Consultant shall review and approve or disapprove all onsite submittals as required by section 3.01. D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s). This individual shall be designated as the Asbestos Project Monitor (APM). 1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the Contractor is on-site. The Contractor shall not be permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is on-site (except for inspection of barriers and negative air system during non-working days). 2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in writing to ensure compliance with the Project documents and all regulations. The APM shall have the authority to Stop Work when gross Work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed, or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area exceed .01 f/cc or background level. a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until corrective measures have been taken and the situation has been corrected. b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3. The APM shall provide the following services: a. Inspection of the Contractor's Work, practices, and procedures, including temporary protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and Project specifications. b. Provide abatement Project air sampling as required by applicable regulations and the Owner’s requirements. Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 8 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the Project are certified by the appropriate regulatory agency. d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's Work, and report any deviations from the schedule to the Owner’s Representative. e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations. f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring daily, and that results are being returned and posted at the site as required. g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences. 4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM. Additional inspections shall be conducted as required by Project conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM. a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the existing conditions of the Work Areas and to document these conditions. b. Pre-Abatement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the integrity of each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos containing material. This inspection shall take place only after the Work Area is fully prepped for removal. c. Work In-Progress Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor the Work practices and procedures employed on the Project and to monitor the continued integrity of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall be conducted by the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities at least twice every Work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as warranted. d. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all materials in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue remains; no pools of liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air clearance testing. e. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the Work Area after satisfactory final clearance sampling and removal of all isolation/critical barriers and equipment from the Work Area. E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA). Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. 1. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Consultant shall have samples analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If TEM clearance is required by the Owner, AHERA protocols/methodology shall be followed. 2. Samples shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearance air sampling is utilized by the owner, the clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory clearance criteria, then TEM analysis of the entire set of clearance air samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH/ELAP accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air sample result in fibers per cubic centimeter. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 9 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber levels at or above .01 fibers/cc or the established background level, whichever is greater, outside the regulated Work Area, Work shall stop immediately and corrective measures required by Code Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor shall bear the burden of any and all costs incurred by this delay. 4. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated air sampling results collected during abatement and all final air clearance results to the Commissioner of Labor. 1.10 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to perform personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which abatement activities occur in order to determine that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and utilized. B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time weighted average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the permissible exposure and excursion limits. C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP approved laboratory, subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative. D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24) hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports shall be delivered and posted at the Work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in all work being stopped until compliance is achieved. 1.11 PROJECT SUPERVISOR A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following qualifications: 1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York State certification as an Asbestos Supervisor. 2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined by OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of one year experience as a supervisor. 3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate in the primary language of the Workers. B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete. The Project Supervisor cannot be removed from the Project without the written consent of the Owner. The Project Supervisor shall be removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner. C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes the entry/exit logs as required by New York State Department of Labor and section 2.03 of the specifications and the Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the specifications. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 10 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall represent the Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor. 1.12 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. 1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee has been examined as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past year. 2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and within thirty (30) calendar days before or after the termination of employment in such occupations. 3. Medical Examination records shall be maintained on site for each employee. 1.13 TRAINING A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct each employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of protective clothing and equipment. B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing. C. An onsite "tool box talk" is mandatory for all Contractor field personnel before the asbestos removal can begin. This talk will review Cornell University practices and procedures pertaining to asbestos control. Workers not complying with these specifications or Cornell University practices and procedures will be asked to leave the job. 1.14 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services. B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that individual. Fit-test records shall be maintained on site for each employee. C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to be utilized during gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM. D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator training program. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 11 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101. F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment. G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters will be removed and discarded during the decontamination process. Filters cannot be reused. Filters must be changed if breathing becomes difficult. H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than one eight (8) hour work day. I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be permitted to return. J. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored on site designated for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available by the Contractor. 1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area. 1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover. 2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft. 3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized. C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary shutdown of HVAC and lock out of electric power to abatement work areas shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be coordinated with the owner. If electrical circuits, machinery and other electrical systems in or passing through a given regulated abatement work area must stay in operation, the contractor shall isolate/seal the live electric as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 56-7.7. B. The Owner will provide a tie-in location to building power for the Contractor’s GFCI electric panel for project power. All temporary power to the work areas shall be brought in from outside the work area through a ground-fault circuit interrupter at the source. The contractor will be responsible for all temporary power (including the power required by the owner's representative for air sampling equipment). All operations associated with CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 12 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 electrical service work (i.e. lockout, temporary power hook-up, etc.) shall be performed by a licensed electrician. C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all Work Areas including decontamination chambers. 1. The entire Work Area shall be kept illuminated at all times. 2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Work Area shall be capable of decontamination procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping. E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system. Provide hot water heaters with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops. B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete disposable outfits per day for each individual performing abatement Work. C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering any Work Area. D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye protection, and footwear whenever they enter the Work Area. 2.2 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas. Locate signs at such distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps required before entering the area. 1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum 20" x 14" displaying the following legend. DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 13 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 2. Provide 3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to asbestos Work Area. Install tape 3' to 4' AFF. B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos. 1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following legend: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD 2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos contaminated material in accordance with United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172: RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SOLID, NOS ORM-E, NA 9188 ASBESTOS 3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste container indicating the following printed in indelible ink: Generator Name Facility Name Facility Address 2.3 DAILY PROJECT LOG A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name, name, address and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of Owner’s Representative; name, address and phone number of Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue department and all other New York State Department of Labor requirements. B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no circumstances shall pencil entries be permitted. C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name, social security number, and time. D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily and note all inspections required by Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and enclosures. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 14 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 2.4 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this Contract. Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding and ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry standards. B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. 2.5 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER) A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. International Protective Coatings Corp.: Serpiflex Shield 2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent 3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant A. Wet all asbestos-containin g materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. International Protective Coatings Corp.: Serpiflex Shield 2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent 3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant 2.6 ENCAPSULANT A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible. 2.7 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also be imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings. B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being sealed air and water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around drum circumference to assure ready identification. C. Containers and bags must be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS and Code Rule 56. When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom, the bags must also be appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on the bag/container in waterproof markings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 15 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or trash. Any material placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled and disposed of as ACM waste. 2.8 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2. B. Provide tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral vacuum hoods connected to a HEPA vacuum with flexible hose. 2.9 POWER TOOLS A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation. 2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to sheeting used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container) shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting. B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for the flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56. Should there be elevated fiber levels outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work, institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Medical approval, fit test reports, and NYS DOL certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any Contractor’s employees to the asbestos Work Area. C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement Project Monitor: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance: a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person employed in the removal, handling, or disturbance of asbestos. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 16 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by the regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. c. Documentation that Workers have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project. 3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results. 4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that will be analyzing the OSHA personnel air samples. 5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. 6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.) 7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the most up-todate notifications and variances are on-site. 8. Applicable regulations. 9. Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project. 10. Approved Abatement Work Plan. 11. List of emergency telephone numbers. 12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual calibration certification. 13. Daily Project Log. D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor during abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Air Sample Log. 3. Air sample results. 4. Project Monitor Daily Log 5. Asbestos Survey Report. 6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure construction and Work Area preparation. F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be conducted within negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers. Demolition debris may be disposed of as construction and demolition debris provided the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not contaminated with asbestos and there has been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the demolition debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be disposed of as asbestos waste. 3.2 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE A. Provide a personnel decontamination enclosure system when required. The system shall be contiguous to the Work Area unless the use of a remote unit is permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance. The decontamination enclosure shall not be located within the work area unless isolation barriers are installed. If the decontamination unit is accessible to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry. B. For attached Unit, access to the Work Area will be from the clean room through an air-lock to the shower and through an air lock to the equipment room. Each airlock shall be a minimum CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 17 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 of three feet from door to door. Additional air locks shall be provided as required by Code Rule 56 for remote decontamination enclosures. C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of opaque 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be used to cover the floor. D. The entrance to the clean room shall have a lockable door. Provide suitable lockers for storage of Worker's street clothes. Storage for respirators along with replacement filters and disposable towels shall also be provided. E. Provide a temporary shower with individual hot and cold water supplies and faucets. Provide a sufficient supply of soap and shampoo. There shall be one shower for every six Workers. The shower room shall be constructed in such a way so that travel through the shower chamber shall be through the shower. The shower shall not be able to be bypassed. F. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste water shall then be discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste. G. The equipment room shall be used for the storage of tools and equipment. A walk-off pan filled with water shall be located in the Work Area outside the equipment room for Workers to clean foot coverings when leaving the Work Area. A labeled 6 mil plastic ACM waste bag for collection of contaminated clothing shall be located in this room. H. The personal decontamination enclosure shall be cleaned and disinfected minimally at the end of each Work shift and as otherwise directed by the Asbestos Project Monitor. 3.3 WASTE DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE A. Provide a waste decontamination enclosure system when required. The system shall be contiguous to the Work Area unless the use of a remote unit is permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance. The decontamination enclosure shall not be located within the work area unless isolation barriers are installed. If the Unit is accessible to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry. B. The waste decontamination enclosure system shall consist of a holding area, air lock and washroom. The airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from door to door. The entrance to the holding area shall have a lockable door. C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of opaque 6 mil polyethylene sheeting on walls and ceiling. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be used to cover the floor. D. Where there is only one egress from the Work Area, the holding area of the waste decontamination enclosure system may branch off from the personnel decontamination enclosure equipment room, which then serves as the waste wash room. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 18 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 E. The waste wash room water shall be drained, collected, and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste water shall then be discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste. F. In small asbestos Projects where only one egress from the Work Area exists, the shower room may be used as a waste washroom. In this instance, the clean room shall not be used for waste storage, but shall be used for waste transfer to carts, which shall immediately be removed from this enclosure. 3.4 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES A. Access to and from the asbestos Work Area is permitted only through the personnel decontamination enclosure unless otherwise stipulated in a Site Specific Variance, the Cornell Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance, or 12 NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 11 Special Projects. B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit. C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the Work Area: 1. Before entering the Work Area, Workers shall proceed to the clean room, remove all street clothes, and don protective clothing, equipment, and respirators. 2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and the equipment room and into the Work Area. D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the Work Area: 1. Before leaving the Work Area, gross asbestos contamination will be removed by brushing, wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming. 2. In the equipment room, Workers shall remove disposable clothing, but not respirators, and shall place clothing in plastic disposal bags for disposal as contaminated debris prior to entering the shower room. 3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators, then wash respirator with soap and water prior to removal. 4. Upon exiting the shower, Workers shall don new disposable clothing if the Work shift is to continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no circumstances shall Workers enter public non-Work Areas in disposable protective clothing. E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance, workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of Work. Workers exiting the work area shall HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock, remove the outer suit and then place it back into the Work Area. A clean second suit shall be donned before exiting the airlock and proceeding to the decontamination enclosure or another work area via the designated pathway required by Code Rule 56. 3.5 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM A. For Minor Project negative pressure tent work areas, a HEP-vacuum shall be utilized for negative air as per 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.3 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 19 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 B. For small-project and large-project work areas, provide a portable asbestos filtration system that develops a minimum pressure differential of negative 0.02 in. of water column within all full enclosure areas relative to adjacent unsealed areas and that provides a minimum of 4 air changes per hour in the Work Area during abatement and 6 air changes for non-friable flooring and/or mastic removal. C. Such filtration systems must be made operational after critical and isolation barriers are installed but before wall, floor, and ceilings are plasticized and shall be operated 24 hours per day during the entire Project until the final cleanup is completed and satisfactory results of the final air samples are received from the laboratory. D. The system shall include a series of pre-filters and filters to provide High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration of particles down to 0.3 microns at 100% efficiency and below 0.3 microns at 99.9% efficiency. Provide sufficient replacement filters to replace pre-filters every 2 hours, secondary pre-filters every 24 hours, and primary HEPA filters every 600 hours of operation. E. A minimum of one additional filtration unit of at least the same capacity as the primary unit(s) shall be installed and fully functional to be used during primary unit (s) filter changing and in case of primary failure. F. At no time will the unit exhaust indoors, within 15 feet of a receptor, including but not limited to windows and doors, or adversely affect the air intake of the building. Exhaust ducting shall not exceed 25’ in length unless the conditions of AV-A-2 are utilized. Provide construction fencing at ground level exhaust termination locations per Code Rule 56. G. Upon electric power failure or shut-down of any filtration unit, all abatement activities shall stop immediately and only resume after power is restored and all filtration units are fully operating. For shut-downs longer than one hour, all openings into the Work Area, including the decontamination enclosures, shall be sealed. H. The Contractor shall provide a manometer to verify negative air pressure. Manometers shall be read twice daily and recorded within the Daily Project Log. I. There shall be at least a 4 hour settling period after the Work Area is fully prepared and the negative filtration units have been started to ensure integrity of the barriers. J. Once installed and operational, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall conduct daily inspections of the Work Area to insure the airtight integrity of the enclosure and operation of the negative air system. Findings shall be recorded within the Daily Project Log. Inspections shall also be conducted on days when no abatement activities are in progress per Code Rule 56 (i.e. weekends). 3.6 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one type of ACM shall be abated at a time within a Work Area. Where there are multiple types of ACM requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential abatement shall be followed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 20 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to ensure full penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not display evidence of saturation. C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed. D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment and methods specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power operated tools used shall be provided with HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation. E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods and any required solvents to completely remove any adhesive, mastic, etc. F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal bags or other suitable container upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to fill a single bag or container and minimally at the end of each workshift. G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Sharp components likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then wrapped with sheeting. H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up procedures unless approved in a Site Specific Variance. I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be encapsulated using lag cloth. J. All construction and demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant to be contaminated with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste. K. The use of metal shovels, metal dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area. 3.7 EQUIPMENT / WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming in the Work Area before moving such items into the waste decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. The persons in the Work Area shall not enter the airlock. No gross removal operations are permitted when waste transfer is in progress. B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed in the washroom during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of containers and equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 21 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any excessive pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight. D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the holding area. Workers in the washroom shall not enter this airlock. E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area by persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from the holding area. F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day. G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. H. Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personnel decontamination enclosure, waste removal shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise occupied. Precautions shall be taken to prevent short circuiting and cycling of air outward through the shower and clean room. 3.8 NON-FRIABLE FLOORING AND/OR MASTIC REMOVALS A. The following procedures may only be used for the removal of non-friable flooring and/or mastic materials using manual and chemical methods. These procedures shall not apply to beadblaster use or other abrasive abatement methods. B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted. C. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures may be utilized and shall be constructed at a location in accordance with the approved Work Plan. D. The Work Area shall include critical barriers and perimeter splash-guard. E. Negative air shall be maintained at six (6) air changes per hour. F. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.10. G. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.6. H. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers. The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed before being passed into the airlock for double- bagging. The bags or containers shall then be transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 22 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 I. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed. 1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be decontaminated and removed from the Work Area. 2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid, and shall be decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area. 3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness and completion of abatement. 4. The Contractor shall then apply a thin coat of encapsulant to all non-removal surfaces covered with plastic in the Work Area. In no event shall encapsulant be applied to any surface that was the subject of removal prior to obtaining satisfactory air monitoring results. Encapsulants shall be pigmented or tinted to provide an indication for completeness of coverage. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall determine adequacy of coverage. 5. After the encapsulant has been applied and the required waiting/settling and drying time has elapsed, aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the Environmental Consultant. 6. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the isolation and critical barriers shall be removed. Following this, the decontamination enclosures shall be removed. 3.9 TENT ENCLOSURES A. Tent enclosures may only be used where specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor. B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted. C. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed when required, based on the scope of the tent work scope. Configuration shall be as required by Project size. For tent enclosures with gross abatement of friable materials, a contiguous decontamination system shall be constructed, maintained and utilized, except for minor size tent enclosure work areas where a remote decontamination enclosure is permitted by Code Rule 56. D. The Work Area shall be precleaned. All objects and equipment that will remain in the restricted area during abatement shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene and tape. E. The tent shall be a single use barrier constructed with a rigid frame and at least two layers of six mil polyethylene unless one layer of six mil polyethylene is otherwise permitted by Code Rule 56. Tents with twenty (20) square feet or less of floor space or no gross removal of friable ACM shall be constructed of one (1) layer of six mil polyethylene and shall include walls, ceilings and a floor (except portions of walls, floors and ceilings that are the removal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 23 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 surface) with double folded seams. All seams shall be sealed airtight using duct tape and/or spray adhesive. F. The tent shall be constructed with at least one airlock for worker/waste egress. G. A monometer shall be used for all OSHA Class I abatement. H. Negative air shall be maintained at four (4) air changes per hour for non-friable and glovebag abatement tent enclosure work areas. Eight (8) air changes shall be maintained for friable gross removal tent enclosure work areas. In a Minor size abatement tent enclosure work area a HEPA vacuum may be used to maintain the required air changes. I. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.09. J. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.07. K. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers. The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed and shall then be placed in a second bag/container before being transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day. L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed. 1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be decontaminated and removed from the Work Area. 2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid, and shall be decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area. 3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness and completion of abatement. 4. After the waiting/settling and drying time requirements have elapsed, aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the Environmental Consultant. 5. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the tent shall be collapsed into itself, placed in suitable disposal bags, and transported to the waste decontamination enclosure. Isolation and critical barriers shall then be removed. 3.10 FUME HOOD WITH TRANSITE, TRANSITE DRYING RACK, AND LAB-TOP/BACKSPLASH WITH ACM MASTIC REMOVALS A. Removal of the Fume Hood with interior transite panels, its associated non-asbestos lab-top with asbestos mastic and the non-asbestos countertops/backsplashes with asbestos mastic shall be performed as per the associated provisions and conditions included in the Cornell University Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance File No. 20-0068. Reference Attachment A of this specification section for the Variance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 24 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 3.11 REMOVALS OF EXTERIOR NON-FRIABLE ASBESTOS CONTAINING ROOFING MATERIALS (ACRM’S) A. Except as modified by this section, removal of exterior non-friable ACM roofing and caulk shall conform to all provisions of this specification. B. Unless Site Specific Variances have been otherwise obtained, removals shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of Code Rule 56 Subpart 56-11.1 for In-Plant Operations. C. The immediate roof work area shall be considered to be the area from which the ACRM’s are actively being removed. The asbestos project regulated abatement work area shall extend twenty-five (25') feet from the perimeter of the immediate work area and shall have signage in accordance with Section 56-7.4. An airlock shall be required at the entrance to the regulated abatement work area to serve as a changing area, if the workers shall have to pass through enclosed publicly occupied space, such as from a roof through an interior stairway, to access the decontamination units. D. Non-certified Workers are not allowed in the Work Area until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. E. A decontamination area or enclosure system shall be constructed at a location in accordance with the approved Work Plan but must be within fifty (50) feet of the building structure entrance used by the asbestos handlers (workers), and shall be removed only after an acceptable visual inspection has determined that the abatement is complete, as per Section 56-9. 2, (e). It shall be cordoned off at a distance of 25 feet to separate it from public areas. F. All roof-top openings (including but not limited to operable windows, doors, hatches, vents, ducts, and grilles) within 25 feet of the work area shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene. G. The removal of the ACM may require the use of scrapers, solvents, mastic removal chemicals, or other methods/procedures to ensure complete removal. H. The Contractor is required to provide temporary protection of the building (i.e. roof, window openings, construction joints, etc.) at the end of each Work shift so as to maintain the building in a watertight condition. I. Dumpsters used for waste storage shall be lined with two layers of six mil polyethylene. The top shall be closed with polyethylene flaps that are sealed at the end of each work shift. J. Personal protective equipment, including respirators, shall be utilized and worn during all removal operations until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. K. The Owner may, at his discretion, choose to conduct air sampling. If air samples collected during abatement indicate any airborne asbestos fiber concentration(s) at or above 0.01 f/cc, Work shall be stopped immediately and Work methods shall be altered to reduce the airborne asbestos fiber concentration(s). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 25 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed: 1. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet cleaned. 2. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness. 3. Upon satisfactory visual inspection results, the isolation and critical barriers shall be removed. Following this, the decontamination enclosures shall be removed. PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE 4.1 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from the site. Waste shall be removed from the site only during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. No waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present and the Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein. C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within ten (10) calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work. D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental Consultant a valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Asbestos Hauler's Permit. The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the hauler's permit with the proper authority. E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all material in the transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests. F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any off-site transfers of the waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any other off-site asbestos material. The Hauler must travel directly to the disposal site as identified on the notifications with no unauthorized stops. 4.2 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.). No open containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically permitted by a Site Specific Variance. B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags (license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from the site immediately. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 26 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene. Once on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies. D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container. F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container. 4.3 ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS A. The proposed asbestos waste manifest shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start of the project for review and approval. B. The Manifest shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place. C. The Manifests shall have the appropriate signatures prior to any waste being removed from the site. D. Copies of the completed Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant and the Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection. E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Manifest to the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Manifest to the Owner’s Representative within 14 days of the waste container being removed from the site. Failure to do so may result in payment being withheld from the Contractor. G. Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner’s Representative with the final close-out documentation. END OF SECTION 02 82 13 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 02 82 13 - 27 Corson Hall 3rd Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Delta Engineers, Architects, & Project No. 20636.00 Surveyors, DPC March 5, 2021 Attachment A Cornell University Campus Wide Variance File No. 20-0068 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-210500-BasicFireSuppressionRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 SECTION 21 05 00 - BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-210500-BasicFireSuppressionRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-210500-BasicFireSuppressio nRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wir es, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-210500-BasicFireSuppressionRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\20027 8-210500-BasicFireSuppressionRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-210500-BasicFireSuppressionRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 21 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 21 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded Fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded Fittings: Class 125, cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\D ESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. 3. Grooved Mechanical Connections: a. Couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and ASTM A536, with painted coating, designed for rolled grooved piping, hot dipped galvanized finish complying with ASTM A153 where called for. b. Gaskets: Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber, -30°F to 230°F temperature range, suitable for water service. c. Bolts and Nuts: Heat treated, hex head carbon steel, ASTM A183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. d. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 and A536. Fittings shall have grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer. e. Victaulic, rigid system, Style 005 couplings cast with offsetting angle pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B 31.9. UL listed and FM approved; 300 psi wwp; follow all terms of listings/approvals. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Grinnell, Gruvlok by Anvil, Victaulic or approved equal. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Victaulic, Watts or approved equal. 2.4 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hotdipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. C. Spacing Schedule (Maximum Distance between Hangers (ft.-in.): NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (IN.) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8 Steel Pipe N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Copper Tube 8-0 8-0 10-0 10-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Rod Size (in.) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 D. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller, complying with NFPA 13. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements, complying with NFPA 13 . E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal, complying with NFPA 13. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SP ECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For weights under 1,000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. G. Hangers for fire protection piping as specified and in accordance with NFPA 13. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. Adjustable swivel ring type hangers are permitted for 3 in. and smaller piping. 2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas. B. All bushings and nipples required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.7 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 2.8 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A" - Piping Materials at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. B. See Exhibit "B" - Testing at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required, to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. B. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. C. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers on diesel engine exhaust piping where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. B. Grooved Mechanical Joints: Pipes joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves of a single manufacturer. Lubricate and install gasket and couplings. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free of indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. C. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat. 3.5 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded piping fabricated by qualified welder. Use certified welder where specifically required by code or insurance company. If indicated and permitted for fire protection systems, all provisions for welded pipe shall additionally be in accordance with NFPA Standard 13. Use full length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe with inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slip-on flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. B. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing on joint following welding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACC ESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 3.6 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.7 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed walls/floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. 3.8 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.9 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative and shall be justified by hydraulic calculations. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Sprinkler (wet) Schedule 40, black steel, 2 in. and smaller Cast or malleable iron Threaded EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Sprinklers Test hydrostatically at system pressure for two (2) hours in accordance with NFPA 13. END OF SECTION 21 10 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESI GN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 21 13 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the 2020 Building Code of New York State referenced edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: 1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code. 4. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. B. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices to comply with the latest edition of the following publications, codes, standards, and listings/approvals: 1. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Approval Guide. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 3. 2020 Building Code of New York State. 4. 2017 Uniform Code Supplement. 5. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 6. Requirements of Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed or and FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service. D. The fire protection work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection sprinkler systems. E. Preparation of working plans, calculations and site observation of systems shall be completed by a NICET Level III technician under the direction of a qualified New York State Registered Professional Engineer. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS. DOC January 22, 2021 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire protection system shall be a wet pipe automatic sprinkler system arranged to properly protect spaces as indicated. B. Water is supplied from the existing system and fire pump. C. The system shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with all provisions of the Contract Documents and any Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Calculations shall be based upon the specific hazard for the areas being protected. Refer to drawings for minimum requirements. E. Maximum coverage for any sprinkler head shall not exceed NFPA requirements and the listing for the sprinklers provided. F. A minimum 10 psi safety factor shall be provided between the available municipal water supply curve and the total system demand point. The total system demand point shall be at the municipal water main and include the calculated sprinkler and interior hose stream demands plus the exterior hose stream demand at the residual pressure required for proper system operation. G. The maximum flow velocity shall not exceed 20 ft. per second in the piping system and 15 ft. per second in mains with paddle type waterflow indicators. H. Water supply control valves shall be electrically supervised and mechanically locked for proper position. Waterflow and supervisory circuits shall be in accordance with the requirements of electrical specifications. Electric connections to sprinkler system shall be by Division 26. Furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment. I. Chains and locks provided by Cornell EH & S. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to: a. Manufacturer's model number. b. Materials, size, finish and type of connection. c. Pressure ratings of components. d. FM approval/UL listing. B. Certification: Submit Contractor's NICET certification and number. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\2002 78-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Drawings and Calculations: 1. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a New York State Registered Professional Engineer. 2. Submit complete NFPA 13 drawings and hydraulic calculations with cross reference to applicable drawings, water supply data, and equipment schedule with ratings for the system to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. Submit hydraulic calculations for each design density/remote area with items in NFPA 13 incorporated including sketches to indicate flow quantities, sprinklers operating and direction of flow for pipes in looped and gridded systems. 4. Drawing shall be fabrication drawings provided to indicate actual sprinkler, standpipe and equipment layouts. Drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'-0" scale on reproducible sheets of uniform size. Drawings shall show all data required by NFPA 13. 5. Submit drawings in one (1) complete package. 6. Include Cornell EH & S and FP Engineer on submittal process. D. Record Drawings and Documents: 1. Submit Record Drawings, hydraulic calculations, test reports, and NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable. 2.2 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Brass or bronze, 1/2 in. orifice, 1/2 in. NPT. 165°F ordinary temperature classification for light and ordinary hazards. Use 286°F sprinklers in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Rooms; in vicinity of heat equipment/sources; and in accordance with NFPA 13. 1. Finished Ceiling Areas: Semi-recessed pendent sprinklers. 2. Unfinished Ceiling Areas: Natural brass/bronze finish pendent or upright sprinklers as required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Sprinkler Types and Design Equipment: 1. Quick Response Pendent and Upright: Reliable Model F1FR. 2. Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall: Reliable Model F1FR-HSW1. 3. Quick Response Dry Pendent and Horizontal Sidewall: Reliable Model F3QR. C. Flexible Sprinkler Drops: 1. FM Approved braided Type 304 stainless steel tube with union joints, factory tested to 400 psi and listed for up to three (3) 90° bends including bracket for mounting to ceiling or building structure. a. Design Equipment: Victaulic "VicFlex". D. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Steel wire cage with base plate and retaining clamps. Same manufacturer as sprinkler. 2. Design Equipment: Reliable Model C-1. E. Sprinkler Cabinets and Spare Sprinklers: 1. Steel or aluminum construction with shelves and shell holes to accommodate the number of spare sprinklers required by NFPA 13. 2. Bright red finish with hinged front door and label. 3. Sprinkler wrenches compatible for each type used. 4. Spare sprinklers for each system of the type and proportion of those used in each system. 5. Design Equipment: Reliable Model A-4. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Reliable, Tyco, Victaulic, Viking or approved equal. 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. At control, test and drain valves, provide permanently marked identification signs constructed of 18 gauge steel with baked enameled finish. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. Additional signs, shall be provided at each alarm check and dry pipe valve to clearly indicate hydraulic calculation data. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.4 ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AND SPRINKLER GUARDS A. Include allowance for providing 5 additional sprinklers with related piping, fittings, hangers installed at locations where job conditions or equipment selections may be required. Provide a credit for sprinklers and guards not installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings. B. Piping shall not pass directly over electric panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar electric and telephone equipment. However, protection for these spaces shall be provided. C. Piping shall be installed concealed above finish ceiling area with sprinklers located in the center of ceiling tiles where ceiling tiles are used. D. Provide a readily removable flushing connection consisting of a cap at each end of cross mains. E. Provide sprinkler guards for sprinklers in mechanical and storage spaces, less than 8 ft. above finished floor subject to mechanical damage. F. Upright sprinklers directly on branch lines shall be installed with their frame parallel to the piping. G. Provide sprinkler protection under ductwork, groups of ductwork and other obstructions to water spray and distribution. Use intermediate level sprinklers if subject to waterspray from above. H. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting. I. Coordinate and activate the systems or portions of the system to operational status as soon as possible. J. Temporary heat detectors need to be installed and tested before removal of any sprinklers that will last more than one work shift. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3.2 PIPING, VALVES AND HANGERS A. Refer to other applicable sections. B. All piping shall be installed to permit drainage of the system through a main drain valve. Where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of the system, auxiliary drains shall be provided. The auxiliary drain assembly shall consist of a lockable ball valve, nipple and cap or plug and shall be located 7 ft. or less above the finished floor. Pipe drain to an accessible location. 3.3 TESTS A. General: 1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building construction or backfill. 2. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully completed. Use NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificate Forms. 3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking, etc. to correct leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel. 4. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections if possible. 5. Coordinate testing with CU EHS. All new joints to be exposed and pressure gauge to be located within work area. B. Pressure Tests: 1. Hydrostatic Tests: Tested at building pressure and in accordance with NFPA 13 for two (2) hours. Per 25.2.1.1 and 25.2.1.4.2. a. Air test not accepted as final test. 2. Do not subject existing systems to excess pressures. 3.4 SYSTEM TURNOVER A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. Provide one (1) new original pamphlet of NFPA 25. Indicate in writing to the Owner's Representative the provisions for proper maintenance, testing, and inspection of the systems as required by local fire codes. END OF SECTION 21 13 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 SECTION 22 05 00 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRe quirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\PLBG\200278-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\ 200278-220523-VALVES.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES - GENERAL A. Valves shall have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies. 2. Stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line. 3. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Balance Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Red White, Taco, Tour and Anderson. 2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Watts. 3. Check Valves: Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Stockham, Watts. 4. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220523-VALVES.DOC January 22, 2021 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES A. Check Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free swing check with silicone bronze body, bonnet and trim, PTFE disc seat and stainless steel seat disc washer, 200 psi working pressure, Nibco T-413-Y-LF (threaded) or Nibco's S-413-Y-LF (solder). B. Ball Valves 1. For all water services, ball valves shall be: a. Body Bronze b. Body Style Standard Port, 2 piece c. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation d. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal e. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum f. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum g. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum h. Lead free i. Design Basis Apollo 70LF-240 or approved equal, Nibco T-580-66LF, S-580-66-LF, Watts LFB6000-SS, LFB6001-SS. C. Valves For Gauges And Instruments: 1. 1/2 in. size: Use a ball valve as listed above. a. Provide at all new pressure gauges. D. Balance Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free, brass body, chrome plated brass ball, glass and carbon filled PTFE seat rings, Viton packing, threaded or solder ends, differential readout ports, calibrated nameplate and memory stop indicator rated for 125 psi; and pre-formed insulation to permit access for balancing and readout; Watt Series LFCSM-61-S. a. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220523-VALVES.DOC January 22, 2021 Balance Valve Size GPM Range 1/2 in. Up to 2.5 3/4 in. 2.5 - 4.5 1 in. 4.5 - 10 1-1/4 in. 10 - 15 1-1/2 in. 15 - 30 2 in. 30 - 60 E. Hose Thread Drain Valves: 1. Ball valve, bronze body, hardened chrome ball with hose thread end, cap and chain; Watts #B6001CC (sweat connection), Watts #B6000CC (threaded connection). 2.3 GAS VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Ball type, two-piece, full port, brass body with chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats, threaded ends, 600 psi WOG, UL listed for natural gas, Watts FBV-3C-UL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all shutoff, check, balancing and other type valves as indicated, as required by Code and as required for proper system maintenance, isolation and safety. Provide at major building and systems sections. Provide shutoff valves on all branch lines serving two fixtures or more, at all equipment, fixtures, before and after automatic control valves, and at future connections. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves with stems at or above the horizontal position. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin level. C. Provide drain valves with hose thread connections on all equipment. Provide hose thread drain valves at all low points to enable complete drainage of all piping systems including, water mains, branches, at base of vertical risers and at strainers. D. Inspect valves for proper operation before installation. Install underground valve boxes vertically over each valve. Adjust top of box to proper grade. Immediately backfill with crushed stone and carefully tamp into place. Unless otherwise noted, leave in the open position. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220523-VALVES.DOC January 22, 2021 3.2 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. Ball valves shall be UL listed for use in natural gas systems, or certified by another acceptable third-party testing agency. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DES IGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 05 53 - PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. paper (minimum), indicating valve number, location and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi rigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI-A13.1. B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: PIPE FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION Cold Water DOMESTIC COLD WATER Hot Water DOMESTIC HOT WATER Hot Water Recirculating DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING Sanitary Waste SANITARY WASTE Indirect Waste INDIRECT WASTE Storm STORM Vent VENT Compressed Air COMPRESSED AIR Lab Vent LAB VENT Lab Waste LAB WASTE 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high black-filled numerals. Attach to valve with brass jack chain and "S" hook. Identify between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4507, or approved equal. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves provided as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Mount in Mechanical Room. 2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: 1. Provide engraved vinyl nameplates for each major piece of mechanical equipment provided, 2-1/2 in. x 3/4 in. size. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4562, or approved equal. 2.5 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT LOCATOR A. 3/4 in. diameter adhesive stickers placed on ceiling grid and color-coded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\ SPECS\PLBG\200278-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 B. The color for all plumbing valves shall be BLUE. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment provided on project. C. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, maximum intervals of 20'-0". For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one (1) pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 07 00 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Shall include product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited. 4. Comply with 2015 International Energy Conservation Code as amended by Part 1 of the 2016 Supplement to the New York State Energy Conservation Code. 5. All adhesives and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ E4.1 and EQ E4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least two (2) years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Johns Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed B. Adhesives: Childers Products, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Product meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system shall consist of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures shall be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.5 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. B. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. C. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 2.6 PIPE SUPPORT INSULATION INSERTS A. 20 lbs./cu. ft. molded fiberglass, for -120°F to +450°F service temperature, noncombustible, 0.30 thermal conductivity (k), same thickness as pipe insulation. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hamfab "H" Block, or approved equal. 2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling, floor, or roof openings, unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Sections 220500, "Basic Plumbing Requirements" and 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Items such as manholes, handholds, clean-outs, plugged connections, pet cocks, air vents, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. G. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personal injury. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material becomes wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. J. All exposed surfaces shall be white, unless noted otherwise. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all water piping and storm water piping. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section 221010 "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Hanger shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 2. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or elbows may be continuous. H. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. I. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings, and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing. J. Piping in exterior walls, spaces, overhangs, attics, or where subject to freezing: Insulate pipe with double the thickness called for. Piping in wall chases: In addition to the above, pack chase with loose glass fiber insulation. K. Provide insulation on exposed hot and cold plumbing piping to within 18 in. of fixture or equipment connection. L. Insulate exposed domestic water and waste piping for plumbing fixtures designated for use by the handicapped. 3.3 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Insulate existing piping and equipment as called for. C. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-220700-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Domestic cold water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1/2 in. Domestic hot, tempered and circulation water (105°F - 140°F) Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1 in. AC unit drains, overflows and indirect waste piping associated with any HVAC equipment Glass fiber All sizes: 1/2 in. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-2210 10-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type K or L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Fittings: Wrought copper and copper alloy, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy, ASME B16.18; solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. E. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. F. Brazing Materials: Class BcuP-5 for brazing copper to brass, bronze to copper. Harris, Inc. "Stay-Silv 15" or approved equal. 2.4 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. 1. Copper not allowed for urinal waste. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. D. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.5 HIGH PURITY POLYPROPYLENE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Piping: Schedule 40 or 80 polypropylene produced without additives or pigments. Piping shall be sterilized and capped by manufacturer. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, sterilized and packed in individual bags by manufacturer, socket fusion weld joints. C. Valves: Material shall be identical to pipe, socket fusion weld joints. D. Design Equipment: Orion "Whiteline". E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Enfield, Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane. 2.6 NO-HUB CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI Standard 301, no-hub cast iron, bitumen coated. 1. For above grade only. B. Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub drainage pattern, bitumen coated. C. Couplings: 1. 1-1/2 in. to 2 in.: CISPI standard 310 with 300 series stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve (or) same as specified for 3 in. and larger. 2. 3 in. and Larger: 24 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel housing clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, 60 in. lbs. minimum torque rating, shall meet requirements of pipe manufacturer and shall be compatible with specified pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clamp-All Coupling System, Tyler "Wide Body", Husky "Series 2000", Mission "Heavy Weight" or approved equal. D. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\S PECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 2.7 ACID RESISTANT WASTE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Polypropylene: 1. Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 flame retardant polypropylene, ASTM D4101. 2. Fittings shall be same material as pipe with thermal welded joints. a. For accessible 1-1/2 in. and 2 in. piping below counters, sinks and equipment, provide mechanical joint or thermal welded unions at traps to permit disassembly. b. Piping through wall or floor at roughing point for sinks and equipment shall be provided with male IPS threaded adapter. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: IPEX "Enfield", Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane. 2.8 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (FOR SPECIALTY LIQUIDS AND GASES) A. Tubing: 316L, stainless steel tubing, meets ASTM A269 requirements for stainless steel tubing, bright annealed in a dry hydrogen atmosphere, 0.065 in. wall thickness, 25 Ra interior surface roughness, purged with UHP nitrogen, ends capped and tubes bagged at factory. B. Fittings: Shall be same material as piping. Passivated and cleaned to match pipe. C. Design Equipment: Swagelok Medium Pressure. 2.9 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Cast Iron to Lead Pipe: Red brass ferrules and wiped joints. Caulk ferrule into cast iron hub. B. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. C. Copper to Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. 2. Dielectric pipefittings. D. Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). E. No-Hub, Cast Iron, Glass, Polypropylene or High Silicon Cast Iron: Proper adapter to piping being connected. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Cast Iron and PVC Sovent: Aerators and deaerators as manufactured by Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2.10 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.11 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. 5. Provide hot dipped galvanized finish for hangers and accessories installed in exterior locations and interior areas with moist environment conditions such as pools, pool filter rooms, areaways, garages and similar areas. C. Spacing Schedule: Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size 3/4 in. to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Each 3/8 in. 1-1/4 in. to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Horizontal 3/8 in. 2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Joint 5 ft. 1/2 in. 5 in. and over 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Maximum 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. O.C. 3/4 in. Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports: 1. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base, at each floor and 15 ft. on center, maximum. Freestanding vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets attached to the building construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative. 3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10 ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear. Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement. E. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. G. Supports: 1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMS ANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or pipe clamps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. Fasten piping to trapeze at every third support. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. I. Cabinet Pipe Space Supports: 1. Piping below casework countertops within space behind cabinet shall be supported using continuous slot metal channels with pipe clamps. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. J. Hanger Insulation Shields: 1. Hanger insulation shields shall be provided for all water and storm water piping. Hangers shall attach directly to pipe for all remaining services. 2. Piping 2 in. and Smaller: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. 3. Piping 3 in. and Larger: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield and pipe support insulation insert(s) between pipe and hanger. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. Provide temporary blocking to maintain proper spacing for insulation. K. Provide continuous support for unpigmented polypropylene piping. L. Piping systems with material not listed above shall be supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.12 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. B. All cleanout plugs, bushings and nipples, required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 2.13 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.14 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.15 STACK SLEEVE A. Cast iron body with caulking recess, flashing clamp and under deck clamp. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Series 1720, Zurn, Wade. 2.16 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (Plumbing) piping. B. See Exhibit "B", "Testing" at end of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20027 8\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beams clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic piping per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger that 21/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 inches of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type and thickness for service applications. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. E. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric unions at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric unions in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. B. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. C. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. D. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. E. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. F. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Cored Holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed Walls/Floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278 \DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to Exhibit "B" at the end of this section for testing of Plumbing Systems. B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. C. Domestic Water: 1. Do not cover joints with insulation until required tests are completed and the Owner's Representative accepts the system. 2. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Piping shall be tight and show no loss of pressure. 3. Air test not acceptable as final test. 4. Confirm in writing that tests and flushing have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. D. Sanitary, Lab Waste, and Storm: 1. There shall be no loss of water when testing interior piping. 2. Air test not acceptable as final test. 3. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction be detected in sewers and/or floors or walls of appurtenant structures, they shall be permanently stopped. Should any defective pipes, fitting or accessories be discovered they shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4. Confirm in writing that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. 3.9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Cleaning and disinfecting shall be in accordance with requirements of New York State Department of Health and authority having jurisdiction. Prior to disinfecting, flush piping to remove any sediment and debris. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\ 200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. C. After disinfection procedures, submit water samples in sterile bottles to an approved Department of Health Laboratory. Samples shall be proven equal to the water quality served to the public from the existing water supply system and acceptable to the Department of Health. Flush and disinfect all sections of pipe that fail the laboratory tests. Submit test results indicating water is potable. 3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Domestic water interior/hot, cold and circulating 3 in. and smaller Type L copper Wrought or cast copper No-lead solder Sanitary, sanitary vent and grease waste Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Storm Service weight cast iron soil pipe Cast iron hub and spigot Neoprene compression type gasket Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Indirect waste Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Lab waste and vent Polypropylene Polypropylene Thermal fused (joint) including concealed locations, mechanical joint below counters, sink and equipment only RODI supply and return water Schedule 80, unpigmented polypropylene Same as pipe Thermal fused Compressed air- Type L copper Wrought copper Brazed P5, N2, H2 Stainless steel tube Same as pipe Natural Gas Schedule 40 black steel Malleable Iron Threaded CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\ 200278-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Domestic water Test hydrostatically at 150 PSI for two (2) hours or at 1.5 times the working pressure when working pressure exceeds 100 PSI Sanitary, sanitary vent, storm Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Indirect waste Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Lab waste and vent Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Reverse osmosis, Test with inert gas (nitrogen) at a pressure of 125 PSI for two (2) hours. Compressed air, vacuum, CO2 Test with clean air or nitrogen at a pressure of 175 PSI for 24 hours. Natural Gas Refer to Section 227010 - Natural Gas Systems END OF SECTION 22 10 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\2002 78\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 - Products of this section. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF FIXTURES A. Fixtures and trim shall be of those manufacturers listed, unless otherwise indicated. Fixtures for this project shall be of same manufacturer. 1. Faucets: Chicago Faucets, Delta, Moen, Symmons, T&S Brass or Zurn. All faucets shall be lead-free in accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372. 2. Supplies, Stops and Traps: Brasscraft, EBC, McGuire or Sanitary Dash. B. Exposed parts of trim shall have polished chrome plated finish. C. Tubular drainage products ("P" traps, nipples, etc.) shall be 17 gauge brass. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of the Plumbing Fixture Law of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. B. Comply with the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 "Requirements for the Physically Challenged". C. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard 61, Section 9 Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third-party testing and certification. D. All fixture trim used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINKS A. SK-A; SK-C 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. c. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece. d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece. e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews. B. SK-B: SK-F: (ADA Compliant) 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. c. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece. d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece. e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC January 22, 2021 f. Provide ADA insulation on exposed waste and supplies. C. SK-D: 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. c. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece. d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece. e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews.' f. Zurn Z1180 solids interceptor. D. SK-E: 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide drain tailpiece, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece. b. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece. E. SK-G: 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Two (2) Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC January 22, 2021 b. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece. c. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece. d. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews. 2.2 EMERGENCY FIXTURES A. EW-A: (for the physically challenged) 1. Water Saver EW805-TMV, Deck mount eyewash unit, 90° swivel with stay open valve, and backflow preventer, universal identification sign and meeting ANSI Z358.1, with emergency fixture thermostatic mixing valve meeting ASSE 1071, and cold water by-pass. 2.3 SPECIALITY FEATURES A. Gas Outlet (GO-A): 1. Water Saver BT2880-231WSA-PCL, deck mount, single outlet, laboratory needle valve assembly, colored plastic disc and polished chrome plate finish with clear epoxy finish. Disc labeled "GAS". B. Gas Outlet (GO-B): 1. Water Saver BT2880-232SWSA-PCL, deck mount, dual outlet, laboratory needle valve assembly, colored plastic disc and polished chrome plate finish with clear epoxy finish. Disc labeled "GAS". C. Compressed Air Outlet (CA-A): 1. Water Saver BT2880-231WSA-PCL, deck mount, single outlet, laboratory needle valve assembly, colored plastic disc and polished chrome plate finish with clear epoxy finish. Disc labeled "AIR". D. Compressed Air Outlet (CA-B): 1. Water Saver BT2880-232SWSA-PCL, deck mount, dual outlet, laboratory needle valve assembly, colored plastic disc and polished chrome plate finish with clear epoxy finish. Disc labeled "AIR". CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-224000-P LUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install fixtures, equipment and systems as shown on Drawings or specified herein in accordance with provisions of each applicable Specification Section and all local and state codes having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Carefully drill holes for through bolts to avoid chipping blocks or plaster. C. Seal fixtures in contact with walls, floors and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone caulk. Match color to fixture color. D. Immediately after installation, provide protective covering over fixtures and trim. 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION A. Mount fixtures at height and location as indicated on Architectural plans and elevations. B. Mount accessible fixtures in conformance with the requirements of ANSI A117.1. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 22. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to provide proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Clean fixtures, fittings, spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. E. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components and retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. END OF SECTION 22 40 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX January 22, 2021 SECTION 22 70 10 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets and installation instructions for all equipment and accessories in this section in accordance with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements and Division 01. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow all requirements, recommendations, and appendices to comply with the following publications, codes, standards, and listings: 1. 2020 Fuel Gas Code of New York State. 2. American Gas Association. 3. Local Utility Company. B. Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 1.4 GAS SERVICE A. The existing gas service will be reused. 1.5 GAS PRESSURE A. The maximum allowable gas pressure inside the building is 1/2 psi. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS PIPING A. Piping Materials: Refer to Specification Section 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories" B. All exposed exterior and interior piping shall be primed and painted with one coat of alkyd primer and two coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel. Color shall be as selected. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX January 22, 2021 2.2 VALVES A. Refer to Specification Section 220523, "Valves". 2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Stainless steel construction and in accordance with ANSI Z21.24. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Provide distribution system from existing piping, including mains, risers, branches, drips, shut-offs and other required parts. Connect to appliances indicated or specified as requiring gas for their operation. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install gas piping at a uniform slope of 1/4 in. in 15 ft. to prevent traps. Horizontal lines shall slope upward to risers to the equipment. B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. C. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. D. Install unions in pipes 2 in. and smaller, adjacent to each valve, regulator and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 3.3 GAS PIPING TESTS A. Test natural gas systems according to 2020 Fuel Gas Code of New York State and the local utility requirements unless otherwise noted: 1. Test pressure shall be 1-1/2 times working pressure, but not less than 3 psi for two (2) hours for steel piping. 2. Pressure testing of plastic piping shall be per utility's requirements. B. Tests shall be witnessed by utility company. Make arrangements, provide all necessary items to complete testing and pay all costs. C. All tests shall be performed prior to the connection of equipment. Regulator shall be isolated from test pressures. Soap test shall be conducted on all joints. Repair leaks and defects with new materials. Retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. D. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200278-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX January 22, 2021 E. Provide written certification that tests have been conducted and satisfactorily completed. Submit to Owner's Representative. 3.4 GAS LINE PURGING A. At completion of pressure test, purge all natural gas systems according to 2020 Fuel Gas Code of New York State and the utility company requirements. B. Provide three (3) days notice to utility company to have the meter unlocked for service and equipment start up. Make all arrangements and pay all fees as required by the Utility Company. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\20 0278-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\200278-2305 00-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\200278-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\200278-230500-BasicMechanicalRequ irements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\200278-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\HVAC\200278-230500-BasicMechanicalRequiremen ts.docx 3/10/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230504-ELECTRICWIRING.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 04 - ELECTRIC WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor control wiring and temperature control wiring as required in Contract Documents. Provide wiring and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctive to the automatic temperature control system and for motor control regardless of the source of supply. Control wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for control signals directing equipment operation. Control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum. Provide wiring in accordance with requirements specified in Division 26 "Electrical" and the National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, disconnect switches, relays, and circuit breaker protection. B. Coordinate all work with Division 26 "Electrical". 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring for motors, motor starters and associated starting and control equipment, as well as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packaged control/starters), are included in Division 26 "Electrical", unless otherwise called for. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Wiring shall be installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26 "Electrical". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete wiring diagrams for equipment systems. Deliver wiring diagrams to proper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay in construction schedule. Wiring diagrams and roughing information to be wired as part of the Work of Division 26, "Electrical", shall be clearly indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 26 specifications for required wiring materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230504-ELECTRICWIRING.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Check electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness of connections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal overload device, or device which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due to incorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams. 3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide motor control and temperature control wiring for equipment. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260501 for type of conduit to be used in specific applications. Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devices subject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Do not attach directly to hot surfaces, piping, or ductwork. Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all other wiring. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wire through conduit to each remote auxiliary relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heating device, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as required by NEC. B. All temperature control wiring shall be plenum rated type, meeting the requirements of NEC Article 300. C. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, and other devices required to provide specified functions. D. Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be installed without conduit. Installation and wire insulation types shall be as described by NEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50 volt and under shall: 1. Be adequately supported using bridle rings spaced a maximum of 3 ft. on centers or other approved method when installed horizontally above accessible ceilings or run exposed in unfinished areas. 2. Be installed in conduit when run in wall cavity or surface metal raceway where no access is available to wall cavity, in finished areas. 3. Be installed in conduit when installed vertically in Mechanical/Utility Rooms from panels and devices up to above ceiling, or 10 ft. above finished floor if not ceiling. 4. Be installed in conduit in all cases not specifically covered by the above cases, or where subject to physical damage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230504-ELECTRICWIRING.DOC January 22, 2021 3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide power and control wiring between sections of electrical radiation units, between shipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, disconnect switches, and their respective units. Provide control wiring from the package control system, to each respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package. Power wiring to and including disconnect switch shall be by Division 26, "Electrical". 3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS AND PANELS A. Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatly in gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide suitably rated terminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relay terminal. Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks. Provide nylon insulated, ring spade terminal for all control wires. Cables and wires shall be neatly bundled and lashed with nylon cable straps. END OF SECTION 23 05 04 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 30 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ROOF CURBS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230530-ROOFCURBS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 30 - ROOF CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation of roof curbs as shown in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 230550 - Wind Restraint for HVAC Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Typical detail and schedule for equipment. Details shall include cross-sectional view illustrating clearly the type of curb being submitted, i.e. double wall insulated, with or without cant. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF CURBS AND PIPE/DUCT/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements of this section, provide Roof Products and Systems Corp. (RPS) or comparable product by one of the following: 1. RPI (Roof Products Inc.) 2. ThyCurb 3. Greenheck B. Configuration: Coordinate curb type with roof deck construction and insulation thickness. 1. Self-flashing without cant strip, with mounting flange (RPS Series 2A). 2. Built-in cant and mounting flange (RPS Series 3A). 3. Built-in raised cant and mounting flange (RPS Series 4A). C. Provide wind restraint as called for in Item 1.2 above. 2.2 FAN CURBS/DUCT CURBS A. Double wall, 1-1/2 in. minimum thickness, fully insulated in the interior cavity with rigid insulation. Curb constructed of galvanized steel, 1-1/2 in. 3# density insulation with continuous welded corner seams and painted at all welds. 20 gauge up to 36 in., 18 gauge 38 to 72 in., 16 gauge over 72 in. in any dimension. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 30 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ROOF CURBS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230530-ROOFCURB S.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Intake penthouse fan curbs shall be 24 in. high minimum; all other fan curbs shall be 18 in. high or as otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Provide curb with adhesive backed closed cell foam gasket on the top edge to make airtight seal between curb and ventilator, fan, or air handling unit. Gasketing for kitchen exhaust fan curbs shall be woven ceramic gasket tape rated for the operating temperature. D. Options: 1. Insulated curb extension with damper tray to allow access door for damper maintenance; access door shall be 10 in. high. 2. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope(s) E. Basis of Design: RPS - RC Roof Curbs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Height as recommended by equipment manufacturer, not less than described in this specification. This Contractor shall be responsible for exact size, length, and location and shall set and secure each curb to the roof. Shim and level curb as required. Provide curb and supports for all roof-mounted equipment. All roof penetrations shall be made through an appropriate curb. All roof mounted equipment including fans, air handling units, etc, shall be set on an equipment support unless otherwise noted. Refer to Contract Drawings for details on plenums extending from curbs. END OF SECTION 23 05 30 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install vibration control devices, materials, and related items. Perform all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation systems in proper working order. 1.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by one of the following approved manufacturers: 1. Mason Industries Inc. (Hauppauge, NY) M.I. 2. Kinetics Noise Control Inc. (Dublin, OH) K.N.C. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls Group. (Butler, NJ) VMC Group 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. (Long Island City, NY) V.E.C. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate the size, location and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads. B. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes, with the proper loading to meet the specified deflection requirements. C. Supply and install any incidental materials such as mounting brackets, attachments and other accessories as may be needed to meet the requirements stated herein even if not expressly specified or shown on the Drawings, without claim for additional payment. D. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specification. E. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration when properly installed on the specified isolators, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-balancing, realignment, or other remedial work required to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. F. Upon completion of work, the Architect or the Architect's Representative shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to related sections elsewhere for procedural instruction for submittals. B. Before ordering any products, submit shop drawings of the items listed below. The shop drawings must be completed when submitted and must be presented in a clear, easily understood form. Incomplete or unclear presentation of shop drawings may be reason for rejection of the submittal. C. A complete description of products to be supplied, including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. D. Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting equipment, including: 1. The equipment identification mark. 2. The isolator type. 3. The actual load. 4. The static deflection expected under the actual load. 5. The specified minimum static deflection. 6. Steel rails, steel base frames, and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method, and location of equipment attachment bolts. 7. Special details necessary to convey complete understanding of the work to be performed. E. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned for installation at the job if requested. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES A. General: 1. All springs installed out-of-doors shall be zinc electroplated or powder-coated after fabrication. Hardware and other metal parts shall be cadmium-plated or galvanized. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard No. 14. 2. All isolators installed out-of-doors shall have base plates with bolt holes for fastening the isolators to the support members. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories and seismic restraint features must not degrade the isolation performance of the isolators. 4. Static deflection of isolators shall be as provided in the EXECUTION section and as shown on the Drawings. All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflections are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Type FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene): 1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1 (one). All mounts shall have leveling bolts. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is used, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the base plate. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NO isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, beating plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 2. Type FSN isolators shall be one of the following products with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLF M.I. b. Type FDS K.N.C. c. Series A VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Type FSNTL (Floor Spring and Neoprene Travel Limited): 1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compression height of the spring at the rated load. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ration of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately one (1). All mounts shall have leveling bolts. All mounts shall have vertical travel limit stops to control extension when weight is removed. The travel limit stops shall be capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment. A minimum clearance of 1/4 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the limit stops and the spring to avoid interference with the spring action. 2. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is use, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the base plate. 3. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NP isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, bearing plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 4. Type FSNTL isolators shall be one of the following products, with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLR M.I. b. Type FLS K.N.C. c. Series AWR VMC Group D. Type FN (Floor Neoprene): 1. Neoprene isolators shall be neoprene-in-shear type with steel reinforced top and base. All metal surfaces shall be covered with neoprene. The top and bottom surfaces shall be ribbed. Bolt holes shall be provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. The mounts shall include leveling bolts that may be rigidly connected to the equipment. 2. Type FN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type ND M.I. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 b. Type RD K.N.C. c. Series RD VMC Group E. Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a free standing and laterally stable steel spring and a neoprene element in series, contained within a steel housing. Spring diameters and hanger housing lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the housing. Alternatively, other provisions shall be made to allow for a 30° arc of movement of the bottom hanger rod without contacting the isolator housing. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Spring elements shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene element shall be designed to have a 0.3 in. minimum static deflection. The deflection of both the spring element and the neoprene element shall be included in determining the overall deflection of Type HSN isolators. 2. Type HSN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type 30N M.I. b. Type SRH or SFH K.N.C. c. Type RSH or RFH VMC Group F. Type HN (Hanger Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a neoprene-in-shear element contained within a steel housing. A neoprene neck brushing shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. The diameter of the hole in the housing shall be sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hanger housing. 2. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type HD M.I. b. Type RH or FH K.N.C. c. Type RHD or RFD VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.2 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Type BSF (Base-Steel Frame): 1. Steel base frames shall consist of structural steel section sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner which will negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. The depth of steel frame shall be at least 1/10 the longest dimension of the base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. 2. Frame bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 3. Type BSF bases shall be supplied by the isolator manufacturer and shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type WFSL M.I. b. Type SFB or SRB K.N.C. c. Series WFB VMC Group B. Type BIB (Base-Inertia Base): 1. Concrete inertia bases shall be formed of stone-aggregate concrete (150 lb./cu. ft.) and appropriate steel reinforcing cast between welded or bolted perimeter structural steel channels. Inertia bases shall be built to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, deflect, or crack in any manner that would negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Inertia bases shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. Inertia base depth shall be at least 1/12 the longest dimension of the inertia base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. Inertia bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 2. The steel frame and reinforcement shall be supplied by the vibration isolator manufacturer. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYST EMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Frame and reinforcement for Type BIB bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type KSL M.I. b. Type CIB-L or CIB-H K.N.C. c. Series WPF VMC Group 2.3 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals shall be field-fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that is 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall be used to provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend 1 in. beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the penetrating element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4 in. of the ends of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4 in. space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant to form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without contacting the sleeve. Refer to details on Drawings. 2.4 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolation mounting manufacturer, or be custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate neoprene isolation elements similar to Type FN that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of ducts or pipe. B. Resilient lateral supports shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Type ADA M.I. 2. Type RGN K.N.C. 3. Type MDPA VMC Group 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections shall be heavy glass fabric, double neoprene coated, approximately 30 oz. per sq. yd. The clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of 3 in. and the connection shall have a minimum of 1.5 in. of slack material. Materials for flex connection shall be fire retardant, water and milder resistant, and comply with UL standard 214. B. Flexible duct connections shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventglass". CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-2305 48-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. 2.7 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Thrust restraints shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad. The unit shall be designed to have the same deflection due to thrust-generated loads as specified for the isolators supporting the equipment. The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and be designed so it can be pre-compressed at the factory to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement during starting or stopping of the equipment. Allowable movement shall be field-adjustable. The assembly shall be furnished complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both equipment and the adjacent fixed structural anchor. The thrust restraints shall be installed on the discharge of the fan so that the restraint rods are in tension. Assemblies that place the rods in compression are not acceptable. The holes in the spring restraint brackets through which the restraint rods pass must be oversized to prevent contact between the brackets and rods. B. Thrust restraints shall be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type WB M.I. 2. Type HSR K.N.C. 3. Type HTR VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.8 GROMMETS A. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate, and shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. B. Grommets shall either be custom made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type Isogrommets MBIS, Inc. (Bedford Heights, OH) 2. Type WB Barry Controls (Brighton, MA) 3. Type HG Mason Industries Inc., (Hauppauge, NY) 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Sealants for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or one of the non-setting sealants indicated below: 1. Acoustical sealant D.A.P. 2. BR-96 Pecora 3. Acoustical sealant Tremco 4. Acoustical sealant U.S.G. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Refer to the PRODUCTS section of this specification for vibration isolation devices identified on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. The static deflection of all isolators specified herein are the minimum acceptable deflections for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Major Equipment: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified on Drawings, all floor-mounted major equipment shall be set on concrete housekeeping pads. 2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major equipment items shall be as specified hereunder. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200 278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on the Drawings. 4. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called for in the electrical portion of the specification. 5. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all suspended fans and on all floor-mounted fans developing 4 in. or more of static pressure, unless the horizontal component of the thrust force can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the equipment weight. C. Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule: TYPE VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPE MINIMUM STATIC DEFLECTION (In.) EQUIPMENT BASE Roof Fans FSNTL 1.0 ---- NOTE 1: Equipment base and vibration isolators can be deleted where pumps are provided on slabs on grade and if pumps are placed on concrete inertia slab isolated from surrounding floor slab. D. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment: 1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as converters, pressure reducing stations, dryers, strainers, storage tanks, condensate receiver tanks and expansion tanks which are connected to isolated piping systems shall be vibration-isolated from the building structure by Type NP or Type HN isolators (selected for .01 in. static deflection) unless their position in the piping system requires a higher degree of isolation as called for under "Pipe Isolation". E. Pipes: 1. All chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam main and engine exhaust piping shall be isolated from the building structure within the following limits: a. Within mechanical rooms. b. Within 50 ft. total pipe length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (chillers, pumps, air handling units, pressure reducing stations, etc.). c. Everywhere for piping that is 5 in. or larger. d. Piping shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolators, resilient lateral supports, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals. e. Isolators for the first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve one half the specified static deflection of the isolators supporting the connected equipment. When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than 1/2 in., Type FSN or Type HSN isolators shall be used. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIO NISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 When the required static deflection is less than or equal to 1/2 in., Type FN or Type HN isolators shall be used. All other pipe support isolators within the specified limits shall be either Type FN or Type HN achieving at least 1/4 in. static deflection. f. Where lateral support of pipes is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports. g. Pipes penetrating the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation. 2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Isolators: 1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment. 2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints. 3. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking. Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system and the location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base is specifically called for herein. 4. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and the isolator base plates shall rest entirely on the pad. 5. Hanger rods for vibration-isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists, not the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide suitable intermediate support members as necessary. 6. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360° about the rod axis without contacting any object. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200 278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 7. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, that is isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated and unisolated pipes on the same trapeze. 8. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment. 9. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment shall not come in rigid contact with the building construction or rigidly supported equipment. 10. The installed and operating heights of equipment vibration-isolated with Type FSNTL isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Adjust isolators to provide 1/4 in. clearance between the limit stop brackets and the isolator top plate, and between the travel limit nuts and travel limit brackets. 11. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes. C. Bases: 1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitable rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements, and is not specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1 in. between steel rails, steel frame base or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment. The isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system. D. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Sheet metal ducts and plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230548-VIBRATIONISOLATIONOFMECHANICALSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 E. Flexible Pipe Connections: 1. Install flexible pipe connections in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. Thrust Restraints: 1. Thrust restraints shall be attached on each side of the fan at the vertical centerline of thrust. The two rods of the thrust restraints shall be parallel to the thrust force. This may require custom brackets or standoffs. The body of the thrust restraint shall not come in contact with the connected elements. Thrust restraints shall be adjusted to constrain equipment movement to the specified limit. G. Grommets: 1. Where grommets are required at hold down bolts of isolators, bolt holes shall be properly sized to allow for grommets. The hold down bolt assembly shall include washers to distribute load evenly over the grommets. Bolts and washers shall be galvanized. H. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals: 1. Maintain an airtight seal around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant. END OF SECTION 23 05 48 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 50 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230550- WINDRESTRAINTFORHVACSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 50 - WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and brace mechanical and electrical systems, as called for, to resist directional wind forces (lateral, longitudinal and vertical). 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Provide work in compliance with the following codes and standards: B. 2020 Building Code of New York State (Section 1609 and 1613). C. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State (Section 301, Item 301.15). 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures with Supplement No. 1 - Standard ASCE/SEI 716. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. The contractor shall provide Professional Engineer stamped and signed engineering calculations and details of wind restraint systems to meet total design lateral force requirements for support and restraint of mechanical systems. Engineer shall be licensed to practice in the state in which the project is located. 2. The wind restraint engineering calculations and details shall provide the quantity of attachments and size/type of attachments for the mounting of an equipment curb or support rail to the building structure, and for attachment of the equipment or system to the equipment curb or support rail. It is not the intent for manufactured equipment curbs or support rails to be certified by their respective manufacturers, nor is it the intent for them to be certified by the Professional Engineer who is providing the wind restraint calculations and connection methodology. 3. Systems requiring wind restraint including, but not limited to: a. Intake penthouse. b. Roof curbs associated with any of the equipment listed above. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit wind force level (Fp) calculations from applicable building code. Submit preapproved restraint selections, installation details, and plans indicating locations of restraints. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 50 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230550-WINDRESTRAINTFORHVACSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Calculations, plans, restraint selection, and installation details shall be stamped and signed by a professionally licensed engineer experienced in wind restraint design. C. Submit manufacturer's product data. D. For each piece of equipment that requires wind restraint as outlined in this section, include the following: 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify the center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchoring provisions. 2. Anchorage: Provide detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the calculations are based and their installation requirements. Identify anchor bolts, studs and other mounting devices. Provide information on the size, type and spacing of mounting brackets, holes and other provisions. E. The Contractor shall provide photographs of the installed roof mounted equipment, showing the fully installed wind restraint anchoring, prior to the roofing material installation, as a formal submittal for verification that the work has been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CODE INFORMATION A. This project is subject to the wind bracing requirements of the codes listed above. The following criteria are applicable to this project: 1. Basic Design Wind Speed (V): 110 mph. 2. Risk Category: II 3. Exposure Category: B 4. Height and Exposure Adjustment Coefficient: N/A - Building height is less than 60 ft. 2.2 WIND BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, wind loads, and capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure. 2. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth. 3. All wind restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces calculated per the applicable building code and as summarized in Section 2.1. B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to wind forces. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 50 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230550-WINDRESTRAINTFORHVACSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wind Restraint of Piping: 1. All restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's restraint guidelines and all certified data. 2. Installation of restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment or piping, resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40 ft. maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80 ft. maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 5. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within 24 in. of the elbow or tee or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances. 6. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints. 7. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 8. Provide reinforced clevis bolts when required. 9. Piping crossing building seismic or expansion joints, passing from building to building, or supported from different portions of the building shall be installed to allow differential support displacements without damaging the pipe, equipment connections, or support connections. Pipe offsets, loops, anchors, and guides shall be installed as required to provide specified motion capability and limit motion of adjacent piping. 10. Do not brace a system to two independent structures such as roof and wall. B. Wind Restraint of Ductwork and Equipment: 1. All restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the wind restraint design submittal. 2. The interaction between mechanical and electrical equipment and the supporting structures shall be designed into the restraint systems. 3. Installation of restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 50 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230550-WINDRESTRAINTFORHVACSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Exhaust fans with hinge kits shall have wind restraint fasteners installed on the hinged side, same as the three (3) non-hinged sides. 5. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified. 6. Do not install any equipment or duct that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. 7. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific equipment selection. END OF SECTION 23 05 50 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230553-MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATION A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11in. (Minimum) indicating valve number, location, and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc.; Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.; Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.; Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where this is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230553-MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: Pipe Function Identification Low Pressure Steam LPS Low Pressure Condensate LPC Heating Water Supply HWS Heating Water Return HWR Chilled Water Supply CWS Chilled Water Return CWR Glycol Supply GS Glycol Return GR High Pressure Steam HPS High Pressure Condensate HPC Pumped Condensate PC 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high numerals. Identify between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. Lettering to be stamped and in-filled black. Seton, or equal. a. Valve-tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves tagged as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Hang in Mechanical Room. 2. Valve chart to include as a minimum, valve #, valve size, valve type, valve service description, valve location. 2.4 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025 in. minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ HVAC\200278-230553-MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in. and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, phenolic (micarta) labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 in. thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-in. bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. E. Provide for the following equipment: 1. Air handling units 2. Pumps CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230553-MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Exhaust fans PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project, except for service valves at terminal equipment. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment listed above. C. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, at maximum intervals of 20 feet. For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents. B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of, mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. C. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including constant volume and variable volume systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems. 4. Hydronic systems; including constant flow and variable flow systems. D. This Section does not include: 1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements. 4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form listing items required by specifications. Results shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit testing and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Section 3.1.B, "Preparation", and consistent with those listed in Part 3 of this specification. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC \200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 C. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, AABC agency shall provide system readiness checklists as specified in Section 3.1.C, "Preparation", to be used and filled out by the installing contractors verifying that systems are ready for Testing and Balancing. D. Examination Report: Provide a summary report of the examination review required in Section 3.1.D to the Engineer, documenting issues that may preclude the proper testing and balancing of the systems. E. Certified report format shall consist of the following: 1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name. 2. Individual test sheets for air handlers, terminal units, air distribution, exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit heaters and unit ventilators. 3. Manufacturer's pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated. 4. One complete set of reproducible record contract drawings marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, testports locations, register, grille and diffuser numbers to correlate test sheet. Data shall be provided with reports. 5. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System testing, adjusting and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of air and water distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20027 8\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers. H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified personnel at project for system operation and trouble shooting. TAB contractor shall change sheaves and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balance facilities. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing, adjust balancing devices for full flow; fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers. 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy job conditions. 4. All outdoor conditions (Db, Wb, and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report. 5. Provide sheaves and belts as required to meet system performance requirements for all belt-driven fan motors 10 HP and greater. Adjust and align sheaves to obtain proper settings and operation. Verify motors are not overloading. 6. Installing contractor shall replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 7. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 8. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set prior to final adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFM's is not acceptable. 9. If duct construction and/or installation prohibits proper traverse readings, provide coil measurements at main coils and/or fresh air intake traverse with units operating in 100% outside air mode (where applicable). 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Testing and Balancing agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital and hard copy formats. B. Controls contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel and assistance to Testing and Balancing agency as required to balance the systems. Controls Contractor shall also provide trending report to demonstrate that systems are complete. C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by Testing and Balancing agency. D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves and belts as required by Testing and Balancing agency. E. Flag all manual volume dampers with fluorescent or other high-visibility tape. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20027 8\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates and other appurtenances as required by Testing and Balancing agency. G. Installing contractor shall replace or repair insulation as required by Testing and Balancing agency. H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness for Testing and Balancing to begin. As a minimum verify the following: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started, and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties have been verified. j. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Testing and Balancing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGA NDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the Testing and Balancing agency to complete work prior to occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, mangnehelic gauges, amprobes, veltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. B. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six (6) months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine Bid Documents and submittals and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of any questions regarding balancing. 1. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing and Balancing of systems and equipment. 2. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. B. Prepare a Testing and Balancing Strategies and Procedures Plan that includes: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. C. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, for use by contractors in verifying system readiness for Testing and Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. j. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. D. Examine construction and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of outstanding issues related to balancing, as part of "Examination Report" submittal. 1. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and controls are ready for operation. 3. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor and functioning. 4. Examine strainers to verify that Mechanical Contractor has replaced startup screens with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. 5. Examine two-way valves for proper installation and function. 6. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. 7. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 8. Examine air vents to verify that mechanical contractor has removed all air from all hydronic systems. 9. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, weld-olets, and manual volume dampers prior to pressure testing. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for testing and balancing. 3.2 TESTING OF EXISTING AIR/WATER SYSTEMS A. Water Systems: Prior to performing any demolition work, Testing and Balancing Contractor shall provide balance report for the existing chilled water system, pumps P-1 and P-2, as specified on the drawings. Report to include pump operating data, water flow and differential pressure readings. No demolition work shall be performed prior to written Engineer review of existing pump conditions. 3.3 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, water flow, and TDH of each pump. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20027 8\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fanspeed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and treating equipment. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system affect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to sheaves sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum setpoint airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return-and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminalunit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVA C\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the conditions but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that the adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. 3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and any manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required coil and heat exchanger gpms with pump design flow rate. B. Verify that hydronic systems are ready for testing and balancing: 1. Check liquid level in expansion tank and verify that tank is set to specified pressure for system fill and expansion. 2. Check that makeup water has adequate pressure to highest vent. 3. Check that control valves are in their proper positions. 4. Check that air has been purged from the system. 5. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 6. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump total dynamic head (TDH) or exchanger pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves or fittings. b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gauge heights. d. On single stage centrifugal pumps, verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. e. With all valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust flow measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at all terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Re-measure each terminal after all have been adjusted. 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been balanced. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow measuring devices at the terminals: 1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. F. Verify final system conditions as follows: 1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Re-measure all final pump operating data, TDH, volts, amps, static profile. 3. Mark all final settings. G. Verify that all memory stops have been set. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 1. Verify that the differential pressure (DP) sensor is located per the Contract Documents. 2. Determine if there is diversity in the system. B. For systems with no diversity: 1. Follow procedures outlined for constant-flow hydronic systems. 2. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 3. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230 593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. C. For systems with diversity: 1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by the design Engineer. 3. Follow procedures outlined for constant flow hydronic systems. 4. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance the terminals that were just opened. 5. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 6. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. 7. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as the hood. Adjust the air outlet flow pattern to minimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate make-up air is available to achieve the indicated flow of the hood. B. Measure, adjust and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position. 1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure adjust, and record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions. 2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral make-up air, measure, adjust, and record the exhaust and make-up airflow. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 16 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using automatic dampers, adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow. D. After balancing is complete, do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood duct connection with the hood operating at indicated airflow. 2. Measure and record the face velocity across the open sash face area. Measure the face velocity at each point in a grid pattern. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 in. between points and between any point and the perimeter of the opening. a. For laboratory fume hoods designed to maintain a constant face velocity at varying sash positions, also measure and record the face velocity at 50 and 25 percent of the design open sash position. b. Calculate and report the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements. c. Calculate and report the exhaust airflow by multiplying the calculated average face velocity by the sash open area. Compare this quantity with the exhaust airflow measured by duct Pitot-tube traverse. Report differences. d. If the average face velocity is less than the indicated face velocity, retest the average face velocity and adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity. 3. Check each laboratory fume hood for the capture and containment of smoke by using a hand-held emitting device. Observe the capture and containment of smoke flow pattern across the open face and inside the hood. Make adjustments necessary to achieve the desired results. E. With the room and laboratory fume hoods operating at indicated conditions all fume hoods installed shall be tested to current ASHRAE 110 Standard. Field test reports must be performed and prepared by an independent third party organization having no affiliation with the manufacturer. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.05 or better for all tests. Manufacturer must have a representative on-site for all tests and must assist in trouble-shooting and correcting all non-conforming hoods. F. Mannequin-as-Person Test: This test is intended to simulate real-world laboratory conditions in which a real person manipulates real objects in the hood. This test is performed with the investigator standing in front of the ejector while repeatedly moving five (5) objects from one side of the ejector to the other, then rotating the body away from the hood with the elbows next to the body and the arms horizontal in front. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 17 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 This series of movements is repeated for the duration of the tracer gas test. The air sampling is performed with a sampling probe at the same height as the breathing zone of the mannequin. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.10 or better for all tests. G. Testing Contractor to provide a complete report of the results of the testing program including an executive summary, an outline of the test procedures and equipment used, a table of the results of each test conducted on each hood and a conclusion and recommendation section discussing the results and (if necessary) recommendations to improve fume hood performance. 3.12 ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TESTING A. Upon completion of airflow balancing of all supply, return and exhaust registers (within specified tolerances), test and record differential pressures between spaces identified in Construction Documents. B. Adjust volume dampers and/or control set points as required to achieve specified pressure differential. Immediately notify engineer if airflow settings are adjusted beyond tolerances specified in this section to ensure that air change rates or other less apparent considerations have been taken into account. C. Test and record final differential pressure values and adjusted airflows. Clearly indicate positive or negative pressure differential in relation to which adjacent space as there may be multiple adjacent spaces measurements are required for. 3.13 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Zero to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Minimum Outside Air: Zero to plus 10 percent. 4. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 5. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 6. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 18 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALA NCING.DOC January 22, 2021 3.14 FINAL TEST & BALANCE REPORT A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations found during the Testing and Balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the technicians or Test and Balance Engineers. B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Title Page: a. AABC or NEBB Certified Company Name. b. Company Address. c. Company Telephone Number. d. Project Identification Number. e. Location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project Number. j. Date of Report. k. Certification Statement. l. Name, Signature, and Certification Number. 2. Table of Contents. 3. National Performance Guaranty. 4. Report Summary: a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design tolerances, with information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies. 5. Instrument List: a. Type b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial Number e. Calibration Date CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 19 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTIN GADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Required air side data - Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Motors: a. RPM b. BHP c. Full load amps d. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts e. Shaft diameter f. Complete nameplate data 2. Fans: a. Cfm b. RPM c. Suction static pressure d. Discharge static pressure e. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts, key sizes, shaft, diameter f. Complete nameplate data g. Sketch of system's inlet and outlet connections h. Location of test port 3. Duct: Traverse Zones a. Cfm b. Static Pressure 4. AHU: Air Handling Units, Blower Coil Units, Fan Coil Units a. Minimum outdoor air Cfm b. Total discharge and return Cfm c. Static profile thru unit d. Complete nameplate data 5. Coil: a. Entering air temperature (DB/WB) b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB) c. Static differential d. Face velocity and area e. Cfm f. Complete nameplate data 6. VAV Boxes and Lab Air Valves: a. Minimum Cfm b. Maximum Cfm CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 20 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC January 22, 2021 7. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: a. Cfm b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern 8. Filter Banks: a. Nameplate data b. Static pressure drop D. Required Fluid Data: Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Heat Transfer Devices: Including, but not limited to air handlers, convectors, fin tube radiation sections, unit ventilators, fan coils, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, heat pumps, heat exchangers. a. GPM (coil and bypass) b. Entering water temperature c. Leaving water temperature d. Water pressure drop e. Complete nameplate data 2. Pumps: a. Check rotation b. GPM c. Pump off pressures (suction and discharge) d. Running suction pressure e. Running discharge pressure f. Running load amps g. RPM - motor h. Complete nameplate motor and pump i. Marked up pump curve illustrating final operating conditions E. One (1) copy of the final test and balance report shall be sent directly to the Engineer of Record. Provide five (5) additional copies to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200 278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 07 10 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data, product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 232010 - Piping Systems and Accessories. B. Section 233100 - Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes, and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited. 4. Comply with 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. All adhesives, coatings and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\ 200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed. (Board, Blanket and Liner) B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armacell, K-Flex. C. Adhesives, Coatings, Mastics, Sealants: Childers, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Product Insulation meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature installed value. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system consists of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures to be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FLEXIBLE TYPE INSULATION A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, foam material. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.25 BTU-in/ft2 hr. °F at 75°F mean temperature. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. B. Insulation shall have a flame-spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN/ULC S-102, "Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 2.5 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct insulation shall have a thermal resistance (R) value identification mark by the manufacturer applied no less than every 10 feet, as per Energy Code requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: 1. Knauf Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard compliant. 2. 'K' Value of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature (Faced): 250°F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate pressuresensitive aluminum foil tape. 5. Density: Minimum 1.0 PCF. C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB. 2. 'K' Value of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450º F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12 in. on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape. a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 3 lb./ft.3. b. Exposed Areas: 6 lb./ft.3 minimum density for duct less than 8 ft. - 0 in. above finished floor. 2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid. 2. Concealed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 3 PCF. b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 3. Exposed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 6 PCF b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature. B. Foam Board. Polyisocyanurate core. Foil faced on one side and opposite side faced with white acrylic coated embossed aluminum, 4-mil. equal to "Dow Chemical Therma Heavy Duty". 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.8 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-24, or approved equal. B. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. C. Weather Barrier Mastic: Used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal. D. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. E. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive: Used to bond elastomeric insulation. Foster 85-75; Childers CP-82, or approved equal. F. Elastomeric Insulation Coating: Water based coating used to protect outside of elastomeric insulation. Foster 30-65, or approved equal. G. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\D ESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 H. Metal Jacketing Sealant: Used as a sealant on metal jacketing seams to prevent water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. I. Reinforcing Mesh: Used in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce. Foster Mast A Fab; Childers Chil Glass #10, or approved equal. 2.9 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Section 230500 "Basic Requirements" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping, ductwork and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, air separators, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. F. Items such as boiler manholes, handholds, clean-outs, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIG N\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personnel injury: Piping from zero to seven feet above all floors and access platforms including hot (above 140°F) piping and any other related hot surface. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed Use cork insulation tape equal to Rubatex #Q-201 for piping inside unit ventilators or fan coil valve compartment. B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. When using polyisocyanurate or cellular glass on below ambient piping/duct, seal all insulation joints with insulation joint sealant. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Chilled Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness 2. Hot Services and Domestic Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 3. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or ells may be continuous. 3. Insulation shall be adhered to 100% of the pipe. 4. Where exposed outdoors, provide with UV resistant PVC jacketing. H. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. I. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed, insulated pipe, valves, fittings, and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors, thermometers, instruments, and access doors. Apply as follows: 1. Rigid Board Type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two rows per side. Secure insulation with washer clips. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Staple all joints. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape and 4 in. glass-fab applied with specified vapor barrier coating. Apply tape over corner beading where exposed. 2. Flexible Blanket Type: Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value using a maximum compression of 25%. Installed R-value shall be per ECC of NYS. Firmly butt all joints. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of 2 in. Where vapor retarder performance is required, all penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressuresensitive foil tape, and coated with vapor barrier coating prior to system startup. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SP ECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 Pressure-sensitive foil tapes shall be a minimum 3 in. wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723. Duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 18 in. wide using mechanical fasteners on 18 in. centers. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Care should be exercised to avoid over-compression of the insulation during installation. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Apply insulation with joints firmly butted as close as possible to the equipment surface. Insulation shall be secured as required with adhesive, mechanical fasteners or banding material. Fasteners shall be located a maximum of 3 in. from each edge and spaced no greater than 12 in. on center. B. Vapor retarders shall overlap a minimum of 2 in. at all seams and be sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive tape and vapor barrier coating. All penetrations, facing damage, and mechanical fasteners shall be covered with a minimum 2 in. overlap of tape and vapor barrier coating. C. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: Secure fiberglass with pins, studs, or clips. Field apply 8 oz. knit fiberglass cloth, cemented and applied over standard jacket. Properly cut at fittings to avoid wrinkles and coat with white lagging adhesive/coating. Leave ready for painting. D. For equipment insulation exposed in mechanical rooms or subject to mechanical abuse, finish with minimum 0.020 in. thick PVC Jacketing or metal. All other insulation shall be finished as appropriate for the location and service or as specified on the drawings. 3.5 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Insulate existing piping, ductwork, and equipment as called for. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Hot water and glycol/hot water (200°F and lower) Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and Larger: 2 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1-1/2 in. Chilled water, glycol/chilled water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and Larger: 1 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1/2 in. Refrigeration Piping (Suction and liquid lines) Flexible 1 in. and Larger: 1 in. 3/4 in. and Smaller: 1/2 in. Concealed AC unit condensate drains Glass fiber or flexible elastomeric All Sizes: 1 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230710-INSULATION.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "II" - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS HVAC Supply Within mechanical rooms or exposed at 8 feet or less above finished floor: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass ……………..……..1-1/2 in. ……………..………….2 in Min. installed R value of 6 Min. installed R value of 6 Supply ducts, exposed within the conditioned space served ………………. …NOT INSULATED… Does not include the associated supply ductwork within the Mechanical Room or supply duct to the conditioned space. Return-air ducts within heated building envelope ………………. …NOT INSULATED… …………… Outside air ducts and plenums, connections and mixing boxes Rigid fiberglass ………………….……. 2 in. Min. installed R value of 8 Provide neat fit at intake plenum Exhaust, relief or vent ducts and plenums Exposed: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass ………………...………2 in. Min. installed R value of 8 Insulate 15 ft. from exterior opening and plenums END OF SECTION 23 07 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 09 23 - BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The Building Automation Control System (BACS) is configured as a network with control functions at multiple levels, and with multiple points of operator control and supervision. The BACS includes centralized head-end computers, the Energy Management and Controls System (EMCS) workstations, data transmission systems, field panels and controllers, necessary interfacing controls, sensors and actuators. The controllers contain microprocessors and other supporting electronics that perform local control functions and execute application programs without requiring communications with the centralized head-end computers or workstations. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings. Provide a complete Direct Digital Control System, to perform the functions described in this Section. Provide wiring and conduit required to connect devices furnished as a part of, or accessory to, this automatic control system. Control wiring is defined as wiring up to and including 120 volts. Install wiring in accordance with requirements of "Electrical Wiring" in Section 15A019, and the National Electrical Code. Provide all required devices for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, relays, pushbutton stations, etc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The complete automatic temperature control system shall be comprised of electronic control devices with a microprocessor based Direct Digital Control System. All work shall be installed only by skilled mechanics. B. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience in systems of similar size, type and complexity installed within a 100 mile radius. C. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a local service department (within a 50 mile radius) and have available a minimum of three factory trained technicians within a 24 hour period. D. All components shall be fully tested and documented to operate as a complete system. E. Supplier must guarantee that all replacement parts will be carried in stock for a period of 10 years minimum from the data that the system is commissioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping and wiring control diagrams and systems description for each system under control. 2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for component control panels and DDC panels. 3. Submit a valve and damper scheduled showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Provide apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for all control system components. 4. A complete listing of input and output points, control loops and/or routines, including time of day functions, and facilities management system functions for each controlled system. This listing shall include point logical names, identifiers, and alarmable ranges. 5. Provide as part of a separate submittal a hard copy of all graphics showing system components, sensor locations, setpoints and fixed/variable data. Engineer shall review and approve graphic format prior to final acceptance of system. 1.5 WORK INCIDENTAL TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL TRADE A. Furnish the following materials: 1. For piping work: a. Control valves in piping. b. Immersion sensing wells in piping systems. c. Valved pressure taps. 2. For sheet metal work: a. All automatic dampers, assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper and motors. b. Provide access doors to other means of access through ducts or ceilings and walls for service and adjustment of controllers, valves, and dampers. B. Furnish written details, instructions and supervision for the above trades to Ensure proper installation size, and location of any equipment furnished for installation by others. C. Electrical trade to provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power with surge protection to all DDC panels and operator workstations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUIL DINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power and control transformers at all microprocessor based VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers. As an option, provide control transformers sized to serve multiple VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers. Provide a junction box or boxes to obtain power, on a per floor basis. See electrical plans for locations. 1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new control system to be free from defects in material and workmanship, for a period of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperatures within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Humidity devices shall maintain relative humidity conditions within 3% of span 0-100% RH. B. Provide one year maintenance service of control components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include software updates and 24-hour, 7-day emergency and seasonal inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient and defective during this period. C. The Contractor will provide monitoring of the DDC system as soon as the system is operating and then for a minimum of one (1) year (24 hours/day, 7 days/week) after the acceptance date. A monthly report will be sent to the Owner with a description of general system status and any alarms or off-normal conditions. D. The Contractor will guarantee future availability of continuous, 24-hour, 7-day a week service for the systems through available maintenance contracts. 1.7 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION A. When the Work has been completed, completely adjust and calibrate the control system. Review the operation of each system input and output, control loops and/or software routings, timing functions, operator entered constants and facilities management functions and observe that they perform their intended functions. Provide a complete values and points log, printed every hour, for one week to demonstrate control functions and programming. Provide one point log for summer operation and one winter. Points to be trended shall be selected by the engineer. When above procedure has been completed and the control system is operating satisfactorily, submit a letter with one copy of completed values and points log to the Owner's Representative advising them that the control system is 100% complete and operates in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. After review and approval of points log by the Engineer, the control system trade shall schedule a technician on site for field review of system components, operation and graphics as part of final system appearance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HV AC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 1.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012: BACnet®. - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2012. 2. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. 3. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. . 1.9 PROCEDURES A. For connection of devices and reconfiguration of existing devices on the Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network: 1. Contractor making changes to existing devices or installing new devices on the Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network shall contact the Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Operation at 607255-5777 at least one (1) business day in advance of the anticipated work to initiate a service request with the Cornell Control Shop. The requestor shall provide the following information: a. Desired time to ,start work and the expected duration b. The IP address of the device to be installed or configured c. The physical location of the device including facility and room number. d. Cell phone contact information for the installer. 2. Work will be permitted from 7:00 AM — 1:00 PM on business days Monday through Thursday. The one (1) day notice requirement and hours restrictions will be waived if the work is deemed an emergency. Personnel shall notify EMCS when the work is complete. Personnel are expected to be able to respond on site if contacted by EMCS to correct any anomalies related to the work for a period of up to four (4) hours after work is complete or if released by the FMCS, whichever is sooner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 1.10 BACNET/IP CHECKOUT A. Prior to connection to the campus backbone network, it must be demonstrated to Cornell personnel that these criteria have been met: 1. The LP address, subnet mask and IP gateway address of the device to be connected must be shown to be correct for the network connection about to made. 2. The device's Device Instance Number (DIN) must be shown to conform to Cornell standards. 3. In the case of devices that route to subordinate BACnet MS/TP or ARCNET networks, the network numbering must be shown to conform to Cornell numbering standards. 4. The BACnet alarm Recipient List must contain the DIN (or BACnet Address, i.e., (BACnet Network Number, MAC Address)) of both the appropriate vendor server (ALC) and the EMCS alarm server (currently Jarlsberg, DIN 510). 5. For each device containing network variables, a list of network variables must be provided showing that each references a valid network-accessible point. 6. For each device containing points that are to issue Unconfirmed COV Notifications, a list of the points and their respective Change of Value (COY) increments must be provided to prove that the device will not generate COV storms. 7. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) capability must be shown to be disabled unless explicitly authorized by Cornell, i.e., the device's Broadcast Distribution Table (BDT) must be shown to be empty or non-existent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This section defines requirements for the sensors, controllers, computers, and generally the components that make up the system and the means and methods by which they are installed. B. Software and Hardware Updates - At the end of the first six months, and during the second six months, the Contractor shall update the equipment and any controllers, servers, workstations and HMI Web servers with the latest modifications and improvements in software, firmware, and hardware that the manufacturer may have incorporated in the furnished equipment. C. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20 0278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 2.2 CONTROLLERS A. Overview 1. The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. B. Controller Installation Requirements 1. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand-alone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. 2. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone functionality. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as OAT, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Design professional shall specifically indicate point groupings for stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are: a. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include: 1) Humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters; 4) Smoke modes. b. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system: pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include: 1) OAT and humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters. c. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any OA that may be necessary for control. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. 4. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. 5. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. 6. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. 7. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.3 SENSORS A. General 1. The following indicates basic requirements for the I/O devices. 2. All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors 1. Sensor Resolution - When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Room Temperature Sensor - These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. a. Sensing element – RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point; b. Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated for zones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system; c. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure and appropriate cabling where indicated (this shall include all office spaces). This shall be a momentary contact closure; d. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display; e. Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. f. Temperature sensor shall be mounted at 46" A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 3. Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The temperature range as required for resolution is indicated above. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each, two square feet of coil/duct face area. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution as indicated above. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 5. Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor a. These shall include brass or stainless steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point. The temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.3°F; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 c. Refer to Cornell’s metering specification for temperature sensors that are used for metering. 6. OA Sensors a. These shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. The temperature range shall be as required for the resolution indicated above; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point; c. On major/critical systems, one shall be provided for each; d. Sensors shall be located on a north wall of the building and installed with stand-offs. On 100% OA systems and lab buildings, locate sensor in outside air plenum. e. Provide one sensor per mechanical room or building-level controller. C. Pressure Sensors - The pressure transducers will be either diaphragm or strain gauge types: 1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Applications: Duct static pressure, air flow VP, filter DP, Fan DP, etc.; b. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments; c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity; d. Acceptable Manufacturers (Airflow): Air Monitor, Paragon; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Filter DP): Dwyer; f. Acceptable Manufacturers (General and Static Pressure): Mamac, Setra. 2. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Pressure transmitters shall gauge pressure in the form of a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal. Sensor shall be installed with a valve manifold and pressure/temperature test ports in lieu of pressure gauges. DP transmitter shall be rated for 150 PSIG static pressure; b. Span shall be no greater than 2 times the working differential pressure of the system to allow the highest possible resolution; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 c. Pressure transmitters shall meet the following performance criteria: 1) External span and zero adjustments; 2) 1% accuracy over the entire span; 3) Wetted parts: Stainless steel with a silicone fluid-filled diaphragm; 4) Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.5% at maximum span. d. Install all transmitters with a three-valve manifold for venting, draining, and calibration; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Gauge and Differential Pressure): Mamac, Setra. D. Flow Sensors 1. General - Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that are required for accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate the location of the sensors and indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipe upstream and downstream from the sensor. 2. Water: a. Water flow sensors shall meet the requirements necessary for use for test and balance duty as defined in the DCS specifications; b. Water flow sensors for monitoring only shall follow CHW standards defined in the DCS specifications. 3. Air Flow (For Laboratory VAV and AHU/Duct Flow Stations): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment. Fan inlet grids shall be used where possible to measure fan flow; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less; d. Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere; e. All fan inlet style flow elements shall be provided by the fan vendor and shall not block or affect fan efficiency; f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 g. Field calibrate to +/- 5% of field-measured airflow. 4. Air Flow (For Duct Airflow Monitoring): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less; d. Field calibrate to +/- 5.0% of field-measured airflow. E. Current Switches (CS) 1. For Constant Speed Motors: a. CS shall be provided for status indication of constant speed motors; b. Switch shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustable trip point; c. CS shall include LED indication of status; d. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries (H708/ H908 series). 2. For Variable Speed Motors: a. Typically, status indication that indicates VSD or bypass operation shall be derived from contacts on the VSD. The VSD must be specified to include this option; b. Otherwise, a current switch shall be provided for status indication. The switch shall be microprocessor based and suitable for use on a VSD; c. Self-adjusting trip setpoint; d. Factory programmed to detect belt loss undercurrent conditions; e. CS shall include LED indication of status; f. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hawkeye. F. Combination Temperature/CO2 Sensors/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point. 4. CO2 sensing equipment: +/- 30 PPM or +/- 3% accuracy at 400 to 1,250 PPM. 5. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy. Element shall have less than 1% drift per year. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-HC-ALC or design equal. G. Combination Temperature/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy. Element shall have less than 1% drift per year. 5. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-H-ALC or design equal. H. Dewpoint Sensors 1. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Units shall be two-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humidity sensors. Units shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for dewpoint temperature (°F). Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria: a. Accuracy: +/- 1.8°F; b. Sensor Operating Range: As required by the application; c. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year; d. Digital display. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vaisala only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2.4 CONTROL VALVES A. General 1. All valves shall be provided and sized by the control trade. 2. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. 3. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Valves with a CV greater than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should only be used if a cost benefit analysis shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC; b. Electrically piloted valves shall have a pneumatic actuator with positioner; c. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. 4. The BACS output to modulating valves shall be analog. In addition: a. Terminal reheat valves shall be proportional; b. Fan coils and similar terminal device valves shall be proportional; c. Radiation valves shall be two-position or proportional; d. Unit heaters shall be two-position or proportional. B. Water 1. General - Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Chilled Water Building Mixing Valve (two-way) a. Rotary-segmented ball ported industrial control valve; b. Body: Flanged carbon steel; c. Seat: Composition or stainless/Teflon; d. ANSI leakage class: IV; e. Trim: 316 Stainless; f. Actuator: Electric g. Typically CV shall be selected to give a 2 PSIG drop @ maximum building flow with the valve at the 90% open CV. Verify the necessary pressure drop with the Department of Utilities and Energy Management (Utilities). For buildings located at extremities, check with Utilities since requirements may not be typical; h. Valve shall seat against 40 PSI differential pressure (typical values; check with Cornell Utilities for location-specific values); i. Flow Characteristic Equal percentage or modified equal. j. Valve shall be normally open. k. Acceptable Make: Fisher, Neles, Valve Solutions. 3. Coil Valves a. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed"; b. Type: Valves shall all be two-way, V-port valve with characterizing disc, 1/4 turn; c. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated; d. Stem: Stainless steel; e. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon; f. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; g. Flow characteristics: Equal percentage; h. Ball and Stem shall be stainless steel; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 i. Fail positions shall generally be as follows, contact Cornell for special circumstances requiring deviation from these requirements: 1) Terminal hot water radiation: fail last 2) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving animal rooms: normally closed spring return. 3) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving laboratories: fail last 4) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving offices: fail last 5) Fan Coil Unit cooling coils: normally closed spring return 6) Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally open spring return 7) Chilled water coils in Air Handling Units: normally closed spring return 8) Chilled Beam terminal cooling: normally closed spring return j. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo, Valve Solutions. C. Steam 1. Steam control valves shall be rated for the highest system pressure and temperature and shall not lift when subjected to that pressure with the control system set to “fully closed.” 2. All steam control valves shall be pneumatically or electrically actuated and have a flanged or screw body with a rating of 400°F or higher, as appropriate. Trim shall be rated for 400°F. 3. Use high performance segmented V-ball control valves for all steam control applications. Since Cornell does not require 1/3-2/3 sizing, these valves are extremely cost-effective; the energy savings associated with the reduced passthrough leakage often pays for the higher cost premium. In addition, these valves require less packing maintenance and use much less vertical space than comparable valves. Steam valves shall have the following characteristics: a. Leakage Class: ANSI Class IV, minimum b. Flow Characteristic: Equal Percentage c. Rangeability: 300:1 turndown 4. On steam control valves with a normal differential pressure of 15 PSIG or greater, stainless steel noise reducing trim shall be used. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 16 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20 0278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Fisher b. Neles c. Valve Solutions, Inc. 6. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Heat Exchangers/Converters: Normally closed spring return (to protect for high temperature). 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damper structural rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead. B. Modulating dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade, dampers shall always be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to be connected to a single jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will prevent excessive damper area or, more importantly, length from being connected to a single jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be sufficient for specifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may have field fabricated jackshaft connections. C. Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection of the damper actuator outside of the air stream. This will allow for easier access to the actuators for maintenance. D. OA control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals. E. Output to modulating control dampers shall be analog. F. Design make: Ruskin. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, and Nailor. 2.6 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. B. For AHU/ duct mounted dampers: 1. Actuators shall be electronic. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 17 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo. C. For terminal unit dampers: 1. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque. Provide stroke indicator. Output to modulating damper actuators may be analog or floating. 2. Fast Acting Electronic Actuators: Provide fast acting electronic actuators for VAV terminals on fume hood and associated tracking zone dampers. These actuators shall move full stroke in less than one second. Output to modulating damper actuators shall be analog. 3. Venturi Style Air Valves: Provide a factory mounted and calibrated electronic positioner and fast acting (less than one second full stroke) electric actuator with position feedback. 2.7 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 18 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278 -230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Power Supplies 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Trade shall certify in writing at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. C. Panel Fabrication 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 2.8 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression or set screw couplings. 2. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 3. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 4. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 19 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 5. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU’s shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 7. Wire shall be un-spliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 8. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 9. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded pair cable. For sensors, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. For communications, the above control wiring requirements and the BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 10. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 11. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities - The BACS Trade wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled on the drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS headend. 2. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 3. The electrical trade shall provide "lock-out stop" control wiring. 4. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. 5. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. 6. ATC Trade shall provide all power supply wiring for all ATC supplied components. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 20 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\H VAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL A. This section of the guideline defines the requirements for the documentation of the installed systems. The BACS vendor shall generally provide the documentation covered herein. 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this section shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. 3.3 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. Hard Copy (General): Paper copies of the indicated deliverables shall be provided as directed by the project manager. Quantities shall be enumerated in the contract documents. At a minimum, three sets of hard copies shall be maintained; one at the facility, one in the HVACR shop, and one in the project maintenance manual. B. Hard Copy (Control Panels): Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. In addition, see Operation and Maintenance Materials. C. Electronic Copy: All submittal and as-built documents shall be provided electronically, to the HVACR shop. Different documents may be in different formats, however each shall be provided in one of the first two formats as well as in the format in which the document was originally created, if it is different. 1. Microsoft Office format (Word, Excel, etc.) 2. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). 3.4 SUBMISSIONS A. Submittals: BACS documentation indicated herein shall be submitted for approval of the design professional and the project manager who shall get review and feedback information from the HVACR Shop. B. As-Built Drawings: As-built documentation as indicated herein shall be maintained and submitted to reflect the final installed condition of the BACS. The as-built documents shall be kept up to date throughout the warranty period and submitted as final at the end of the warranty period. One set of documents and files shall be provided to be stored locally at the new facility and two sets shall be provided to be stored centrally. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 21 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 3.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED A. Control Schematics: Control schematics shall be utilized to graphically indicate the systems, show the schematic configuration of the systems and location of control devices, define the point names and addresses (as applicable), and define the setpoints for control elements. Control schematics are required both as part of the contract documents (generated by the design professional), shop drawing submittals, and as-built document submittals. The following shall be included in the controls schematics at a minimum: 1. Point names. 2. Point addresses (not applicable to the contract documents). 3. Point type. 4. Normal position of output devices. 5. Device ranges. 6. Initial design intent setpoints modified as refined during construction/ commissioning for as-built submittals. 7. Bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers (not applicable to the contract documents). 8. Legend of device symbols. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. Provide these as a part of the shop drawings and as-built submittal. C. Valve Schedules: Either with the control schematic or separately in shop drawing submittal and as-built submittal provide a valve schedule listing the following: 1. Size. 2. CV. 3. Design maximum flow. 4. Pressure drop at design maximum flow. 5. Position of valve at design condition. 6. Manufacturer. 7. Model/product number. 8. Close off rating. 9. Normal positions. 10. Valve characteristic. 11. Valve turndown. 12. Actuator information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 22 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 13. Design controlled circuit pressure differential range (coordinated with the submittals). D. Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” Valve sizes shall be picked as close as possible to meet the design pressure drop. The minimum CV shall be no less than 1.9 on all valves (See Section III, 3.04 “Control Valves” for additional information). E. Control System Architecture Diagram: Provide a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN (See also DCS 15956). F. Control Sequence of Operations: 1. All projects shall include detailed sequence of operations. Sequences may be on the control schematics or in the specifications in the contract documents, but shall be included with the control schematics for the shop drawing and as-built submittal. Control sequences shall be highly detailed in the design phase and shall maintain this detail throughout the as-built submittal phase. The following shall be included as a minimum: a. Sequences in all modes of operation (i.e., on, off, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.); b. Detailed steps during mode switches; c. Details of operation during and after a power outage. Loss of status associated with power outages must not be indicated as failures with a subsequent alarm or lock out; d. Specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips; e. Setpoints, trip points, and ranges. Initially these shall be the designer’s intent, and eventually be the actual setting at time of as-built submittal; f. Smoke control systems; g. Fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes. 2. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served. Also, group all sequences into functional sections (i.e., start/stop, static pressure control, economizer, etc.). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 23 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\ 200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Points List: A detailed point list shall be provided in tabular form either with the control schematics or separately. Indicate all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses (when known) and point types with applicable range as a minimum. These shall be provided electronically in either a database format or in a spreadsheet format. H. Alarms and Alarms List: Either as part of the points list or as a separate list, an alarms list shall be provided. The list shall include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. All analog control loops shall include an adjustable setpoint deviation alarm based upon error and time. The alarm parameters shall be the state the point is in to cause a particular alarm. An example of a point in this list is as follows: 1. Supply air temp (AI) +/-5°F from setpoint. I. Floor Plans: Provide a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, etc., located and identified. All network components (repeaters, routers, etc.) shall also be identified on the floor plan drawings. All BACS network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings. J. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings and as-built submittals shall include detailed wiring diagrams. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. These shall be submitted with shop drawing and as-built submittals. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). K. Sample Graphics and Trends: If the project includes web-based graphics and trends for the use of interfacing to the BACS, the vendor shall submit for approval draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. Design professional and project manager, after consultation with the HVACR Shop, shall approve the graphics. L. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 24 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 4. All submittals with as-built information (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists). As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram (as detailed above). Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc.). PART 4 - BACS INFRASTRUCTURE 4.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Automated Logic Corporation. 4.2 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEMS A. The control panels/enclosures housing the controllers will be located on each floor, to the extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home-runs to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in the equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations such that the ambient conditions are between 50 and 90°F and 10 to 85% relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. The HVACR Shop must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels will be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. 4.3 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided pursuant to this guideline shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this section. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While this specification contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 25 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used: 1. Building-level controller. These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other building-wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler or chiller and a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). 4.4 UPDATING DATABASES AND GRAPHICS A. Controllers: Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (except field-level controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 26 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. B. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. All software shall be submitted to the engineer and commissioning agent for review. C. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The controls vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. D. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. E. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the Commissioning Team Members and Project Manager for required configuration. F. Web-based Graphic: In the event that a Web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, these screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens. a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 27 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 Indicate the location of temperature sensors and the device associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., reheat coils, VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen; b. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic; c. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens; d. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens. a. Provide graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic; b. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic; c. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 28 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 d. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. e. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. f. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints. PART 5 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM OPERATION 5.1 SMOKE DETECTION DEVICES AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Installed Smoke Detection Devices and Smoke Dampers 1. Smoke dampers are installed at each duct/smoke barrier penetration. 2. Every smoke damper has a local duct smoke detector. 3. Every smoke damper has a local remote test station. 4. Every duct smoke detector is addressable and is connected to the building fire alarm system. 5. The building project area is provided with addressable area smoke detectors. B. Fire Alarm Activation of Smoke Dampers 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: a. Upon activation of any duct smoke detector, an addressable signal is sent to the building fire alarm system and the smoke damper associated with duct smoke detector is closed. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return fans or the exhaust fan, associated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 29 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Non-Fire Alarm System Activation of Smoke Dampers (These activations do not cause for a building fire condition to be annunciated) 1. Safety Device Activation a. Upon activation of either the low-limit switch (freeze-stat) or the supply duct high static pressure switch, both the supply and return fans are deenergized via hardwiring of the low limit switch in the fan starter circuits. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive of the supply and return fans then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 2. BMS (Building Management System) Component Fault a. Upon activation of any of the following BMS component faults, the supply and return fans, or exhaust fan are de-energized via BMS. 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 30 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 3. EMCS Operator Activation: a. When the EMCS system operator overrides the operational status of the air handling system and shuts down the supply, return, or exhaust fans. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 4. Maintenance Operator Activation: a. When a building maintenance staff member manually shuts off the supply, return or exhaust fan at the starter disconnect switch, the supply, return or exhaust fans are shutdown. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 31 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DES IGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Smoke Damper Testing - M/E Engineering offers the following suggestions for a smoke damper testing protocol. The actual final protocol needs to be authored and approved by all Cornell parties and agencies of interest. 1. Duct Smoke Detector (Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager and Cornell Fire and Safety, apply smoke to any duct smoke detector in the ductwork of any air handling systems which serve the project area. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return, or exhaust fans associated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 2. Safety Device Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition) a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually trip the low limit switch (freeze-stat) associated with any air handling system in the project area. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 32 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 3. BMS Component Interlock or Fault: a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually cause for a fault condition to occur in any of the following BMS components: 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door 4. EMCS Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually override the operational status of any air handling system via laptop, PC or remote access to EMCS Webcontrol and shutdown the associated air handing system. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 33 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM. DOC January 22, 2021 c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 5. Maintenance Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually shut off any air handling system within the project area. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 6. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door PART 6 - COMMISSIONING, TRAINING AND WARRANTY 6.1 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS Trade’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 34 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the contractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS Trade shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from PDC. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner’s representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 6.2 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The contractor shall provide 40 hours of training. B. The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 35 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230923-BUILDINGAUTOMATIONCONTROLSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 6.3 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The Contractor shall provide all recommended preventative maintenance of the materials, equipment, and workmanship as necessary and as described in the operating and maintenance manuals during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor shall provide two (2) semi-annual service visits (i.e., one visit during the peak cooling season and one visit during the peak heating season) to test and evaluate the performance of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide a written report of the test and evaluation results. The service visits shall include but not be limited to: 1. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the calibration of the sensors, transducers, and transmitters for air flow, liquid flow, pressure, temperature, and humidity; 2. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation of the dampers and damper actuators; 3. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation (i.e., monitoring and command) of the system points. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 09 31 - CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. B. Provide a complete Laboratory Airflow Control System, including control components required to perform the functions, intent and performance described later in this Section. C. Provide wiring, conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of our adjunctive to this Laboratory Airflow control system regardless of the source of supply. Control circuits, 120 volt maximum. Install wiring in accordance with requirements of "Electric Wiring in HVAC Work" Section, Electric Contract Specifications and National Electrical Code. D. Provide all necessary devices for a fume hood control systems including make-up/supply air controllers; supply exhaust, constant volume and general purpose airflow control valves, plus all interconnecting wiring and pneumatic tubing to result in a completely operational system. E. Furnish fume hood controllers, sash sensors and display monitors as required. F. All control components shall be strictly electronic in nature. G. All laboratory airflow control system components shall be the products of a single manufacturer for single point responsibility. H. All devices specified in this section shall be provided by the BACS vendor. 1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The complete system is designed and based on that manufactured by Accutrol, LLC or compatible product as manufactured by: 1. Phoenix Controls 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping for wiring control diagrams and systems descriptions for each system. 2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for local control panels and DDC panels. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPE CS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Valve schedule showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for laboratory airflow control system components. 1.4 GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new laboratory airflow control system free from defects in material and workmanship, except for damages from other causes, for a period of one year after final acceptance or Owner occupancy, whichever is earlier. B. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperature within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Maintain room pressurization control within 10% differential setpoint. C. Provide one year maintenance service of system components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include 24 hour emergency and seasonal (twice per year minimum) inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient or defective during this period. 1.5 INSTRUCTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. When the work has been completed, completely adjust the laboratory airflow control system B. Tag equipment with designation from the submitted diagram. 1. Provide factory trained technicians to instruct the Owner's operating personnel and turn over three copies of maintenance manuals; total of three working days. 2. Submit in triplicate, letter of acknowledgment of such instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Airflow control valves shall be of a low pressure drop design for energy efficiency. Valves shall not require greater pressure drop than listed at Max CFM (Max L/s or CMH) on project valve schedule or 0.3” wc (75Pa), whichever is less. The provision of a larger airflow control valve that is scheduled to accommodate the lower scheduled pressure drop will not be acceptable. Airflow control valves that require higher pressures to operate will not be acceptable. B. Demand Based Static Pressure Reset Control (DBSPRC) – Valve must be capable of being utilized with a demand based static pressure reset control scheme as described in ASHRAE Standard 90.1-6.5.3.2.3. C. Should a venturi valve be offered as a substitute for a low pressure drop closed loop control valve the contractor offering the valve must provide each venturi valve with a static pressure reset kit which requires duct straight runs of 3x Duct Diameter (upstream of venturi valve) and 3.5x Duct Diameter (downstream of venturi valve) ensuring that the pressure pickups are located such that they will not be susceptible to clogging or condensation within the tubes. The contractor substituting the venturi valve shall also be responsible for associated design change and field duct changes to accompany the requirement of straight duct run upstream and downstream of the venturi valve (see above). 2.2 CONTROLLERS (TYPICAL FOR ALL VALVES) A. All valve controllers shall be capable of providing the full airflow range of the valve specified and not limited to the airflow range scheduled. Do not provide mechanical stops on the valve. 2.3 FUME HOOD CONTROLLER A. A linear fume hood control system shall be provided to directly measure the area of the fume hood sash opening. The measured sash area shall proportionally control the hood's exhaust airflow to maintain the face velocity constant to a + 10% tolerance over no less than a 5 to 1 change in the sash open area (change in sash position). B. A vertical sash sensor shall be provided to measure the height of each vertically moving fume hood sash. The vertical sash sensor shall consist of a precision 10 turn potentiometer mechanically coupled to a constant tension spring reel. A stainless steel, vinyl coated cable shall be attached to the spring reel. Expected lifetime base on manufacturer's component data and tests shall be over 200,000 full height sash movements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 C. A horizontal sash sensor shall be provided for each pair of horizontal or overlapping sashes that are located on horizontal, combination or walk-in sash fume hoods. The horizontal sash sensor shall consist of two long, flat bars for each pair of overlapping sashes. The first bar shall contain a element to send magnetic flux to the second bar. The second bar shall contain a multitude of magnetic sensors spaced over .75 in. or less. The bars shall be mounted at the top of each sash, one per sash. As the two sashes slide past each other, the bars shall overlap to determine the total amount of sash opening. D. A fume hood monitor shall be provided to receive the sash opening signals from the vertical and or horizontal sash sensors. The monitor shall compute the total open sash and then output an exhaust airflow control signal to the appropriate volume control device. E. The face velocity and minimum exhaust flow level of the fume hood shall be set at the fume hood monitor via trimpot adjustments. Accurate adjustment of the face velocity shall be provided at two different sash positions. F. An emergency exhaust capability shall be provided to override the sash sensor and command maximum exhaust air flow. A push to start, push to stop, push button switch shall initiate this mode. G. A "night energy waste alert" circuit employing a light level sensor shall be included in the monitor to sense the combination of a darkened lab room and a fume hood that has its sash left up. H. Fume hood monitor shall include an energy use meter to indicate a relative measure of hood air flow, visual indication for normal operation, visual and audible alarm for an unsafe flow condition, visual and audible alarm for night energy waste alert and visual and audible alarm to indicate emergency exhaust operation. I. A push button switch shall be provided to mute the audible alarm. The mute mode is automatically reset when the alarm condition ceases. 2.4 EXHAUST, MAKE-UP AIR AND MULTI-POSITION CONTROL VALVES A. Supply Air Valves 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces). B. General Exhaust Air Valves 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Fume Hood Exhaust Air Valves (VAV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator. D. Fume Hood Exhaust Air Valves (CV / Multi-position CV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator. E. Specialty Exhaust Air Valves (CV / Multi-position CV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator. F. The Airflow Control Valve shall consist of a compression section, two airflow control surfaces, factory-mounted digital vortex airflow measuring device factory-mounted high speed electric actuator, integral access panel and integrated high performance closed-loop feedback controller with native BACnet. G. The compression section shall divide the airstream into at least two separate airstreams. Each airstream shall be approximately equal in size and the total open area shall be approximately 50% of the duct open area. The divided sections shall cause compression therefore creating a more laminar flow for better airflow measurement and turndown. The compression section shall be of an aerodynamic shape with a static regain section to insure minimal pressure drop. The valve shall not require any duct straight runs either upstream or downstream of the airflow valve to achieve required specified performance. H. Airflow control valves shall be a linear type and shall operate with a minimum turndown ratio of 8 to 1. Accuracy of the airflow valve shall be 5% of reading in the 8 to 1 range of the damper. I. The airflow control valve speed of response shall be <1 second (<2 seconds for standard speed actuation). J. The airflow control valve shall be capable of being mounted in any position (360º mounting plane) in ductwork without the need for recalibration. It shall not be required to specify mounting plane when ordering valve. K. Valve body material for Acid Wash Exhaust shall be 304SS; 20gauge for body and 16gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 316SS. Valve shall be provided with a PFA coating suitable for acid. L. Valve body material for Fume Hood or other corrosive service shall be 304SS; 20gauge for body and 16gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 316SS. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 M. Valve body material for non-lab (non-corrosive) service such as for Supply and Return or Exhaust shall be 18 gauge aluminum for body and 16 gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 416SS. Valve body material for lab spaces (non-corrosive) service such as for Supply and Return or Exhaust shall be 16 gauge (aluminum) for body and 16 gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 316SS. N. Airflow control valves shall operate without linkages, springs, levers, or bearings, in the airstream due to the effect of exhaust air on those materials, and shall exhibit no deadband or hysteresis. Airflow control valves shall be provided as “fail last position”. Airflow valves provided for Fume Hood Exhaust application shall be provided as “fail safe position”. O. All critical components of the airflow control valve shall be easily accessible from one side of the valve. All linkages shall be out of the airstream to avoid possible corrosion and loss of accuracy. P. The airflow valve shall be complete with a digital vortex type airflow sensing device providing true airflow feedback for the system. Q. Airflow measuring devices shall be of the Vortex Shedding type, capable of continuously monitoring the airflow volume of the duct served and electronically transmitting a signal linear to the airflow volume. R. Individual airflow sensors shall be of rugged construction, and shall not require special handling during installation. Sensors shall be mounted on support bars. Standard materials shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant plastic. S. Individual velocity sensors shall not be affected by dust, temperature, pressure, or humidity. The sensors shall be passive in nature, with no active parts within the air stream. The output from individual sensors shall be linear with respect to airflow velocity and shall be capable of sensing airflow in one direction only. The velocity sensors shall not require calibration. T. Airflow control valves shall have factory installed high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces) specifically adapted to the stroke of the valve which shall operate on 24VAC. Power requirement for each airflow valve actuator shall not exceed 24VA. U. Supply airflow valves shall be provided with factory installed AP Armaflex insulation. Insulation shall be 3/8" thick black flexible closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation. V. Valve shall fail open. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200 278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 W. Airflow control valves shall have an integral closed-loop feeedback controller. Airflow measurement through the vortex airflow sensor shall send the digital signal to the controller which modulates the electric actuator to maintain desired airflow setpoint. The airflow setpoint shall have the capability of being provided through analog input, digital input, communications over BACnet MS/TP or AVC internal program memory. Analog output signal shall be provided for airflow and alarm outputs must be provided to indicate abnormal airflow conditions. 1. Airflow Control Valve integral controller shall provide an EIA-485 port supporting BACnet MS/TP as a Full Master Node state machine. Field programming shall be accomplished through an intuitive PC based UI (User Interface) tool. Connection between the integral controller and the computer shall be provided through a USB port located on the AVC control module. 2. Power requirement for each airflow valve with integral controller shall not exceed 28VA for all round, 12"x18" and 12"x24" valves and 55VA for 12"x36" and 12"x48" valves. 2.5 EXHAUST, MAKE-UP AIR AND TWO-POSITION CONTROL VALVES (VENTURI STYLE) A. Airflow control valve shall be of venturi control type utilizing a venturi section into which a cone shaped element slides to create a smoothly varying, ring shaped orifice. Valve shall have an equal percentage flow characteristic to provide stable control at low flow values. B. Valve shall be pressure independent and use closed loop control to regulate air volume linearly proportional to a 0 to 10 volt electronic control signal. Valve shall also generate a 0 to 10 volt feedback signal linearly proportional to valve airflow for internal volume control, monitoring, or airflow tracking control. Signal shall be factory calibrated to a stated CFM per volt scale factor using NBS traceable instrumentation. Accuracy shall be + 5% of reading regardless of inlet or exit duct configuration over a range of no less than 8 to 1. C. An electric actuator shall be factory mounted to the valve body to vary the position of the valve cone from its minimum to maximum flows. Loss of power shall cause exhaust valves to fail open and supply valves to fail closed. D. Any electronic (hot wire, thermistor, etc.) airflow sensor exposed to exhaust airflow shall be UL listed under the UL913 class 1, division 1 standard for intrinsically safe equipment used in hazardous locations. E. Valve shall be constructed of one of the following types. Refer to the valve schedule for the specific type: 1. Type #1 (General Exhaust): Valve shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum or galvanized steel. All critical bearing surfaces related to the control of airflow shall be made of Teflon or Teflon infused aluminum. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Type #2 (Acid Wash and Fume Hood Exhaust): Valve body and cone shall be of corrosive resistant design using baked-on phenolic coating material. The valve's shaft and other exposed metal parts shall be PFA coated 316 stainless steel suitable for acid. F. A reduction of airflow of approximately 25% below the setpoint shall be sensed and alarmed by a static pressure switch premounted to a hood exhaust valve. The switch shall operate by measuring the pressure drop across the valve's variable orifice venturi. G. Provide flanged duct connection on all multiple valve arrangements. H. Provide drawband clamp connections on all single valve arrangements. For fume hood exhaust valves, provide PTFE adhesive tape to protect the drawband clamp gasket. I. Provide factory sound neutralizer for all general exhaust valves. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. J. Provide fan static reset kit. Pressure pickups shall be located per manufacturer's installation instruction. There shall be no obstructions for a minimum of 3 equivalent duct diameters upstream, and 3.5 equivalent duct diameters downstream of the valve. 2.6 MAKE-UP AIR CONTROL UNIT A. A Make-up Air Control Unit shall be supplied to control the airflow balance of the laboratory room. The Make-up air control unit shall be panel or valve mounted. B. The control unit shall be of electronic design with analog signal inputs and outputs. The inputs shall accept 0 to 10 volt signals proportional to fume hood, canopy, or snorkel exhaust, and supply flows. The output signals shall control supply valves and general exhaust valves, with 0 to 10 volt signals linearly proportional to the desired supply or exhaust volumes. C. Integral field adjustable trim points shall be provided for all required calibration and scaling adjustments. D. The control unit shall maintain a constant adjustment offset between the sum of the room's total exhaust and the make-up/supply air volumes. This offset shall be independent of the exhaust volume magnitude and represent the volume of air that will enter the room from the corridor or other room. E. The control unit shall generate 0 to 10 volt analog signals linearly proportional to the airflow to each exhaust air source as indicated by the calibrated input signals. Similar output signals shall also be provided for the supply, general exhaust (if appropriate), and total exhaust airflow volume signals. These signals shall be provided for calibration, local monitoring, and direct connection to the central DDC system. F. An integral power supply for the panel mounted unit, or a valve mounted power supply for the valve mount unit, shall be included to power the complete laboratory air flow control system from on 120 VAC line connection. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200 278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 G. A liquid crystal digital display reading out directly in CFM shall be provided for panel mounted control units to indicate the magnitude of all exhaust and supply airflow signals specified above. H. Provide factory sound neutralizer for all general exhaust valves. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be furnished and installed by the Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) Trade as recommended by the Laboratory Airflow Controls Manufacturer. B. The ATC Trade shall install the sash sensor and the monitor on the fume hood. Vertical sash sensor and its stainless steel cable shall be hidden from view. Horizontal sash sensor bars shall be affixed to the top of the individual sash panels. C. Linearized airflow control valves shall be installed in ductwork by the Mechanical Trade. Valves shall be mounted in the position specified to insure calibrated performance. D. The ATC Trade shall install the Make-up/Air Supply Control in an accessible location within the indicated laboratory room. Single phase 110 VAC power shall be wired to the Control Panels and the valve mounted power supplies be the Electronic Trade. E. The ATC Trade shall extend eight wire cables from the fume hood monitors to the fume hood exhaust valves; from the fume exhaust valves, two position exhaust valves and lab office supply valves to the make-up/supply air control units; and from the makeup/supply control units to the make-up/supply air control valves and general exhaust/return valves. Two wire cables attached to the sash sensors shall be routed into their associated fume hood monitor. The ATC Tradeshall terminate and connect cables as required. 3.2 START-UP AND CALIBRATION A. System start-up, calibration shall be provided by a factory authorized representative of the Laboratory Airflow Controls Manufacturer. Start-up shall include setting of the fume hood face velocity, supply/make-up and/or general exhaust flow and complete air balance with report as outlined in Section 15990. PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.1 LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL A. Refer to drawings for sequence of operation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 31 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation CONTROL SYSTEM - LAB AIRFLOW M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\D ESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-230931-CONTROLSYSTEM-LABAIRFLOW.DOC January 22, 2021 B. The control unit shall increase the flow at the general exhaust valve under conditions where additional exhaust is required to maintain the room's airflow balance to maintain temperature setpoint. The general exhaust valve command shall equal the algebraic difference between the supply volume and the hood's make-up air volume. C. If any lab office supply valves are used (for offices that are part of the lab area), then the supply volume of these valves must be subtracted from the make-up air command for the lab make-up/supply valve. END OF SECTION 23 09 31 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 20 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for piping in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, or extra strong (Schedule 80) weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or roll grooved for grooved mechanical; connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets", or "Sockolets" are acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job-fabricated reductions are not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Flanges, Unions and Couplings: 1. Threaded connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron, 150 or 300 lb. wwp, based on system pressure. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings.Welded connections: 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. b. Flanges (Slip-on Type): Not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. c. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents and working temperatures and pressures. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 in. maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. d. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. E. Base Elbows: 1. Cast iron or steel type, flange connections; Crane 500 or equivalent. Made from welding elbows, with welded pipe support and steel base. Reducing elbows where necessary. ELBOW SIZE SUPPORT SIZE BASE PLATE 2 in. to 3 in. 1-1/4 in. 6 in. x 6 in. x 1/4 in. 4 in. to 6 in. 2-1/2 in. 8 in. x 8 in. x 1/4 in. 8 in. and larger 6 in. 14 in. x 14 in. x 5/16 in. 2. Anchor bolt holes in each corner of base for securely bolting to floor or concrete base; minimum 3/4 in. bolts. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIP INGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type L hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze; ANSI B16.8 solder end connections. C. Unions And Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Willard Industries "Solder Safe (silver bearing), Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. 2.4 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. D. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.5 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Dielectric unions are not allowed. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Make: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.6 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Type L hard temper deoxidized, dehydrated, and sealed copper tubing, refrigerant grade. B. Refrigerant grade wrought copper fittings. Long radius elbows. C. Factory made suction traps, Melco Type PT. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS \HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and ASME/ANSI B31.5. E. Make: Mueller, Howell Metal, Cerro, Cambridge-Lee, Universal Tube. 2.7 HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hotdipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for 4 in, and larger, and where insulation passes through hanger. 4. Hangers sized to permit passage of insulation through the hanger for all piping. 5. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 6. All refrigerant lines must be supported by strut channel hangers and supports. All liquid and suction lines must be clamped securely to the strut channel. All discharge piping to and from remote air cooled condensers shall also be clamped per Manufacturer's recommendations to minimize vibrations. Clamp assemblies shall be refrigeration cushion clamps (for example, Hydra-Zorb). A piping support shall be installed within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and equipment connection. Hanger Rods 7. Process Areas - Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends only, not threaded between ends. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. C. Hanger Shields: 1. Pre-insulated type: a. Insulated pipes shall be protected at point of support by a 360° insert of high density, 100 psi waterproof calcium silicate, encased in a 360° sheet metal shield. Insulation insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and extend 1 in. beyond sheet metal shield. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVA C\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Field-insulated type: a. #18 USSG, galvanized steel shields, minimum 120° arc. Provide temporary blocking between pipe and hanger to maintain proper spacing for insulation. 3. Shield Sizing: PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" 18 4" 12" 16 5" and 6" 12" 14 8" to 14" 24" 12 16" to 24" 24" 10 4. Hanger shield gauges listed are for use with band type hangers only. For point loading (roller support), increase shield thickness by one gauge, and length by 50%. D. Spacing Schedule: PIPE SIZE STEEL COPPER PVC PLASTIC ROD SIZE 3/4 to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 1-1/4 to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 2-1/2 to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 1/2 in. 5 and 6 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 3/4 in. E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1,300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. F. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp, locknut, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center load style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For weights under 1000 lbs.: Insert, "U" shaped channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 4. For metal decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and embed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 5. Make: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head", or approved equal. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For use on 1-1/2" and smaller piping only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut, or approved equal. 2.8 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass polished chrome, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Escutcheons plates for process spaces shall be stainless steel. B. Pipe Guides: Cylindrical steel guide sleeve, proper length for travel, integral bottom base anchor, top half removable. Split steel spider to bolt to pipe, copper plated spider for copper pipe. Insulated style where pipe is required to be insulated. Make: Tri-Sate Industries, or equal. C. Anchors: 1. Pipe support; same material as pipe; as manufactured by Pipe Shields Model C1000 or C2000, Keflex, Metraflex, Flexonics or Advanced Thermal Systems. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Pipe Anchors: a. Anchors shall be designed and located as to prevent stress to piping or building structural components from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stressing to connected equipment. 3. All field or shop fabricated anchor and equipment and piping supports shall include detail fabrication drawings submittals accompanied by comprehensive structural engineering design and analysis by a qualified, profession engineer licensed to practice in the State of New York, using the performance and design criteria specific to the project and system in question. D. Pipe Roll Stand: Cast iron roll stand. Make: Advanced Thermal Systems, Carpenter and Patterson, ITT Grinnell, Pipe Shields. 2.9 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Full circle water stop collar for sleeves located in below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2. Schedule 40, PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces and existing construction. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18-gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. B. Pre-Insulated Type: 1. Adjustable or fixed length metal cans, 24-gauge minimum sized for 1 in. spacing between insulation and can. Insulation shall consist of a 360° waterproofed calcium silicate insert sized to extend 1 in. beyond wall or floor penetration. Calcium silicate insert shall be the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Spacing between shield and can packed at each end with double neoprene rope positively fastened. 2.10 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts. 1. Make: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. B. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade, above floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 2.11 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (HVAC) piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Equipment and systems in accordance with laws, codes, and provisions of each applicable section of these specifications. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, union, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. B. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, union and flanges in inaccessible locations. Provide trap seal of adequate depth on drain pans. C. Provide reducers at all control valves, where control valve is smaller than pipeline size. Reducers for steam control valves shall be eccentric type. Provide unions at each side of every control valve and reducers directly adjacent to the unions. D. Provide reducers at all balance valves, where balance valve is smaller than pipeline size. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment (within 18" horizontally), including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters and fused switches. In the event it cannot be avoided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and provide a sheetmetal drip shield under the pipe which extends 3'0" beyond the electrical equipment. 3.3 WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Top connection for up feed, bottom or side connection for down feed. Grade off level; up in direction of flow and down toward drain. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278 -232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3.4 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Fittings brazed with silver brazing alloy. Guarantee refrigerant charge for one year from date of final acceptance. Provide for flexibility at compressor connections. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate system to 0.1 in. VAC break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 0.1 in. VAC and hold for four (4) hours; then charge system. Charge with refrigerant as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, not by vertical expansion bolts. Support each pipe with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location. Trapeze hangers are acceptable for racking of multiple pipes of 1-1/2" or less in size. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size as called for, using four nuts per rod. Provide additional rustproofed structural steel members, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2", "C" types are permitted for piping 2-1/2" and smaller. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 in. of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.6 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specific for each application. C. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric couplings or flanges at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric couplings or flanges in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. Dielectric couplings or flanges are not required in typical closed systems such as heating water, chilled water, heat pump loop, etc. except for the equipment connections. D. Refrigeration Piping Connections: A nitrogen purge shall be used at all times during brazing or soldering to prevent oxidation on the inside of tubing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3.7 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded pipe fabricated by certified welder. Contractor shall submit proof of current certification of each welder if requested by Owner. Use full-length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slipon flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. Welding is prohibited in existing building, except in following areas: mechanical rooms, crawl spaces. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing on joint after welding. 3.8 HANGER SHIELDS A. Provide at hangers for all piping. Pre-insulated type or field-insulated type at Contractor's option. 3.9 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. B. Pre-insulated type: Required for chilled water piping. C. Standard type: Provide for piping, except as called for. D. Extend 1/8 in. above finished areas. In above grade mechanical and other areas with floor drains; use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use pipe sleeves in bearing walls, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.10 ANCHORS A. Provide piping system anchors where shown on the plans, and as recommended by the expansion joint/loop manufacturer. Where an anchor is shown at a change in piping direction, it shall fully control movement in both directions. In lieu of a single anchor fabricated for two directional control, two (2) individual anchors may be provided. Provide detailed fabrication drawings for all field-fabricated anchors. B. Design anchors and equipment and piping supports including comprehensive structural engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the State of New York using the performance and design criteria specific to this project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 3.11 ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Provide alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install two (2) or more guide(s) on each side of flexible expansion loop. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four (4) pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure. 3.12 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls and below grade cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed walls and floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device, or compound. 3.13 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.14 CLEANING HOT WATER AND CHILLED WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Cornell University’s continual approach of protecting its community and the environment must be adhered to in the application of chemicals pertinent to process water loops. In addition, University policy dictates that “under no circumstances should chemicals be disposed of by pouring into sinks or other drains leading to sanitary or storm sewers”. B. All chemicals and formulations prescribed for the cleaning and treatment of process water systems at the University must meet the following specified criteria: 1. They must be ecologically compatible so that any discharge will not create an environmental impact. 2. They must be industrial and toxicologically safe so as to minimize personnel and equipment exposure to hazardous conditions. 3. Every effort must be made to maintain a sense of uniformity in chemical formulation to insure a line of continuity. Deviation from existing formulations that are applied across the University are to kept to a minimum. This relieves the University of any burden that arises from trying to maintain adequate protection using numerous treatments. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 4. All material proposed for application must have the prior approval of Environmental Health and Safety, Facilities Engineering and Facilities Management Pipe Shop. In order to thoroughly evaluate the products performance, it is recommended that the following be submitted at the time of proposal. a. Material Safety Data Sheets for all products that are to be applied. All sheets are required to contain complete formulations. Further documentation of qualitative composition must be included if Material Safety Data Sheets do not supply all product(s) components. b. Product Data Sheets specifying overall product description and application guidelines. c. Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Proposals should specify qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels. They should also include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter. d. Expected performance levels of products; this should include expected corrosion rates, expressed in mils per yea. If the product is a biostatic nature, what levels of biological growth should be expected if the product is applied at recommended dosages. e. Provisions should be submitted for the removal for any unused chemicals. In addition, provisions must be provided for the disposal of all empty containers. 5. The above mentioned criteria will serve as a guide for the information required for submittal of approval concerning any chemical treatment applied at Cornell University. No water treatment should be purchased, delivered or applied without consideration to the previously mentioned guidelines. C. Cleaning 1. Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems shall be as follows: a. Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process. b. Step 2: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by manufacturer. Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system using bleed and feed until the bleed water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 c. Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before proceeding to chemical treatment. 2. For extensions to existing building systems, the new system cleaning procedures shall be followed if the extension contains ferrous piping materials. Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing building system. D. Treatment Chemicals 1. Treatment chemicals for non-glycol, non-potable systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows: 1) Molybdate: 150 ppm 2) pH: 8.3-9 3) Tolytriazole: 5 ppm b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab prior to final acceptance. 2. Treatment chemicals for glycol heating systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill with a glycol formulation as follows: 1) Propylene Glycol: 400,000 ppm (40%) 2) Nitrate: 1500 ppm 3) Tolytriazole: 20 ppm 4) Water: Balance (water to be added to glycol solution shall meet manufacturers standard for quality) 5) Color: Olive Green 6) Preferred Manf/Material: PG #36 b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before prior to final acceptance. 3. Chilled Water Systems: a. Chemicals shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop. Fill system with potable water. Notify the Central Energy Plant for permission to begin circulating water into the campus chilled water loop. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\20 0278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 E. Identification 4. Provide a three ring binder for each hydronic system treated with chemicals that includes the following information: a. SDS b. Product data sheets c. Chemical type d. Test points e. Control limits f. System volume g. Direction to drain system to sanitary. h. System volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location. 3.15 TESTS A. Test piping and accessories before insulation, connection to existing piping, or concealment. Repeat as many times as necessary to prove tight system. Notify Owner's Representative at least seven days in advance of each test. Isolate valves and equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Remove and replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Furnish necessary pumps, gauges, equipment, piping, valving, power and labor for testing. Certify that tests have been successfully completed. B. Schedule of Test Requirements: 1. Hot, chilled, glycol water: Hydrostatic, 100 psig at high point of system; two hours duration. 2. Refrigeration: a. After installation, charge system with dry nitrogen to manufacturer's recommended pressure. b. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours. 3.16 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe sizing changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232010-PIPINGSYSTEMS.DOC January 22, 2021 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (HVAC) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Chilled water 3 in. and larger ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Chilled water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Hot water 3 in. and larger; ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Hot water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Glycol Hot water 3 in. and larger ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Glycol Hot water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Refrigerant Type L refrigerant grade hard temper, deoxidized copper Wrought copper, solder end Sil-Flo "5" silver brazing Vent, overflow, drain ASTM B88 Type M hard temper copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Drain (optional) ASTM B3026 Type DWV copper ASME B16.3026 Wrought copper DWV fittings ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder END OF SECTION 23 20 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 21 10 - WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on water system specialties. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and accessories shall be rated for a minimum of 125 psi wwp, and 250°F temperatures. Manufacturer's written installation procedures shall become a part of these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH EFFICIENCY IN LINE AIR SEPARATOR A. All fittings shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for less than 1 foot of water pressure drop and velocity not to exceed 4 feet per second through the unit at specified GPM. Performance curves from the unit manufacturer shall be furnished as part of the submittal for each unit. Units to include internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate maximum air elimination and suppress turbulence. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. Alternates must include cast iron float actuated air vent rated at 150 psig which shall be threaded to the top of the fitting. Unit shall have bottom blow down connection with ball valve. B. Air separators shall be capable of removing 100% of free air, 100% of entrained air and up to 99.6% of dissolved air in the system fluid. System efficiency and performance shall be third party tested and certified. C. Design Equipment: Spirovent. 2.2 PRESSURIZED EXPANSION TANKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Steel tanks, 125 psi wwp, ASME construction, with reinforced opening of size and location as required. Red oxide coating outside and final exterior coat of paint; factory applied. Heavy duty butyl rubber removable bladder. Full acceptance vessel. Maximum operating temperature of 240°F. Provide ring stand. B. Design Equipment: The John Wood Company C. Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, The John Wood Company. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 2.3 AIR ELIMINATING SUPPLY FITTING A. Designed to eliminate air from supply water; located in supply header from heat generating devices; flanged or screwed. B. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett "Airtrol". C. Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Spirotherm. 2.4 FLOW BALANCERS A. High Performance, Bronze Body, Y-Pattern with brass readout valves with integral selfsealing EPT readout valves. B. Valve shall be multi-turn globe style with calibrated digital hand wheel capable of at least four turns with graduations at 1/10th turn. Hand wheel shall be equipped with a positive, tamper-resistant memory stop that effectively prevents opening valve past the stop. C. Valve shall be capable of bubble-tight shutoff thus eliminating the need for a second shut off valve to facilitate equipment service. D. Valve shall be provided with an integral, positive, tamper-resistant memory stop feature which is not subject to accidental readjustment when the valves is operated as a shut-off for service purposes. Memory stop shall require a tool for adjustment. E. Valve shall have provisions for a seal to prevent re-setting. F. Valve shall exhibit an accuracy of +/- 5% within its normal operation flow range. G. Valves shall be rated for a maximum temperature of 230°F and a maximum pressure of 250 psig. H. Valves shall be manufactured from Bronze or Dezincifcation resistant brass in sizes through 2” nominal, and bronze or cast iron in sizes above 2” nominal. I. For chilled water applications, valve shall be provided with preformed insulation to permit access for balance and readout. J. Mechanical Contractor shall supply Testing and Balancing Contractor with flow calculator (circular slide rule, etc.), if requested. K. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. 1. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 2. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 L. 5 in. and Larger: Nickel-plated flow meter with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Shall be individually calibrated. Provide with a butterfly valve with memory stop at each location. 1. Flow meter size shall be based upon manufacturer's recommended gpm range rather than pipe size. 2. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 3. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. 2.5 SUCTION DIFFUSER A. Provide as shown on plans, an angle pattern flow straightening fitting equipped with a combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder, flow straightening vanes, start-up strainer and adjustable support foot. The combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to the system pump shutoff head (maximum 175 PSIG) and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section area of the pump suction opening. The length of the flow straightening vanes shall be no less than 2-1/2 times the diameter of the system pump suction connection. B. The Flow Straightening Fitting shall have NPT, flanged or (grooved) mechanical system connections as applicable. The fitting shall have a stainless steel combination diffuserstrainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter perforations to protect the system pump, and full length flow straightening vanes shall provide nonturbulent flow to the suction side of the system pump. The start-up strainer shall be of 16 mesh bronze, and the support foot shall eliminate pipe strain at the flow fitting/pump connection. All internal components shall be replaceable. C. Construction Materials: 1. Body and Cover: NPT and Flanged Models Cast Iron Grooved Models Ductile Iron 2. Straightening Vanes: X Models Steel Z and Grooved Models Stainless Steel 3. Orifice Cylinder: Z and Grooved Models Stainless Steel 4. Start-Up Strainer: X, Z and Grooved Models 16 Mesh Bronze 5. O-Ring Seal: All models EPDM 6. Type X Models (for closed systems). 7. Type Z for (open systems). D. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278 -232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 E. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Grundfos. 2.6 STRAINERS A. Cast semi-steel body or cast iron construction for steel piping and bronze body construction for copper piping; equipped with removable, monel or stainless steel water screen; maximum pressure drop 2 psi with free area at least four times area of pipe. Provided with blow-off outlet. B. Sizes 5 in. and Smaller, Y-Pattern Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 in. and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 in. and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. C. Sizes 6 in. and Larger, Basket Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. D. Design Equipment: Mueller. E. Manufacturers: Elliott, Keckley, Mueller, Webster, Watts, Spirax-Sarco. 2.7 AIR VENTS A. Manual air vents shall be a 3/4 in. ball valve with bronze body, nickel plated bronze ball, hose end, cap and chain, Watts B6000CC. B. Automatic air vents shall be float type, 35 psig rated, Armstrong No. 502CV OR float type, 150 psig rated, Armstrong No. 75 or Spirotop. Provide unit with an appropriate rating, as necessary for location. C. High Capacity Automatic Air Vent: 1. Cast iron body. 150 psig rated. Stainless steel float. 2.8 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain detailed instructions from each manufacturer for proper method of installation. 3.2 SYSTEM FILLING A. After cleaning, fill each system from low point. B. With pumps off, vent mains, risers, run-outs, and units, working consecutively from low to high point of building. Obtain approximately 2 psi at highest point. Obtain proper air cushion in compression/expansion tanks. 3.3 AIR VENTING A. Provide where specifically called for in piping details and at all points in piping systems where air may collect due to changes in piping elevation. 1. Manual air vent assembly consisting of 1-1/4 in. x 4 in. air collection chamber with 3/4 in. hose end ball valve with cap and chain. 2. Automatic air vent with a ball valve for the purpose of isolation and service or replacement. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, automatic air vents shall only be installed in Mechanical Rooms. Pipe high capacity air vent discharge down to floor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-232110-WATERSYSTEMSSPECIALTIES.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Equipment Vents: 1. When equipment is above mains: Connect run-outs or risers to upper quadrant or top of mains. Install vent assembly concealed within enclosure, consisting of 1 in. diameter by 4 in. to 6 in. long air collection chamber with 1/4 in. soft copper tube to manual valve. Mount securely near bottom of enclosure, but not fastened to enclosure. For individual units, radiators, fan convectors and units with return grilled: Provide screwdriver operated manual valve, operated from discharge grille or access door. Drill enclosure and position valve for operating without removing enclosure. 2. When equipment is below mains: Connect piping run-outs or risers to bottom or lower quadrant of mains. Vent assembly not required in unit. Provide means of purging and draining each unit if required. Use tees instead of ells at low point of run-outs. 3.4 AIR SEPARATOR A. Provide supports and provide blow-down with hose end drain valve. Hang unit from structure at an elevation low enough to allow for upward pitch of piping to compression tank. 3.5 STRAINERS A. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 in. nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 in. and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 in. 3.6 FLOW BALANCERS A. Where flow balancers are smaller than pipe line size, provide reducers directly adjacent to flow balancers. B. Provide on each hydronic unit and where called for. Meter connection points shall not point downward. 3.7 SUCTION DIFFUSERS A. Provide at inlet to base mounted pump. B. Pipe suction diffuser blow-off connection (full size with ball valve) to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION 23 21 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVA C\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 SECTION 23 31 00 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with latest edition of the following standards. 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork. 2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. 3. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 4. 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. NFPA Standards 96. 6. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards. 7. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of work. C. All ductwork and fittings shall have a computer generated label affixed to the exterior surface of each section, detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gauge, reinforcement type/class and connection type by systems manufacturer. Galvanizing thickness shall be clearly stenciled on each duct section. D. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork Shop Drawings. B. Duct Access Doors. C. Flexible Duct. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 D. Submit a complete shop standard manual including miscellaneous materials, and construction details for all shop fabricated materials including, but not limited to, volume dampers, turning vanes, duct sealant, equipment flexible connections, access doors, flexible duct, acoustical duct lining, etc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for ductwork in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 1.5 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION A. Duct systems are to be classified and constructed per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure classification system as follows: 1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 2 in. w.g. (unless stated otherwise) for the following systems, as applicable: a. Supply duct downstream of terminal units. b. Typical low pressure supply ductwork. c. Typical return ductwork. d. Typical low pressure exhaust ductwork. 2. Supply duct upstream of terminal units shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 3 in. w.g. unless otherwise stated or required as per below. 3. Pressure classes above 3 in. w.g. shall be provided as follows, based upon the external static pressure as scheduled for each specific fan. Scheduled External Static Pressure Pressure Class Over 3 in. up to 4 in. w.g. 4 in. w.g. Over 4 in. up to 6 in. w.g. 6 in. w.g. Over 6 in. up to 10 in. w.g. 10 in. w.g. 1.6 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare minimum 1/4 in. scale drawings: 1. Detailed ductwork shop drawings shall include size, layouts and pressure classifications. Any ductwork installed without benefit of review by the Engineer of Record may be subject to replacement at the expense of the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPEC S\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 2. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a complete job. 3. Incorporate dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on the project. 4. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom of ductwork elevations from the finished floor. 5. Indicating all volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, damper access doors and other accessories required for a completed project. B. Call to the attention of the Engineers immediately, any major deviations from the Contract Drawings, which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing. C. Indicate roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings. D. Submit prints to each Contractor of the other trades for review for interference's and coordination with their work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of this section. 2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Materials: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. 2. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I". 3. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. 4. Gauges per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. B. Transverse and longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification for duct construction. 1. Transverse joints shall be sealed with duct joint sealant. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPEC S\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or shop fabricated rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant. C. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. D. Throat radius on all elbows shall not be less than the dimension of the duct plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow with turning vanes. E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used. F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork cross-sectional area. Maximum angle in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation from square to round or flat to oval seams welded or brazed. 2.3 ROUND DUCTWORK A. Standard Round Ductwork: 1. Materials: a. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. b. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I". c. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. d. Gauges per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Spiral lock-seam or longitudinal fusion-welded. 2. All spiral ducts shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate leakage under pressure for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seams duct shall have fusion-welded butt seams. 3. No stovepipe will be allowed. 4. Round Ductwork Fittings: a. All fittings fabricated per SMACNA Standards for round and flat-oval ductwork, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETAL ANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 b. Fittings shall have continuous, welded seams. c. 90° tees shall be conical type. 90° tees and 45° laterals up to and including 12 in. diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of any restrictions. d. Round taps off the bottom of rectangular ducts down to diffusers shall be made with a 45° square to round shoe-tap. 5. Elbows: a. Diameters 3 in. through 8 in.: Two-section stamped and continuously welded elbows, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. b. Over 8 in.: Gored construction with standing seam construction and internally sealed or continuously welded. Less than 35° - two gores, 36° to 71° - three gores, over 71° - five gores. c. Fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter. d. Adjustable elbows are not allowed. 6. Joints: a. For duct construction pressure 3 in. w.g. or greater: 1) Round Joints: a) Unexposed Duct 3 in. - 30 in. Diameter: Connect round duct with a one piece interior slip coupling, at least two gauges heavier than duct wall, beaded at center and fastener to duct with screws. Seal joint with an approved sealant applied continuously around both end of coupler prior to assembling and after fastening. b) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 in. - 72 in. Diameter: Install using a three piece, gasket flangedjoint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure band, which compress the gasket between the internal flanges. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate" system or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 c) Above 72 in. Diameter: Install using companion angle flanged joints as defined in Figure 3-1 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" Third Edition. Refer to manual for proper sizing and construction details. d) Dust collection systems and exposed duct 3 in. - 14 in. use a one piece, polyethylene lined gasket connector with integrated bolt for the closure system. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Quicksleeve" or approved equal. b. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads. c. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by slip-fit of projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe. d. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar shall be 2 in. up to 36 in. diameter and 4 in. above 36 in. diameter. e. Pipe-to-pipe and pipe-to-fitting connections in ductwork above 60 in. in diameter shall be made by angle ring flanges. The flange on the pipe shall be a 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. angle attached to the pipe with a continuous weld. The fittings shall have a loose ring "Van Stone" flange. A 5/8 in. flange shall be provided to act as a gasketing surface for sealing with the angle ring being a rolled, welded ring 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. Bolt hole spacing for angle rings shall be 6 in. centers. f. If longitudinal seam duct greater than 60 in. in diameter is supplied in lengths greater than 4 ft., one angle ring must be welded to the duct on 4 ft. centers for support. 2.4 PVC DUCTWORK A. General Description: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ductwork for conveying air, or a mixture of air and other gases and acids. 2. All duct and duct components shall be manufactured by a certified fabricator and bear the "FM" label. 3. Material shall be Trovidur Series 250, Type II, Grade I, PVC class 14333-D, ASTM D01784. Composition shall include inhibitor for UV radiation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 4. Ductwork shall be fabricated, reinforced, installed, sealed and tested in accordance with requirements and recommendations of the SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual. B. Ductwork Fabrication: 1. Welding shall be one by hot gas fusion welding method utilizing PVC filler rod. Solvent welding shall not be utilized. 2. Welding shall be performed by worksmen adequately trained in the art of PVC welding and certified in accordance with ASTM 1789 test methods. 3. Ductwork shall be completely free from cracks, distortions or other imperfections. 4. Provide manufacturer recommended minimum number of welding passes. 5. For thermally formed round duct sections, longitudinal seams shall be butt welded. 6. Alignment of longitudinal seams in adjacent butt welded sections of duct shall be avoided, and seams shall be staggered. 7. Longitudinal seams shall be butt welded and located at a distance of not less than 1/8 of the span width from corner of duct. C. Fittings and Couplings: 1. Unless otherwise specified, centerline radius for standard elbows shall be 1.5 times diameter. 2. Where space limitations will not allow standard centerline radius offset, vane blades shall be installed to decrease turbulence. 3. Segmented elbows shall be joined by butt welding and number of gores or segments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Elbows constructed by press forming in halves from a sheet are acceptable. The halves shall then be joined by hot gas fusion welding method. 5. Transition pieces in mains and sub-mains shall be tapered. 6. Branch ducts shall enter main duct near large end of transition, at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees wherever possible. 7. Branches shall not be positioned directly opposite one another on a main or a sub-main. 8. Intersection of branches with mains shall be continuously welded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 D. Make: Viron International Corporation 2.5 DUCTWORK SEALING A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification shall be used for duct systems using the following criteria: 1. Ductwork and all plenums with pressure class ratings shall be constructed to seal Class A. 2. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings or other devices that seal off air leakage. Pressure sensitive tape or sealing compounds shall not be used. Sealing compounds used to seal openings for rotating shafts shall not be used. 3. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other branch connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections to equipment. 4. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. 5. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed. B. Duct sealant for indoor applications shall be non-fibrated, water based, Hardcast IronGrip IG-601, Ductmate PRO Seal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP146. C. Duct sealant for outdoor applications shall be fibrated, water based, Hardcast Versa-Grip VG-102, Ductmate Fiberseal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP148. D. Sealants and tapes shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL181B and marked according to type. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Provide in mitered elbows as shown on contract drawings. Vanes 36 in. or longer shall be double wall air foil type. All turning vanes shall be installed as per the latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vane size and spacing shall be as per SMACNA. Turning vane spacing greater than SMACNA Standards is not acceptable. B. Turning vanes shall be Harper or equivalent double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. C. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 D. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". Rail systems with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted. E. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PRO-Rail Turning Vane or approved equal. 2.7 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK A. Blade Type Volume Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide Ventlock 639 elevated dial regulator for 2 in. insulated ductwork or equal. Provide Ventlock 635 dial regulator for non-insulated ductwork or equal. B. Multiple Blade Type Volume Dampers: Provide multiple blade volume dampers in ductwork above 12 in. in height. 1. Heavy duty, manual balancing dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 1,500 ft. per minute, open position and max. pressure of 3 in. w.g. close position. Ruskin MD 35 or equivalent. 2. Fabrication: a. Frame: 5 in. x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hatshaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel. 3. Blades: a. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves. b. Action: Opposed. c. Orientation: Horizontal d. Material: Minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. e. Width: Nominal 6 in. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 5. Linkage: Concealed in frame. 6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 in. diameter, plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 7. Control Shaft: 3/8 in. square plated steel. 8. Finish: Mill galvanized. a. Actuator: Hand quadrant for 3/8 in. square extended shaft. b. Hand Quadrant Standoff Bracket: 2 in. standoff for insulated ductwork. c. Oillite bearings. d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, minimum 12 in. length. C. Automatic Air Dampers: Furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section 230923, and installed by this Contractor. 2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS A. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be constructed in compliance with NFPA Bulletin 90A, 90B and UL Standard 181 and shall be listed and labeled as Class I Air Duct. B. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be tri-laminate: 1. Consisting of corrosion resistant galvanized steel helix encapsulated by a double lamination of polyethylene or spun bond nylon. 2. Factory applied (R 6.0 or R 8.0) fiberglass exterior insulation, sheathed in a seamless, tri-directionally reinforced, metalized polyester, exterior vapor barrier. 3. R-value shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, and certified by the Air Diffusion Council, in accordance with ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standard (1991), using ASTM C-518, at installed wall thickness, on flat insulation only. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 4. Recommended operating pressure for flexible ductwork shall be three times maximum system press but not less than 6 in. w.g. positive pressure for 4 in. - 20 in. dia., 5 in. wg. negative pressure through 16 in. dia., 1 in. negative pressure for 18 in. and 20 in. dia. Maximum velocity of 5500 fpm. 5. Operating temperature range - 20°F to 250°F, intermittent @1/2 in. pos. w.g. max., -20°F to 140°F, continuous at maximum pressure. 6. Flame Spread: 25 max. smoke developed rating: 50 max. 7. Porous inner core flexible duct shall not be used. C. Static pressure and thermal performance shall be tested and certified in accordance with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Test Code FD-72-R1 under conditions of 140°F for 164 hours and 180°F for 4 hours. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORI ESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 D. Acoustical performance shall be certified in accordance with ASTM E 477 and/or Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. 1. Minimum Acoustic Performance: a. The insertion loss (dB) of a 6 foot length of duct when tested in accordance with ASTM E477 at a velocity of 1000 feet per minute shall be at least: 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8 inch dia. 26 27 27 31 32 27 12 inch dia 22 26 24 31 31 20 E. Friction loss and leakage for flexible duct only shall be certified in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. Leakage for connections shall be accordance with UL 181 requirements. F. Basis-of-Design: Flexmaster 6B (R-6.0). G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dundas-Jafine Type SPC R6.0/ Type SPC R8.0. 2. Hart & Cooley Type F216 (R-6.0)/ Type F218 (R-8.0) 3. Flexible Technologies, Inc. Thermaflex Type M-KE (R-6.0)/ Type M-KE (R8.0) 4. Atco Rubber Products, Inc. Type 036 (R-6.0)/Type 031 (R-8.0). 5. Superior Air Ducts Type SF 082 (R-8.0) 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT ELBOW SUPPORT A. Provide flexible duct elbow support for flexible duct connected directly to a diffuser collar. B. Elbow support shall be a radius forming brace designed to form flexible duct into a 90° elbow not less than one duct diameter in centerline radius. C. Elbow support shall be manufactured from 100% recycled copolymer polypropylene with a universal fit of 4 in. thru 16 in. and be UL listed. D. Basis-of-Design: Titus Flexright. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basis-of-Design: Ventfabrics, Inc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ductmate Industries, Inc., Duro Dyne Inc., Elgen Manufacturing, Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, water and mildew resistant UL Standard 214. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 in. wide attached to two (2) strips of 2-3/4-in. wide, 0.028-in. thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 in. thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/in. in the warp and 360 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200°F. G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/in. in the warp and 440 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F. H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemicalresistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/in. in the warp and 340 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500°F. I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-in. movement at start and stop. 2.11 ACCESS DOORS A. General: 1. Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to prevent condensation where applicable. 2. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal. 3. Systems 3 in. w.g. or less shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square framed access door. 4. Systems 4 in. w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Third Edition. 5. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Sandwich" style door or approved equal. 6. All access doors shall be continuous piano hinged type, unless noted otherwise. 7. Non-hinged only allowed where clearance to ceiling does not allow a full 90° swing. 8. Double panel insulated type when used in insulated duct. 9. Single panel uninsulated type allowed in un-insulated duct. 10. Pressure rated according to system in which being installed. Door-to-frame and frame-to-duct gasketing. 11. Provide specified Seal Class A or B ductwork sealing around frame, and hand adjust the latch tension for proper seal, on all access doors other than sandwich panel (Ductmate) style. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCT ION.DOC March 15, 2021 12. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. or less in depth is 12 in. x 8 in. 13. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. to 18 in. in depth is 18 in. x 14 in. 14. MINIMUM access door size for ducts more than 18 in. in depth is 24 in. x 18 in. 15. In ducts which require multiple section fire dampers due to duct size, provide one access door for each fire damper section. 16. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with 1/2 in. high lettering reading "SMOKE DAMPER" or "FIRE DAMPER". B. Door Types: 1. Low Pressure Systems (2 in. w.g. pressure class): National Controlled Air ADH1, Ruskin ADH22, Vent Products 9701, Air Balance FSA-100, Safe Air SAH, Nailor. 2. Medium and High Pressure Systems (3 in. w.g. pressure class and higher): a. Rectangular Duct: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" Style Door, or equal. b. Round Duct: Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type, or equal. 8 in. x 4 in. for ducts 14 in. and less in diameter. Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type 16 in. x 12 in. for ducts more than 14 in. in diameter. c. Furnish and install factory supplied protector molding on cut medal edge for all Ductmate access doors. 2.12 EXHAUST HOOD CONNECTIONS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide hoods and/or duct connections to hoods/fans where furnished by others. 2. Duct material, thickness and joints as required for gases and vapors involved and per SMACNA. 2.13 CABLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Ductwork not required to be exterior insulated in exposed installations may be installed using Gripple Inc. B. Ductwork shall be installed using load rated, stainless steel cable suspension systems. Cables shall be pre-cut lengths, type 316 stainless steel with fused ends, and pre-made end attachments. C. Cable grips shall be of 316 stainless steel and have an internal tamperproof cable release mechanism. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 D. Stress distribution saddles shall be prescribed in addition for the support of rectangular duct on corners as necessary. E. Hangers shall have a manufacturer's published safe working load and have a 5 to 1 safety factor. F. Hanger assemblies shall be tested and verified by SMACNA and be installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards. G. Adjustable steel cable hanging system consisting of spring loaded, serrated clamping mechanism shall be tested and certified in compliance with all applicable SMACNA standards for upper and lower attachment methods. 1. All approved systems must be installed using matching components including steel cable, clamping mechanism and hardware approved by the manufacturer for its corresponding load rating. No Substitution of manufacturer's components is permitted. 2. Approved systems must be installed per the manufacturer's specific instructions and must not exceed the stated working load rating at any point throughout the system. H. Supports, bar/angle reinforcements, and other products that are not part of the duct that are manufactured of uncoated mild steel shall either be painted with two (2) coats of primer or shall be manufactured of a galvanized equivalent material. I. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Clutcher" Cable Hanging System or Gripple Inc. 2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Ventlock 699 or 699-2 based upon insulation thickness. C. Install duct test holes where required for duct traverse testing and balancing purposes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA -HVAC Duct Construction Standard. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 16 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DO C March 15, 2021 B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interferences. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions. D. Keep openings continuously closed and sealed with protective plastic wrapping during construction to prevent entrance of dirt and debris. E. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation make systems airtight. F. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork. G. Provide necessary openings, hanger inserts, framing, chases, and recesses, not provided by other trades. H. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream with 45° shoe-tap extension collars. I. Provide 14 gauge sleeves for ducts passing through Mechanical Room floors. Set sleeves 4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal watertight to floor. J. Where a return or exhaust duct is shown to be left open ended, provide hardware mesh screen at opening. K. Do not utilize flexible ductwork or connection in any way to connect variable or constant volume boxes to ductwork. L. For duct penetrations of non-rated walls, provide sheet metal angle framing or sheet metal closure panels around the entire perimeter of each duct wall penetration on both sides of the wall, where the gap exceeds 1/4 inch. Where the gap is less than 1/4 inch, the gap may be caulked on both sides of the wall. Non-rated wall penetrations SHALL NOT be fire caulked under any circumstances. M. For duct penetrations of rated walls, see Specification Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible connections for the intake and discharge connections of duct connected to fans and air handling equipment. B. Round connections are to be made with adhesive and metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 17 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 C. Rectangular connections shall be made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges. Attach with adhesive and mechanical fasteners on 6 in. centers. D. Connections shall be made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so as not to interfere with airflow through connection. E. Mechanically fastened and sealed, with specified duct sealant, at duct and equipment connections. 3.3 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS A. "Air duct" applies to conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from heating, cooling, air conditioning or ventilating equipment but not including the plenum as defined in NFPA 90A. "Air connector" applies to conduit for transferring air between an air duct or plenum and an air terminal device or an air inlet or an air outlet as defined by the NFPA 90A. B. For round to oval connections, provide round-oval flexible adapter. C. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be provided in fully extended condition, free from kinks. D. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall not be used in systems with entering air temperatures in excess of 250°F. E. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use only the minimum length required to make the connection and shall be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Flexible elbows are not acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum length of 48 in., fully extended. F. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use minimum 1/2 in. wide positive locking, steel worm drive clamp, or nylon plenum rated straps for joints and connections. One clamp or strap for the inside core liner and one clamp or strap for the outer jacketing. When non-metallic (nylon) straps are used, they should be listed and labeled to standard UL 181B. Fastener package should be marked UL 181 B-C. G. Collars to which flexible duct is attached shall be beaded and a minimum of 2 in. in length. Wrap twice with UL 181 tape and secure with clamp or strap. Sleeves used for joining two sections of flexible duct shall be beaded and a minimum of 4 in. in length. The draw band shall be positioned behind the bead on the metal collar. H. Outer vapor barrier and insulation shall be slid over inner core and collar, wrapped twice with UL 151 tape and secured with a clamp or strap. I. Connections shall be per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", Air Diffusion Council "Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards" and NAIMA Installation Standards. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 18 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORK ACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 J. Flexible duct shall be supported at manufacturer's recommended intervals, but no greater distance than 2'-6" on center and prior to all 90 degree bends. Maximum permissible sag shall be 1/2 in. per foot of support spacing. Provide a minimum of one hanger on each run of flexible duct. K. A connection to rigid duct or equipment shall be considered a support joint. Long horizontal duct runs with sharp bends shall have additional supports before and after the bend approximately one duct diameter from the centerline of the bend. L. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case shall the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1-1/2 in. wide. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when the manufacturer's recommended procedures are followed. M. The hanger shall be strapped around the flexible duct and secured to the structure above. Hangers shall not be attached to other mechanical or electrical objects. Hangers may be attached to an approved trapeze. Ceiling grid shall not be used to fabricate a trapeze. Support hangers shall be installed horizontal. Screws shall not be used to penetrate the flexible duct to attach to the hanger. N. Provide flexible duct connections and splices in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. O. Seal flexible duct connections with sealing materials listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181B. Mechanically secure connections with approved clamping materials. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Install only in square elbows of equal dimensions. B. Install as per latest SMACNA Standards. C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot welding, riveting or sheet metal screws. D. When installing in ductwork with internal insulation. 1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. w.g. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 19 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 3.5 DUCT CLEANLINESS AND CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Duct Cleanliness: 1. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 2. Prior to shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered with a heavy duty, dual-ply, clear polyethylene protective film. Open ends are to be kept covered during transport, storage, and installation. As ductwork is installed at the job site, open ends are to be covered to maintain cleanliness. 3. The film must be securely affixed to protect against dirt and debris, and must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing the film. The film is have a elongation rating of 600% and a break strength of 13.1 lbs./in. The film shall contain no VOC's, and shall leave no residue on duct after removal. 4. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries ProGuard (heavy duty grade clear). B. Cleaning After Installation: 1. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted. 3. Clean debris from system before fans are turned on. 4. Keep openings continuously closed during the construction period. 5. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces. 6. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels, dampers, or other system parts damaged as a result of debris. 7. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt free. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROUND DUCTWORK A. Use factory-fabricated couplings for joints. B. After the joint is slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2 in. from the joint bead for mechanical strength. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 20 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 C. Sealer is applied to the outside of the joint and covering the screw heads. D. Flanged joints shall be made with neoprene rubber gaskets. 3.7 TEST OF DUCTWORK A. Systems designed to operate at 3-inches w.c. and below: Due to the limited quantity of new ductwork in the project area, ductwork is not required to be tested at the time of install. If during the balancing phase, the measured outlet airflow is +/- 10% of the air terminal unit airflow set point, ductwork shall be replaced or resealed as necessary to meet the design airflows. B. Systems designed to operate in excess of 3-inches w.c.: The entire system shall be leak tested. C. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and per the requirements of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. D. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representatives from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of Record. E. Acceptance Criteria: Generally, maximum system leakage shall be specified by the Consultant per the following recommendations: 1. Interior supply, return and general exhaust systems: 5% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 2. Interior Laboratory exhaust systems: 2% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 3. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the 2012 ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook F. Provide test reports indicating pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure and leakage rate. G. Ductwork not required to be tested for leakage, shall be checked and guaranteed to meet the standards of the specified SMACNA Duct Seal Class A. Air balancing and testing shall be used to determine satisfactory operation of duct systems. Balancing reports indicating excessive leakage amounts shall be required to rebuild, repair or seal ductwork having excessive leakage. 3.8 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide volume dampers at all air outlets, diffusers, grilles and as noted on plans. Provide volume dampers at all low pressure supply, return and exhaust, branch ducts and as noted on the plans. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 21 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETAL ANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 B. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings. C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork, install with insulated "buildouts" per SMACNA. D. Install all dampers furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section. 3.9 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide for access to upstream side of duct mounted reheat coils, dampers, damper motors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, control devices, fan bearings, and equipment requiring periodic inspection or service. B. For ducts that are too small to install an access door of the minimum specified size, provide a 12" long section of removable ductwork for maintenance and inspection access. Removable ductwork shall be fastened between device requiring access and next duct section with duct flanges or Donaldson Torit clamp with PVC foam seal. For ducts that are required to be insulated, provisions shall be made to allow insulation to be easily removed and re-installed. 3.10 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom 2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct spaced per building structural system but not greater that 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required. B. Provide additional supports as required to support reheat coils, air terminal units, filter enclosures, and any other duct mounted equipment independent from the associated ductwork system. 3.11 AIR AND WATERTIGHT DUCTWORK A. Where water and snow may accumulate on ductwork or where odors or corrosive gasses may collect, ductwork and plenums shall be made watertight by soldering, brazing or welding of joints. Grade ducts down toward waste points and/or toward louvers. Provide valve and drain piping from low point to waste point. 1. Intake and exhaust plenums. 2. Fume hood and corrosive exhaust. B. Test for Watertightness: Before concealment, apply water by hose to check for leaks, witnessed by Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 22 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 3.12 DUCT SEALING A. Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease and loose of foreign matter that could impair adhesion, using soap and water or solvent. 2. Allow surfaces to dry completely before proceeding. B. Installation of Sealant System: 1. Apply sealant system to duct joints, fasteners, and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply sealant by brush, putty knife or caulk gun, to full coverage. Remove excess adhesive immediately. 3. Completely seal duct joint, fasteners and seams without voids, to a minimum 20 mil thick wet film. 4. Apply and store at ambient temperature of 40°F to 100°F; and protect from freezing until dry. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Allow duct sealant system to cure a minimum of 72 hours before operating the system. 2. Do not apply external duct insulation or coatings until the joints have been inspected by the Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 23 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORK ACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC March 15, 2021 EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Supply, return, vent, relief, outside, general exhaust and laboratory exhaust Lock forming quality, galvanized steel ASTM A653 and A924 Joints and features as called for Exterior double wall ductwork Pre-manufactured galvanized steel, double wall, 3 in. insulation between walls, solid inner liner with thickness per SMACNA, outer duct one gauge heavier. McGill Airflow LLC, or similar. Horizontal top surfaces crossbroken for positive water drainage where shown as rectangular, Ductmate joints, seal Class A, and outdoor duct sealant applied per spec, watertight construction. Fume hood exhaust Type 316 stainless steel Braze or weld airtight/watertight Corrosive Acid Exhaust PVC Weld airtight/watertight Exterior ductwork Galvaneal/paint grip (ready for paint) if not insulated, otherwise same as above Horizontal top surfaces crossbrocken for positive water drainage, Ductmate joints, seal Class A, and outdoor duct sealant per spec Accessories, dampers and air turns Same material and gauge as parent duct --------------- Field constructed apparatus casings Galvanized steel ASTM 525 Sealed airtight END OF SECTION 23 31 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 33 13 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200 278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233313-FIREANDSMOKEDAMPERS.DOCX January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 33 13 - FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data, types, schedule of sizes, locations, and installation arrangements of all dampers. B. Submit manufacturer's UL listed installation details for each mounting arrangement. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide work in accordance with the latest requirements of the Mechanical Code of New York State, UL 555, UL 555S and UL555C. Fire dampers shall be Underwriter's Laboratories classified and labeled. Smoke dampers and operator assemblies shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) classified and labeled as an assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DAMPERS A. Curtain type damper of galvanized steel (304 stainless steel for ductwork containing shower room exhaust, wet location exhaust, and corrosive fume exhaust) construction with fusible link, 20 gauge frame and 24 gauge blades. UL listed and labeled. 1. 100% free area with welded head for velocities above 2000 fpm. 2. Square, rectangular, round or oval duct connection as required by duct connections. 3. 1-1/2 hour rated dampers for walls or floors rated less than three hours. Threehour rated dampers for three and four hour walls or floors. 4. With factory fabricated sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. 5. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. B. Design Equipment: Ruskin Model IBD2 Style B. C. Make: Ruskin, Air Balance, National Controlled Air, Prefco, Venco, Greenheck, Nailor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 33 13 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN \SPECS\HVAC\200278-233313-FIREANDSMOKEDAMPERS.DOCX January 22, 2021 2.2 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Airfoil multiblade type damper of galvanized steel construction suitable for installation in high velocity duct systems up to 3000 fpm and 4 in. s.p. with 16 gauge hat channel frame with corner reinforcement and blades equivalent to 14 gauge, silicone rubber blade edge seals, stainless steel bearings and flexible stainless steel jamb seals. UL listed and labeled. 1. UL listed 120 volt electric motor operator. Operator to be mounted outside of the air stream. 2. Square, rectangle, or round as required. Duct transitions for dampers in oval ducts. 3. With factory fabricated sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. 4. Class I leak rating of 4.0 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. w.g. (8.0 cfm/ft2 at 4 in. w.g.) 5. 1-1/2 hour fire rated. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. 6. Provide with damper position indicator switch package. B. Design Equipment: Ruskin FSD60. C. Make: Ruskin, Air Balance, National Controlled Air, Greenheck, Nailor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS A. Provide fire dampers in all one, two and three hour rated wall and floor penetrations. B. Provide smoke dampers as called for in penetrations of smoke barriers. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide sleeve, angles, and access doors for installation in accordance with the latest requirements of SMACNA, NFPA, UL and damper manufacturer. B. Provide sheet metal access doors with labels, as called for in Specification Section 233100 in ductwork for dampers and accessories. C. Provide ceiling or wall access doors for dampers and accessories. D. Install dampers square and free from racking. E. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 33 13 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233313-FIREANDSMOKEDAMPERS.DOCX January 22, 2021 F. Provide bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Attach multiple damper section assemblies together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install support mullions as reinforcement between assemblies as required. G. Division 26 "Electric" will provide signal wiring and power wiring for smoke dampers. Refer to "Building Management System" Section for additional requirements. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26 "Electric". Install detectors located in ductwork within 5'-0" of the damper. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct size and length for smoke detectors required with Division 26 "Electric". 3.3 CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall certify that dampers are accessible for servicing, are installed properly, and are operational. Submit three (3) copies of signed certification to the Owner's Representative for review. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide damper tags and charts. 1. Fasten tag to ductwork adjacent to the dampers. 2. Number each damper and make chart listing. a. Number. b. Location. c. Air system in which they are installed. B. Submit three (3) copies of chart to the Owner's Representative for review. END OF SECTION 23 33 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 34 00 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include all fans, motors, drives, and accessories. Include all fan curves fan operating point, and sound data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Capacity, size and arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories shall be provided as called for or scheduled. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions listed. The manufacturer shall guarantee sound-power level ratings not exceeding those of the design equipment. All equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced to acceptable tolerances with weights permanently fastened. Fan wheels shall be rebalanced in the field, if necessary. B. Pressure Classification: Maximum Total Sp Class Up to 3-3/4 in. WG-STD I Up to 6-3/4 in. WG-STD II Up to 12-3/4 in. WG-STD III C. Motors: 1. Motor sizes shall be as scheduled. Refer to Specification Section 230513 for motor types, efficiency requirements, and acceptable motor manufacturers. All belt-driven fan motors shall be mounted on either an adjustable slide base or a pivoting base. Motors shall contain permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. D. Drive Systems: 1. Provide fans with belt or direct drive systems as scheduled. V-belt drives as recommended by drive manufacturer, unless otherwise specified or scheduled. a. Size drive for 200% of motor rating when motor is 10 HP and larger. Size for 150% of motor rating when motor is less than 10 HP. b. Motors 5 HP and larger shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) belts. All belt sets shall be matched. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 c. Cast iron or cast steel pulleys. d. Provide belt and shaft guards for each driven device. Provide openings in both the motor and fan sections of the guard so that the motor and fan speeds can be checked without removing the belt guard. e. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. f. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. g. All belt drive fan motor selections must include an allowance for medium drive losses as established by AMCA Publication 203. E. Motor Pulleys: 1. 5 HP and Smaller: Adjustable type to produce 15% speed change above and below scheduled fan speed. 7-1/2 HP and Larger: Fixed type. 2. 5 HP and Smaller: "A" section, 2.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. 3. 7-1/2 HP to 20 HP: "B" section, 4.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. 4. 25 HP and Larger: "C" section 7.0 in. minimum pitch diameter. 5. Drive ratio not over 4:1. F. Bearings: 1. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy-duty regreasable ball type in a pillow block cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours as maximum cataloged operating speed. G. Wheels and Propellers: 1. All wheels and propellers shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration levels for fans. Wheel shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. 2. Blades on all sizes shall be continuously welded to the backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. 3. All hubs shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 H. Blower Shafts: 1. All blower shafts shall be AISI-C-1045 hot rolled and accurately turned, ground and polished. Shafting shall be sized for a critical speed of at least 125% of maximum cataloged operating speed. I. Vibration isolation for units shall be furnished by the fan manufacturer unless otherwise noted. J. AMCA Type B spark resistant construction. K. Certifications: 1. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705) and UL listed for Canada (CUL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. 2. All units shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in ISTA certified transit-tested packaging. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. High-Plume Laboratory Fume Exhaust: 1. Construction: a. All steel fan and system components (fan, nozzle, windband and plenum) shall be corrosion resistant coated with a two part electrostatically applied and baked, sustainable, corrosion-resistant coating system. Standard finish color to be RAL 7023, concrete grey. b. All parts shall be cleaned and chemically prepared for coating using a multistage wash system which includes acid pickling to remove oxide, improving the coating bond to the substrate. c. The first powder coat applied over the prepared surface shall be an epoxy primer. After application, the coating shall be heated to a gelatinous consistency (partial cure) at which time the second powder coat of polyester resin shall be electrostatically applied and then be cured simultaneously at a uniform temperature of 400°F (204°C). d. The coating system shall not be less than a total thickness of 6 mils, shall not be affected by the UV component of sunlight (does not chalk), and have superior corrosion resistance to acid, alkali, and solvents. Coating system shall exceed 4000 hour ASTM B117 Salt Spray Resistance. e. Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 f. Fan housing shall be welded steel and meet corrosion resistant coating above. No uncoated metal fan parts shall be acceptable. g. Load bearing or structural fan components that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower mechanical properties than steel, have rough interior surfaces in which corrosive, hazardous compounds can collect, and / or which chalk and structurally degrade due to the UV component of the sunlight shall not be acceptable. h. A high velocity conical discharge nozzle shall be supplied by the fan manufacturer and be designed to efficiently handle an outlet velocity of up to 6000 FPM (30.48 m/s). Discharge nozzles shall be steel with corrosion resistant coating or chemical resistant medium density polyethylene with UV inhibitors to prevent chalking and have smooth interior surfaces. Discharge stack caps or hinged covers, impeding exhaust flow shall not be permitted. i. Provide housing drain for removal of rain and condensation. j. Motor compartment shall be sealed from the contaminated airstream and have integral cooling vents to fan exterior housing to prevent heat buildup. k. Housing shall have a bolted and gasketed access panel allowing for inspection of impeller. l. Impeller, inlet cone and motor shall be removable in a single cartridge from the exterior of the fan housing without removal of the fan housing from plenum or roof curb. 2. Fan Impeller: a. Fan impeller shall be centrifugal, backward curved, with laminar blade geometry and non-stall characteristics. The impeller shall be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically per AMCA Standard 204. b. Fan impeller shall be manufactured of aluminum (AMCA type B spark resistant) and meet corrosion resistant coating noted above. c. Aluminum centrifugal impellers shall be coated with Hi Pro polyester resin. 3. Bypass Air Plenum: a. A bypass air plenum shall be provided as shown on drawings. The plenum shall be equipped with a bypass air damper and intake air hood with bird screen for introducing outside air at roof level upstream of the fan. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 b. The plenum shall be constructed of fully welded steel, meet corrosion resistant coating listed above, and mount on roof curb as shown on the project drawings. c. The bypass air plenum shall be mounted on factory fabricated roof curb provided by the fan manufacturer. d. Bypass air plenum shall introduce outside air above the roof level and shall have rain hood(s) and bird screen protection over the bypass air damper(s). e. Bypass air dampers shall be opposed-blade design, and coated with up to 4 mils of Hi-Pro polyester resin, electrostatically applied and baked. f. Fan isolation damper of parallel blade design, either gravity backdraft or two position actuated, fabricated of steel or aluminum and coated with minimum 4 mils of Hi-Pro polyester resin, electrostatically applied and baked, shall be provided as shown on the project documents. g. Blower / Plenum vibration isolation shall be limited to neoprene / cork vibration pads. 4. Roof Curb: a. Exhaust system manufacturer shall supply a structural support curb for the plenum, of specified height, as shown on the drawings. b. Curb shall be fabricated of a corrosion resistant coated steel and structurally reinforced. c. Curbs shall be insulated. d. When properly anchored to the roof structure, the standard curb / plenum / blower assembly shall withstand wind loads of up to 125 mph without additional structural support. 5. Motor: a. Motors shall be premium efficiency, standard NEMA frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) with a 1.15 service factor on line (sinewave) frequency. Motor shall be labeled for use with a VFD with 10:1 VT and 1.0 service factor. b. Motor bearings shall be sealed for life and require no lubrication maintenance. c. Motor shall be equipped with internal shaft grounding ring protect motor bearings from the shaft voltages. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 34 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FANS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\D ESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233400-FANS.DOC January 22, 2021 d. Motor bearings shall be sized for an L-10 life of no less than 100,000 hours in vertical shaft down application. 6. Accessories: a. Drain. b. Bypass Air Plenum. c. OSHA Belt Guard. d. Weather Cover. e. Inlet/Outlet Companion Flange. f. Hinged Access Door. g. Discharge nozzle. h. Isolation damper. 7. Basis-of-Design: Greenheck Vektor PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All fans shall meet the intent of the system performance requirements. Provide rubber in-shear vibration isolation for all fans unless otherwise called for. Provide necessary support steel for equipment. Provide guards for all exposed belts, shafts, and fan wheels. Change pulley sizes or adjust sheaves as required to make systems deliver specified quantities of air as listed on the Contract Drawings. END OF SECTION 23 34 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 36 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233600-VARIABLEVOLUMETERMINALUNITS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 36 00 - VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for terminal units including room number, maximum and minimum CFM, accessories, pressure drops, discharge and sound power data by octave band. Clearly indicate box sizes being proposed. Submit separately the controller and control interface devices being utilized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMINAL UNITS A. General Unit Construction: 1. Unit casing shall be constructed of 22 gauge welded galvanized steel. Each unit shall be internally lined with 1/2 in. minimum 1-1/2 lb./ft.3 fiberglass insulation which meets NFPA 90A and UL 181. Factory label each unit with size, location, minimum and maximum CFM, and calibration chart. Air terminal units shall be capable of operating at 10 in. w.g., pressure maximum without damage. Maximum casing leakage at 3 in. W.G. shall be 11 cfm. 2. Units to be certified under ARI Standard 880-94 Certification Program and carry ARI seal. 3. Units shall be provided with factory access door option. 4. Units shall be provided with integral sound attenuators. B. Control and Volume Regulating Devices: 1. Internal unit damper shall be constructed of galvanized steel with blade-end seals for tight shut-off with a maximum damper leakage of 7 CFM against a maximum of 3 in. w.g. Damper shall be mounted on a galvanized steel shaft extending through the unit on torque free bearings. Terminal shall have normally open dampers. Minimum and maximum air quantities shall be factory set, but may be field adjustable. Neither the radiated or discharge sound power levels shall exceed the ratings of design equipment as scheduled on the Contract Drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 36 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233600-VARIABLEVOLUMETERMINALUNITS.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Terminal Volume Controller (Microprocessor Based): 1. Provide unit with airflow velocity and total pressure sensor suitable for up to 3000 fpm inlet velocity. Sensor shall be averaging type with multiple sampling points on cross grids. Pressure independent microprocessor based electronic controller shall modulate airflow to maintain space temperature. 2. Provide a 24 volt electric damper actuator. The actuator shall be reversible with a switch and have a visual position indicator. The stroke time shall be 75 - 150 seconds at 0.53 in. lbs. Torque. The unit shall have a 3 foot long plenum rated cable. The housing shall be NEMA type 2 with a flammability rating conforming to UL94. The actuator shall be maintenance free and have a minimum life span of 60,000 cycles. Actuator shall be Bellimo NM24-1US, or equal. 3. Provide factory mounted transformers for controller and actuator suitable for 120 volt, 1 phase-input power. Multiple boxes (approximately 6 to 8) shall be powered off of one terminal unit transformer through a low voltage power loop. Coordinate with the Control Contractor which terminal units require transformers. 4. Wall mounted thermistor type electric space sensor provided by Control subcontractor. Controller shall interface with Building Management System to provide analog outputs for space temperature and airflow and accept analog inputs position the actuator for warm-up or pull-down and change space temperature set-point for night set-back, set-up or occupancy sensor status. Controller shall sequence reheat coil to maintain space. 5. The VAV box manufacturer shall provide the box and the airflow sensor, microprocessor based controller and damper actuator. The temperature control subcontractor shall ship the microprocessor based controller and damper motor to the VAV box manufacturer's factory for mounting and calibration. D. Design Equipment: Titus DESV. E. Acceptable Makes: Anemostat, Krueger, Titus. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Suspended terminal units from the building structural system independent of the ceiling system. If this cannot be accomplished, provide additional intermediate angle iron from which the units shall be suspended. Level each unit. Access to the terminal unit controls shall be accomplished by remove of ceiling panels or through an access door. Coordinate locations of access doors. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233713-REGISTERSANDDIFFUSERS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 37 13 - REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: Submit product data including room schedule listing size, CFM, throw, direction of throw, accessories, finish, material type, color chart, pressure drop and noise criteria. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each manufacturer shall check noise level ratings for registers and diffusers to insure that the sizes selected will not produce noise to exceed N.C. - 24, measured at occupant level; notify Owner's Representative of problems prior to submittal. B. Pressure drop, airflow and noise criteria selection is based on design equipment. Manufacturers not submitting design makes must provide written certification in front of submittal that equipment submitted has been checked against and performs equal to the design make. C. Borders and frames shall be coordinated with materials and ceiling systems to integrate with architectural ceiling details and finishes scheduled. D. Locations of ceiling mounted air terminal devices shall be coordinated with locations shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans. E. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw and pressure drop. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR REGISTERS A. General: 1. A register is defined as a grille plus a volume damper. 2. Registers shall be installed "sight-proof" where possible, i.e.: High wall register with horizontal blades inclined up, or along a wall with blades facing the wall. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233713-REGISTERSANDDIFFUSERS.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Borders and frames shall be of the same material as register face unless specified otherwise. B. Mounting Frames: 1. Provide with screw holes in register face punched and countersunk at factory, and mounting frame drilled and tapped to suit. Sponge rubber gasket between frame and wall or ceiling for all surface mounted frames. 2. Frame shall be overlap type and shall be suitable for type of ceiling where register is to be installed. C. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart), as scheduled. D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR DIFFUSERS A. General: 1. Provide four way blow unless otherwise noted. 2. Where manufacturer's size recommendations require duct sizes or connections differing from design, Contractor shall provide at no change in contract price. 3. Suitable for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide square to round neck transitions as required. 5. Provide sponge rubber gasket for all surface mounted frames. B. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart) as scheduled. C. Frame style shall be suitable for ceiling type in which diffuser is to be installed. D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-23371 3-REGISTERSANDDIFFUSERS.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLY TYPES A. Type 1 - (Perforated face type, high volume low velocity): 1. Provided for one-way or two-way blow as indicated on drawings. 2. Face or diffuser shall be constructed of 51 percent free area perforated steel with 3/16 inch diameter holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers. 3. The back pan shall be manufactured of 22 gauge steel. 4. The interior of the diffuser shall be accessible for sanitization from below (room side). 5. The diffuser must be available for full radial air diffusion (two-way) and 1/2 radial air diffusion (one-way). 6. Panel Size = 48 in. x 24 in. 7. Model: Titus Model TriTec. B. Type 2 - (Perforated face type, high volume low velocity): 1. Provided for one-way or two-way blow as indicated on drawings. 2. Face or diffuser shall be constructed of 51 percent free area perforated steel with 3/16 inch diameter holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers. 3. The back pan shall be manufactured of 22 gauge steel. 4. The interior of the diffuser shall be accessible for sanitization from below (room side). 5. The diffuser must be available for full radial air diffusion (two-way) and 1/2 radial air diffusion (one-way). 6. Panel Size = 24 in. x 24 in. 7. Model: Titus Model TriTec. C. Type 3 - (Perforated face type, high volume low velocity): 1. Provided for one-way or two-way blow as indicated on drawings. 2. Face or diffuser shall be constructed of 51 percent free area perforated steel with 3/16 inch diameter holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers. 3. The face and back pan shall be manufactured of 304 stainless steel. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-233713-REGISTER SANDDIFFUSERS.DOC January 22, 2021 4. The interior of the diffuser shall be accessible for sanitization from below (room side). 5. The diffuser must be available for full radial air diffusion (two-way) and 1/2 radial air diffusion (one-way). 6. Panel Size = 24 in. x 24 in. 7. Model: Titus Model TriTec. 2.2 RETURN/EXHAUST TYPES A. Type A - (Exhaust and Return Grilles): 1. Steel construction with 22 gauge frame and blades, with horizontal bars on a 1/2 in. spacing set at 35° fixed deflection. 2. 1-1/4 in. wide flange. 3. The blades shall be parallel to long dimension. 4. Model: Titus 355-RL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rough in or install per reflected ceiling plan or in location instructed by Owner's Representative. B. Provide approved air extractors behind all duct mounted supply registers in exposed ductwork. C. When the final connection to an exhaust or return grille is made, a 12 in. minimum height plenum box must be supplied to all grilles. Plenum dimensions shall match grille size. Paint inside of plenum box flat black. Provide 1 in. acoustical lining in plenum box. Oversize the plenum to account for the thickness of the lining. D. Seal all supply and return registers, grilles and diffusers during construction operations to limit dust entering HVAC systems and ductwork. Seals may be removed just prior to testing and balancing, but not without the approval of the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 82 16.10 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation DUCT COILS (ELECTRIC) M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-238216.10-DUCTCOILS-ELECTRIC.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 23 82 16.10 - DUCT COILS (ELECTRIC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for equipment, including detailed wiring diagrams, dimensions, ratings, and special features. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT COILS A. General Requirements: 1. Open coil type and slip in design having UL listed for zero combustion clearance. 2. Terminal cabinet mounted on the side or bottom to suit installation arrangement. 3. Complete package fabricated, wired and tested by the manufacturer. 4. 1/8 in. minimum insulation shall be installed on the inside of the box between the duct and the terminal cabinet to stop condensation. B. Coil Element: Of 80% nickel, 20% chromium, coiled resistance wire supported with reinforcing brackets made of high grade ceramic. C. Construction: 1. Frame members, terminal cabinet and associated sheet metal parts shall be of heavy gauge, die formed, aluminized steel. 2. Hinged cover and terminal cabinet shall meet NEMA 1 requirements. D. Wiring of insulated copper conductors rated for 225°F with clearly marked terminals. E. Controls: 1. Disc type automatic reset thermal cut out. 2. Manual reset thermal cut out. 3. Fused control transformer. 4. Air proving switch to de-energize the coil when insufficient air flow occurs. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 82 16.10 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation DUCT COILS (ELECTRIC) M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 P:\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200278-238216.10-DUCTCOILS-ELECTRIC.DOC January 22, 2021 5. Magnetic staging contactors to control the coil elements. 6. SCR modulating control. 7. Control voltage terminal block. 8. Power voltage terminal block. 9. Fusing to meet UL and NEC requirements. 10. Built-in snap acting disconnect switch with marked ON/OFF positions and positive door interlock. F. Design Equipment: [ ]. G. Make: Brasch, Indeeco, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Duct coils shall be installed in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of UL and the National Electrical Code. B. Install with access to control compartments. END OF SECTION 23 82 16.10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\200278-260500-Bas icElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\200278-2605 00-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\200278-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\ 200278-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20-0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\200278-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\rocfile1\roch_projects\2020\20 -0200\200278\Design\Specs\ELEC\200278-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 3/10/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESI GN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories: 1. Cable Tray 2. Conductors 3. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 4. Telephone/Data Communication Outlets 5. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel; UL listed "electrical metallic tubing." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 3. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electrogalvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.D OC January 22, 2021 4. Surface Metal Raceway shall be .040 in. steel UL listed "Surface Metal Raceway". Use manufacturer's standard fittings designed to be used with the specific raceway. a. One-Piece Raceway: 1) Buff or ivory finish. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold "700" Series (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal b. Two-Piece Prewired Raceways: 1) Buff, gray, ivory or stainless steel finish. 2) Wiring Harness: a) Single circuit NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounded receptacles spaced 12" on centers if required. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold 2200 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal c. Two-Piece Raceways: 1) Gray finish. 2) Duplex or special receptacles as specified in wiring devices. 3) Corners, turns, tees and elbows shall have suitable turning radius for the intended cable. 4) Provide divider in raceways utilized for power and communications. Utilize wire clips 18 in. on center to hold in the conductors/cables. 5) Utilize rounded head screws for mounting. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold 4000 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJ ECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal C. Cable Trays: 1. Solid Bottom Cable Trays shall be aluminum construction, including accessories. One-piece construction bottom and side, sheet aluminum 080 ±5%. Aluminum alloy side rails and bottom channel with flanges in standard lengths 12 ft. - 0 in. long. Wrap around type bolted connector to connect tray sections. Cover required where indicated on Contract Documents and in all areas used as return air plenums. Use three-piece construction, consisting of a solid corrugated bottom welded to the side rails. Provide divider strip where noted on Contract Documents. Minimum inside radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows where required for field conditions. Horizontal and vertical bends for solid bottom trays shall have solid bottoms. Loading data: Tray Width Load Depth Usable NEMA Depth Standard Span Lbs. Per Feet Deflection 12 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.15 in. 18 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.015 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2 020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 Tray Width Load Depth Usable NEMA Depth Standard Span Lbs. Per Feet Deflection 18 in. 6 in. 3 in. 12C 10 ft. 144 0.15 in. 2. Provide a safety-loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) P-W 2) B-Line Systems 3) Chalfant 4) Globe D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Channel shall be steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2 for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application. a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Three Phase 120/208V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V Ground Green Green Green Neutral White Gray White A or L1 Black Brown Black B or L2 Red Orange Red C or L3 Blue Yellow --- b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite F. Cable Termination Kits: 1. The shielded power cable termination shall be capable of continuous operation at the rated voltage of the cable it is to be used on, up to 35 kV. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The termination shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, for a Class 1 Termination. It shall be a one-piece design, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber, munsell gray in color. The termination shall not require heat or flame for installation. The termination kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make three terminations (except for the lugs). In addition to normal locations, the termination must be designed for contaminated indoor and outdoor locations. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Separable Splices/Apparatus Connections: 1. The shielded power cable separable insulated connector splice or 600 Amp apparatus connection shall be capable of continuous operation at 35 kV, 600 amps and 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The system and components shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE dead-break interfaces. The elbow (tee-module) and all other rubber components shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber, and the connecting components shall be insulated with molded epoxy. The system shall be available as specific kits for splicing, tapping (adding-on), dead-ending and apparatus connecting. Provide with test point for apparatus connection. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Brand w/Grounding Kit 2) Elastimold w/Grounding Kit 3) Raychem 4) Approved equal H. Permanent Splices: 1. The shielded power cable splice must meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE and meeting the cable voltage rating. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90ºC, with an emergency overload rating of 130ºC. The splice shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber. The splice kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make one inline splice (except for the connector), including a solderless mechanical ground jumper. The splice shall be designed for splicing tape shielded, wire shielded, and UniShield cables without the requirement of additional adapters. It shall be rated for indoor, outdoor and direct burial applications. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal I. Terminal Lugs and Connectors: 1. The copper lug shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of the cable it is used on. The lug shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using industry standard crimping tools and dies. Terminal lugs shall be solderless, pressure type with UL label for "CU/AL" conductor terminations. The lug shall be a closedend compression (crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-2 60501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 The lug shall be made with a chamfered inside end, for ease of conductor insertion. Both one and two hole lugs shall be NEMA sized for standard stud sizes and spacing. The lug shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Scotchlok 30,000 and 31,000 Series 2) Burndy 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 2. The copper conductor connection shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of the cables it is used on. The connection shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using industry standard crimping tools and ides. The connector shall be an inline compression (crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper. The connector shall be constructed with chamfered inside-ends and with center cable stops. The connector shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Scotchlok 10,000 and 11,000 Series 2) Burndy 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 3. "Split-bolt" Connectors shall be solderless type. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Kearney 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 5) Anderson 4. "TWIST ON" Connectors shall be spiral steel spring type and insulated with vinyl cap and skirt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3-M Company "Scotch-Lok" 2) Ideal "Wing-Nuts" 3) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 J. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened (screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds 2. Telephone/Data Communications Outlet Boxes: a. 4 in. x 4 in. x 2-1/8 in. minimum outlet box with single gang plaster ring with cover plate suitable for indicated communications outlet and conduit routed to cable tray. Cover plate shall match the receptacle cover type. 3. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal K. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets: 1. Terminal and equipment cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and grey baked enamel finish. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 Boxes and front shall be UL listed and shall be minimum 35 in. H x 24 in. W x 6 in. D. Provide removable insulated plywood terminal board mounted on inside back wall of cabinet. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Square D "Mono-Flat" 2) Approved equal L. Wiring Devices: 1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors, etc.) shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle face shall be as directed by the Architect. Provide device cover plates of rounded nylon colored to match the device in finished areas and rounded raised (Steel City 450/460 series) only for surface mounted locations in unfinished areas. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pass and Seymour 2) Hubbell 3) Leviton 2. Toggle/Snap Switches: a. Units shall be quiet operation, quick make/quick break, rated for 20A/120-277V/1hp at 120/277V, side/back wired, with nylon/polycarbonate toggle, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal and silver alloy contacts. Units shall meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. Single pole units shall be Hubbell HBL1221, P&S 20AC1 or Leviton 1221-2. Provide two pole, three way, four way, illuminated handle, keyed, etc. type of the same quality and model. b. Momentary Contact: Units shall be as indicated above (20A, 277V, nylon handle, side/back wired), three position, two circuit/three wire with spring return to center position, provide where indicated and as needed for proper system operation. Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1250, Leviton 1256 or approved equal. Provide keyed operation or pilot light where indicated. 3. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DES IGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V, side/back wired, #14 to 10AWG screw terminals with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal Meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall have brass mounting strap and be: Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362AX or Leviton 5362. Industrial grade c. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 5mA interrupting ground fault level, test/reset front buttons, full through feed capability, power off on reverse wired sensing, 10kA short circuit current rating, be tamper/weather resistant and in compliance with UL 943. Unit shall self-test function to periodically test the components automatically and indicate a failure condition utilizing an LED. Shall be Hubbell GFR5362, P&S 2096TR or d. Special Receptacles: provide other type receptacles as indicated herein or on the drawings. Such receptacles shall be Hubbell, P&S or Leviton highest grade available. 4. Lighting Dimmers: a. Provide lighting dimmer where indicated suitable for the type of luminaire for even continuous control. Unit shall be rated for the indicated connected load plus 25% minimum (even when ganged). Review luminaire schedule for type and loading. Provide for three-way control as indicated. b. Dimmers to be Lutron "Nova" NT-(1000W minimum) with debuzzing coil for incandescent. c. Low voltage dimming shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer for magnetic or solid state. d. LED dimmers shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer and be listed for use with the associated driver. e. Device color shall match the toggle switch. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Lutron 2) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 5. Occupancy/Vacancy (Automatic/Manual) Sensors: a. Sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum: 1) Zero crossing switching operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating. 2) Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation. 3) Motion sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 20 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial). 4) Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz. 5) UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer full replacement warranty. 6) Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity. 7) Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation. 8) Operation shall have adjustable time delay. Occupancy sensors shall have automatic on and vacancy sensors shall have manual on. 9) Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit. 10) Unit color shall match the project devices except for the ceiling mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect. 11) Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment). 12) Provide components as needed for the indicated control. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN \SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 13) A factory authorized representative shall coordinate and instruct the start up services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and start up supervision and adjustment. b. Wall Mounted - Passive Infrared (PIR): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR technology motion sensing. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Pass & Seymour Model OS300S (Design Make) b) Hubbell c) Watt Stopper d) Sensor Switch c. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and Ultrasonic): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-2 60501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model AD2000 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch d. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching: 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have two on/off buttons and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. To have two contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum switching capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model AD2000X2 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 e. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Ultrasonic: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize ultrasonic sensing. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be programmable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch f. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 16 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch g. Ceiling Mounted - Vacancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Operation shall require manual operation of momentary wall switch for lighting to be switched on and automatic off. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 17 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\E LEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Provide momentary switch(es) and any other needed equipment for indicated operation. 8) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch h. Switch Pack: 1) Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the quantity of circuits). 2) Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic box. 3) Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) occupancy sensors. Multiple sensors shall be able to control a single switch pack. 4) Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277VAC. i. Testing: 1) Each occupancy sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after installation. 2) Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, etc. 3) Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 18 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 M. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping: 1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide firestop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. All Wiring Installed in Hazardous Locations: Galvanized rigid metal conduit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 19 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSAND METHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. 4. Surface metal raceway may be used for surface runs in finished area where concealed conduit cannot be run or where specifically indicated on drawings. B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in. 9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 20 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication, "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades. 14. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 15. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 16. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. 17. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 18. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 19. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 21 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501- BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 20. At each flush mounted panelboard, terminal cabinet, control cabinet, etc., provide four (4) spare 3/4 in. raceways from panelboard, etc., to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90° turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation of raceway, and cap. 21. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. 22. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers, environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows: a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit within space wall/separation. b. Seal raceway penetration through the wall/separation. c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation. d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide a complete air barrier after conductors are installed. e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer. 23. Raceway installed in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway. C. Cable Trays: 1. Tray supports shall be hung using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member section; and without visible deflection. Install cable tray level and straight. 2. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum 4 in. movements, greater if expansion movement conditions warrant. 3. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. 4. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors, clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job, coordinate with the manufacturer. 5. Provide conduit to tray fitting at each conduit entrance to tray. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 22 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\ 2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 6. Install divider in trays as called for. 7. Install fire stop wall frames around cable tray at penetrations through fire rated walls, and where called for. Seal these openings with pliable fire resistant sealant. D. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Provide minimum 6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination. 10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. 11. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices. 12. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 23 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 13. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible. 14. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "TyRaps" or equal. 15. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. 16. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. 17. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes. 18. Provide cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC. 19. The following should be permitted to be installed in cable tray systems only under the conditions described in their respective National Electrical Code articles: a. Power and control tray cable. b. Other factory-assembled, Multiconductor control, signal, or power cables that and specifically approved for installation in cable trays. c. Optical fiber cables. E. Outlet Boxes: 1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. Comply with the NEC relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 24 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20- 0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of 5 ft. in any direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The above modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line. 4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from door frame. 5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring, splices and device(s) to be installed in accordance with the NEC. 7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled hollow cavity walls shall be installed flush with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. Boxes shall be mechanically fastened and supported by two (2) adjacent structural members (studs) with cross brackets (Garvin Industries Model BMB or approved equal). 8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed flush and have extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. 9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep, galvanized sheet metal. 10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes. 11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type. 12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices. F. Receptacles: 1. Provide hospital grade receptacle for all hospital construction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 25 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Toggle Switches: 1. Switches shall be installed in accessible locations near room/space entryway(s). 2. Provide lighted handle switches in mechanical rooms, elevator pits, electric rooms, etc. H. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. I. Equipment Mounting Heights: 1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in. b. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest from floor) 18 in. c. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters d. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters 30 in. e. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also for refrigerators 48 in. f. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, abovegrade 24 in. g. Telephone outlets 18 in. h. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in. i. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in. j. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated) 80 in. to bottom of the notification device k. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max) CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 26 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\ 2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 l. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets, to top of backbox 72 in. m. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in. 2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. J. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc. 2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. K. Identification: 1. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on switchboards, main service disconnects, transfer switches, motor control centers and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 2. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to each device. 3. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, adjustable speed drives, circuit breakers, etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 4. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc., for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 5. Nameplates shall be engraved black, with white core, with Helvetica medium 3/16 in. lettering. 1/8 in. lettering is acceptable where space of 3/16 in. is not available. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 27 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC January 22, 2021 6. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. 7. Provide signage at each electrical service room indicating "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". Utilize adhesive backed, yellow background, block lettering signage at door. 8. Using adhesive backed printed tape label all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation and circuit number. Tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates. L. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc. 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. END OF SECTION 26 05 01 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDI NG.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system equal to or exceeding the requirements of NEC and as indicated in the contract documents. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, busway, wire ways, cable trays, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system. B. Provide solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Types of grounding systems include the following: 1. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar 2. Electrical Equipment Grounding 3. Telecommunications Grounding 4. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the NEC by Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding conductors, bonding conductors, jumpers, grounded conductors, etc. shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. B. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\2 00278-260526-GROUNDING.DOC January 22, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Ground connectors. 2. Ground bars. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Exposed grounding components such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grounding conductors in raceway with 600V circuiting shall be insulated to match the circuit conductors with green color. 3. Grounding conductor size shall be as indicated or as required by the NEC whichever is larger, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise indicated. Sizing shall take into account circuit voltage drop. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Same make as for 600 volt conductors. B. Connectors, Clamps and Terminals: 1. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be made of copper alloy or silicon bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. Bolts and washers (Belleville) shall be of comparable material or stainless steel. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Hubbell Anderson Corp. 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Approved equal 2. Exothermic Welds: a. Provide exothermic welds designed for size and type of intended cable, rods, structure, etc. Solder prohibited for connections, except for medium and high voltage cable metallic tape shields (utilize mechanical and solder). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDING.DOC January 22, 2021 b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Erico "Cadweld" 2) Burndy "ThermOweld" 3) Approved equal 3. Pipe Clamp: a. Pipe clamp for bonding to pipe type electrode (water pipe, etc.) shall be a suitably sized copper alloy clamp. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy GAR-BU 2) O-Z Gedney Type CG 3) Burndy "Durium" 4) AFL Global "Everdur" 5) Approved equal 4. Flexible Strap: a. Flexible grounding straps shall be of braided high conductivity copper with two hole connector. Strap shall have equal to or greater than ampacity of the system it is bonding to. Strap shall provide flexibility in all directions when installed properly. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) OZ Gedney 3) Approved equal C. Ground Bars 1. Provide ground bars where indicated. Ground bars shall be: a. 98% conductive copper, minimum. b. 4 in. x 1/4 in. thick minimum with length as indicated with minimum 36 in. for electric room/MDF and all other minimum of 24 in. c. Standard NEMA bolt hole patterns with maximum quantity of lug locations. Spacing of 1-1/8 in. apart. 2. Bar shall be mounted to an accessible wall location with galvanized steel hardware and 2000V rated insulators. Mounting shall be suitable for full complement of cabling. 3. Unit shall conform to EIA/TIA standards. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDI NG.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico b. Newton Instrument c. Burndy d. Harger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: 1. Provide grounding conductor(s) with all power circuits. Conductor shall be sized as indicated or as required by the NEC as a minimum and shall be terminated on the equipment, device, enclosure, etc. grounding terminal. Conductor size shall be for the entire length unless approved by the Engineer where oversized for voltage drop. 2. Conductors above grade to ground electrodes (water piping, structural column, etc.) and to equipment (service entrance, ground bars, ground halos, etc.) shall be installed in metallic conduit with ends bonded to the conduit. 3. Grounding conductors shall be installed to have a minimum radius of 3 in. 4. Grounding conductors in a raceway system shall be terminated/bonded to each box, cabinet, enclosure, etc. through which it passes or terminates. 5. Grounding conductors routed with underground circuits shall be bonded to each ground electrode and metallic cable support system within the raceway system including pull and access locations. 6. Stranded conductors penetrating vapor barriers, foundations, slab on grade and water stop membranes shall have the interstitial spaces between strands filled with solder 4 in. beyond the membrane each side. The conductor shall be sealed to the membrane with a manufacturer approved method. B. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system. 2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type. Utilize grounding bushings as specified elsewhere in these specifications. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PRO JECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDING.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Conduit which runs to or from boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. 4. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC. C. Connectors Clamps and Terminals: 1. Connectors utilized above grade in dry accessible locations shall be mechanical or exothermic type. 2. Connectors in damp locations, below grade or if not indicated shall be exothermic type. 3. Clean the area near the connecting surfaces prior to any connection to ensure effective contact. Cleaning shall be to the bare metal. Wire brush area if needed to remove rust scale paint, dirt, etc. to expose bare metal. 4. Exothermic connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested with heavy blow of a five pound sledge. D. Flexible Strap: 1. Flexible straps shall be used when bonding vibrating/moveable equipment, with expansion fittings and where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Sufficient slack shall be provided to compensate for the anticipated vibration, movement and expansion. E. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. The neutral (grounded) conductor of each low voltage, single and/or polyphase system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected to ground at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear to the system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by the NEC. Ground connection shall be to the building grounding system, building steel, building water service, building concrete reinforcement and as indicated. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to the enclosure and secondary neutral bushing, to all electrical utilization and distribution equipment; insulation shall be same type as phase conductors. Transformer enclosures shall be bonded to the primary and secondary circuit grounding conductor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDING.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Equipment grounding conductors shall extend from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the source panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear. F. Communications Rooms: 1. For each building communications room or closet provide one (1) wall mounted ground bar bonded to the main building ground bar or electrical service ground with insulated #2/0 AWG conductor. 2. Local cable trays, equipment racks, etc. shall be bonded to the ground bar with insulated #6AWG minimum. G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit from building's main service equipment or grounding bus to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 3.2 GROUND TERMINAL BUS INSTALLATION A. Install ground terminal bar in rooms where shown on the drawings. Mount bar 18 in. above finished floor by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 in. long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two (2) supports 18 in. on center. Connect all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar. B. Label grounding conductors terminated to bus for equipment, location, electrode, etc served. 3.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete telecommunications grounding electrode system with room grounding buses, grounding electrodes and interconnecting cables per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607A. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278 \DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-260526-GROUNDING.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Bond metallic telecommunications pathways (e.g. conduit, sleeves, cable trays, fire-rated assemblies, etc.) to ground. Use structural steel where available. When a bonding conductor is installed in metallic conduit, the bonding conductor must be bonded to the conduit at both ends. C. All exterior/underground terminals shall be made with exothermic welds or compression connectors. D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data and other communication equipment, provide #4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location. 1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.4 TESTS A. Test the building ground system before backfilling to ensure continuity and determine system resistance value. B. Testing procedure shall be a fall of potential type with a moving auxiliary electrode in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 and reviewed/approved by the Engineer. Sufficient test points shall be taken for accurate resistance value. C. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, no earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Provide tabulated test results indicating distance between rods and resistance readings on a plotted graph. D. Test each ground electrode system separately prior to connection to the system or main building ground bar. Test each system ground electrode system a second time after backfilling has occurred and all final connections (building steel, water service, etc.) have been made. E. Soil type, date, time, meter manufacturer/model number, person performing the test, test witnesses and most recent rainfall shall be noted in test submittal. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 26 20 00 - ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete distribution system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following product data/information: 1. Manufacturer and equipment type. 2. Standard catalog information sheet. 3. Detailed shop drawings indicating plan, elevation, end and isometric views. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly shown and dimensioned on the drawings. 4. Complete Bill of Materials. 5. All relevant ratings including, but not limited to, voltage, current, interrupting and withstand. 6. Overcurrent Device Information. Model number, available settings, setting ranges, capabilities, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC January 22, 2021 7. Submit available and final settings, programming and adjustments. B. Submit product data and information for the following equipment, materials, products, etc.: 1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 2. Enclosed circuit breakers. 3. Disconnect switches. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 and a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Branch Circuit Panelboards (480Y/277 volt, 208Y/120 volt, 240/120 volts): 1. Provide branch circuit panelboard as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled. 2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper. Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. 3. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition of connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboard. Bus connections shall be bolt-on. 4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule or on the plans. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. Reducing breaker ratings on the basis of series rating is not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DO C January 22, 2021 5. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be specified in UL Standard 50 cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, stainless steel, cylinder type lock with catch and spring-loaded door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust inhibiting iron phosphate sealer and baked enamel finish. Minimum box width shall be 20 in. Provide door-in-door construction. Panelboard to be keyed to match the Owner's existing system. 6. Panelboards with main circuit breaker shall have inherent and listed coordination of the main and branch circuit breakers. 7. Ratings shall be as indicted on the Panelboard Schedule. 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. 480Y/277 Volt: 1) Square D "NF" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL2" 3) General Electric by ABB "AE" b. 208Y/120 Volt and 240/120 Volt: 1) Square D "NQ" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL1" 3) General Electric by ABB "AQ" B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers below 400 amp frame shall be molded case with inverse time and instantaneous tripping functions, unless indicated otherwise in contract documents. 2. Listed combination of coordinated circuit breakers shall be verified by the equipment manufacturer utilizing published data sheets. Confirm listings shall be submitted. 3. Lugs shall be mechanical, rated for 60/75° AL/Cu. 4. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac or 277 V ac and carry the SWD marking. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC January 22, 2021 5. Ratings shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D Micrologic trip unit - Design Make. b. Eaton Corporation Optim 550 trip units for circuit breakers 400 - 1600 amp frame or RMS 610 trip units for 2000 amp frame to 6000 amp frame c. General Electric Spectra RMS or MicroVersa trip unit 7. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic type, ratings as noted, with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism, quick make/quick break action and positive handle indication. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pose. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C and shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Breakers shall have removable lugs, UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be installed in NEMA 1 general purpose, surface enclosures, unless otherwise noted. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Square D 2) Cutler Hammer 3) General Electric by ABB C. Disconnect Switches: 1. Shall be heavy-duty type three-pole, with "Quick Make/Quick Break" operating handle mechanically interlocked with the cover, horsepower and voltage rated to match equipment served. Where indicated switches shall be provided with dualelement, time delay, rejection type fuses. Switches shall be installed in NEMA 1 for indoor use, NEMA 3R for outdoor use. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Provide neutral bar in single phase or three phase, four wire circuits, and ground bar in all switches. Provide auxiliary contacts where called for. 2. All disconnects connected downstream of ASD's shall have a normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts which shall be wired to the ASD to indicate disconnect is open. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square-D - Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer c. General Electric CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC January 22, 2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be grounded per the NEC. B. Electrical distribution equipment shall have lugs/terminations suitable for the indicated conductor size. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop and where approved by the Engineer it shall be allowed to reduce the conductor size using hydraulically crimpled splice in a box next to the distribution equipment to allow for standard lug termination. C. Install dry-type transformers with adequate clearances for proper ventilation. Bolt floor mounted transformer to pad. D. Distribution switchboards, motor control centers and floor mounted dry-type transformers shall be mounted on 4 in. high concrete pads which shall extend 3 in. on all sides. Securely bolt the unit to the pads for proper horizontal and vertical alignment. E. Coordinate transformer pad dimensions with transformer manufacturer's requirements. Coordinate transformer pad locations, dimensions and details with General Contractor. F. Provide pad lockable branch circuit breaker device to hold circuit breaker in the closed position, but not prevent overcurrent protection, for all branch circuits serving fire alarm controls panels, emergency lighting and life safety branch circuits. G. Identification: 1. Identify all items of equipment as described in Section 260501-3.1, Identification. Identification shall be provided for switchboards, panelboards, transformers, ASD's, motor starters, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, switchboard main/distribution breakers, MCC's automatic transfer switches, UPS's, generators, surge suppression devices, control panels, switchgear, etc. 2. Switchboards, panelboards, MCC's, switchgear, etc. shall have a label indicating name/tag ID, feeder source, conductor color convention and for service entrance locations the available short circuit current. 3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD TEST A. Conduct a load test prior to request for final payment and comply with the following: 1. Energize maximum normal light and power load for a period of two hours when scheduled. 2. Record voltage at service and at each panel. 3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELE C\200278-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Adjust transformer taps as directed by engineer after review of report. 5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment. 6. Owner's Representative or Site Representative shall witness the test. 7. Before final acceptance specified test shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of such additional tests as deemed necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Additional tests required by the Owner's Representative shall be provided at no additional cost. Protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrated their workability and operation. 3.3 CLEANING A. At the completion of the project, while equipment is de-energized, it shall be thoroughly cleaned to a shipped condition using methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize vacuum for cleaning and not compressed gas. 3.4 SPARE PARTS A. Deliver loose equipment to the Owner and obtain receipt for fuses, keys to panelboards, etc. 3.5 DISCONNECT DEVICES A. All disconnect devices downstream of ASD's: Provide wiring, conduit and connections between ASD and disconnect auxiliary switch to ASD. END OF SECTION 26 20 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide interior and exterior lighting systems, including luminaires, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents for complete and operational systems. The lighting layouts on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Refer to architectural "Reflected Ceiling Plans" for exact location of interior luminaires. Luminaires, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling in which they are to be installed. Verify the ceiling construction details and provide luminaires suitable for the respective ceiling types and room finish schedule. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following standards, criteria, codes, etc. shall be followed in the manufacture and installation of the lighting systems. 1. NFPA 2. NEC 3. IESNA 4. NEMA 5. ANSI 6. UL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaires shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule". Luminaire types, appearance, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the specified manufacturer and associated series or catalog number listed in the "Luminaire Schedule". Products of other listed acceptable manufacturers shall be equivalent in every way to that of the luminaire specified. The Engineer reserves the right to disapprove any luminaire type submitted which they feel is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the luminaire specified. B. Manufacturer's luminaire series or catalog numbers listed in the "Luminaire Schedule" indicate quality, type, and style, but may not cover required special design details. Provide luminaires having such special details as noted in the "Luminaire Schedule", as indicated by the specified luminaire model number and as required for proper installation. C. All luminaires shall be new and bear a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) label for the service intended. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 D. Luminaires shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the type of luminaires specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. E. Verify the availability of all luminaires proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting same for approval. The discontinuance of production of any luminaire after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved luminaire of comparable quality and design at no additional cost. F. Photometric and operational data shall be provided only by qualified and certified organizations. Certification documentation shall be submitted with the luminaire information. G. Should there be any difference between drawings and schedules, secure from Architect/Engineer such information as necessary prior to providing proposal. When finishes are not definitely specified, they shall be as selected by the Architect and not be limited to standard finishes. H. Locations indicated for luminaires are approximate. Field coordinate exact locations as near as possible to the location indicated. Coordinate with the Engineer for any major location changes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire type, include in a single submittal, in order of luminaire designation, the catalog "cut" sheet with complete manufacturer and model number. Product data should include the following: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number. 2. Features, accessories, materials and finishes. 3. Physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Life, power input, output (lumens, distribution, CCT, and CRI) and energyefficiency data. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient of utilization complete values, IES distribution hard and electronic copy, candlepower distribution by angle and luminaire efficiency). Format shall be in accordance with IES TM-27. 6. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams between luminaires and controllers. 7. Lens/Louver Type. 8. Driver/ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating, overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\ DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 9. Certification of IES LM-79, IES LM-80 and TM-21 testing for LED luminaires. Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IES LM and TM standards. 10. Warranty. B. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings in accordance with Section 260500. Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structure members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including other luminaires, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, ceiling mounted projectors, etc. C. Color Chips: Provide color chips of available finishes for luminaires upon request of Architect/Engineer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Luminaires and equipment shall be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed from the site immediately and be replaced with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division hazard by a NRTL. C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and UL 8750. D. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 2.2 LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminaries specified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGBW systems as indicated on the luminaire schedule. B. Luminaires shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, drivers, connectors, terminators and accessories required for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulse width modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection. C. Provide dimming down to 10% as a minimum, or to percentage indicated or called for on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the dimming control shall be a 0-10VDC signal D. LED luminaires shall be high brightness and binned for forward voltage, luminous flux and wavelength. E. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input, luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), color temperature and color rendering index), IESNA LM-80 (L70, output luminous maintenance, 10,000 hour minimum test, calculation method is not acceptable) and IESNA TM-21/28. Luminaire output shall be a minimum of 100 lumens/watt. Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 70% output. Testing shall be performed by a US Department of Energy (DOE) accredited laboratory. F. Drivers shall be solid state Class 1 power supply/driver with universal input (120-277V). The system shall have a minimum 90% power factor, 3.5 maximum crest factor, minimum efficiency of 90%, a maximum of 20% THD and overload protection. Adequate heat sink capability shall be provided to ensure the rated life. Unit shall meet FCC rules and regulations. G. Where indicated luminaires shall have color tuning capability and control. System to have separate dimming (5-100%) and color (3000K to 5000K, or as indicated on drawings) adjustability. Control shall be Dali or DMX512 for controllability as indicated. The system shall utilize the most recent settings when energized. H. The luminaire (to include LED sources and drivers) shall have a full five (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor. 1. Acceptable LED Node Manufacturers: a. Philips b. Osram c. Cree d. Nichea e. Lumiled CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 2.3 EXIT LUMINAIRES: A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Electrical characteristics: a. LED type for 120/277 volt supply. b. Use two LED strips for indirect illumination of the face. Meet or exceed illumination requirements of NFPA 101, and all of the requirements of UL924. c. Maximum input power of 5 watts per illuminated face. 2. Construction: a. Red letters. b. Provide Universal mount unit. c. Provide single or double face and arrows as indicated on Contract Documents. 3. Design Equipment: a. Simkar SLEDARW or approved equal. 2.4 LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Lenses: 1. Shall be listed materials tested in accordance with ASTM D-635, "Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position" and burns less than 2/5 inches per minute. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-L IGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 2. The products shall have a smoke density of less than 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2843, standard test method for "Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics". 3. The flame spread rating shall not exceed 0-25 and smoke developed rating shall not exceed 450 in accordance with ASTM E-84, standard test method for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 4. Self-ignition shall not occur below 600°F, in accordance with ASTM D-1929, standard test method for "Ignition Properties of Plastics". 5. Materials shall remain in place 15 minutes at 175°F and fall from frame at 200° below ignition temperature in accordance with ASTM D-648, "Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load". 2.5 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE A. Luminaire schedule is found on the contract drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. All luminaires shall be installed as per manufacturer furnished installation instructions. C. Provide for every luminaire as shown on the plans, or as scheduled on the drawings. D. Location of all ceiling and wall mounted luminaires shall be as indicated on the Architectural and Electrical drawings. The contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and material prior to ordering. E. Provide luminaires with an IC rating for luminaires installed in direct contact with insulation. F. Provide plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flanged frames for drywall ceilings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. H. Luminaires shall be suitable and as recommended by the manufacturer for the actual intended mounting method and materials. I. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. J. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. K. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls, to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members, or using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. L. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Pendant and Rods: a. Pendant mount luminaires from 1/4 in. threaded rods of required length. b. Brace pendants and rods longer than 48 inches to limit swinging. 2. Aircraft Cable: a. Cables shall be 1/16 in. aircraft cable with end safety fittings. Cable shall be provided with 2 in. diameter mini-canopy and threaded coupler for attachment to a 1/4 in.-20 threaded stud extending 3/4 in. below ceiling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 b. Cable assembly shall include a spring-loaded adjustment device mounted in the fixture. c. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required supports for cable attachment. d. For cord feed to the luminaire provide continuous cord clip of matching color to attach the cord to the cable. e. Support per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Support stem mounted, single unit luminaires with approved outlet box and accessories that hold tem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 4. Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point of continuous rows of luminaires and tubing, rod, or wire support for suspension for each unit of length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. M. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. Utilize #10 steel wire; similar to that used to support the ceiling grid. 3. Provide UL listed seismic hold-down clips and fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each luminaire corner. 4. Install luminaires of sizes less than ceiling grid as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel and support luminaire independently with at least two metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. N. Provide all necessary accessories for "end-to-end" mounting where continuous rows of luminaires are indicated. All luminaire assemblies shall be grounded. O. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if luminaires are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway. P. New luminaires may be provided to replace existing luminaires indicated to remain or be reused, subject to shop drawing approval. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of all lighting luminaires. B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for this purpose. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, finger marks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test of Emergency Lighting: Under supervision of Engineer, interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. D. Replace luminaires damaged during shipment, construction, or installation. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260936 "Lighting Controls." 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Provide adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Adjustment may be required during hours of darkness. B. Final distribution shall be acceptable to the Owner and may take several attempts. 3.8 REMOVAL OF BALLASTS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. Assume ballasts contain PCB material unless labeled otherwise or test samples show materials are not PCB; submit a test report. Remove all ballasts from existing luminaires indicated on contract documents. Dispose of all ballasts which do not have non PCB labels in PCB containers and pay all costs to have containers taken to EPA approved incinerators and disposed of all EPA regulations. Follow all EPA regulations for transporting material. If ballast has leaked in existing luminaires, remove material deposited in luminaire and dispose of those materials as indicated above. Provide documentation verifying disposal of PCB contaminated ballasts. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278- 265000-LIGHTING.DOCX January 22, 2021 3.9 REMOVAL OF LAMPS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. The Contractor shall employ the service of a certified disposal/recycling service company to dispose of all removed fluorescent and/or HID lamps. All disposal procedures shall be performed in accordance with EPA Requirements and Subtitle C for the disposal of mercury contaminated lamps. END OF SECTION 26 50 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 27 21 00 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area Network (LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents. B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the Data Network System. C. Basic Intent: 1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources. 2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings. 3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a fiber optic cable backbone. From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected. 4. Rack mounted enclosure shall be used as termination points for all fiber optic cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber. 5. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all data cables and rack mounted enclosures for the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber. D. Description of System: 1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents: a. Data network shall be compatible with existing network configuration and characteristics. b. Campus service to the building(s). c. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution. d. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling distribution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\202 0\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 e. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to the IDFs. f. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution as noted on Construction Drawings. g. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment. h. Power for the telecommunication rooms. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. C. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards. E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed. F. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day; 365 days per year and staff must be adequate to respond within two (2) hours of an emergency call. 4. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 5. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DE SIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 6. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. 7. Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use. a. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. b. System shall be reprogrammed three months after occupancy/system turn over to incorporate all Owner desired modifications. 8. Any system being extended or connected to an existing system shall be tested for full functionality prior to beginning work and at the completion. G. Contractor Qualifications: 1. This Contractor shall be a certified installer for the proposed equipment/system manufacturer(s) and be Panduit and Corning certified ITS Installer 2, Copper and Optical Fiber and shall be certified to terminate indicated fiber connectors. 2. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3) similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius. H. Installer Qualifications: 1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by Panduit and Corning on staff. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in: 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components. 2. Detailed description of system operation. 3. Itemized list of all features and functions. 4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJE CTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 5. Wiring diagrams showing typical connections for equipment. 6. Contractor certification and qualifications. 7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types. 8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year. 9. Warranty information. 10. System test reports. 11. Provide scaled elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications. B. The complete system shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment cabinets and racks. 2. Patch panels and patch cables. 3. Wire management. 4. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 5. Horizontal cabling. 6. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 7. Terminations and testing. 8. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 9. Firestopping. 10. Router. 11. Core switch. 12. Edge switches. 13. Fringe switches. 14. UPS units. 15. Wireless Network System. 16. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 17. Training and system programming. C. Owner shall provide the network electronics. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 1.5 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. E. Contractor to submit cable records to Panduit for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Category 6 UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed 0.365 in. 7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568 polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing at 250 MHz. The following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length. a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance. b. Return loss > 20.0 dB. c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4 dB). e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB. f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB). g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2 dB (21.8 dB). h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF. j. Delay < 490 ns. k. Delay skew < 44 ns. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit Genspeed 6000 b. Berk-Tek Lanmark 1000 c. Comm Scope - Systimax 1071E B. Augmented Category 6A UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed .215 in. x .290 in. 7. Pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.2 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568A polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 tested at 500 MHz. Testing parameters as follows: a. Less than 21.0 ohm per 100 m DC resistance. b. Return loss > 10.0 dB/100m at 500 MHz. c. Insertion loss < 43.8 dB/100m at 500 MHz. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT) > 26.7 dB at 500 MHz. e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT) > 23.8 dB at 500 MHz. f. Attenuation to cross talk ration far end (ACRF) > 10.2 dB at 500 MHz. g. Power sum - attenuation to cross talk ratio (PS-ACRF) > 7.2 dB at 500 MZz. h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 65.6 pF per 100 meters. j. Delay < 490 ns at 100MHz. k. Delay skew < 44 ns at 100MHz. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 augmented Category 6 (Cat 6A) compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacture to 500 MHz. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Berk-Tek Lanmark -XTP b. Comm Scope-systimax 1091B C. Fiber Optic Singlemode Indoor Cable: 1. Cable: 8.3 micron core of graded index glass. Cladding to have 125 micron diameter. 2. Maximum attenuation /3300 ft. for each strand of fiber in the cable at temperatures ranging from -40°C to 70°. a. 850 nM: 3.5 dB b. 1300 nM: 1.5 dB 3. Minimum Bandwidth/3300 ft. a. 850 nM: 160 MHz b. 1300 nM: 500 Mhz 4. Meet or exceed requirements for FDDI, and TIA/EIA 568B. 5. Six (6) strand fiber cable consisting of: a. The fiber. b. Tight buffer. c. Thermoplastic jacket. d. Aramid strength member. e. Outer jacket. f. Minimum Bend Radius: 1) Installation 15 x O.D. 2) Long term 10 x O.D. g. Maximum Loading: 1) Installation 660 pounds. 2) Long term 330 pounds. 6. The cables shall be tight buffer design with all dielectric construction. 7. All horizontal fiber shall be installed in plenum rated inner duct on J hooks or EMT. a. Raceway shall be labeled on 10 ft. centers as "Fiber Optic Cable". 8. All fibers shall be terminated with compatible connectors in patch panel as specified. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 9 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning Cable Systems MIC clearCurve. 2.2 PATCH PANELS A. UTP Cable Patch Panels: 1. All panels should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports. 2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance and Category to match the cabling. 3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets. a. Contractor shall provide Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the front. No substitutions allowed. b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future installation. 4. Jacks shall be Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations, T568A only. No substitutions allowed. 5. Panels shall have factory labels for each port. 6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568A standards and dressed in a neat workmanship way. Match the Owner's standard configuration. 7. Modular jacks shall be mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss. 8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack. 9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 10 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\D ESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Provide fiber optic rack mounted enclosure in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated. 2. Provide SC or LC connector to match existing style panel base. Provide quantity of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports. 3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access. 4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel. 5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning b. Panduit 2.3 OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS A. UTP Outlets/Connectors: 1. Physical Specifications: a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics. b. Shall be modular and snap-in to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard. c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight 22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection. d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g. e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors. g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification. h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 11 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYS TEM.DOC January 22, 2021 i. Minimum durability shall be 1000 connecting cycles. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors 1. Physical Characteristics: a. Shall be SC type. b. Shall terminate up to 125 micron fiber. c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA. d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable. 2. Transmission Characteristics: a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CS type. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling. B. Copper Cable: 1. Data Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 2. Voice Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 3. Wireless Network - Green 4. Paging - White 5. Security/Access - Indigo CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 12 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Backbone Cabling: a. Single Mode - Yellow 2. Horizontal Cabling: a. Single Mode - X 2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a minimum, include the following: 1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure. B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack. C. All racks shall have 2RU space horizontal full width cable management, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. D. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. E. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation. F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2.6 INNERDUCT A. Innerduct shall be corrugated HDPE material, plenum rated, flexible, continuous, UV rated with flame/smoke spread in accordance with code and length markings on the outer surface. B. When in conduit minimum size shall be 3/4", otherwise 1 1/2" minimum. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Maxcell 3. Opti-Com CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 13 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2.7 LABELING A. General: 1. Labeling system and structure shall match the Owners existing. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process. 2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested. 3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints. 4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1" high lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back. B. Patch Panel 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number. C. Outlets 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location. 2. Contractor shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other locations that do not have a label location. D. Cable 1. Fiber Optic: a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each termination point indicating building, destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color. b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc. c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully visible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 14 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Copper a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the building, destination room, rack number, panel number and port number. 2.8 UTP CABLE TESTER A. Provide one (1) Fluke DSX 5000 tester or approved equal. Provide adapters for specified cables. Turn over to owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cable: 1. Provide a minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum quantity of UTP cables (typical). 2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (6 strands) of single-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 6 strand cables (typical). 3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits. 4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed in cable tray. 5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 12 inches throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. elsewhere. 6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are not acceptable. 7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring requirements and conduit sizes. 8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards. 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA-569. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 15 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and these specifications. 12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet. 13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Terminate backbone fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends. 2. Terminate horizontal fiber cables in patch panels at the distribution frame and at the telecommunications outlet or other. 3. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations. C. Terminations: 1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative. 2. Use termination kits for fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable. 3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable. D. Equipment and Devices: 1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes. 2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in. of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack. 3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans. E. Raceways: 1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in. 2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be twogang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed. 3. Provide no greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 16 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 F. Data Network Ground System: 1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called for in Specification Section 260526. G. Telecommunications Rooms: 1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications rooms. 2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks. 3.2 TESTING A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 and 500 MHz for Cat 6A 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures. Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR. C. Replace any cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable. D. Test equipment shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152. E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained. F. Test Reporting: 1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion in O&M Manuals and for Owner future use. 2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory at telecommunications room location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 17 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and electronic copy provided to the Owner. 4. The report documentation for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Project name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date. c. Date and time of the test. d. Patch panel identification. e. Cable identification. f. Cable type. g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent) for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters. h. Test pass criteria. i. Cable length. j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth. k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values. Any failed parameters shall be noted or highlighted. 3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide brief overview of system of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set up configuration and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions shall be answered. B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the training. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 18 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-272 100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 D. Provide updated cable schedule and redline/as-built during training and instruction period 2-3 weeks prior to occupancy. 3.4 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION 27 21 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 1 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALAR MSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 SECTION 28 31 03 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the expansion of the existing fire alarm system and related Work required in these Contract Documents. B. Provide system as approved by local Fire Marshal and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). System materials and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 72, (National Fire Alarm Code), AHS Installer shall be certified in the State of New York for fire alarm installation. state codes, local codes, and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, NFPA, UL and IEEE Standards. D. Contractor shall be a licensed fire alarm installer in the State of New York. E. Items specified for the fire alarm are to match the existing system and to maintain one fire alarm system in the facility. No other makes will be specified. 1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The existing fire alarm panel shall have its capabilities extended to provide coverage for renovation if required. The zones of the existing panel are to be determined during a pretest to confirm capacities. B. The following work is proposed: 1. Pre-test of the system to confirm there is adequate capacities on the circuits in the area of work, prior to installing new devices. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 2 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALAR MSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2. Provide smoke detectors, heat detectors and manual stations in the building. Provide the additional modules required to the existing fire alarm control panel. 3. Provide audio-visual and visual only devices in the existing building utilizing existing strobe circuits to support additional devices. 4. Refer to Appendix A for operation/sequence of matrix. C. Before any work is accomplished on the existing system, a thorough testing shall be done on the system to conform to NFPA 72. A test report shall be completed and submitted to the engineers for review. Once the preliminary testing is found to be acceptable, work can proceed on the existing system. An additional test will be performed after the work is complete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete system submittal prior to ordering of equipment and installation including but not limited to: 1. Complete equipment list, including quantities. 2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes. 4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting, control circuiting and any system applicable building characteristics (ceiling heights, structural members impeding detection, etc). Contact the Engineer for an electronic copy of the project floor plans. Engineer logo shall be included in final drawing. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7. Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device, backup period and recommended battery capacity (AH). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 3 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. 8. Complete console enclosure and equipment configuration. 9. Contractor shall submit copies of the installation firms license for approval and post a copy of license on the premises where the work is being performed. a. Work involving installation of Fire Alarm system components shall be performed by firms currently licensed by the NYS department of State Division of Licensing Services. The supervising personnel shall be NICET level 2 certified. 10. Test reports as called for. 11. Copies of the firm alarm installation firm's current license. The contractor shall also post a copy of the license on the premises where work is being performed. B. If required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) provide a submission of all requested information for review and comment by the AHJ. All AHJ comments shall be incorporated and resubmitted until approved. C. Test reports at the completion of the project. Testing shall be of all system devices, equipment, circuits, features and functions. D. Provide submittal to Dan Philips at Cornell EH&S and Ithaca Fire Department for review and comment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Provide the necessary initiation modules for the additional devices required. Each individual function shall be provided by solid state plug-in panels or modules. Removal of any plug-in module shall cause a trouble signal to sound. New end of line resistors shall be located per the existing system. Provide supplementary control modules as required and shown by riser diagram for control of magnetic door holders, duct smoke dampers, fan shutdown. B. Provide separate visible and audible alarm, trouble and supervisory indication for each circuit. C. Make: Modules and equipment shall match existing. No substitute, no equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 4 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2.2 MANUAL STATIONS A. Semi-flush non-coded type. Break glass, "pull-down" type, double action. Indoor construction. Bright red finish. Key lock for test and reset. B. Unless directly connected to a central station alarm service, municipal alarm system or local manned fire alarm dispatch station, a clearly legible sign shall be posted above each manual station stating: "LOCAL ALARM ONLY - NOT CONNECTED TO FIRE DEPARTMENT - CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT BY TELEPHONE." 2.3 AUTOMATIC THERMAL DETECTORS A. Low profile, white colored, surface mounted on flush box. Equip with mounting plate. Replaceable fixed temperature elements; visual indicator for tripped mode. Provide combination rate-of-rise (15°F per minute) fixed temperature 135°F, fixed temperature 135°F, or fixed temperature 200°F as shown on the Drawings. 2.4 PHOTO-OBSCURATION SMOKE DETECTORS A. Detectors shall operate on the photoelectronic principle. Provide detectors with an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135°F. Upon activation, the detector shall operate its associated alarm circuit and illuminate the integral alarm indicator light. The alarm indicator light shall not extinguish until the Fire Alarm Control Panel has been reset. The detector shall contain a solid state LED and a high speed light sensing photodiode within the smoke sensing chamber. The photodiode shall accelerate the LED light burst rate when smoke enters the chamber. An alarm shall be activated when several consecutive pulses verify the existence of smoke. Reset shall be accomplished at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Provide lock-in feature. Provide a calibrated test feature capable of simulating a maximum acceptable amount of smoke for alarm. Detectors shall operate from a nominal 10 to 30 volt DC power supply. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide backbox suitable for surface mounting where required. Detector shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. 2.5 LIGHT UNIT A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization and this includes new and existing devices being synchronized. Protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Rated life shall be a minimum 500 hours of continuous operation. Indoor construction. Flush single gang box, wall or ceiling mounted as noted on the drawings. Shall be white in color. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 5 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 2.6 COMBINATION HORN-LIGHT UNITS A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization and this includes new and existing devices being synchronized.. Single unit combination horn and light, with protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Horn shall be rated 100 dB at 10 ft. Surface or flush box as noted on the drawings. Indoor construction. Shall be white in color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of Work. Fire alarm installation shall be directed by a person who possesses a state license for installation of fire alarm systems. All equipment and components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. System junction boxes and surface mounted device boxes shall be painted red. C. Provide all wiring to duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be mounted on the ventilating ductwork by others. All mounting arrangements, holes cut into ductwork, sealing of openings along with ceiling and access doors for the duct type detectors shall be provided by others. Provide duct detectors along with sampling tubes with end caps. Sequence smoke damper operation thirty seconds after its associated fan has been shut down. Duct detector shall report as supervisory alarm at FACP. D. Provide all wiring required for fan shutdown. Wire from the addressable control module for each fan to be shut down and provide wiring from the module to the fan control unit (starter, adjustable speed drive, etc). Dry contact shall be wired ahead of all control functions for starters. Provide intermediate relay for control circuits beyond the rating of the control module. E. Detection and initiating equipment shall be listed by NRTL and approved by FM. F. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special box furnished by fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth contour and have no protrusions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 6 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 G. Where detectors are installed on wood or masonry surfaces, attach brackets directly to the surface with tamperproof fasteners. Where detectors are installed on suspended ceilings, provide additional supports in the ceiling, such as channel support system, angle iron or additional runner bars. Fasten the additional supports rigidly to the ceiling runner bar system. Attach bracket to the supports with tamperproof fasteners. Install metal spacers between the bracket and supports so that the ceiling tiles will not be a part of the support system. H. Install wall mounted audio/visual signal devices at 80 in. AFF to bottom. Where ceiling types are called for, verify ceiling type and mounting height in the field. Provide pendant-mounted devices as required for specified mounting height. I. An auxiliary fire alarm relay used to control an emergency control device that provides control functions described in this specification shall be located within 3 ft. of the emergency control device and all wiring shall be supervised. J. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. K. All wiring shall conform to N.E.C. Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National Fire Alarm Code". L. Label all fire alarm devices and system components (major equipment, conduit, junction boxes and cabling) according to the Cornell Standard 16710 and 283100. 3.2 SYSTEM CIRCUITING A. All wiring shall conform to the NEC, and to NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code. B. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations taking into account loading, intended location, circuit length, spare capacity and voltage drop. C. All wiring shall be copper and installed in a dedicated/segregated red EMT conduit system. D. Power circuits: 1. Provide the required quantity of 20 ampere, 120 volt circuits to the system with a minimum of one for the FACP. E. Provide minimum #18 AWG twisted shielded pair for addressable signal line circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be#14AWG minimum. F. Addressable signal line circuits shall be NFPA 72 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation). G. Notification appliance circuits shall be NFPA 72 - 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 7 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DES IGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 H. Provide a 24VDC power circuit, #16 twisted pair minimum, with each initiation addressable circuit for the entire length. I. Notification circuits shall be segregated as indicated on the drawings and by individual floors as a minimum. Circuits shall also be dedicated to audible or visual appliances but not both. 3.3 PROGRAMMING A. Include in bid the cost to cover all system programming, including items particular to this project (such as custom zone descriptions, time delay settings, sensitivity settings, etc.) such that entire system is 100% complete and operating to the Owner's satisfaction. Coordinate all system programming with the Owner. Also, provide programming of the system a minimum of once during the warranty period to provide changes requested by the Owner. 3.4 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire alarm system shall be fully tested after the installation is complete. Testing shall include all devices, FACP, annunciator panel, other panels, features and functions. Testing shall be witnessed by the owners representative and be in accordance with the NFPA and herein. Provide a testing report to the authority having jurisdiction and the Engineer as a submittal. B. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Provide up to three programming modifications. C. Provide three sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Owner's Representative. D. Provide a copy of the system programming to the Owner on a CD/DVD disk or flash drive. E. Provide to the Owner system Operation Manuals as specified, that shall include as a minimum. 1. Bill of Material. 2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 8 Corson Hall Third Floor Laboratory & Office Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\S PECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting and control circuiting. Contact the Engineer for a copy of the project floor plans. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7. Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device and recommended battery capacity (AH). b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. 8. Instruction report starting when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by Owner's Representative. 9. A written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested and approved. 10. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72. 11. A two year warranty in accordance with the Basic Requirements of these Specifications shall be provided for this system. 12. All devices shall be pre-tested by the contractor and distributor prior to scheduling final acceptance test with AHJ and EH&S. 13. Final test to be done with AHJ and EH&S present. APPENDIX A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION/SEQUENCE MATRIX M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200278 \\ROCFILE1\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0200\200278\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200278-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC January 22, 2021 WARNING - THIS IS NOT SET UP FOR SMOKE EVAC SYSTEMS; HIGH RISES NOT APPLICABLE ON ALL PROJECTS. System Outputs THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK